Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual

Linx 7300
Maintenance Manual
7300_MMCover_EN_Iss1.PMD 1 9/4/2009, 3:58 PM

7300
Continuous Ink Jet
Printer
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (ii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Amendment Record
Each page of this publication bears the date of initial issue. Subsequent amendments to this
publication will bear the amendment number and its date of issue.
Amendments should be incorporated in strict numerical order so that the technical
integrity and accuracy of the publication are retained.
Incorporation of amendments should be recorded on the Amendment Record below.
Amdt Incorporated by Date of Amdt Incorporated by Date of

No. (Name) Incorporation No. (Name) Incorporation
01 27
02 28
03 29
04 30
05 31
06 32
07 33
08 34
09 35
10 36
11 37
12 38
13 39
14 40
15 41
16 42
17 43
18 44
19 45
20 46
21 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (iii) Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (iv) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Copyright
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language by any means or in
any form, without the express prior written permission of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd.
Neither whole nor part of the product described in this manual may be adapted or
reproduced in any material form without the express prior written permission of Linx
Printing Technologies Ltd.
Contravention of copyright may also reduce the ability of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd to
provide effective support for its equipment.
This First edition published 2009
© Linx Printing Technologies Ltd 2009
LINX is a registered trademark of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd.
Manual Content
The content of this manual is provided for information only. Nothing in the content of this
manual represents, or should be construed as, any contractual or other commitment on the
part of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd.
Linx products are subject to continual development and improvement, and updates to the
content of this manual will be made accordingly in the form of amendments.
Linx reserves the right to make changes without notice to both this publication and to the
products described herein.
All possible care has been taken in the preparation of this manual, and information of a
technical nature and particulars of the product and its use are given by Linx in good faith.
However, Linx makes no guarantees regarding the accuracy or completeness of this
publication.
Safety Recommendation
Before attempting to use either the printer or its accessories, the information contained in
the ‘Safety’ chapter should be read. It is essential that safe operating procedures are
followed at all times, and that the equipment is maintained according to the directions
contained herein and as recommended by Linx or its authorized Distributors. It is strongly
recommended that maintenance tasks described in this manual are performed only by Linx
maintenance technicians or Linx-trained personnel.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (v) Sep 2009
About This Manual
The purpose of this manual is to provide maintenance technicians with sufficient
information to safely and effectively carry out maintenance tasks on the Linx 7300
Continuous Ink Jet Printer.
The information contained in this manual is applicable to Version 4.1 System Software or
later, unless otherwise stated.
Linx will be pleased to receive any correspondence relating to this manual and the
information contained herein; please write to us at the address below.
For further information or help with Linx products, please contact:
Linx Printing Technologies Ltd
Burrel Road
St Ives
Cambridgeshire
PE27 3LA
UK
Tel: + 44 (0) 1480 302100
Fax: + 44 (0) 1480 302116
E-mail: sales@linx.co.uk
or visit our website at www.linxglobal.com
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (vi) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Contents
Amendment Record .......................................................................................... iii
Copyright ............................................................................................................ v
Manual Content .................................................................................................. v
Safety Recommendation .................................................................................... v
About This Manual ............................................................................................ vi
Contents ........................................................................................................... vii
List of Figures ............................................................................................ xv
Document Conventions .................................................................................. xxii
Text Conventions ...................................................................................... xxii
Other Conventions .................................................................................. xxiii
Additional Publications .................................................................................. xxiii
CHAPTER 1: SAFETY .................................................................. 1—1

1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 1—1
1.2 Safety Warnings and Cautions ............................................................... 1—1
1.2.1 Warnings ....................................................................................... 1—1
1.2.2 Cautions ........................................................................................ 1—1
1.2.3 Warning Symbols .......................................................................... 1—2
1.3 Lethal Voltages ....................................................................................... 1—3
1.4 Inks and Solvents ................................................................................... 1—3
1.5 Heavy Equipment Hazard ...................................................................... 1—4
1.6 First Aid .................................................................................................. 1—5
1.6.1 Procedures .................................................................................... 1—5
1.7 Test Printing ........................................................................................... 1—6
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL AND COMPLIANCE INFORMATION ... 2—1

2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 2—1
2.2 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 2—1
2.2.1 Printer Configurations ................................................................... 2—1
2.2.2 Environmental ............................................................................... 2—1
2.2.3 Power Requirements ..................................................................... 2—2
2.2.4 Cabinet .......................................................................................... 2—2
2.2.5 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit .................................................... 2—2
2.2.6 EHT Power Supply Unit ................................................................ 2—3
2.2.7 Ink System .................................................................................... 2—3
2.2.8 Printhead ....................................................................................... 2—5
2.2.9 Printing Performance .................................................................... 2—5
2.2.10 Memory Capacity ........................................................................ 2—7
2.2.11 Regulatory Approvals .................................................................. 2—8
2.3 Abbreviations and Glossary ................................................................... 2—9
CHAPTER 3: TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION .................................. 3—1

3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 3—1
3.2 Cabinet ................................................................................................... 3—1
3.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................... 3—1
3.2.2 Top Cover ...................................................................................... 3—1
3.2.3 Base Unit ...................................................................................... 3—2
3.2.4 Ink System .................................................................................... 3—2
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (vii) Sep 2009
3.2.5 Cooling and Air Filter ..................................................................... 3—2
3.3 User Interface ......................................................................................... 3—4
3.3.1 Keyboard and Display ................................................................... 3—4
3.3.2 Control Panel LEDs ....................................................................... 3—4
3.4 Printhead Components .......................................................................... 3—6
3.4.1 Gun Chamber and Nozzle Assembly ............................................ 3—7
3.4.2 Charge Electrode .......................................................................... 3—7
3.4.3 Strobe LED .................................................................................... 3—7
3.4.4 Deflector Plates ............................................................................. 3—7
3.4.5 Phase and TOF Sensors ............................................................... 3—7
3.4.6 Printhead Cover Sensor ................................................................ 3—8
3.4.7 Printhead Temperature Sensor ..................................................... 3—8
3.4.8 Printhead Feed and Purge Valves ................................................ 3—9
3.4.9 In-Line Feed Filter ......................................................................... 3—9
3.4.10 Standard Gutter Restrictor ........................................................ 3—10
3.4.11 In-Line Gutter Check Valve ........................................................ 3—10
3.4.12 Electrical and Fluid Connections ............................................... 3—10
3.4.13 Dynamic Flow Control ............................................................... 3—11
3.5 Printhead Theory of Operation ............................................................. 3—12
3.5.1 Summary ..................................................................................... 3—12
3.5.2 Printhead Types .......................................................................... 3—12
3.5.3 Modulation .................................................................................. 3—13
3.5.4 Drop Charge ................................................................................ 3—15
3.5.5 Historic Correction ....................................................................... 3—15
3.5.6 Drop Deflection ........................................................................... 3—16
3.5.7 Guard Drops ................................................................................ 3—16
3.5.8 Phasing ....................................................................................... 3—17
3.5.9 Time Of Flight (TOF) ................................................................... 3—18
3.5.10 Phase/TOF during a Stalled Print .............................................. 3—18
3.5.11 Viscosity Control ........................................................................ 3—19
3.5.12 Starting Up and Shutting Down ................................................. 3—19
3.5.13 Jet/Nozzle Alignment ................................................................. 3—20
3.5.14 Print Quality ............................................................................... 3—20
3.5.15 Printhead/Nozzle Replacement ................................................. 3—21
3.6 Ink System ........................................................................................... 3—22
3.6.1 General Description .................................................................... 3—22
3.6.2 Venturi Manifold Assembly .......................................................... 3—26
3.6.3 Valves .......................................................................................... 3—28
3.6.4 Ink System Connections ............................................................. 3—29
3.6.5 Ink and Solvent Flows ................................................................. 3—31
3.6.6 Startup and Shutdown Sequences .............................................. 3—41
3.6.7 Other Operating Sequences ....................................................... 3—51
3.6.8 Ink Type Dependent Parameters ................................................ 3—58
3.7 Electrical Components ......................................................................... 3—62
3.7.1 Overview ..................................................................................... 3—62
3.7.2 Mains Power Cable ..................................................................... 3—62
3.7.3 Mains Power Supply Switch ........................................................ 3—62
3.7.4 Power On Switch ......................................................................... 3—63
3.7.5 Mains Filter .................................................................................. 3—63
3.7.6 Mains Input Fuses ....................................................................... 3—63
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (viii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.7.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPSU) ................................... 3—63
3.7.8 EHT Power Supply Unit (EHTPSU) ............................................ 3—64
3.7.9 Ink System Pump ........................................................................ 3—65
3.7.10 Ink System Valves and Cableform Assembly ............................ 3—65
3.7.11 Cooling Fan ............................................................................... 3—66
3.7.12 Printhead Positive Air Pump ...................................................... 3—66
3.8 Electronics and Software ..................................................................... 3—67
3.8.1 Overview ..................................................................................... 3—67
3.8.2 Circuit Diagrams .......................................................................... 3—67
3.8.3 IPM PCB ..................................................................................... 3—67
3.8.4 Display PCB ................................................................................ 3—76
3.8.5 Auxiliary PCBs ............................................................................. 3—76
3.8.6 Software ...................................................................................... 3—77
3.9 External Signals ................................................................................... 3—77
3.9.1 Primary Trigger ............................................................................ 3—77
3.9.2 Secondary Trigger ....................................................................... 3—79
3.9.3 Shaft Encoders ........................................................................... 3—80
3.9.4 Alarm Output ............................................................................... 3—82
3.9.5 Dual Alarm .................................................................................. 3—84
The following examples are a common arrangement: ......................... 3—84
3.9.6 Multi-Stage Alarm ........................................................................ 3—84
3.9.7 Serial Interface ............................................................................ 3—85
3.9.8 Parallel I/O Interface ................................................................... 3—86
3.9.9 Ethernet Interface ....................................................................... 3—88
3.9.10 USB Facility ............................................................................... 3—88
3.9.11 D-Type Connector Assembly ..................................................... 3—89
CHAPTER 4: SYSTEM OPTIONS ................................................ 4—1

4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4—1
4.2 Print Monitor ........................................................................................... 4—1
4.2.1 How to Select and Change Options .............................................. 4—2
4.2.2 Total System Options .................................................................... 4—3
4.2.3 Password Access .......................................................................... 4—3
4.2.4 Option Availability .......................................................................... 4—5
4.3 Line Setup Page ..................................................................................... 4—7
4.3.1 Power Down .................................................................................. 4—7
4.4 Menu Page ............................................................................................. 4—9
4.4.1 Event Log .................................................................................... 4—10
4.4.2 Maintenance ............................................................................... 4—15
4.4.3 Setup ........................................................................................... 4—16
4.4.4 Change User Level ..................................................................... 4—27
CHAPTER 5: MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 5—1

5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 5—1
5.2 Maintenance Options ............................................................................. 5—1
5.2.1 How to Select and Change Options .............................................. 5—1
5.2.2 Total Maintenance Options ............................................................ 5—2
5.2.3 Password Access .......................................................................... 5—2
5.2.4 Option Availability .......................................................................... 5—3
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (ix) Sep 2009
5.3 Maintenance Page ................................................................................. 5—5
5.3.1 Jet Functions ................................................................................. 5—5
5.3.2 Monitor Jet .................................................................................... 5—8
5.3.3 Maintenance Times ..................................................................... 5—15
5.3.4 Charge Calibration ...................................................................... 5—17
5.3.5 Jet Sequences ............................................................................ 5—19
5.3.6 Valves .......................................................................................... 5—23
5.3.7 Test Message .............................................................................. 5—24
5.3.8 System Flush .............................................................................. 5—25
5.3.9 Print and Consumables History ................................................... 5—26
5.4 Maintenance Instructions ..................................................................... 5—29
5.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................. 5—29
5.4.2 Maintenance Terminology ........................................................... 5—29
5.4.3 Antistatic Precautions .................................................................. 5—30
5.4.4 Recommended Procedures ........................................................ 5—30
5.4.5 7300 CE Approval Checklist ........................................................ 5—31
5.4.6 Scheduled Maintenance Checklist .............................................. 5—32
5.4.7 Maintenance Instruction Documents ........................................... 5—32
Scheduled Maintenance ............................................................. 5—33
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks ...................................... 5—43
Draining the Ink System .............................................................. 5—47
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal ....................................................... 5—53
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement ................................................. 5—57
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement ................................ 5—61
Main Ink Filter Replacement ....................................................... 5—65
Main Ink Filter Purging ................................................................ 5—69
Charge Amplifier Calibration ....................................................... 5—71
Printhead Valves Tests ................................................................ 5—75
Ink System Feed Valve Test ........................................................ 5—79
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests .................................................... 5—81
Solvent Flush Valve Tests ........................................................... 5—87
Solvent Add Valve Tests .............................................................. 5—91
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning ............................................ 5—95
Modulation Range Checks ........................................................ 5—105
Blocked Gutter Clearance ......................................................... 5—109
System Flush ............................................................................ 5—115
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) ......................... 5—127
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) ................ 5—139
Printer Installation ..................................................................... 5—145
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mounted) ............... 5—147
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion .................................. 5—151
Positive Air Pump Installation .................................................... 5—157
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement ......................................... 5—161
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement ................................. 5—165
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads ...................................... 5—169
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads ...... 5—175
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation ........................... 5—179
Parallel I/O Interface Installation ............................................... 5—185
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion ........................................ 5—189
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion ........................................ 5—193
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (x) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Dual Alarm Installation .............................................................. 5—197
Ethernet Interface Installation ................................................... 5—201
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation .......... 5—205
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures ................................ 5—209
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning ....................................................... 5—223
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement ............................ 5—229
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) ............................... 5—233
Pressure Transducer Calibration .............................................. 5—237
CHAPTER 6: SYSTEM EVENTS .................................................. 6—1

6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 6—1
6.2 System Event Identifications .................................................................. 6—2
6.2.1 System Failures ............................................................................ 6—2
6.2.2 Print Failures ................................................................................. 6—2
6.2.3 System Warnings .......................................................................... 6—2
6.2.4 Information Events ........................................................................ 6—2
6.3 Summary of System Events ................................................................... 6—3
6.4 System Failures ..................................................................................... 6—4
6.4.1 “1.00 Internal Failure” .................................................................. 6—5
6.4.2 “1.01 Stack Overflow” .................................................................. 6—5
6.4.3 “1.02 Corrupt Program Data” ...................................................... 6—5
6.5 Print Failures .......................................................................................... 6—6
6.5.1 “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” ............................................ 6—7
6.5.2 “2.01 EHT Trip” ............................................................................ 6—7
6.5.3 “2.02 Phase Failure” .................................................................... 6—8
6.5.4 “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure” ....................................................... 6—9
6.5.5 “2.04 300V Power Supply” .......................................................... 6—9
6.5.6 “2.05 Ink Tank Empty” ................................................................. 6—9
6.5.7 “2.06 Solvent Tank Empty” .......................................................... 6—9
6.5.8 “2.07 Internal Spillage” .............................................................. 6—10
6.5.9 “2.08 Printer Over Temperature” ............................................... 6—10
6.5.10 “2.09 Misaligned ned Ink Jet Jet” ...............
......................................................... 6—10
6.5.11 “2.11
“ .11 Pressu
Pressure re Limit Re Reached”
ched” ......
................................................ 6—11
“ .12 Viscosity”
6.5.12 “2.12 Viscos ty” ............
........................................................................
................. 6—11
6.5.13 “2.13
“ .13 Hardware
Hardw re Safety Trip” rip” ....................................................
.......... 6—12
6.5.14 “2.14 Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped” .................................... 6—12
6.6 System Warnings ................................................................................. 6—13
6.6.1 “3.00 Shutdown Incomplete” ..................................................... 6—13
6.6.2 “3.01 Shutdown Incomplete (Failure)” ....................................... 6—13
6.6.3 “3.02 Memory Corrupt” .............................................................. 6—13
6.6.4 “3.03 Ink Low” ........................................................................... 6—13
6.6.5 “3.04 Solvent Low” .................................................................... 6—14
6.6.6 “3.05 Over Speed (Print Trigger)” .............................................. 6—14
6.6.7 “3.06 Over Speed (Synchronous Data)” .................................... 6—14
6.6.8 “3.07 Over Speed (Asynchronous Data)” .................................. 6—15
6.6.9 “3.08 Over Speed (Line Speed)” ............................................... 6—15
6.6.10 “3.09 Over Speed (Compensation)” ........................................ 6—15
6.6.11 “3.10 Under Speed (Line Speed)” ............................................ 6—15
6.6.12 “3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance” ..................... 6—16
6.6.13 “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” ...................................................... 6—16
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xi) Sep 2009
6.6.14 “3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted” ............................................ 6—16
6.6.15 “3.14 Power Off Override Active” ............................................ 6—17
6.6.16 “3.15 Safety Override Active” .................................................. 6—17
6.6.17 “3.16 Gutter Override Active” .................................................. 6—17
6.6.18 “3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active” ........................................ 6—18
6.6.19 “3.18 Low Pressure” ................................................................ 6—18
6.6.20 “3.19 Valid UNIC Chip Not Found” .......................................... 6—18
6.6.21 “3.20 No Time Of Flight” .......................................................... 6—18
6.6.22 “3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix” ................................................. 6—19
6.6.23 “3.22 Fault Prevented Mix” ...................................................... 6—19
6.6.24 “3.23 Power Off Occurred During Mixing” ............................... 6—19
6.6.25 “3.24 Restart In Progress” ....................................................... 6—19
6.6.26 “3.25 Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks” ............................................ 6—19
6.6.27 “3.26 User Data Corrupt–Please contact your local Linx Service
Centre” ................................................................................................. 6—19
6.6.28 “3.27 Mix Disabled” ................................................................. 6—19
6.6.29 “3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown” ...................... 6—19
6.6.30 “3.29 Over Speed (No Remote Data)” ..................................... 6—20
6.6.31 “3.30 Remote Error” ................................................................ 6—20
6.6.32 “3.31 Restarted Print Delay” .................................................... 6—20
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................

........................................ 7—1
7.1 Introduction
ion .......................................................................................
............................................................................................ 7—1
7.2 How to Use se the Flow Charts ..............................................................
................................................................... 7—1
7.3 First Steps .............................................................................................. 7—3
s .........................................................................................
7.4 Fault Recording ...................................................................................... 7—3
cording .................................................................................
7.5 When Flow ................................................. 7—3
ow Charts Seem Inappropriate ............................................
7.6 Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 7—3
eous Faults .........................................................................
7.7 List of Flow ................................................................................. 7—5
ow Charts ............................................................................
FC001 Troubleshooting ................................................................. 7—6
roubleshooting Start ............................................................
FC002 Jet .............................................................................................. 7—7
et .........................................................................................
FC003 Modulation .................................................................................. 7—8
odulation .............................................................................
FC004 Charge ........................................................................................ 7—9
harge ...................................................................................
FC005 Phase ....................................................................................... 7—10
hase ....................................................................................
FC006 Low ........................................................................... 7—11
ow Pressure ........................................................................
FC007 Ink ................................................................................ 7—12
k Quality .............................................................................
FC008 Low ...................................................................... 7—13
ow Viscosity Ink ...................................................................
FC009 High ..................................................................... 7—14
igh Viscosity Ink ..................................................................
FC010 EHT ......................................................................... 7—15
HT Deflection ......................................................................
FC011 Print .......................................................................................... 7—16
rint .......................................................................................
FC012 Print .............................................................................. 7—17
rint Quality ...........................................................................
FC200 2.00 ............................................ 7—18
.00 Printhead Over Temperature .........................................
FC201 2.01 ........................................................................... 7—19
.01 EHT Trip ........................................................................
FC202 2.02 ................................................................... 7—20
.02 Phase Failure ................................................................
FC203 2.03 ....................................................... 7—21
.03 Time Of Flight Failure ....................................................
FC204 2.04 .......................................................... 7—22
.04 300V Power Supply .......................................................
FC205 2.05 ................................................................. 7—23
.05 Ink Tank Empty ..............................................................
FC206 2.06 .......................................................... 7—24
.06 Solvent Tank Empty .......................................................
FC207 2.07 Internal Spillage ................................................................ 7—25
FC208 2.08 Printer Over Temperature ................................................. 7—26
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC209 2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet ............................................................. 7—27
FC211 2.11 Pressure Limit Reached ................................................... 7—28
FC212 2.12 Viscosity ........................................................................... 7—29
FC213 2.13 Hardware Safety Trip ........................................................ 7—30
FC999 Final Test .................................................................................. 7—31
CHAPTER 8: TRAINING COURSE GUIDES ............................... 8—1

Course One: Printer Operation (Level C & Level A) ..................................... 8—1
Level C: Module 01 – Introduction ............................................................... 8—3
Level C: Module
odule 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing .....................................
....................................... 8—4
Level C: Module
odule 03 – Getting Started and Printing Messages .....................
................... 8—5
Level C: Module
odule 04 – Navigating the 7300 ..................................................
................................................ 8—6
Level C: Module
odule 05 – Creating and Editing Messages ................................
.............................. 8—7
Level C: Module
odule 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting Down .............................
........................... 8—8
Level C: Module
odule 07 – Looking After Your Printer ..........................................
........................................ 8—9
Level C: Module
odule 08 – Routine Maintenance .............................................. 8—10
Level C: Module
odule 09 – Line Installation ....................................................... 8—11
Level C: Module
odule 10 – Review ..................................................................... 8—12
Level A: Module
odule 01 – Introduction .............................................................. 8—13
Level A: Module
odule 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing ...................................... 8—14
Level A: Module
odule 03 – Getting Started and Printing Messages ................... 8—15
Level A: Module
odule 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting Down ........................... 8—16
Level A: Module
odule 07 – Looking After Your Printer ........................................ 8—17
Level A: Module
odule 09 – Line Installation ........................................................ 8—18
Level A: Module
odule 10 – Review ..................................................................... 8—19
APPENDIX A: 7300 FOOD GRADE PRINTER ............................. A—1

A.1 Introduction
ction ..........................................................................................
........................................................................................... A—1
A.2 Summaryary of Differences ......................................................................
....................................................................... A—1
A.2.1 Hardware ..................................................................................... A—1
ardware ....................................................................................
A.2.2 Configuration ............................................................................... A—1
onfiguration ..............................................................................
A.2.3 Software ....................................................................................... A—2
oftware ......................................................................................
A.2.4 User .............................................................................. A—2
ser Interface .............................................................................
A.3 Technical ............................................................................ A—2
ical Description ...........................................................................
A.3.1 Printhead ................................................................ A—2
rinthead Components ...............................................................
A.3.2 Printhead .................................................... A—2
rinthead Theory of Operation ...................................................
A.3.3 Ink System ................................................................................... A—4
A.3.4 Electrical Components ............................................................... A—10
A.3.5 Electronics and Software ............................................................ A—11
A.4 System Options ................................................................................... A—11
A.4.1 Option Availability ....................................................................... A—11
A.4.2 Line Setup Page ........................................................................ A—12
A.4.3 Installation Page ........................................................................ A—12
A.5 Maintenance ....................................................................................... A—14
A.5.1 Jet Functions ............................................................................. A—14
A.5.2 Monitor Jet ................................................................................. A—15
A.5.3 Maintenance Instructions ........................................................... A—15
A.6 System Events .................................................................................... A—16
A.6.1 Print Failures .............................................................................. A—16
A.6.2 System Warnings ....................................................................... A—16
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xiii) Sep 2009
A.7 Troubleshooting .................................................................................. A—16
A.7.1 First Steps .................................................................................. A—16
FC001 Troubleshooting Start .............................................................. A—17
A.8 Training Course Guides ...................................................................... A—18
A.8.1 Course One: Printer Operation (Level C & Level A) .................. A—18
A.9 Illustrated Parts List ............................................................................ A—18
A.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................ A—18
A.10 On-Farm Egg Coding ........................................................................ A—19
A.10.1 Introduction .............................................................................. A—19
A.10.2 Configuration Code .................................................................. A—19
A.10.3 Warm-up Delay ........................................................................ A—19
A.10.4 Maintenance Times ................................................................. A—19
INDEX ................................................................................... INDEX—1
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xiv) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure Page
CHAPTER 1: SAFETY ..................................................................................... 1—1

Figure 1-1. Test Printing into a Non-metallic Container ................................................................ 1—6
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL AND COMPLIANCE INFORMATION ...................... 2—1

Figure 2-1. Printer Types ............................................................................................................. 2—1
Figure 2-2. Printer Configurations ................................................................................................ 2—1
CHAPTER 3: TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................... 3—1

Figure 3-1. 7300 (IP65 version) Printer Base Unit and Main Components ................................... 3—3
Figure 3-2. 7300 European User Interface .................................................................................. 3—5
Figure 3-3. Mk7 Midi Printhead Main Components ...................................................................... 3—6
Figure 3-4. 3-Way Fluid Connector Containing the In-line Feed Filter .......................................... 3—9
Figure 3-5. In-Line Gutter Check Valve ...................................................................................... 3—10
Figure 3-6. Modulation of the Ink Jet by a Piezoelectric Crystal ................................................. 3—13
Figure 3-7. Correct Drop Break-off in the Charge Electrode ...................................................... 3—14
Figure 3-8. Guard Drops ............................................................................................................ 3—16
Figure 3-9. Phase Control Process ............................................................................................ 3—17
Figure 3-10. Static Ink System—Standard 7300 Printer ............................................................. 3—24
Figure 3-11. Static Ink System—7300 Spectrum Printer ............................................................ 3—25
Figure 3-12. Venturi Manifold Assembly and Valves—Standard 7300 Printer ............................ 3—26
Figure 3-13. Venturi Manifold Assembly
Assembly and Valves—7300
Valves—7300 Spectrum S Printer ........................... 3—27
Figure 3-14. Section View of the Venturi
enturi ..........
....................................................................................
..................... 3—28
Figure 3-15. 7300 Ink
Ink System Pip
Pipe e Connection
Connections—Standard—Standard 7 7300 Printer ................................. 3—29
Figure 3-16. 7300 Ink
Ink System Pipe Connections—7300
Pipe Connection —7300 Spectrum
Spec Printer ................................ 3—30
Figure 3-17. Primary Circuit—Standard 7300 Printer ................................................................. 3—32
Figure 3-18. Primary Circuit—7300 Spectrum Printer ................................................................ 3—33
Figure 3-19. Secondary Circuit (Normal Running after a Start Purge)—Standard 7300 Printer .. 3—34
Figure 3-20. Secondary Circuit (Normal Running after a Start Purge)—7300 Spectrum Printer . 3—35
Figure 3-21. Solvent Addition—Standard 7300 Printer ............................................................... 3—37
Figure 3-22. Solvent Addition—7300 Spectrum Printer .............................................................. 3—38
Figure 3-23. Ink Mixing Sequence Timings ................................................................................ 3—39
Figure 3-24. Ink Mixing—7300 Spectrum Printer Only ............................................................... 3—40
Figure 3-25. Pressure Conversion Table .................................................................................... 3—42
Figure 3-26. Printhead Dependent Parameters Table ................................................................ 3—43
Figure 3-27. Normal Start Summary Table ................................................................................. 3—44
Figure 3-28. Jet Test – Start Summary Table ............................................................................. 3—44
Figure 3-29. Restart Summary Table ......................................................................................... 3—45
Figure 3-30. Normal Shutdown (2 m conduit) Summary Table ................................................... 3—46
Figure 3-31. Normal Shutdown (4 m conduit) Summary Table ................................................... 3—47
Figure 3-32. Ink System after a Successful Normal Shutdown—Standard 7300 Printer ............ 3—48
Figure 3-33. Ink System after a Successful Normal Shutdown—7300 Spectrum Printer ........... 3—49
Figure 3-34. Jet Test – Stop Summary Table ............................................................................. 3—50
Figure 3-35. Purge Dry Cycle Summary Table ........................................................................... 3—51
Figure 3-36. Feed Dry Cycle Summary Table ............................................................................ 3—51
Figure 3-37. Nozzle Clear Summary Table ................................................................................ 3—52
Figure 3-38. Flush Cycle Summary Table .................................................................................. 3—53
Figure 3-38. Flush Cycle Summary Table (continued) ............................................................... 3—54
Figure 3-39. Filter Purge Summary Table .................................................................................. 3—54
Figure 3-40. Gutter Dry Cycle Summary Table .......................................................................... 3—55
Figure 3-41. Empty Tank Summary Table .................................................................................. 3—55
Figure 3-42. Solvent Drain Summary Table ............................................................................... 3—55
Figure 3-43. Nozzle Flush Summary Table ................................................................................ 3—56
Figure 3-44. Ink Mixing Summary Table .................................................................................... 3—57
Figure 3-45. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima Printhead) .................................... 3—58
Figure 3-46. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi Printhead) ........................................ 3—58
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xv) Sep 2009
Figure 3-47. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima A Printhead) ................................. 3—59
Figure 3-48. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi A Printhead) ..................................... 3—59
Figure 3-49. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (MidiEC Printhead) ................................... 3—59
Figure 3-50. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Mini Printhead) ........................................ 3—60
Figure 3-51. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Micro Printhead) ..................................... 3—60
Figure 3-52. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima plus Printhead) ............................. 3—61
Figure 3-53. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi plus Printhead) ................................ 3—61
Figure 3-54. LVPSU Input Details .............................................................................................. 3—63
Figure 3-55. LVPSU Output Details ........................................................................................... 3—63
Figure 3-56. EHTPSU Input/Output
ut/Output Details ...............................................................................
............................................................... 3—64
Figure 3-57. Valve Cableformorm Details ........................................................................................
........................................................................ 3—65
Figure 3-58. IPM PCB Link k Default Positions ............................................................
............................................................................ 3—74
Figure 3-59. IPM PCB Test st Points and Links Locations .............................................................
............................................. 3—75
Figure 3-60. Fault Conditions
ions and Actions .................................................................................
................................................................. 3—76
Figure 3-61. Primary Trigger—NPN
er—NPN Configuration .....................................................................
..................................................... 3—78
Figure 3-62. Primary Trigger—PNP
er—PNP Configuration .....................................................................
..................................................... 3—78
Figure 3-63. Secondary Trigger—NPN
rigger—NPN Configuration ................................................................
................................................ 3—79
Figure 3-64. Secondary Trigger—PNP
rigger—PNP Configuration ................................................................
................................................ 3—79
Figure 3-65. 5 V Single-Ended
nded Shaft Encoder Connections ......................................................
...................................... 3—81
Figure 3-66. 24 V Single-Ended .................................................... 3—81
Ended Shaft Encoder Connections ....................................
Figure 3-67. 5 V Quadratureure Shaft Encoder Connections ..........................................................
.......................................... 3—81
Figure 3-68. 24 V Quadratureture Shaft Encoder Connections ........................................................
........................................ 3—82
Figure 3-69. 24 Volts External
rnal Alarm Pin Connections ...............................................................
............................................... 3—82
Figure 3-70. Mains External al Alarm (Volt-Free) Pin Connections ................................................
................................ 3—83
Figure 3-71. RS232 Interfaceace Cable Pin Connections ...............................................................
............................................... 3—85
Figure 3-72. RS422 Interface Cable Pin Connections ............................................................... 3—86
Figure 3-73. Parallel I/O PCB Links ........................................................................................... 3—87
Figure 3-74. Parallel I/O Interface Pin Connections ................................................................... 3—88
Figure 3-75. Correct Assembly of the IP67 D-Type Connector .................................................. 3—89
CHAPTER 4: SYSTEM OPTIONS ................................................................... 4—1

Figure 4-1. Print Monitor Page ..................................................................................................... 4—1
Figure 4-2. Soft Keys and Related Options .................................................................................. 4—2
Figure 4-3. Total Menu Page Options .......................................................................................... 4—3
Figure 4-4. Change User Level Page .......................................................................................... 4—4
Figure 4-5. System Options Availability Table .............................................................................. 4—5
Figure 4-5. System Options Availability Table (continued) ............................................................ 4—6
Figure 4-6. Line Setup Page ........................................................................................................ 4—7
Figure 4-7. Power Down Page ..................................................................................................... 4—8
Figure 4-8. Menu Page ................................................................................................................ 4—9
Figure 4-9. Current Events Page ............................................................................................... 4—10
Figure 4-10. Event History Page ................................................................................................ 4—10
Figure 4-11. Track New Events Option ...................................................................................... 4—11
Figure 4-12.
-12. Event Filtering
F Page .............................................................................................. 4—12
Figure 4-13. Clear EEvent History Page ...................................................................................... 4—13
Figure 4-14.
-14. Event SSetup Page .................................................................................................. 4—13
Figure 4-15.
-15. Always Log Option ................................................................................................. 4—14
Figure 4-16. Never Log Option .................................................................................................. 4—14
Figure 4-17. Edit Interval Page .................................................................................................. 4—15
Figure 4-18. Setup Page ............................................................................................................ 4—16
Figure 4-19. Installation Page .................................................................................................... 4—16
Figure 4-20. Date & Time Page ................................................................................................. 4—17
Figure 4-21. Printhead Page ...................................................................................................... 4—18
Figure 4-22. Printhead Conduit Label ........................................................................................ 4—19
Figure 4-23. ID Page ................................................................................................................. 4—20
Figure 4-24. Ink/Solvent Page ................................................................................................... 4—22
Figure 4-25. Locale Page .......................................................................................................... 4—24
Figure 4-26. Gregorian Calendars ............................................................................................. 4—25
Figure 4-27. Photocells Page .................................................................................................... 4—26
Figure 4-28. Change User Level Page ....................................................................................... 4—27
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xvi) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 5: MAINTENANCE ......................................................................... 5—1
Figure 5-1. Soft Keys and Related Options .................................................................................. 5—1
Figure 5-2. Total Maintenance Options ........................................................................................ 5—2
Figure 5-3. Maintenance Options Availability Table ...................................................................... 5—3
Figure 5-3. Maintenance Options Availability Table (continued) ................................................... 5—4
Figure 5-4. Maintenance Page ..................................................................................................... 5—5
Figure 5-5. Jet Functions Page .................................................................................................... 5—5
Figure 5-6. Monitor Jet Page ....................................................................................................... 5—8
Figure 5-7. Edit Pressure Page ................................................................................................... 5—9
Figure 5-8. Edit Modulation Page .............................................................................................. 5—11
Figure 5-9. TOF Mode Page ...................................................................................................... 5—13
Figure 5-10. Maintenance
aintenance Times Page ...................................................................................... 5—15
Figure 5-11. Scheduled
heduled Maintenance Intervals .......................................................................... 5—16
Figure 5-12. Charge
harge Calibration Page ....................................................................................... 5—17
Figure 5-13. Jett Sequences Page ............................................................................................. 5—19
Figure 5-14. Valves
lves Page .......................................................................................................... 5—23
Figure 5-15. Test
st Message Page ............................................................................................... 5—24
Figure 5-16. Test
st Message—Save As Page .............................................................................. 5—24
Figure 5-17. System
ystem Flush—First Preparation Page .................................................................. 5—25
Figure 5-18. System
stem Flush—Options Page ................................................................................ 5—26
Figure 5-19. Print
rint and Consumables History Page .................................................................... 5—26
5.4 Maintenance
ance Instructions ....................................................................... 5
5—29
Scheduled Maintenance
intenance .......................................................................................................... 5—33
Figure 1. Removing the 7300 (IP65 version) Air Filter ............................................................... 5—37
Figure 2. Removing the 7300 Air Filter ....................................................................................... 5—38
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks ................................................................................. 5—43

Figure 1. Correct Area of the Printhead to Wash with Solvent ...................................
................................................... 5—44
Figure 2. Correct Area of the Printhead to Clean with the Brush ................................
................................................ 5—45
Figure 3. Washing the Printhead ........................................................ 5—46
inthead Cover Tube with Solvent ........................................
Draining the Ink System ..........................................................................................................

.......................................................................................... 5—47
Figure 1. System Flush—First
First Page ..........................................................................................
.......................................................................... 5—48
Figure 2. Feed Damper Orientation
rientation with Drain Tube Connected ...............................................
............................... 5—49
Figure 3. System Flush Options
ptions Page .......................................................................................
....................................................................... 5—49
Figure 4. Empty Tank Sequence
uence in Progress .............................................................................
............................................................. 5—50
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal

oval ...................................................................................................
................................................................................... 5—53
Figure 1. 7300 Spectrum Ink Tank .............................................................................
............................................................................................. 5—54
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement ............................................................................................. 5—57

cement .............................................................................
Figure 1. Ink Tank Dip (Pick-up) ........................................................ 5—57
ick-up) Tube and Filter Assembly ........................................
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement ...........................................................................

........................................................... 5—61
Figure 1. 3-Way Fluid Connector Disassembled ........................................................................ 5—62
Main Ink Filter Replacement ................................................................................................... 5—65

Figure 1. Main Ink Filter Inlet and Outlet Pipe Lengths .............................................................. 5—66
Figure 2. Correct Assembly of the Main Ink Filter Fluid Connections ......................................... 5—66
Figure 3. One End of the Main Ink Filter Enclosed in a Latex Glove .......................................... 5—67
Figure 4. Both Ends of the Main Ink Filter Enclosed in Latex Gloves ......................................... 5—68
Charge Amplifier Calibration .................................................................................................. 5—71

Figure 1. Calibration Mode Page ............................................................................................... 5—72
Printhead Valves Tests ............................................................................................................ 5—75

Figure 1. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page ................................. 5—75
Figure 2. Feed Valve Open on the Valves Page ......................................................................... 5—76
Figure 3. Jet Test – Start Option on the Jet Functions Page ...................................................... 5—77
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xvii) Sep 2009
Ink System Feed Valve Test .................................................................................................... 5—79
Figure 2. Printhead Feed Valve Open on the Valves Page ........................................................ 5—80
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests ............................................................................................... 5—81

Figure 2. Purge Test Fluid Connector Fitted in the 3-Way Fluid Connector ................................ 5—83
Figure 3. Testing for a Leaking Purge or Gutter Valve (closed) .................................................. 5—84
Figure 4. Nozzle Clear Option on the Jet Sequences Page ....................................................... 5—85
Solvent Flush Valve Tests ....................................................................................................... 5—87

Figure 2. Solvent Flush Valve Open on the Valves Page ........................................................... 5—88
Figure 4. Creating Bubbles to Test the Solvent Flush Valve for Leakage ................................... 5—89
Solvent Add Valve Tests .......................................................................................................... 5—91

Figure 1. Creating Bubbles to Test the Solvent Add Valve for Leakage ...................................... 5—92
Figure 3. Solvent Add Valve Open on the Valves Page .............................................................. 5—93
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning ....................................................................................... 5—95

Figure 2. Correct Alignment of the Jet into the Gutter ................................................................ 5—96
Figure 3. Correct Alignment of the Jet from the Nozzle .............................................................. 5—97
Figure 5. Nozzle Clear Sequence—Applying Solvent to the Nozzle Face .................................. 5—98
Figure 6. Suspending the Nozzle in a Beaker of Solvent ........................................................... 5—99
Figure 7. Feed and Printhead Feed Valves Open on the Valves Page ..................................... 5—102
Modulation Range Checks .................................................................................................... 5—105

Figure 1. Creating a Test Message on the Test Message Page ............................................... 5—105
Figure 2. Jet Test – Start and Start Print Options on the Jet Functions Page ............. ........................... 5—106
Figure 3. Reference Modulation
ulation Value on the Monitor Jet Page ................................
.............................................. 5—106
Figure 4. Changing the Actual
ctual Modulation Value on the Edit Modulation Page .......... ........................ 5—107
Figure 5. Under Modulation—Expected
on—Expected Deterioration when Reference Mod is < Vm1 ............ 5—107
Figure 6. Over Modulation—Expected
n—Expected Deterioration when Reference Mod is > Vm2 .............. 5—107
Blocked Gutter Clearance ce .....................................................................................................

....................................................................................... 5—109
Figure 1. Gutter Clear Fluid
id Connector Fitted in the 3-Way Fluid Connector ............. ........................... 5—111
Figure 2. Removal of the DFC Pipe Connections ....................................................................
...................................................... 5—111
Figure 3. Gutter Line Connection
nection .............................................................................................
............................................................................... 5—112
Figure 4. Entering a Set Pressure
ressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page ...............................
................. 5—112
Figure 5. Feed Valve Open ....................................................................... 5—113
n on the Valves Page .........................................................
System Flush .........................................................................................................................

............................................................................................ 5—115
Figure 1. System Flush—FirstFirst Page ........................................................................................
.......................................................................... 5—120
Figure 2. Feed Damper Orientation
rientation with Drain Tube Connected .............................................
............................... 5—121
Figure 3. System Flush Options
ptions Page .....................................................................................
....................................................................... 5—122
Figure 4. Empty Tank Sequence in Progress ........................................................................... 5—123
Figure 5. System Flush Options Page—Empty Tank Sequence Count of 1 ............................. 5—124
Figure 6. System Flush Options Page—Flush Cycle Sequence Count of 1 ............................. 5—125
Figure 7. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page ............................... 5—125
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) .................................................................. 5—127

Figure 1. Reference Pressure Value on the Printhead Code Page .......................................... 5—128
Figure 2. Example of a Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Table ............. 5—128
Figure 3. Reference Modulation Value on the Printhead Code Page ....................................... 5—129
Figure 4. Correct Fitting of the Printhead Calibration Label on the Conduit .............................. 5—130
Figure 5. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima Printheads, and Allowed Ink
Conversions ............................................................................................................................ 5—131
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xviii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Figure 6. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima plus Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—132
Figure 7. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi Printheads, and Allowed Ink
Conversions ............................................................................................................................ 5—133
Figure 8. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi plus Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—134
Figure 9. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima A Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—135
Figure 10. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi A Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—135
Figure 11. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300FG Printers with Mk7 MidiEC Printheads, and
Allowed Ink Conversions ......................................................................................................... 5—136
Figure 12. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Mini Printheads, and Allowed Ink
Conversions ............................................................................................................................ 5—137
Figure 13. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Micro Printheads, and Allowed Ink
Conversions ............................................................................................................................ 5—137
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) .......................................................... 5—139

Figure 1. Reference Pressure Value on the Printhead Code Page .......................................... 5—141
Figure 2. Example of a Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Table ............. 5—141
Figure 3. Reference Modulation Value on the Printhead Code Page ....................................... 5—142
Figure 4. Jet Test – Start Option on the Jet Functions Page .................................................... 5—142
Figure 5. Correct Alignment of the Jet into the Gutter .............................................................. 5—143
Figure 6. Correct Fitting of the Printhead Calibration Label on the Conduit .............................. 5—144
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mounted) ........................................................ 5—147

Figure 1. Alarm Beacon Mounting Bracket Fitted to the Stalk Assembly .................................. 5—147
Figure 2. Fitting the Alarm Beacon to the Rear of the Printer ................................................... 5—148
Figure 3. Alarm Setup Page — “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” Set to Constant ............................ 5—149
Figure 4. System Event Page — “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” Displayed ................................... 5—149
Figure 5. Print Monitor Page — “Printer Warnings Exist” Displayed ........................................ 5—150
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion ............................................................................. 5—151

Positive Air Pump Installation .............................................................................................. 5—157

Figure 1. Connecting and Fitting the Printhead Positive Air Pump ........................................... 5—158
Figure 2. Printhead Positive Air Pipe Outlet ............................................................................. 5—159
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement ..................................................................................... 5—161

Figure 1. Printhead Upper Cover and Securing Screw(s) ........................................................ 5—162
Figure 2. Printhead Feed Valve Assembly ............................................................................... 5—162
Figure 3. Printhead Feed Valve Component Parts ................................................................... 5—163
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement ............................................................................ 5—165

Figure 1. Printhead Upper Cover and Securing Screw(s) ........................................................ 5—165
Figure 2. Printhead Feed Valve Assembly ............................................................................... 5—166
Figure 3. Printhead Feed Valve Component Parts ................................................................... 5—166
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads ............................................... 5—175

Figure 1. Removing the Right-Angle Adaptor Top Section ....................................................... 5—175
Figure 2. Changing the Orientation of the Right-Angle Adaptor Bottom Section ...................... 5—176
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xix) Sep 2009
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation .................................................................... 5—179
Figure 1. Location of the Auto Power On/Off Connector PL20 on the IPM PCB ...................... 5—180
Figure 2. Printer Rear View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections ............ 5—180
Figure 3. Printer Front View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections ............ 5—181
Figure 4. Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit ............................................................................. 5—182
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion ................................................................................... 5—189

Figure 1. Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Details ................................................................................. 5—190
Figure 2. Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Connector Details .............................................................. 5—192
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion ................................................................................... 5—193

Figure 1. Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Details ................................................................................. 5—194
Figure 2. Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Connector Details .............................................................. 5—196
Ethernet Interface Installation .............................................................................................. 5—201

Figure 1. Ethernet Connector Details ....................................................................................... 5—203
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation ................................................... 5—205

Figure 1. Ethernet Connector Details ....................................................................................... 5—207
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures ........................................................................... 5—209

Figure 1. Linx Sync Compatibility Issues ................................................................................. 5—209
Figure 2. Connected Printers in the Linx Sync Window ........................................................... 5—211
Figure 3. Dragging and Dropping the System Software File .................................................... 5—212
Figure 4. Copying and Pasting the System Software File ........................................................ 5—212
Figure 5. Downloading the System Software File Using the Download Menu Command ......... 5—213
Figure 6. “Maintain the store during download?” Message Dialog Box .................................... 5—213
Figure 7. Download Progress Dialog Box ................................................................................ 5—214
Figure 8. “Maintain the store backed up last time?” Message Dialog Box ................................ 5—216
Figure 9. Changing the Base Directory of the Backup Files ..................................................... 5—217
Figure 10. Selecting a Printer to Back Up ................................................................................ 5—218
Figure 11. Named Backup File in the Printer’s Backup Directory ............................................. 5—218
Figure 12. Selecting a Backup File to Restore to a Printer ....................................................... 5—219
Figure 13. Transferring Data Items from a Printer ................................................................... 5—220
Figure 14. Transferring Data Types from a Printer to a Backup ............................................... 5—220
Figure 15. Transferring Data Items from a Backup .................................................................. 5—221
Figure 16. Transferring Data Types from a Backup ................................................................. 5—221
Figure 17. Transferring Data Items from a PC ......................................................................... 5—222
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning ................................................................................................... 5—223

Figure 1. Area of the Printhead to Wash with Solvent .............................................................. 5—224
Figure 2. Printhead Components to Clean with the Swabs ...................................................... 5—225
Figure 3. Identification of the Printhead Components .............................................................. 5—226
Figure 4. Washing the Printhead Cover Tube with Solvent ...................................................... 5—227
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement ...................................................................... 5—229

Figure 1. DFC Module Removal .............................................................................................. 5—230
Figure 2. DFC Module Cableform and Connectors .................................................................. 5—230
Figure 3. DFC Module Cableform Routing ............................................................................... 5—231
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) ......................................................................... 5—233

Figure 1. Printhead Removal ................................................................................................... 5—234
Figure 2. Printhead Fitting ....................................................................................................... 5—235
Figure 3. DFC Module Cableform—Location of Position 15 on PL6 ........................................ 5—235
Figure 4. DFC Module Cableform—Control Signal Connector ‘A’ ............................................ 5—236
CHAPTER 6: SYSTEM EVENTS ..................................................................... 6—1

Figure 6-1. System Event Page ................................................................................................... 6—1
Figure 6-2. System Events Summary Table ................................................................................. 6—3
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xx) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................. 7—1
Figure 7-1. Simple Flow Chart Example ...................................................................................... 7—1
Figure 7-2. How to Use a Flow Chart ........................................................................................... 7—2
Figure 7-3. Flow Chart Record Sheet .......................................................................................... 7—4
Figure 7-4. List of Troubleshooting Flow Charts .......................................................................... 7—5
Figure 7-5. FC001 Troubleshooting Start ..................................................................................... 7—6
Figure 7-6. FC002 Jet .................................................................................................................. 7—7
Figure 7-7. FC003 Modulation ..................................................................................................... 7—8
Figure 7-8. FC004 Charge ........................................................................................................... 7—9
Figure 7-9. FC005 Phase .......................................................................................................... 7—10
Figure 7-10. FC006 Low Pressure ............................................................................................. 7—11
Figure 7-11. FC007 Ink Quality .................................................................................................. 7—12
Figure 7-12. FC008 Low Viscosity Ink ....................................................................................... 7—13
Figure 7-13. FC009 High Viscosity Ink ....................................................................................... 7—14
Figure 7-14. FC010 EHT Deflection ........................................................................................... 7—15
Figure 7-15. FC011 Print ........................................................................................................... 7—16
Figure 7-16. FC012 Print Quality ............................................................................................... 7—17
Figure 7-17. FC200 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature .............................................................. 7—18
Figure 7-18. FC201 2.01 EHT Trip ............................................................................................. 7—19
Figure 7-19. FC202 2.02 Phase Failure ..................................................................................... 7—20
Figure 7-20. FC203 2.03 Time Of Flight Failure ......................................................................... 7—21
Figure 7-21. FC204 2.04 300V Power Supply ............................................................................ 7—22
Figure 7-22. FC205 2.05 Ink Tank Empty .................................................................................. 7—23
Figure 7-23. FC206 2.06 Solvent Tank Empty ........................................................................... 7—24
Figure 7-24. FC207 2.07 Internal Spillage ................................................................................. 7—25
Figure 7-25. FC208 2.08 Printer Over Temperature ................................................................... 7—26
Figure 7-26. FC209 2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet .............................................................................. 7—27
Figure 7-27. FC211 2.11 Pressure Limit Reach Reached d .....................................................................
................. 7—28
Figure 7-28. FC212 2.12 Viscosit
Viscosity .............................................................................................
................... ..................... 7—29
Figure 7-29. FC213 2.13 Hardwa
Hardware e Safety Trip .........................................................................
..................... 7—30
Figure 7-30. FC999 Final Test ...................................................................................................
......................... ..................... 7—31
APPENDIX A: 7300 FOOD GRADE PRINTER ............................................... A—1

Figure A-1. Static Ink System—7300 Food Grade Printer ........................................................... A—6
Figure A-2. 7300 Food Grade Ink System Pipe Connections ...................................................... A—7
Figure A-3. Normal Start Summary Table—7300 Food Grade Printer ......................................... A—8
Figure A-4. Normal Shutdown Summary Table—7300 Food Grade Printer ................................ A—9
Figure A-4. Normal Shutdown Summary Table—7300 Food Grade Printer (continued) ............ A—10
Figure A-5. Dual-Circuit Pump Ink Flows .................................................................................. A—10
Figure A-6. Power Down Page .................................................................................................. A—12
Figure A-7. Printhead Page ...................................................................................................... A—12
Figure A-8. Ink/Solvent Page .................................................................................................... A—13
Figure A-9. Advisory Message for Minimum Run Time Override ............................................... A—14
Figure A-10. FC001 7300 Food Grade Printer Troubleshooting Start ........................................ A—17
Figure A-11. 7300 Food Grade Printer Parts ............................................................................. A—18
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xxi) Sep 2009
Document Conventions
Text Conventions
The following text conventions are used throughout this maintenance manual for
identification and emphasis.
Display Elements
Bold text is used to identify the following:
• Page names, options and items. For example, the Print Monitor page; the Service page;
the Monitor Jet option on the Service page; the Modulation item on the Monitor Jet
page.
• Operator input in procedures. For example,
“In the Enter password for required level text box, type: ADMIN”
Control Panel and Keyboard Keys

The word ‘key’ in this manual describes any of the keys physically located on the printer
control panel and the keyboard. Keys are always ‘pressed’ to achieve an effect.
Reference to a key on the control panel or keyboard is made as follows:
…press the [stop] key to…
…press the [alt] key to…
This identifies the key labelled ‘stop’ on the control panel and the key labelled ‘alt’ on the
keyboard.
Cross-References
Where a cross-reference is made to another chapter, section or subsection within this
manual (an internal cross-reference), the reference is shown as follows:
…refer to ‘Password Access’ in Chapter 4: ‘System Options’…
Alternatively, where a cross-reference is made to a specific page element, a route reference
is used, for example:
…refer to Chapter 5: Maintenance Page > Charge Calibration > Calibration
Mode…
This method is also used to show the location of an item in the menu structure of the
printer, for example:
…select the Jet Test – Start option (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet
Functions > Jet Test – Start)…
Refer to the ‘Contents’ and ‘Index’ pages to locate the references quickly.
Where a cross-reference is made to another publication (an external cross-reference), the
reference is shown in italics, as follows:
…refer to the Linx Remote Communications Interface Reference Manual…
Printer Models
There are two 7300 printers—the 7300 and the 7300 (IP65 version). Where a particular
model is referred to, it is shown in italics (as in the previous sentence). Information
common to both printer models is referenced generically as 7300, that is, in plain text.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xxii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Other Conventions
The following types of annotation are used in this manual to identify and to draw the
reader’s attention to particular types of information.
Important Note Symbol

The pointing hand symbol is shown beside an IMPORTANT Note to indicate that the
information given is essential to the completion of a task.
Notes
Notes are used to provide additional information that may apply in special cases, such as
memory limitations, printer configuration, or details that apply to specific versions of
system software.
Additional Publications
Additional information about the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer is provided in the following
publications. These publications are available from Linx or from your Linx Distributor, or
can be downloaded from ExtraLinx:
1. Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide (part number FA69085).
This document provides instructions on the basic operator functions of the printer, and
how to carry out routine maintenance.
2. How To … documents.
These documents provide details of how to use the more complex functions of the
printer.
3. Printer Care Card, English (part number FA68022).
The card contains basic routine maintenance and safety information, and is designed to
be printed and positioned near the printer.
4. Linx Remote Communications Interface Reference Manual (available on CD only—part
number FA76014).
This manual describes the RS232 communications protocol for Linx printers. It also
includes information on printer setup and hardware connections.
5. For information about spare parts, refer to ExtraLinx or the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer
Service Information CD.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xxiii) Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xxiv) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 1: SAFETY
1.1 Introduction
WARNING: GENERAL SAFETY. REGARDLESS OF THE LEVEL OF PERCEIVED HAZARD, THE

SAFETY PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE FOLLOWED.
READ, UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW ALL OF THE SAFETY INFORMATION IN THIS SAFETY
CHAPTER BEFORE THE PRINTER IS INSTALLED, OPERATED OR ANY MAINTENANCE WORK
IS DONE. ALWAYS FOLLOW THE SAFETY INFORMATION IN ALL WARNING AND CAUTION
STATEMENTS IN THIS MANUAL.
IF THERE IS ANY PART OF THIS SAFETY CHAPTER THAT YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND, DO
NOT USE THE PRINTER.
INCORRECT INSTALLATION, SETUP, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE OR MODIFICATION OF
THE PRINTER CAN CREATE A HAZARD TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY OF PERSONNEL AND
THE ENVIRONMENT.
This chapter provides important information about the precautions to be taken to make
sure that all operations and maintenance related to inks and solvents are performed with
the maximum possible safety. First Aid information is also included.
For maximum safety the printer must always be operated with the spare parts approved by
Linx. Linx recommends that any maintenance work is performed only by Linx maintenance
technicians or personnel trained by Linx. The use of spare parts that are not approved, and
the performance of maintenance work by personnel who are not trained can make the
printer unsafe to use.
1.2 Safety Warnings and Cautions

Warning and Caution statements are provided within the text of this manual. These
statements advise the reader of potential hazards, how to prevent them and how to safely
use a product. A Warning statement always includes a related warning symbol.
The definitions of Warning and Caution statements are given below, with the text
conventions used in this manual.
1.2.1 Warnings
A Warning advises the reader of a hazard that can cause loss of life, injury or illness. The
statement is printed in bold capital letters and includes a warning symbol that identifies
the type of hazard.
1.2.2 Cautions
A Caution advises the reader of actions that can damage equipment or the environment,
but are not a direct danger to personnel. The statement is printed in bold lower-case letters
and does not include a symbol.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 1—1 Sep 2009
1.2.3 Warning Symbols
The following subsections describe the different types of warning symbols.
Eye Protection
The mandatory Eye Protection warning symbol is an indication that safety glasses must be
worn when any work is done that includes inks or solvents. The safety glasses must be of a
type according to European and international safety standards.
Hand Protection
The mandatory Hand Protection warning symbol is an indication that solvent-resistant

protective gloves must be worn when any work is done that includes the use of inks or
solvents.
Irritant Substance Hazard
The Irritant Warning symbol is an indication that a substance can cause irritation to the
eyes and the respiratory system if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
Electric Shock Hazard
The Lethal Voltage warning symbol is an indication that there is a risk of electric shock
from possible lethal voltages if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
Fire Hazard
The Highly Flammable warning symbol is an indication that there is a risk of fire from a
highly flammable type of material if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
Hot Surface Hazard
The Hot Surface Warning symbol is an indication that there is a risk of skin burns from
contact with a hot surface if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 1—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
General Hazard
The General warning symbol is shown with a Warning statement that does not have a
special symbol to indicate the hazard. The Warning advises the reader of other activities
that can be harmful or lethal.
1.3 Lethal Voltages
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST IN THIS

EQUIPMENT WHEN ELECTRICAL POWER IS APPLIED.
MAXIMUM CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN ANY WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTER WHILE
ELECTRICAL POWER IS APPLIED AND THE COVER IS REMOVED. THE CORRECT,
STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN.
THERE IS A DANGER OF INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK IF THIS SAFETY
WARNING IS IGNORED.
When the printer cabinet cover is removed, the mains electrical supply and the 300 volts
DC supply can be accessed.
To protect against the danger of electric shock, printing is stopped when the printhead
cover tube is removed. Also, the charge electrode voltage is decreased to less than 10 volts
instead of the normal 300 volts, and the +8 kV supply to the deflector plates is turned off.
WARNING: THIS PRINTER MUST BE EARTHED.
1.4 Inks and Solvents
WARNING: HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES. THIS PRINTER USES SOLVENT AND SOLVENT-

BASED INKS THAT CAN BE HAZARDOUS. THESE INKS AND SOLVENTS ARE HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE, AND THE LIQUID, VAPOUR OR SPRAY CAN CAUSE IRRITATION TO THE EYES
AND SKIN.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND SOLVENT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN THERE
IS DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE INKS AND SOLVENTS, WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE
PRINTER, AND WHEN THE PRINTER IS CLEANED.
THERE IS A RISK OF SEVERE IRRITATION AND TEMPORARY (REVERSIBLE) DAMAGE TO
THE EYES, AND IRRITATION OF THE SKIN IF THIS SAFETY WARNING IS IGNORED.
FA69084–1
Solvents and inks can be harmful. When inks and solvents are used, the following
necessary precautions must be taken:
• Before work is started on the printer, read the applicable ink and solvent Material
Safety Data Sheets. If you do not fully understand the information, or are not sure,
contact Linx for instruction.
If the Material Safety Data Sheets have not been supplied or are not available, contact
Linx for copies. Always refer to the Material Safety Data Sheets before inks and
solvents are used.
• Do not smoke or use open flames near the printer, or ink and solvent storage areas and
containers.
• Make sure that the printing area has good ventilation when the printer is in operation,
when work is done on the printer, and when inks and solvents are used.
• Wear safety glasses when inks and solvents are used, or when the printer is examined
or repaired. The safety glasses must be of a type according to the applicable European
and international safety standards. The Eye Protection Warning symbol is shown in
this manual, where applicable, to indicate the mandatory requirement to wear safety
glasses.
• Wear solvent-resistant gloves when inks and solvents are used, when the printer is
examined or repaired, or at any time that hand contact with inks or solvents is possible.
The Hand Protection Warning symbol is shown in this manual, where applicable, to
indicate the mandatory requirement to wear safety gloves.
Barrier creams can help to protect areas of bare skin, but they do not give the same
level of protection as safety gloves. Barrier creams must not be applied after exposure
to ink or solvent has occurred.
• Never look into the end of the printhead or point the printhead at any person while the
printer is turned on.
• Do not overfill the ink and solvent tanks of the printer. Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick
Start Guide for information on how to correctly refill the ink system.
• Remove all ink and solvent spillage immediately from the interior and exterior of the
printer, and from the area around the printer. Use the correct solvent type for the
related ink type to remove ink spillage.
• Remove any increased ink deposits from the interior of the printer with the correct
solvent type for the related ink type.
• Store all inks and solvents in their original containers, which must be tightly closed.
Store the containers in a cabinet with good air circulation or in a recommended
flameproof storage container. Inks and solvents must be kept away from any source of
heat or ignition.
• All waste ink and solvent must be discarded correctly, according to local regulations
and must not be allowed to enter the water drainage system.
1.5 Heavy Equipment Hazard
WARNING: HEAVY EQUIPMENT HAZARD. THE WEIGHT OF THE 7300 CIJ PRINTER IS
APPROXIMATELY 25.0 KG WHEN THE INK AND SOLVENT TANKS ARE FULL.
CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN THE PRINTER IS MOVED.
THERE IS A RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY IF THE CORRECT GUIDELINES FOR THE SAFE
MANUAL HANDLING OF HEAVY OBJECTS ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
FA69084–1
1.6 First Aid
Ideally, all maintenance personnel should be trained in First Aid and know the possible
effects from the use of flammable and toxic materials.
All maintenance personnel must have access to the ink and solvent Material Safety Data
Sheets, which describe the hazards and the actions to be taken if First Aid is necessary.
Maintenance personnel must make sure that the First Aid information is easily available if
ink and solvent ingestion, inhalation, or contact with the eyes or skin occurs.
1.6.1 Procedures
The following paragraphs contain First Aid procedures for inks and solvents from the
Material Safety Data Sheets. For complete and up to date information, always refer to the
Material Safety Data Sheet for the related ink or solvent.
Eye Contact with Inks or Solvents

Remove contact lenses, if necessary, before the eyes are flushed. Hold the eyelids open,
flush the eyes with clean water and continue this process for at least 10 minutes. Get
medical attention.
Skin Contact with Inks or Solvents

Remove any contaminated clothes. Wash the affected area completely with soap and water,
or use a proprietary skin cleaner. Do not use solvents to remove ink from skin. Get medical
attention if irritation occurs or continues after the skin has been washed.
Ingestion of Inks or Solvents

If accidentally swallowed, DO NOT INDUCE VOMITING. Obtain immediate medical
attention. Rise the mouth thoroughly with water and give large amounts of water to drink
if the person is conscious. Keep at rest, and provide warmth and fresh air.
Inhalation of Solvent Fumes

Remove the affected person to fresh air immediately. If the person stops breathing, give
artificial respiration and get medical attention immediately. Make sure that the person does
not move and keep the person warm.
FA69084–1
1.7 Test Printing
Printing drops hold a charge, which is not discharged until the drops contact the substrate.
If test printing is performed into a container, a charge can build in the collected ink. This
charge can eventually, suddenly discharge to earth and cause the ink to ignite.
To prevent this risk of fire, it is extremely important to make sure that the ink is earthed so
that the charge does not occur. If a metal container is used, connect the container to an
earth point. If a non-metallic container is used (for example, glass or plastic), put one end
of a length of wire directly into the ink, and connect the other end to an earth point (see
Figure 1-1). The knurled securing screw for the printhead cover tube can be used as an
earth point.
IMPORTANT: To
o make sure that the printer operates correctly, this safety procedure is
the only time that the cover tube securing screw is to be used as an earth
point.
68001
MIDI
Figure 1-1. Test Printing into a Non-metallic Container
FA69084–1
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL AND
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
2.1 Introduction
The Linx 7300 Continuous Ink Jet (CIJ) Printer is a fast, reliable, non-contact printer capable
of applying sell-by dates, batch codes, logos and other variable information to a wide range
of substrates on the production line. The following table shows the different printer types
and their names, and the printheads available with each:
v4.0 73048
Pigmented ink Food grade ink
Printer type Non-pigmented ink printers printer printer
Printer name 7300 7300 (IP65 version) 7300 Spectrum 7300 Food Grade
IP rating IP55 IP65 IP65 IP55
Printheads: Ultima plus (75 µm) Ultima plus (75 µm) Ultima plus (75 µm) MidiEC (62 µm)
Midi plus (75 µm) Midi plus (75 µm) Midi plus (75 µm)
Ultima (62 µm) Ultima (62 µm)
Midi (62 µm) Midi (62 µm)
Ultima A (62 µm) Ultima A (62 µm)
Midi A (62 µm) Midi A (62 µm)
Mini (50 µm) Mini (50 µm)
Micro (40 µm) Micro (40 µm)
Figure 2-1. Printer Types
2.2 Technical Data

2.2.1 Printer Configurations
v3.6 69053
Speed Standard Speed (SS) High Performance (HP)
Lines of print 2 3 4 2 3 4
Printheads: Ultima plus ● ● – ● ● –
Midi plus ● ● ● – – –
Ultima and Ultima A ● ● – ● ● –
Midi and Midi A ● ● ● ● ● ●
MidiEC ● ● – ● ● –
Mini ● – – ● – –
Micro ● ● ● ● ● ●
Figure 2-2. Printer Configurations
2.2.2 Environmental
Operating temperature: +5 °C to +45 °C ambient (all printers except 7300 Food Grade)
0 °C to +40 °C ambient (7300 Food Grade)
Humidity range: Maximum of 90% relative humidity, non–condensing
Acoustic emission: Less than 70 dBA
Protection rating (dust & water): 7300 and 7300 Food Grade protected to IP55
7300 (IP65 version) protected to IP65
7300 Spectrum protected to IP65
FA69084–1
2.2.3 Power Requirements
Voltage: Single phase, 100 V (3 A) to 230 V (1 A) AC, 50/60 Hz
Power rating: 200 W
This equipment is a Class 1 earthed appliance as defined by EN 60950. Electrical
connections at the rear of the cabinet comply with the extra low voltage safety
requirements as defined by EN 60950.
WARNING: THIS PRINTER MUST BE EARTHED/GROUNDED.

The integrity of the insulation resistance between the live conductors and earth has been
tested in accordance with the test defined in EN 60950.
The integrity of the protective earthing conductors has been tested in accordance with the
test defined in EN 60950.
2.2.4 Cabinet
Construction
7300, 7300 (IP65 version), 7300 Spectrum and 7300 Food Grade
Base tray unit: Stainless steel
Top cover: Stainless steel
Dimensions
7300, 7300 (IP65 version), 7300 Spectrum and 7300 Food Grade
External height: 240 mm (including filler caps)
External width: 490 mm
External depth: 600 mm
Weight
Excluding ink, solvent, accessories and packaging.
7300: 19.6 kg
7300 (IP65 version): 20.1 kg
7300 Spectrum: 20.2 kg
7300 Food Grade: 19.7 kg
2.2.5 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit

Input: 85 V AC to 264 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Outputs (100 W total): +5.1 V DC ±5%, 2.5 A
+12 V DC ±5%, 0.9 A
–16 V DC ±5%, 0.4 A
+24 V DC ±5%, 2.5 A
FA69084–1
2.2.6 EHT Power Supply Unit
Inputs: +24 V DC ±5%, 1.2 A (power input)
0 V to +10 V DC (EHT output level control)
Outputs: 0 V to +10 kV DC ±5%, 10 µA
+300 V DC ±5%, 10 mA to 46 mA max.
2.2.7 Ink System

IMPORTANT: The 7300 Continuous Ink Jet printer cannot be used in some environments.
For example, on offshore oil and gas installations, in petro-chemical plants,
mines, inappropriate areas in flour mills, and other areas where a
potentially explosive atmosphere may be present.
Construction
7300, 7300 (IP65 version) and 7300 Food Grade

Ink system enclosure: Stainless steel
Ink tank: Natural colour polyethylene
Solvent tank: Natural colour polyethylene
7300 Spectrum
Ink system enclosure: Stainless steel
Ink tank: Stainless steel
Solvent tank: Natural colour polyethylene
Environmental
Protection rating: Protected to a minimum of IP65 with respect to the
electrical compartment of the printer cabinet when the
printer top cover is fitted
Electrical Connections
Construction: • Double insulated
• In accordance with the requirements for equipment
operating in Zone 2
Maximum Surface Temperature

Valves solenoids: 107 °C under fault conditions
Pressure
7300 and 7300 (IP65 version)

Pressure range: Up to 4.49 bar (65.00 p.s.i.) normal operating pressure
Maximum pressure: 6.21 bar (90.00 p.s.i.) under fault conditions
7300 Spectrum and 7300 Food Grade

Pressure range: Up to 4.49 bar (65.00 p.s.i.) normal operating pressure
Maximum pressure: Less than 6.9 bar (100.00 p.s.i.) under fault conditions
NOTE: To convert bar to p.s.i. multiply by 14.503.
FA69084–1
Capacity

Ink and solvent tanks: 1600 ml maximum; 1440 ml usable
7300 Spectrum
Ink tank: 1400 ml approximately
Solvent tank: 1600 ml maximum; 1440 ml usable
Fluid Level Control

Ink & solvent tanks sense low: Warning reported at approximately 740 ml, leaving 690 ml
of usable ink or solvent
7300 Spectrum
Ink tank sense low: Warning reported at less than 450 ml
Solvent tank sense low: Warning reported at approximately 740 ml, leaving 690 ml
of usable solvent
Performance
Solvent consumption: Please contact Linx for information on solvent
consumption, as this changes with the ink type, the printer
configuration, and the environment in which the printer
operates
Inks
7300 and 7300 (IP65 version)

Ink capability: Refer to the ‘Ink Type Dependent Parameters’ tables at the
end of the ‘Ink System’ description in ‘Chapter 3:
Technical Description’
7300 Spectrum
Ink capability: Black Pigmented ink 1009
Yellow Pigmented ink 1039
White Pigmented ink 1059
Brilliant White ink 1305 and 1306
High-Opacity Grey ink 1310 and 1311
Opaque Blue ink 1043
7300 Food Grade

Ink capability: Red Food Grade ink 6100
Blue Food Grade ink 6120
Blue Food Grade ink 6220
FA69084–1
2.2.8 Printhead
Types
Ultima plus: Mk7 (75 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Midi plus: Mk7 (75 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Ultima and Ultima A: Mk7 (62 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Midi and Midi A: Mk7 (62 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
MidiEC: Mk7 (62 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Mini: Mk7 (50 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Micro: Mk7 (40 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Construction
Printhead: Thermoplastic polyester body
Cover tube: Stainless steel
Conduit adaptor: Stainless steel
Dimensions
Straight and Right-Angled Printheads

Printhead body length: Straight printhead 225 mm, excluding conduit fitting (see
also conduit minimum bend radius below for clearance)
Right-angled printhead 261 mm, including conduit fitting
Midi short reach right angle (SRRA) printhead 143 mm,
excluding conduit fitting
Printhead body diameter: 42 mm
Conduit length: 2 m or 4 m
Conduit diameter: 16.5 mm
Conduit minimum bend radius: 75 mm (static applications)
150 mm (dynamic applications)
2.2.9 Printing Performance

Further information can be found in the Linx CIJ print performance data pamphlet for the
Mk7 printhead types, or in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
Ultima plus (75 µm)

Lines of print: Up to three lines of 7 High characters
No. of message types (rasters): 20
Maximum speed: 7.28 m/s—one line of 5 High characters using message
type 5 Linear Wide
Minimum character height: 2.1 mm nominal at default EHT using message types:
5 Linear Quality
5 Linear Speed
Maximum character height: 9.5 mm nominal at default EHT using message type
25 Linear Quality
FA69084–1
Midi plus (75 µm)
Lines of print: Up to four lines of 7 High characters
type 5 Linear Quality
Minimum character height: 2.1 mm nominal at default EHT using message type
5 Linear Quality
34 Linear Quality
Ultima and Ultima A (62µm)

type 5 Linear Wide
5 Linear Quality
5 Linear Speed
25 Linear Speed
Midi and Midi A (62 µm)

type 5 Linear Wide
5 Linear Quality
Maximum character height: 12.0 mm nominal at default EHT using message types:
34 Linear Quality
4×7 Stitched Quality
MidiEC (62 µm)

type 5 Linear Wide
5 Linear Quality
3×7 Stitched Wide
FA69084–1
Mini (50 µm)
Lines of print: Up to two lines of 7 High characters
types:
4T 1×5 WIDE 6.83m/s
8T 1×5 WIDE 6.83m/s
8T 1×5 Quality 1.82m/s
4T 1×5 Quality 2.27m/s
4T 1×5 Speed 2.73m/s
Maximum character height: 6.70 mm nominal at default EHT using message types:
12T 2×7 WIDE 1.95m/s
12T 2×7 WIDE 2.27m/s
Micro (40 µm)

type 1×7 WIDE 8.41m/s
1×5 Quality 1.82m/s
1×32 Quality 0.19m/s
Printhead to Substrate Distance (recommended)

Ultima plus*; Midi plus: 12 mm
Ultima; Midi**; MidiEC**: 12 mm
Ultima A; Midi A**; MidiEC**: 12 mm
Mini: 4 mm, 8 mm or 12 mm, depending on message type. For
more information, refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide
Micro: 4 mm
* The recommended printhead to substrate distance for the 21 Linear Speed message type is
6 mm.
** The recommended printhead to substrate distance for the 25 Linear Speed message type is
6 mm.
2.2.10 Memory Capacity

Storage capacity in RAM: Up to a maximum of approximately 2 MB for storage of
messages, logos, and so forth. Further details can be found
on the Software page (Print Monitor > Menu > System
Information > Software)
FA69084–1
2.2.11 Regulatory Approvals
Safety
Approved in accordance with TÜV/GS requirements.
Low Voltage Directive

2006/95/EC
Applicable European Safety Standards

EN 60950-1:2006 Specification for safety of information technology
equipment, including electrical business equipment.
Environmental
RoHS Directive
2002/95/EC Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in
electrical and electronic equipment.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

EMC Directive
2004/108/EC
Applicable European EMC Standards

EN 55024:1998(+A1/A2) Information technology equipment. Immunity
characteristics. Limits and methods of measurement.
EN 61000-3-2:2006 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Limits. Limits for
harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16
A per phase).
EN 61000-3-3:1995 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Limits. Limitation
of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
public low-voltage supply systems, for equipment with
rated current ≤ 16 A per phase and not subject to
conditional connection.
EN 61000-6-4:2007 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards.
Emission standard for industrial environments
Applicable USA EMC Standards

FCC CFR 47, Part 15,
subpart B:2007 Class A devices.
Enclosure Protection
EN 60529:1991 Specification for degrees of protection provided by
enclosures (IP code).
FA69084–1
2.3 Abbreviations and Glossary
AC alternating current
ADC analogue to digital converter
CPU central processing unit
DAC digital to analogue converter
DC direct current
DFC dynamic flow control
DPP deflector and phase plate
DVM digital voltmeter
EHT extra high tension (voltage)
EHTPSU extra high tension power supply unit
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
FC fault code
Flash memory A high density, non-volatile, read/write memory IC, which holds
the system software program
IC integrated circuit
IP ingress protection
IPM integrated processor module
IPM PCB integrated processor module printed circuit board
LCD liquid crystal display
LK link
LVPSU low voltage power supply unit
MEK methyl ethyl ketone
Mk Mark (followed by a number indicating a particular design, model,
version, as in Mk7 Printhead)
N/A not available or not applicable
NiMH nickel metal hydride
NMI non-maskable interrupt
NVR non-volatile RAM
p.s.i. pounds per square inch (lb/in2); (imperial unit of pressure)
PCB printed circuit board
Pixel The smallest size of spot on the screen that makes up the displayed
message
PL plug (connector with male pins/contacts)
PLC programmable logic controller
PLCC plastic leadless chip carrier
PLD programmable logic device
Print Go An internal logic signal that initiates print, normally preceded by a
print trigger
Print registration The horizontal position of a printed message on a substrate
FA69084–1
Print trigger A logic signal generated by a product sensor, which initiates
printing of a single message
PSU power supply unit
r.f. radio frequency
RAM random-access memory
raster A variable line of drops printed at 90 degrees to the direction of
production line travel, which create characters that are made up of
one or more rasters
RCI remote communications interface
RoHS restriction of hazardous substances
S/W software
SK socket (connector with female pins/contacts)
SRAM static random-access memory; a low density, volatile,
reprogrammable memory
SRRA (printhead) short reach right angle
Substrate surface (product) on which printing is done
t.b.a. to be announced
TFT thin-film transistor
TOF time of flight
TP test point
UNIC nique number identification chip
unique
USB universal serial bus
VFC volt-free contact (relay)
VGA video graphics array
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 2 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 3: TECHNICAL
DESCRIPTION
3.1 Introduction
This chapter provides a technical description of the function of the various sub-systems,
modules and components that constitute the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer. The following topics
are covered in this chapter:
3.2 Cabinet
3.3 User Interface
3.4 Printhead Components
3.5 Printhead Theory of Operation
3.6 Ink System
3.7 Electrical Components
3.8 Electronics and Software
3.9 External Signals
NOTE: This chapter provides technical information about the 7300, 7300 (IP65 version)
and the 7300 Spectrum printers. Where the 7300 Food Grade printer is different
from the standard 7300 printer described in this chapter, the alternative
information is provided in Appendix A.
3.2 Cabinet
3.2.1 Introduction
The purpose of the cabinet is to house and support the modules that constitute the printer,
and to protect them from contamination. The printer cabinet is designed to meet an Ingress
Protection (IP) rating in respect of water and dust ingress. There are two printer models:
the 7300 which is sealed to IP55 and the 7300 (IP65 version).
The cabinet is a two-piece structure consisting of a top cover and a base tray unit.
3.2.2 Top Cover

The stainless steel top cover for both models is attached at the front and the rear to the
stainless steel base unit.
A handle block with a hinge blade at each end is fitted to the rear of the top cover. The
hinge blades fit into the two hinge blocks mounted on the rear of the base unit. When the
top cover is lowered to the closed position, the rear hinge assembly locks and fastens the
rear of the cover. In the closed position the top cover is attached at the front by a latch. The
latch is locked by rotating it through 90 degrees using a special tool, which is available to
maintenance technicians.
The top cover can be completely removed from the hinge blocks when the cover is in the
vertically open position.
The top cover houses the keyboard, LCD screen, and the Display PCB, which form the
interface between the operator and the printer. The keyboard is an integral part of the top
cover. The LCD screen is mounted directly onto the underside of the top cover with the
Display PCB mounted on stand-off pillars above it.
FA69084–1
3.2.3 Base Unit
The base unit houses the following main components:
• Ink system enclosure.
• Electronics system (IPM PCB and optional Auxiliary PCBs).
• Mains power supply and power on switches.
• Mains filter and fuses.
• Low voltage power supply unit (LVPSU).
• EHT power supply unit (EHTPSU).
• Cooling fan and air filter.
• Optional printhead positive air pump.
The back plate of the base unit allows entry of the printhead conduit and the non-operator-
removable mains power supply cable. The mains power supply cable enters the rear of the
printer below the mains supply switch. External connectors for product sensors, shaft
encoders, RS232, and the alarm output are also provided on the back plate. A USB
connector is provided on the front face of the base unit. All the connectors are IP67 rated
except the alarm connector, which is IP68 rated.
The cabinet also provides fixing points on the rear face for the alarm beacon.
3.2.4 Ink System

The ink system is further protected by, and housed within, a self-contained stainless steel
enclosure that is part of the base unit of the printer. The lid of the ink system is formed by
the top cover and a gasket when closed. When the top cover is fitted correctly, the ink
system enclosure is sealed to a minimum IP54 rating with respect to the electronics
enclosure.
Protective caps for the ink and solvent filler tubes are on the upper, rear surface of the top
cover.
3.2.5 Cooling and Air Filter

The air intake for the cooling fan is on the underside of the base unit. A cabinet air filter is
included, located beneath the fan in its own housing. The cooling air flows in through the
air filter, over the IPM PCB and PSUs, and out through vents in the bottom of the base unit
at each side.
The air filter may be removed for cleaning or replacement depending on its type. On the
7300 (IP65 version) the filter element is designed to be disposable, that is, it should be
replaced when necessary rather than cleaned and refitted. Replacement is achieved by
removing the protective plate on the right-hand side of the base unit, and pulling the loop
attached to the filter to remove it from its housing.
On the 7300 there is no protective plate; the filter is simply removed by pulling the tab
attached to the filter. This filter should be cleaned using compressed air blown through in
the reverse direction to the normal air flow, or replaced if it is severely blocked or
damaged.
There is a natural air vent for the ink system on the rear panel of the base unit.
The following illustration is a view of the 7300 (IP65 version) printer base unit showing the
locations of the main components.
FA69084–1
Locations of External Alarm
Auxiliary PCBs 73053 Output Connector
Ink System Mains Filter and Fuses Assembly
FA69084–1
Enclosure (located below Mains Power Supply Switch
Unit—fuses x2 accessed under the Mains
Pressure Transducer Power Cable Connector Cover)
Ink System
Valves x5
IPM PCB
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual

Mains Power Cable
Cooling Fan Connector Cover
3—3
Mains Power Supply
Switch Unit
(switch located
USB Connector LVPSU
on rear panel)
(with sealing cap)
Ink System
Top Cover Pump/Motor Assy
Securing Latch
Air Filter (behind protective plate)

Positive Air Pump (optional)
EHTPSU
Power On Switch Air Filter Housing
Sep 2009
Figure 3-1. 7300 (IP65 version) Printer Base Unit and Main Components
3.3 User Interface
The user interface consists of a keyboard and a display, with associated controls and
indicators.
3.3.1 Keyboard and Display

Keyboard
The keyboard includes 47 character keys (QWERTY layout) and 15 standard control keys
on a tactile membrane keypad, which are used to input and edit messages.
Display
The display is positioned above the keyboard and is a 256-colour LCD screen with cold
cathode back-lighting and automatic contrast control.
There are six soft keys associated with the display, and four navigating arrow keys to the
right of the display. A [start] key and a [stop] key are also provided to the left of the
display.
Messages
Before printing can take place, a message or messages must be created. A message is a
structure describing the text or pattern to be printed. Each message consists of one or more
fields, which can be of a number of types. For example, a text field is simply fixed text that
does not change from one print to the next; a time field displays the actual time (or the time
offset by a specific amount) and changes accordingly from one print to the next. Refer to
the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide for details about creating and editing messages.
3.3.2 Control Panel LEDs

Fail
The software controlled red Fail LED illuminates when a System Failure or a Print Failure
occurs and remains lit until the printer is powered down.
Warning
The software controlled red Warning LED illuminates when there is one or more active
System Warnings on the printer. These warnings can be viewed (and cleared) via the Event
Log option (Print Monitor > Menu > Event Log). When the last remaining warning is
cleared, the LED is not illuminated.
Ready
The software controlled green Ready LED illuminates when the printer is ready to print,
that is, when the jet is running, a message is loaded, and the [start] key is pressed.
Power
The green Power LED remains illuminated while the printer is powered up. It is not under
software control.
The following illustration shows the 7300 standard European user interface.
FA69084–1
Figure 3-2. 7300 European User Interface
"
FA69084–1
3.4 Printhead Components
This section identifies the main components of the printhead and describes their basic
functions together with various other aspects of the printhead. The illustration below
shows the location of the main printhead components.
68153
Printhead Conduit
(with strain relief)
to control unit
and ink system
Printhead Feed and

Purge Valves
(inside the cover)
Cover Tube
Securing Screw
Gun Body and Chamber MIDI Nozzle Assembly Cover

(under Mounting Board)
Nozzle
Charge Electrode
Mounting Board Charge Strobe LED

(in Charge Electrode slot)
+8 kV
Deflector Plate 0V Deflector Plate
(incorporating Phase and
TOF Sensors)
Gutter
Figure 3-3. Mk7 Midi Printhead Main Components
FA69084–1
3.4.1 Gun Chamber and Nozzle Assembly
The printhead operation requires ink to be supplied under pressure from the ink system to
the ink gun chamber and then out of the nozzle.
The gun chamber is located underneath the printhead component mounting board, directly
below the nozzle assembly. On the Micro and Mini printheads it is mounted above the
component mounting board. Inside the chamber, the ink is pulsed (modulated) by the
effect of a piezoelectric crystal causing the ink jet to break up into drops.
The modulated jet is forced from the nozzle assembly through a precisely machined hole in
a small jewel (located in the nozzle cap) of either 40 µm, 50 µm, 62 µm or 75 µm, depending
on the type of printhead.
3.4.2 Charge Electrode

The charge electrode is used to apply a charge to individual ink drops as they break off
from the ink jet. Drops that are required for printing are charged, while drops that are not
required for printing remain uncharged and travel to the gutter, returning to the ink tank
for reuse.
3.4.3 Strobe LED

A red light-emitting diode (LED) is located in the centre of the charge electrode slot, so that
it is behind the jet break-up point when viewed from the front of the printhead. The
stroboscopic effect of the LED allows the details of the jet break-up to be examined with an
eyeglass, which can be useful for diagnostic purposes.
3.4.4 Deflector Plates

An electrostatic field is generated between the two deflector plates. As the ink jet passes
through the field, charged (printing) drops are deflected in proportion to the amount of
charge they carry, while uncharged (non-printing) drops are unaffected by the field. The
uncharged, and therefore undeflected, drops enter the gutter where they are drawn back
through the system to the ink tank for reuse.
The combination of the speed of the drops travelling through the field and the charge given
to them is accurately determined to ensure that each drop is positioned correctly on the
substrate (the surface onto which the pattern is to be printed).
3.4.5 Phase and TOF

OF Sensors
There are two sensors incorporated in the 0 volt deflector plate and this assembly is called
the Deflector and Phase Plate (DPP). These sensors are used to monitor the jet to make sure
that the printer is operating correctly. The first sensor (nearest the nozzle) is called the
Phase Sensor; the second sensor (nearest the gutter) is called the Time Of Flight (TOF) Sensor.
During startup, and at intervals between printing patterns, the printer monitors the jet
performance. Signals are detected by the two sensors from the passing drops and these
signals are used by the printer for two functions. The first is to make sure that the drops are
receiving the correct charge for consistent print quality—this is called phasing. The second
function is to measure the velocity of the jet by timing the flight of the drops between two
fixed points—the Phase sensor and the TOF sensor. This is called the Time Of Flight
measurement.
The phase and TOF readings are checked routinely during printing, between patterns, to
maximize print quality.
FA69084–1
3.4.6 Printhead Cover Sensor
This sensor is a Hall-effect switch that is used to detect the presence of the printhead cover
tube, and is situated within the printhead body. A small magnet inside the cover tube
activates the Hall-effect switch when the cover tube is fitted to the printhead. Activation of
the Hall-effect switch enables the print process by switching on the deflector plate EHT
circuit. When the cover tube magnet is moved away from the Hall-effect switch by
approximately 3 mm (which is insufficient to allow access to the potentially dangerous
deflector plates), the switch is deactivated. This disables the EHT circuit and printing is
suspended. Printing is resumed a few seconds after the printhead cover tube is refitted.
3.4.7 Printhead Temperature

emperature Sensor
The printhead is also fitted with a thermistor, which has two functions.
Over Temperature
Firstly, it acts as a safety sensor so that if a local printhead temperature in excess of 60 °C is
detected, the printer is immediately shut down in a controlled way. In addition, the Print
Failure message “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” is displayed to warn of the
printhead’s ‘over temperature’ condition.
Ink Density
Secondly, the temperature monitored by the sensor is used to compensate for variations in
ink density at the extremes of the printer’s operating temperature range.
Under normal operating conditions the Set Pressure is varied as the ink viscosity changes,
to maintain a constant TOF. For example, as the ink viscosity increases due to solvent
evaporation, the Set Pressure is increased to maintain a constant TOF (at the Reference
TOF) with the thicker ink. If the Set Pressure reaches the predetermined Solvent Add
Pressure, solvent is added to the ink to decrease the viscosity and thus maintain the Actual
TOF at Reference TOF. Refer to ‘Solvent Addition’ in the section, ‘Ink System’ later in this
chapter.
Whilst the pressure required to achieve the correct TOF is viscosity dependent, it is also
affected by temperature and, more importantly, by ink density. For example, at lower
temperatures when the ink is more dense, it is necessary to drive the jet at a greater
pressure to maintain the correct TOF. Therefore, the printhead temperature is monitored
and the Set Pressure is adjusted accordingly to compensate for the greater ink density.
The Solvent Add Pressure is offset by an amount determined by the printhead
temperature. This prevents the printer from adding solvent too early to thin the ink at low
temperatures, when the ink is at a higher density but is at the ideal viscosity.
The above principle applies, but in reverse, when there is a high printhead temperature
and the ink density is low.
This pressure compensation explains why the Solvent Add Pressure may be seen to change
at extreme operating temperatures on the Monitor Jet page (Print Monitor > Menu >
Maintenance > Monitor Jet).
See also: ‘Viscosity Control’ in the section ‘Printhead Theory of Operation’ later in this
chapter.
‘Solvent Addition’ in the section ‘Ink System’ later in this chapter.
FA69084–1
3.4.8 Printhead Feed and Purge Valves
During the time that the printer is switched off, small amounts of residual ink-stained
solvent can form into ‘slugs’ in the pipes between the printhead nozzle and the Ink System
Feed and Purge valves.
Printhead Feed and Purge valves are incorporated in the Mk7 printhead, which prevent the
slugs from reaching the gun. During the normal shutdown sequence solvent is flushed
through the system to clear the printhead gun, and the feed and purge lines of ink. The
solvent is fed directly to the Printhead Feed valve and out to the gun chamber. Towards the
end of the shutdown sequence the gun–to–Printhead Feed valve pipe is cleared of solvent.
The Printhead Feed valve is then closed and the gun–to–Printhead Purge valve pipe is
cleared of solvent.
At the end of the shutdown sequence the Printhead Feed and Purge valves are in the closed
position, effectively sealing off the ink system from the printhead nozzle. Therefore, any
slugs of ink-stained solvent that may form in the feed and purge lines are contained,
keeping the nozzle clean in preparation for the next startup.
Feed Valve
The Printhead Feed valve is a 24-volt, electrically-operated, solenoid valve. It is fitted with
an integral 35 µm filter on Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads, and a 15 µm filter on
Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads.
NOTE: All specified filter sizes are nominal ratings.
Purge Valve
The Printhead Purge valve is a ball-and-spring type of non-return valve (NRV), which is
designed to open at a positive pressure difference of approximately 0.14 bar (2.04 p.s.i.).
3.4.9 In-Line Feed Filter

This component is a stainless steel in-line filter fitted in the feed line within the printhead
3-way fluid connector. Its purpose is to provide increased protection for the printhead from
ink-borne particles, which could cause a blocked nozzle. The filter size is 35 µm for Ultima
plus and Midi plus printheads, and 15 µm for Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads.
The filter is also colour-coded—white for Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads; black for
Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads. It is most important when replacing an in-line
feed filter that a white filter (35 µm) is fitted to a white 3-way fluid connector female part
(printhead side); and a black filter (15 µm) is fitted to a black 3-way fluid connector female
part (printhead side).
68053
Assembly Filter
screw
O-ring gasket
Locating
lug
Locating
recess
Figure 3-4. 3-Way Fluid Connector Containing the In-line Feed Filter
FA69084–1
3.4.10 Standard Gutter Restrictor
During normal running conditions, air is drawn into the gutter with the ink that is
returning to the ink tank. This volume of air flowing with the ink in the gutter return line
causes the solvent in the ink to evaporate, which in turn causes an increase in solvent
consumption.
A restrictor is fitted in the printhead gutter return line to control the airflow. This reduces
solvent consumption and, consequently, the volume of vented solvent fumes.
The gutter restrictor is currently fitted as standard inside the gutter return line of the Mk7
Ultima plus, Midi plus,
plus Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads (2-metre conduits only),
and as such is part of the printhead assembly. The restrictor is held in place with a clip, and
is located on the printhead side of the 3-way fluid connector, within the printer cabinet.
3.4.11 In-Line Gutter Check Valve

alve
Where the application of a printer requires that the printhead is mounted below the level of
the printer, there is a small risk that ink can siphon from the ink tank when the printer is
not in use. To eliminate the possibility of this occurring, a check valve can be fitted in the
gutter return line of all Mk7 printheads.
48007
FLOW
Figure 3-5. In-Line Gutter Check Valve

This check valve is available as a spare part only; it is not fitted to Mk7 printheads as
standard.
3.4.12 Electrical and Fluid Connections

The printhead is connected to the printer via a number of electrical cables and fluid lines.
The various electrical connections are either labelled with letter identifications, or are
polarized sockets and plugs.
A 3-way fluid connector is used to connect the three fluid lines to the printer, which are
colour-coded as follows: feed line—red stripe; purge line—blue stripe; gutter line—no
stripe. The connector is also colour-coded: white for Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads;
black for Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads.
FA69084–1
3.4.13 Dynamic Flow Control
The Dynamic Flow Control (DFC) option is a factory-fit module that reduces solvent
consumption by up to 40% at 20 °C.
The solvent reduction is achieved by a controlled restriction of the airflow down the
printhead gutter of approximately 40%. A 7300 printer that has the DFC option fitted is
known as a Linx 7300 Solver printer. The correct Configuration Code must be entered into
the printer to enable the DFC software control.
When the DFC option is used, the Print and Consumables Data page shows the extended
hours per solvent bottle.
The DFC module is a 80 mm x 60 mm x 30 mm box with two barbs for pipe connections, a
flying lead, and a twin-colour LED (red and green). The module is installed in the ink
system enclosure and replaces the function of the standard gutter restrictor in the
printhead gutter line (see ‘Standard Gutter Restrictor’ earlier in this section).
The DFC option is only compatible with 2-metre printhead conduits and Mk7 Ultima,
Midi, Midi SRRA, Mini, and Micro printheads (not Ultima plus or Midi plus printheads),
and so is not compatible with 7300 Spectrum printers. It is also not approved for inks 1405,
2030, 2035 and 2250.
The DFC module operates in two states:
• Active (green LED illuminated)—the gutter has controlled airflow restriction.
• Inactive (red LED illuminated)— the gutter has unrestricted airflow.
NOTE: The green and red LEDs are a single component.
The module is ‘active’ between Reference Pressure and Solvent Add Pressure +1 bit, and
‘inactive’ outside this pressure range.
The module is switched to ‘inactive’ before a ‘Solvent Add’ and then reactivated, providing
that the Set Pressure is between Reference Pressure and Solvent Add Pressure + 1 bit.
The module is switched to ‘inactive’ during the ‘Jet Starting’ and ‘Jet Stopping’ states, but is
switched to ‘active’ in the ‘Idle’ state to prevent drying out of the solenoid valve.
Refer to the ‘Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement’ maintenance instruction in
Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’ for the replacement procedure.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 11 Sep 2009
3.5 Printhead Theory of Operation
3.5.1 Summary
The following is a short summary of the basic theory of operation of the ink jet printhead.
This summary is followed by a full description of each part of the process.
A character is created on the substrate from ink drops discharged from the printhead. The
structure of the character depends on drops being printed or discarded. The drops are
discharged from the printhead in lines called rasters, and each raster has a preset number of
drops that controls the potential height of a character. The characters are created from
rasters printed one after the other as the substrate moves past the printhead.
Inside the printhead, electrically-conductive ink is fed under pressure through an
accurately-cut hole in an industrial jewel in the printhead nozzle cap to create the ink jet.
Before the jet leaves the nozzle, the ink is pulsed (modulated) to generate a continuous jet
of modulated ink. This modulated jet passes along the length of the printhead and between
the charge electrode plates where the jet divides into separate ink drops. The jet continues to a
gutter, which collects the non-printing drops and returns these drops under vacuum to the
ink tank.
Ink drops that are to be printed receive an electrostatic charge. This process occurs between
the charge electrode plates, which is at the point in the jet flight path where the jet naturally
separates into drops. The electrostatic charge causes a flow of electrons onto each drop as it
is created. The printing drop now has a negative electric charge.
This electrically charged drop moves with the main jet of drops until it enters the area
between two deflector plates. The electrostatic field generated between the plates applies a
force to the drop, which deflects the drop from its original straight path and draws it
towards the positive potential plate. The drop is deflected by an amount that is
proportional to the charge on the drop and the potential across the two deflector plates.
To make sure that the printing drops are correctly charged, a regular test of the charging
function is performed, which measures the drop charge at the phase sensor.
A measurement of jet speed is also performed. Both the phase sensor and the Time Of Flight
sensor are used to measure the time taken for drops to move the known distance between
the two sensors. This time period provides an accurate evaluation of jet speed, which is
used by the printer to adjust the pressure at which the ink is ejected from the nozzle. Jet
speed is also used with the pressure to monitor ink viscosity at the printhead.
3.5.2 Printhead Types

ypes
Linx 7300 printers currently use six types of Mk7 printheads. The basic design of these is
similar but with two important differences. Firstly, the six types of printheads use four
different nozzle orifice sizes (measured in micrometres), as follows:
• Ultima plus: 75 µm
• Midi plus:: 75 µm
• Ultima: 2 µm
62
• Midi: 62 µm
• Mini: 0 µm
50
• Micro: 40 µm
Secondly, the Ultima plus
plus, Ultima and Mini 2-line printheads, and the 4-line Micro
printhead have shorter flight paths than the corresponding Midi plus and Midi printheads.
This provides better print quality and/or faster print speed, depending on the message
type.
FA69084–1
The Ultima plus and Ultima printheads are for 2-line printing (or reduced height 3-line
printing), or a single line of up to 25 High characters. The Midi plus and Midi printheads
are for printing up to four lines, or a single line of up to 34 High characters. The Mini
printhead is for 2-line printing, or a single line of up to 16 High characters. The Micro
printhead is for printing up to four lines, or a single line of up to 32 High characters.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide for further information about the different message
types (rasters) that are available for each printhead and printer configuration combination,
and for related speed and quality data.
3.5.3 Modulation
The jet of ink from the nozzle is broken into drops of equal size and spacing by a process
called modulation.
A jet of fluid naturally breaks into approximately equal size drops because of the effects of
aerodynamic drag and noise. The jet break-up (drop break-off) can be accurately controlled
by the introduction of a disturbance or excitation into the fluid. This excitation is done in
the Linx printheads by the oscillation of a piezoelectric crystal that is in contact with the
ink.
Ink delivered under pressure

from the ink system
through the ink feed line
Piezoelectric crystal pulsed

by the modulation signal 6245
Gun chamber
Modulation signal
Ink drop break-off (jet break-up)

occurs in the charge electrode Nozzle
caused by excitation from
the piezoelectric crystal
Charge electrode
NOTE: charge electrode shown
rotated through 90 degrees
for ease of representation
Figure 3-6. Modulation of the Ink Jet by a Piezoelectric Crystal

If a voltage is applied to a piezoelectric crystal, it bends, and the amount that the crystal
bends depends on the amplitude of the applied voltage. Two opposite-polarity, bimorph
piezoelectric crystals are used in the printhead gun chamber, joined together so that the
crystals bend in sympathy with a fixed-frequency sine wave. This process gives a direct
and very controlled modulation to the ink. Because the edges are fixed, the crystal deflects
and moves a small volume of ink. This movement is transmitted through the ink and
causes disturbance in the jet, which then separates into equal size drops.
FA69084–1
The frequency of the sine wave (modulation frequency) applied to the piezoelectric crystal
controls the rate of drop production. This drop production rate is a fixed value for each
type of printhead:
• Ultima plus and Midi plus: 64 kHz
• Ultima and Midi: 80 kHz
• Mini: 96 kHz
• Micro: 120 kHz
The amplitude of the sine wave (modulation voltage) applied to the piezoelectric crystal
controls exactly where the ink jet forms into drops, and depends on:
• The type of printhead.
• The different characteristics of each separate printhead.
• The type of ink that is used.
This modulation voltage is a value calibrated at Linx between 0 and 255 volts AC, and is
unique to every printhead. The value is referred to as the Reference Modulation and is part of
the printhead code, and is also printed on each printhead conduit label.
As described earlier, the modulation amplitude controls the point at which the ink jet
separates into drops. This point changes and depends on the viscosity of the ink—if the ink
is thicker, the drop break-off occurs at a later point than for thinner ink. The correct point
of drop break-off is within the charge electrode plates where printing drops are required to
be charged.
6246
Printhead nozzle
Ink jet pulsed by the

piezoelectric crystal
Drop break-off
begins to occur Charge electrode
Strobe LED
Point of drop break-off (jet break-up).

This must occur within the central
area of the charge electrode for the
drops to receive the correct charge Charged drops
Figure 3-7. Correct Drop Break-off in the Charge Electrode
FA69084–1
3.5.4 Drop Charge
To build a pattern, each drop has to be directed to an exact position on the substrate. To get
this accuracy, each drop is charged and deflected separately by a defined amount.
Each drop to be printed receives an electric charge, so that the drop can be deflected by the
electrostatic field between the deflector plates. The amount that the drop is charged is
controlled by the planned position of the drop on the substrate. The further the drop has to
be deflected, the greater the electric charge on it.
To charge a drop, a positive voltage of between 0 volts and +255 volts is applied to the
charge electrode for the time (1/modulation frequency) required to create one complete
drop. The drop now has a negative charge. This charge is created by capacitive coupling,
by which a flow of electrons is induced from the nozzle (which is at earth potential),
through the electrically conductive ink onto the ink drop as it takes shape. When the drop
separates from the ink jet, the charging voltage is removed from the charge electrode and
the drop holds the given charge.
The charge timing is such that the exact point of drop break-off occurs at the end of the
charge pulse. Timing the end of the charge pulse to occur at the exact drop break-off point
is very important. Accurate timing makes sure that the drop has been given the full charge,
which increases the accuracy of the printed position of the drop on the substrate.
If the following drop is to be printed, the voltage on the charge electrode is set to the
applicable level for the time period of the drop production. If the next drop is not for
printing (and is, therefore, passed straight to the gutter), a small correction voltage of 12.5%
of the previous charge voltage is applied. This action is called historic correction, which is
described later in this section (refer to ‘Historic Correction’).
Strobe LED
A red light-emitting diode (LED) is fitted at the bottom of the charge electrode slot, so that
the light is behind the jet break-up point when looked at from the front of the printhead.
The LED is pulsed at the same frequency as the modulation signal. The stroboscopic effect
of the light causes the ink jet to appear stationary in the charge electrode slot when looked
at with a magnifying eyeglass. This feature allows the jet break-up to be examined, which
can be useful for fault diagnosis purposes. When the ink jet break-up is examined with an
eyeglass of x10 or x20 magnification, the example shown in Figure 3-7 is seen.
The LED electrical supply is enabled when the printhead cover tube is removed, and so can
also be used as an indication that the Hall-effect switch circuit is operating correctly.
However, for safety reasons, make sure that the deflector plates and the charge electrode
have been made safe before these components are touched or work is done on the printhead.
Refer to ‘Printhead Cover Sensor’ earlier in this chapter for more information. Refer also to
the descriptions of the Safety Override link LK19 and the Cover Override link LK21 in the
section, ‘Electronics and Software’ later in this chapter.
3.5.5 Historic Correction

Historic correction is used to remove the positive charge induced in a non-printing drop
from a printing drop. The historic correction voltage ensures that non-printing drops have
zero charge when they leave the charge electrode, and therefore pass straight to the gutter.
A non-printing drop following a charged drop is susceptible to capacitive coupling from
the charged drop. This would place a small but significant positive charge on the non-
printing drop. To remove this unwanted charge, an historic correction voltage of 12.5% of
the previous charge voltage is applied to the charge electrode for all non-printing drops.
For example, a printing drop has 100 volts applied to the charge electrode for the time
period of that drop’s production. The following drop is non-printing, and therefore must
pass to the gutter. To remove the positive charge that is induced in the non-printing drop
from the preceding printing drop, 12.5 volts is applied to the charge electrode for the
period of the non-printing drop’s production, to stabilize its charge at zero.
FA69084–1
3.5.6 Drop Deflection
When drops have been charged to the correct level, the drops continue along the flight path
and pass between the deflector (EHT) plates. These plates have a fixed high voltage
applied across them of +8 kV maximum, which creates an electrostatic field. The drops that
have a negative charged (printing drops) are deflected in this field towards the positive
plate. The drops are deflected by an amount that is proportional to the field strength and
the amount of charge on the each drop.
The printing drops then exit through the slot in the printhead cover tube and are applied to
the substrate in rasters to create the characters. The combination of the speed of the drops
through the field and the charge given to the drops is accurately measured to make sure
that each drop is put in the correct position on the substrate.
Non-printing drops are given zero charge, which causes zero deflection, so the drops
continue along a straight flight path and enter the gutter. A vacuum on the gutter draws
the ink drops back through the system to the ink tank to be used again.
IMPORTANT: The deflector plates and mountings must always remain clean and without
ink deposits, otherwise a decrease in print quality can occur. The mounting
for the 0 volts deflector plate is black in colour, and so ink deposits are not
always easily seen. The +8 kV deflector plate is made from stainless steel
and the mounting is made from white plastic.
3.5.7 Guard Drops

s
Because all printing drops have a negative charge, each drop tries to repel adjacent drops
in the flight path, which can cause a decrease in print quality. The most deflected drops in
a raster carry a higher charge and therefore have a greater repulsion effect on adjacent
drops. This effect is greater in large characters, which causes a greater decrease in print
quality. Because of this effect, it would not normally be possible to have drops that touch
on the substrate, which would ideally give a higher-quality print.
However, where high-quality print is required (with printed drops that touch on the
substrate), the drops in the flight path must be separated to remove the drop repulsion
effect. To get this separation, guard drops are inserted.
Guard drops are low-charge, non-printing drops that are inserted into each raster between
printing drops to separate the drops in flight, which decreases their interactive effect.
When large characters are printed, more guard drops are inserted between the most
deflected (higher charged) drops to decrease their greater interactive effect.
6248
No guard drops, therefore,

much greater repulsion
Low charge, non-printing

guard drops inserted
to reduce repulsion
Gutter Gutter
Figure 3-8. Guard Drops
FA69084–1
3.5.8 Phasing
The deflection of each ink drop is controlled by the voltage that is applied to the charge
electrode immediately before the drop separates from the main ink jet. For the correct
drop-charge to occur, the voltage on the charge electrode must be there at the exact time
that the drop separates from the main ink jet. The method that makes sure that
synchronization between the charge and the jet break-up time is called phase control.
The charging circuit is a capacitance-resistance network and these circuits have a CR time
constant to charge completely. Therefore, if a voltage is applied to the charge electrode, it
can take 2 µs to 3 µs before the charge reaches the final level. The Micro printhead, for
example, creates drops every 8 µs, so the production of incorrectly charged drops is
possible unless there is synchronization of the process.
To perform phase control, a series of half-width charge pulses (called a phase packet) is
generated at a low voltage, which is not high enough to deflect the charged drops from of
the gutter. Normally, a phase packet is eight drops charged by 10 volts. The half-width
pulses are moved in 1/16 cycle steps (phase positions) relative to the modulation signal,
and any charge result is detected by the phase sensor.
A half-width pulse only induces charge onto drops for eight out of the 16 steps in a cycle.
Therefore, it is a simple process to move the position by one step until an edge between
charge and no charge is detected. This position sets the timing that allows full-width
printing pulses to be placed, which then gives correct printing. An illustration of the
phasing process is shown in Figure 3-9.
21006
Jet break-up
Instant of drop break-off
Modulation signal
Phasing signal Phase sensor

(½ width pulses) output
Step 1
Step 2
(moved right by one phase position)
Step 3
(moved right by one phase position)
Phase found
Charging pulses
Figure 3-9. Phase Control Process

The process performs a continuous sequence of phase cycles if the printer is Idle. If the
printer is printing, a single phase cycle is performed at the end of each message.
FA69084–1
3.5.9 Time Of Flight (TOF)
During printer operation, solvent evaporates from the ink. This causes the ink to become
thicker, that is, the viscosity of the ink increases. If this were not controlled, a reduction in
jet speed would occur. This in turn would lead to a shift in the position of the printed drops
on the substrate due to the drops spending a longer time between the deflector plates. To
prevent this happening, and to maintain consistent print quality, the control function of the
printer monitors jet speed and alters the pressure to compensate for any variations.
This monitoring of the jet speed is known as Time of Flight (TOF) and is achieved initially
in the same way as the phase operation. That is, a number of TOF drops are charged by
applying 10 volts to the charge electrode. This packet of drops travels past the phase sensor
(situated in the DPP) where it induces a current in the sensor, which starts a counter. The
count increments until the same packet of TOF drops passes the TOF sensor (also situated
in the DPP). As the TOF packet passes the TOF sensor it induces a current, known as the
TOF signal, in the sensor, which stops the counter. The counter value is the Actual TOF.
This Actual TOF value is compared with a Reference TOF, an evaluation of jet speed is
made, and the system pressure is increased or decreased as necessary to maintain a
constant jet speed, as follows:
• If Actual TOF is equal to Reference TOF (±0.3%), system pressure is left unchanged.
• If Actual TOF is greater than Reference TOF (+0.3%), system pressure is increased.
• If Actual TOF is less than Reference TOF (–0.3%), system pressure is decreased.
In practice the process of obtaining the phase and TOF signals is identical. The difference
between the phase and TOF operations is in how the software handles the received signal.
3.5.10 Phase/TOF during a Stalled Print

Stalled print is when a production line stops and the shaft encoder stops turning.
On older printers the printer waited until the print had completed before a Phase/TOF
sequence was started. Because production lines are sometimes stopped for extended
periods, the phase position can drift during this time, which causes bad print quality when
the line is restarted. If the line was stopped for more than 40 minutes, the printer would
shut down with a “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure” Print Failure.
The ‘Phase/TOF during a Stalled Print’ feature on the 7300 printer allows phase and TOF
sequences to begin again after the print has been stalled for 30 seconds. If the line restarts,
the printer completes the current print and restarts at the raster immediately after the last
printed raster.
There is a limitation with this feature: if the line restarts during a Phase/TOF sequence,
printing will not continue until the Phase/TOF sequence has completed. This delay can be
approximately 7 ms, which causes a small space between the previous and next printed
rasters. However, it is unlikely that production lines increase speed that quickly, therefore
the space will be negligible.
When Phase/TOF sequences begin again during a stalled print, they repeat at the same
rate as inter-print Phase/TOF sequences.
FA69084–1
3.5.11 Viscosity Control
As previously stated, the viscosity of the ink changes during printer operation. The viscosity
of the ink at the printhead is determined by the control system from the Set Pressure required
to maintain the actual TOF at the Reference TOF value. The Set Pressure is varied in line with
viscosity changes to maintain a constant TOF. When the viscosity reaches a predetermined
level, solvent is added to the ink tank from the solvent tank. This predetermined level is
when the Set Pressure exceeds a value known as the Solvent Add Pressure. Solvent Add
Pressure is derived from a Reference Pressure, which is a calibrated value unique to each
printhead (and which forms part of the printhead code). The Reference Pressure is also
dependent on printhead temperature.
See also: ‘Printhead Temperature Sensor’ earlier in this chapter.
For each of the printhead types, the Solvent Add Pressure is derived as follows:
Solvent Add Pressure = Reference Pressure + 0.07 bar (1.02 p.s.i.).
Solvent is added to the ink when all of the following five conditions apply:
• Pressure check is OK (that is, the pressure generation circuits functioned correctly at jet
startup and there is no System Warning “3.18 Low Pressure”).
• Set Pressure is greater than Solvent Add Pressure.
• Actual TOF is within ±0.3% of Reference TOF.
• Warm-up time has expired (that is, the jet has been running for 45 minutes).
• Solvent level is OK (that is, the printer solvent level is above the minimum required and
there is no System Warning “3.04 Solvent Low”).
When solvent is added to the ink, the viscosity of the ink is lowered. Within 20 minutes (the
Viscosity Settle Time) this thinner ink arrives at the printhead, causing the Set Pressure to
decrease as the thinner ink flows from the nozzle. If, after 20 minutes, the Set Pressure value
is still above the Solvent Add Pressure value, more solvent is added to the ink tank.
To ensure that too much solvent is not inadvertently added to the ink, the printer allows only
8 (MEK and Pigmented inks), 12 (Mixed Base inks) or 25 (Ethanol inks) consecutive solvent
additions, where the Set Pressure has not fallen below the Solvent Add Pressure. If after these
solvent additions more solvent is still required, the printer will fail with Print Failure “2.12
Viscosity”.
3.5.12 Starting Up and Shutting Down

The principle of continuous ink jet printing has proved to be the most effective means of
printing with an ink that is required to dry almost instantly (within a second) on virtually
any surface. If ink is required to dry quickly on the product, it also has a tendency to dry in
the printhead, causing it to become blocked.
The continuous ink jet printer overcomes this problem by continuously circulating the ink
through the printhead and the ink system. Although the ink is evaporating quickly during
this operation, it does not cause the nozzle to become blocked because there is a constant
replacement of ink in the nozzle.
A problem arises on shutdown when ink is left in the printhead nozzle; because it is fast
drying, it will soon cause a blockage in the nozzle. To overcome this, special functions to
clear the nozzle are necessary.
On shutdown, the ink is removed from the nozzle and the gun by suction through the feed
and purge lines. Just prior to final shutdown, solvent is introduced into the ink gun and is
circulated through the nozzle and gutter, clearing ink from these vital components. This
automatic procedure makes it unnecessary to manually clean the printhead after
shutdown.
FA69084–1
During startup, a series of actions occurs automatically:
• The electronic circuitry is checked.
• The Ink System Feed valve, and the Printhead Feed and Purge valves are opened to
allow the ink to circulate through the printhead.
• The Purge valve is closed, causing the ink jet to be established.
• Pressure is increased to normal operating pressure and the ink jet is pulsed by the
modulation process to cause drop break-off.
• The TOF is adjusted to be close to the reference TOF, that is, drop velocity is corrected.
Only when these systems are operating correctly will the printer go to the ‘Printing’
state.
• The phasing and modulation are checked automatically for optimum positioning.
• On receiving a signal from the ‘print go’ sensor (for example, a photocell), the printer
prints the message previously entered, which is automatically updated for items such
as dates and sequential numbers.
All these actions should operate automatically and it should not, under normal operating
conditions, be necessary to remove the printhead cover tube and perform any maintenance
during startup or shutdown. However, under certain conditions it may be necessary to
remove the printhead cover tube and clean the printhead manually with solvent at regular
intervals.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the correct solvent is used when cleaning the
printhead, that is, MEK solvent for MEK based inks; Ethanol solvent for
Ethanol based inks; 3XXX for Mixed Base inks.
Summary tables of the startup and shutdown sequences are contained in the ‘Ink System’
section later in this chapter.
3.5.13 Jet/Nozzle Alignment

The alignment of the jet is critical to the performance of the printhead. There are two
requirements:
• The jet must pass centrally through the charge electrode slot to ensure correct charging.
• The undeflected drops must enter the gutter cleanly, that is, without clipping the
edges.
It is not possible to adjust the position of the charge electrode, the DPP or the gutter. It is
possible to achieve a small amount of movement of the nozzle to correct jet misalignment.
3.5.14 Print Quality

During manufacturing, each printer undergoes a series of performance and quality tests to
establish the individual characteristics of each printhead. These characteristics are related
to the printhead type and variant (for example, type 62 µm; variant Ultima) and are:
• Reference Pressure
• Reference Modulation voltage
• Charge Calibration Factor
These parameters are established to give consistent print quality. The parameters are then
grouped together to form the printhead code for the particular printhead. These
parameters are also identified on the printhead conduit label, which is located near to the
conduit entry point to the printer.
Refer to Printhead > Printhead Code in Chapter 4: ‘System Options’ for details of how the
code is created.
FA69084–1
3.5.15 Printhead/Nozzle Replacement
Whenever a printhead is replaced, the code for the new printhead and the Printhead Type
must be entered on the Printhead Code page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation
> Printhead > Printhead Code). In addition, whenever a printhead or a nozzle is replaced,
the new offset values, for all ink types except 3103, must be used from the supplied
Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Table. For the calibration procedure, refer
to Chapter 5: Maintenance > Maintenance Instructions > ‘Calibrated Nozzle Replacement
(Offset Calibration)’ maintenance instruction.
Prior to removing the printhead for replacement, the printer must be allowed to complete a
full normal shutdown. This removes any residual ink in the nozzle, and feed, purge and
gutter lines.
FA69084–1
3.6 Ink System
3.6.1 General Description
The Ink System is contained in a stainless steel enclosure, which is integral to the base unit of
the cabinet. The cabinet top cover has two openings through which the ink and solvent tanks
are filled, via internal filler tubes. The filler tubes are sealed by removable protective caps.
Both the filler tubes and protective caps are colour coded—black for ink and white for
solvent. Adhesive ink and solvent type identification labels are supplied with the printer for
attaching to the protective caps.
The ink system comprises the following main components (refer to ‘Figure 3-10. Static Ink
System—Standard 7300 Printer’ and ‘Figure 3-11. Static Ink System—7300 Spectrum
Printer’):
• Ink tank
• Ink pick-up tube incorporating a 40 µm stainless steel in-line filter (7300 standard printer
only; the 7300 Spectrum does not have an ink pick-up filter)
• Pump and motor assembly
• 10 µm (nominal) polypropylene disposable main ink filter
• Small ink manifold assembly, which includes the pressure transducer and venturi
• Damper
• Solvent tank
• Solvent pick-up tube incorporating a 20 µm stainless steel in-line filter
• Five solenoid-operated valves (the 7300 Spectrum printer has an additional Ink Mixing
valve)
• Interconnecting pipes
NOTE: The symbol ‘µm’ stands for micrometre, which is the SI unit of length and formerly
known as the micron.
Standard 7300 printers have polyethylene ink and solvent tanks with nominal capacities of
1440 ml. The 7300 Spectrum printer has a stainless steel, conically-shaped ink tank with a
nominal capacity of 1400 ml. Both tanks are fitted with fluid level sensors (float switches) to
detect when the level of ink or solvent falls below a predetermined point. If either sensor
detects a low fluid level, a System Warning message is displayed (“3.03 Ink Low” or “3.04
Solvent Low”).
If, during a print run, the ink low condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the
Print Failure “2.05 Ink Tank Empty” after 8 hours for Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro
printheads, and 6 hours for Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads. If, during a print run, the
solvent low condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the Print Failure “2.06
Solvent Tank Empty” after 12 hours (for all printheads). This is to prevent the ink or solvent
from running out completely.
The ink system pump used in standard 7300 printers has an integral pressure relief valve
(PRV). The 7300 Spectrum has an external PRV connected across the pump inlet and outlet
ports. Control of the pump/motor assembly is achieved by a 0 to +5 volts (depending on the
requested pressure) drive signal supplied by the IPM PCB.
Standard 7300 Printers

The pump draws ink up from the tank through the ink pick-up tube, which incorporates a
40 µm in-line filter. The ink then flows through the pump to the 10 µm main ink filter, which
provides the primary filtration within the ink system. The filter removes any remaining
foreign particles from the ink before it reaches the venturi manifold and the printhead. From
the main ink filter, the ink is fed through the venturi manifold to the damper and the Feed
valve, and then out to the printhead. The purpose of the damper is to smooth any ink
pressure fluctuations within the primary circuit and to isolate them from the printhead.
FA69084–1
Ink is fed to and from the printhead through the feed, purge, and gutter lines, via a 3-way
fluid connector, which connects the printhead to the ink system. This connector is located
within the ink system enclosure and incorporates a 35 µm filter on Ultima plus and Midi
plus printheads, and a 15 µm filter on Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads. The
tubing to and from the printhead is colour-coded: red stripe for the feed line, blue stripe for
the purge line, and no stripe for the gutter line.
The disposable ink pick-up tube and filter (all ink types), main ink filter (all ink types), and
3-way fluid connector filter (pigmented inks only) are replaced at every Scheduled
Maintenance. The damper is replaced annually. All these items must be replaced in
accordance with the ‘Scheduled Maintenance’ procedure provided in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
The venturi in the manifold provides suction to draw unused ink from the printhead gutter
back to the ink tank via the Gutter valve, and to draw solvent from the solvent tank as
required.
During solvent addition and solvent flushing, the solvent is drawn from the tank via the
solvent pick-up tube, which incorporates a 20 µm in-line filter. It is then fed through the
Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve and the venturi to the ink tank, or through the Solvent
Flush valve and the venturi manifold to the printhead.
7300 Spectrum Printer

The pump draws the pigmented ink up from the tank through the ink pick-up tube. The
ink then flows through the pump and a 4-way connector and on to the Ink Mixing valve. A
smaller tapping from the 4-way connector also routes ink back to, and in through the base
of, the ink tank, where it mixes with the main body of ink, helping to keep the pigment in
suspension. The fourth tapping from the 4-way connector connects the external PRV from
the outlet to the inlet of the pump.
The ink is fed through the Ink Mixing valve to the 10 µm main ink filter, which provides
the primary filtration within the ink system. The filter removes any remaining foreign
particles from the ink before it reaches the venturi manifold and the printhead. From the
main ink filter, the ink is fed through the venturi manifold to the damper and the Feed
valve, and then out to the printhead. The purpose of the damper is to smooth any ink
pressure fluctuations within the primary circuit and to isolate them from the printhead.
Ink is fed to and from the printhead through the feed, purge, and gutter lines, via a 3-way
within the ink system enclosure and incorporates a 35 µm filter. The tubing to and from the
printhead is colour-coded: red stripe for the feed line, blue stripe for the purge line, and no
stripe for the gutter line.
The disposable main ink filter and 3-way fluid connector filter are replaced at every
Scheduled Maintenance. The damper is replaced annually. All these items must be
replaced in accordance with the ‘Scheduled Maintenance’ procedure provided in Chapter
5: ‘Maintenance’.
required.
During the ink mixing sequence, ink is drawn from the tank (via the ink pick-up tube)
through the pump to the energized Ink Mixing valve. From the valve it is fed back to, and
in through the base of, the ink tank, where it mixes with the main body of ink. This
continuous circulation of the ink during the sequence thoroughly mixes the ink in the tank,
which keeps the pigment of the ink in suspension, prior to printer use.
FA69084–1
Gun Printhead Printhead Feed Valve and Filter Assembly
Chamber Purge Valve (35 µm filter—Ultima plus and Midi plus 75 µm printheads;
15 µm filter—Ultima and Midi 62 µm, Mini 50 µm and Micro 40 µm printheads)
Purge Line
Sep 2009
Gutter Restrictor
Printhead OFF Feed Line
(2-metre printhead conduits only—Ultima plus and Midi plus 75 µm,
Gutter Line Ultima and Midi 62 µm, Mini 50 µm, and Micro µm printheads)
3-Way Fluid Connector and In-Line Feed Filter Assembly

10 µm Main Ink Damper (35 µm filter—Ultima plus and Midi plus 75 µm printheads;
Filter 15 µm filter—Ultima and Midi 62 µm, Mini 50 µm and Micro 40 µm printheads)
7 25 1 21 68146
19 20
Venturi
24
14 OFF 15 OFF 16 OFF 17 OFF 18 OFF
B C A 8
Pressure
3 — 24
Transducer
9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
22 20 µm
Vent
40 µm In-Line Filter
In-Line Filter fitted in
fitted in Solvent
This drawing provides details for all Ink Pick-up Tube Pick-up Tube
Mk7 printheads regardless of which INK SOLVENT
model of printer they can be fitted to.

FA69084–1
Figure 3-10. Static Ink System—Standard 7300 Printer
Gun Printhead Printhead Feed Valve
Chamber Purge Valve and 35 µm Filter Assembly
Purge Line
Gutter Restrictor
Printhead OFF Feed Line (2-metre Ultima plus and
Pipe Size
FA69084–1
Midi plus 75 µm
Gutter Line printheads only) Adaptor
68579
3-Way Fluid Connector
and 35 µm In-Line Feed Filter Assembly
10 µm Main Ink Damper
Filter
7 25 1
21

Venturi
24 19 20
14 OFF 15 OFF 16 OFF 17 OFF 18 OFF 23 OFF
B C A 8
Pressure
Transducer
9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 26 27
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent Ink
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush Mixing
3 — 25
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
22
Vent Vent
20 µm
Ink Return Ink Pick-up In-Line Filter
Tube Tube fitted in
INK SOLVENT Solvent
Pick-up Tube
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-11. Static Ink System—7300 Spectrum Printer
3.6.2 Venturi Manifold Assembly
The venturi manifold assembly is the central part of the ink system. Its purpose is to
monitor the ink pressure, and to manage the ink and solvent distribution in the system.
Three components are used to achieve this—the manifold block, the pressure transducer,
and the vacuum venturi—each forming part of the complete manifold assembly.
The manifold block and the pressure transducer are fitted through the front wall of the ink
system enclosure to the right of the ink system valves. The Spectrum printer has the
manifold block and the pressure transducer fitted through the right side wall of the ink
system enclosure. This arrangement allows the electrical and fluid connections to be
isolated from each other. The fluid connections of the manifold are on the inside of the
enclosure, and the electrical connections of the pressure transducer are on the outside.
The main component is the small manifold block, manufactured from white acetal, in
which interconnecting internal bores are drilled. These bores enter and exit the manifold
block at ports to which are connected the pressure transducer, vacuum venturi, and
interconnecting ink and solvent pipes.
The following two illustrations show the venturi manifold assembly and the ink system
valves.
Venturi
Manifold Block
Pressure
Solvent Flush Transducer
Valve (5)
Gutter
49165
Valve (3) Solvent Add
Valve (4)
Feed
Valve (1) Purge
Valve (2)
Venturi
Vi
ole Festo Fitting
t
Blu
e
Gree
Yell n
ow
Re
d
Ink System Cableform

(connector SK1)
Figure 3-12. Venturi Manifold Assembly and Valves—Standard 7300 Printer
FA69084–1
Festo Fitting
Venturi
Venturi
Manifold Block
Solvent Flush
Valve (5) Ink Mixing
Valve (6)
68592
Gutter
Valve (3) Solvent Add
Valve (4)
Feed
Valve (1) Purge Pressure
Valve (2) Transducer
Bl
ac
Vi k
ole
t
Blu
e
Gree
Yell n
ow
Re
d
Ink System Cableform

(connector SK1)
Figure 3-13. Venturi Manifold Assembly and Valves—7300 Spectrum Printer
Pressure Transducer
The actual pressure of the ink in the system is monitored by the pressure transducer, which
is fitted to a small manifold that contains the venturi.
Vacuum Venturi
Ink flowing through the venturi creates a vacuum, which is tapped off and used for various
purposes. During normal operation, the vacuum draws ink back into the system from the
printhead gutter. It is also used to draw solvent into the system for ink viscosity control,
and for flushing the printhead and ink lines. Finally, the vacuum is used to purge the ink
lines, and to clear blockages and obstructions in the printhead. Refer to ‘Startup and
Shutdown Sequences’, and ‘Other Operating Sequences’ later in this section.
FA69084–1
Venturi Vacuum Suction
A true venturi has a tapered mixing chamber, which creates a vacuum to provide suction.
The method used by Linx follows this principle, but uses the turbulence caused by a high
pressure ink flow passing through a small bore directly into a larger bore. The turbulence
creates a vacuum around the ink flow, and this vacuum is tapped off through a bore drilled
at right angles to the ink flow. The following illustration is a sectional view of the venturi.
Ink flow from the pump

at Set Pressure
48004
Groove around circumference of

venturi to allow equalization of
Small bore
vacuum at both tappings
steel insert
Suction connected Suction connected

through the manifold to through the manifold
the Solvent Add valve to the Gutter valve
Large bore
drilling Area of low pressure
around the ink flow
due to turbulence
Venturi housing
Ink and air returned

to the ink tank
Figure 3-14. Section View of the Venturi
3.6.3 Valves
There are five solenoid-operated valves in the standard 7300 ink system enclosure, and six
solenoid-operated valves in the 7300 Spectrum ink system enclosure. These valves are used
to control the flow of ink and solvent through the system. The valves are sealed and cannot
be disassembled. The valve types and designations are as follows:
• 2-way Feed valve
• 3-way Purge valve
• 3-way Gutter valve
• 3-way Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve
• 3-way Solvent Flush valve
• 3-way Ink Mixing valve (7300 Spectrum only)
The valves are mounted through the front wall of the ink system enclosure, allowing the
electrical and fluid connections to be isolated from each other. The fluid connections are on
the inside of the enclosure and the electrical connections are on the outside.
FA69084–1
3.6.4 Ink System Connections
The pipe connections to the venturi manifold are made using Festo fittings or barb fittings.
The barbs are sealed by interference fit to the manifold and cannot be removed, and are
therefore not replaceable items.
The following two illustrations show the venturi manifold, its components, and the ink
system valves, and provide details of the ink system pipe connections.
22
21
20 19
VENTURI
MANIFOLD
18 17 16 15 14
1 25
7 8
C
A B
6 5 4 3 2
13 12 11 10 9
SOLVENT SOLVENT GUTTER PURGE FEED

24 FLUSH ADD (3) (2) (1)
(5) (4)
69091
INK SYSTEM PIPE CONNECTIONS
PIPE ROUTING PIPE LENGTHS
PORT 1 (VENTURI) TO DAMPER INLET (BLEED CAP END) 460 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 2 NOT USED —
PORT 3 (PURGE VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (PURGE) 360 mm BLUE STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 4 (GUTTER VALVE) TO PORT 8 (VENTURI) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 5 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 6 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 9 (FEED VALVE) TO PORT A (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 260 mm RED PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 10 (PURGE VALVE) TO INK TANK 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 12 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 7 (VENTURI) 160 mm YELLOW PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 13 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO PORT B (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 15 (PURGE VALVE) TO PORT 11 (GUTTER VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 16 (GUTTER VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (GUTTER) 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 17 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO 19 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 18 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO 20 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 21 (Y-PIECE) TO 22 (SOLVENT TANK PICK-UP TUBE) 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 24 (VENTURI) TO INK TANK (INK RETURN LINE) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT C (VENTURI MANIFOLD) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (FEED) 360 mm RED STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
DAMPER OUTLET TO PORT 14 (FEED VALVE) 360 mm RED PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
MAIN INK FILTER OUTLET TO PORT 25 (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER) 185 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK PICK-UP TUBE TO PUMP INLET 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PUMP OUTLET TO MAIN INK FILTER INLET 120 mm/230 mm* NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK TANK TO SOLVENT TANK (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
SOLVENT TANK TO INK TRAY (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
* The length of the Main Ink Filter inlet pipe is dependent on the type of motor that is fitted to the Pump/Motor Assembly—
older '380' model or new 'I-Drive' model. Refer to the 'Main Ink Filter Replacement' maintenance instruction.
Figure 3-15. 7300 Ink System Pipe Connections—Standard 7300 Printer
FA69084–1
22
VENTURI
MANIFOLD
21
A 25
8
24
20 19
23 18 17 16 15 14
C 7 1
26 6 5 4 3 2
27 13 12 11 10 9
INK SOLVENT SOLVENT GUTTER PURGE FEED

MIXING FLUSH ADD (3) (2) (1)
(6) (5) (4)
73071
INK SYSTEM PIPE CONNECTIONS
PIPE ROUTING PIPE LENGTHS
PORT 1 (VENTURI) TO DAMPER INLET (BLEED CAP END) 460 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 2 NOT USED —
PORT 3 (PURGE VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (PURGE) 360 mm BLUE STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 4 (GUTTER VALVE) TO PORT 8 (VENTURI) 240 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 5 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 6 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 9 (FEED VALVE) TO PORT A (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 10 (PURGE VALVE) TO INK TANK 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 12 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 7 (VENTURI) 220 mm YELLOW PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 13 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO PORT B (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 15 (PURGE VALVE) TO PORT 11 (GUTTER VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 16 (GUTTER VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (GUTTER) 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 17 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO 19 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 18 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO 20 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 21 (Y-PIECE) TO 22 (SOLVENT TANK PICK-UP TUBE) 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 23 (MIXING VALVE) TO PIPE SIZE ADAPTOR 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 24 (VENTURI) TO INK TANK (INK RETURN LINE) 110 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
MAIN INK FILTER OUTLET TO PORT 25 (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER) 220 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT C (VENTURI MANIFOLD) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (FEED) 360 mm RED STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
DAMPER OUTLET TO PORT 14 (FEED VALVE) 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PIPE SIZE ADAPTOR TO MAIN INK FILTER INLET 75 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK PICK-UP TUBE TO T-PIECE 55 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
T-PIECE TO PUMP INLET 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PUMP OUTLET TO 4-WAY CONNECTOR 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
4-WAY CONNECTOR TO PORT 26 (MIXING VALVE) 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT 27 (MIXING VALVE) TO INK TANK BOTTOM INLET 8 COILS NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
4-WAY CONNECTOR TO INK TANK BOTTOM INLET 1.7 m COILED NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
4-WAY CONNECTOR TO PRV INLET 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRV OUTLET TO T-PIECE 42 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK TANK TO SOLVENT TANK (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
SOLVENT TANK TO INK TRAY (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
Figure 3-16. 7300 Ink System Pipe Connections—7300 Spectrum Printer
FA69084–1
3.6.5 Ink and Solvent Flows
The following ink and solvent flow descriptions should be read in conjunction with the
relevant ink and solvent flow diagrams on the following pages.
When the jet is running under normal operating conditions, there are two ink flow circuits
in operation: a primary circuit and a secondary circuit.
Primary Circuit—Standard 7300 Printer (Figure 3-17)

The ink flow in the primary circuit is from the ink tank, up through the ink pick-up tube
and in-line filter to the pump, and then under pressure through the main ink filter to the
venturi manifold. Within the manifold, the pressurized ink passes the pressure transducer,
which sends an electrical feedback signal to the electronics system. This signal gives the
system an indication of the actual pressure at which the pump is operating, and can thus be
used to regulate the pump speed to achieve the necessary pressure. After passing the
pressure transducer, the ink flows through the venturi, where the vacuum is generated,
and then back to the ink tank.
Primary Circuit—7300 Spectrum Printer (Figure 3-18)

The ink flow in the primary circuit is from the ink tank, up through the ink pick-up tube to
the pump, and then under pressure through the de-energized Ink Mixing valve and the
main ink filter to the venturi manifold. Within the manifold, the pressurized ink passes the
pressure transducer, which sends an electrical feedback signal to the electronics system.
This signal gives the system an indication of the actual pressure at which the pump is
operating, and can thus be used to regulate the pump speed achieve the necessary
pressure. After passing the pressure transducer, the ink flows through the venturi, where
the vacuum is generated, and then back to the ink tank.
Secondary Circuit—All 7300 Printers (Figures 3-19 and 3-20)

The secondary ink flow circuit operates when the Ink System Feed valve and the Printhead
Feed valve are switched on. There is an internal manifold fluid connection that feeds ink
from the primary circuit at the venturi, through the damper, to the switched on Feed valve.
This allows ink to be fed under pressure along the feed line and through the in-line feed
filter, located in the 3-way fluid connector.
The ink continues along the feed line to the printhead where it is fed through the open
Printhead Feed valve and then to the printhead nozzle, where it emerges as the jet. Drops
of ink not required for printing enter the gutter. The venturi vacuum acting on the gutter
draws the unprinted drops back into the system through the switched off Gutter valve, and
returns them to the ink tank via the venturi.
FA69084–1
Purge Line
Sep 2009
OFF Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
Gutter Line Ink
Ink with Air Bubbles

Filter
68147
Venturi
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 32
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT

FA69084–1
Figure 3-17. Primary Circuit—Standard 7300 Printer
PIPE FLUID KEY
Purge Line
Ink
FA69084–1
Gutter Line
68580

Filter

Venturi
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 33
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-18. Primary Circuit—7300 Spectrum Printer
Purge Line
Sep 2009
ON Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
Gutter Line Ink
Discoloured Solvent
Filter
68148
Venturi
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 34
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT

FA69084–1
Figure 3-19. Secondary Circuit (Normal Running after a Start Purge)—Standard 7300 Printer
PIPE FLUID KEY
Purge Line Ink

Printhead ON Feed Line
Discoloured Solvent
FA69084–1
Gutter Line
68581

Filter

Venturi
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 35
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-20. Secondary Circuit (Normal Running after a Start Purge)—7300 Spectrum Printer
Solvent Addition—All 7300 Printers (Figures 3-21 and 3-22)
Solvent is automatically added to the ink if the viscosity of the ink becomes too high. This
is indicated by the Set Pressure exceeding the predetermined Solvent Add Pressure (P1).
When this Solvent Add Pressure is exceeded, a solvent addition occurs only if all the
following criteria are met:
• Pressure check is OK (that is, the pressure generation circuits functioned correctly at jet
startup and there is no System Warning “3.18 Low Pressure”).
• Set Pressure is greater than Solvent Add Pressure.
• Actual TOF is within ±0.3% of Reference TOF.
• Warm-up time has expired (that is, the jet has been running for 45 minutes).
• Solvent level is OK (that is, the printer solvent level is above the minimum required
and there is no System Warning “3.04 Solvent Low”).
NOTE: No solvent is added if there is a System Warning “3.18 Low Pressure”, since this
means that there is a loss of pressure in the system, and therefore a higher
pressure is required to attain the correct TOF, even though the ink viscosity is
probably acceptable.
When a solvent addition is performed, the ink flow is as previously described in ‘Ink and
Solvent Flows‘, that is, ink flow in both the primary and secondary ink circuits.
To add solvent, the Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve is switched on. Vacuum from the
venturi now acts on the Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve, as well as the normally
switched off Gutter valve. The vacuum draws solvent from the tank, through the switched
on Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve—via the switched off Solvent Flush valve—to the
venturi, where it is mixed with the ink in the primary circuit returning to the ink tank. The
resultant lower viscosity solvent and ink mixture in the ink tank is then fed to the
printhead.
The Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve is switched on for a predetermined time, which is
calculated to allow a fixed quantity of solvent to be added in a single ‘solvent add’
operation. This Solvent Add Time is dependent on the ink and printhead type. Refer to the
‘Ink Type Dependent Parameters’ tables at the end of this ‘Ink System’ section.
After solvent is added, further solvent additions are inhibited for a predetermined period
of 20 minutes (the Viscosity Settle Time). This time allows the solvent to mix in the ink
tank, and for the effects of the solvent addition to be seen at the printhead.
FA69084–1
Purge Line
ON Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
FA69084–1
Gutter Line Ink
Solvent
Filter
68149

Venturi
ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 37
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT
Sep 2009
Figure 3-21. Solvent Addition—Standard 7300 Printer
PIPE FLUID KEY
Purge Line Ink

Sep 2009
Printhead ON Feed Line
Solvent
Gutter Line
68582

Filter
Venturi
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 38
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve

FA69084–1
Figure 3-22. Solvent Addition—7300 Spectrum Printer
Ink Mixing—7300 Spectrum Printer Only (Figure 3-24)
Brilliant White Ink 1305 is an ultra-white, heavily pigmented ink that has been designed to
be chemically stable, but this does not prevent the pigment settling. Unless the fluid is
agitated and the pigment redispersed, the ink loses its opacity.
A special conically-shaped ink tank is used in the 7300 Spectrum printer to help mix all
pigmented inks before use. The shape of the tank gathers the settled pigment in the
smallest possible area at the bottom, where there is high ink flow velocity when mixing is
initiated.
The ink is mixed for a predetermined time before being circulated in the main ink system.
To achieve this an extra Ink Mixing, solenoid-operated valve is used to switch the ink flow
from the mixing circuit to the main ink system.
The mixing sequence has four variables:
• The time each day it is initiated, should it be required.
• The ‘pump jog-start’ duration.
• The ink mixing duration.
• The damper purge duration.
The first variable is set by the maintenance technician (see ‘Next Mix’ in Chapter 4: ‘System
Options’). The remaining three variables are calculated by the software and are dependent
on when the last mix occurred, as shown in the following table.
v1.7 68139
Time since last Pump jog-start Ink mixing Damper purge
ink mix time (s) time (min) time (min)
Less than 1 week 10 5 1

Less than 2 weeks 20 10 2
Less than 3 weeks 30 15 3
More than 3 weeks 40 15 3
Figure 3-23. Ink Mixing Sequence Timings
Pump Jog-Start
Immediately before the start of the ink mixing part of the sequence, a ‘pump jog-start’
routine is done, where the pump is switched on and off continuously for a calculated time
(in seconds). This helps to stop the pigmented ink’s tendency to prevent the pump gears
from rotating during pump starting.
Ink Mixing
During the ink mixing sequence, ink is drawn from the tank and circulated through the
pump to the energized Ink Mixing valve. From the valve it is fed back in through the base
of the ink tank, where it mixes with the main body of ink. This continuous circulation of the
ink during the sequence thoroughly mixes the ink in the tank, keeping the ink pigment in
suspension, in preparation for printing.
NOTE: If the ink level becomes low during the ink mixing sequence, the sequence is aborted.
Damper Purge
Ink is drawn from the tank and routed via the Ink Mixing valve to the damper to purge it.
When the ink mixing sequence has completed, the jet can be started. In addition to the
mixing sequence, when the printer is switched on (that is, the pump is running), a
secondary action of the primary ink circuit is to continuously return ink from the pump to
the bottom inlet of the tank. This circulation of the ink helps to keep the pigment in
suspension.
FA69084–1
PIPE FLUID KEY
Purge Line
Ink
Sep 2009
Gutter Line
68583

Filter
Venturi
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 40
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve

FA69084–1
Figure 3-24. Ink Mixing—7300 Spectrum Printer Only
3.6.6 Startup and Shutdown Sequences
There are three startup sequences:
• Normal Start
• Jet Test – Start (only to be used for fault diagnostic purposes by qualified maintenance
technicians)
• Restart
There are three shutdown sequences:
• Normal Shutdown
• Jet Test – Stop (only to be used for fault diagnostic purposes by qualified maintenance
technicians)
• Fault Shutdown
Fault Shutdown and Jet Test – Stop are used in emergencies to shut-off the jet as quickly as
possible.
Valve sequence summary tables are provided for each operating sequence. The valves are
identified in these tables as follows:
Feed F
Printhead Feed PF
Purge P
Gutter G
Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) T
Solvent Flush L
Ink Mixing M
A valve identification in bold type indicates that the valve is switched on; an identification
in normal type indicates that the valve is switched off. For example: F PF P G T L M
indicates that the Gutter and Solvent Flush valves are switched on and the remainder are
switched off.
Other operating sequences are detailed in this section after the ‘Startup and Shutdown
Sequences’, and use the same summary tables.
The timings quoted in the valve sequence summary tables are in seconds and the pressures
are quoted in bar.
NOTE: The valve sequences and timings information given here is relevant to Version
4.1 System Software for the 7300 printer, unless otherwise stated.
FA69084–1
A pressure conversion table is provided below, for quick reference, which shows
conversions in steps of 5 pressure bits. Conversion factors are also given at the bottom of
the table if intermediate pressure calculations are required.
68046
PRESSURE CONVERSION TABLE
bits bar p.s.i. bits bar p.s.i.

100 1.76 25.49 180 3.17 45.88
105 1.85 26.76 185 3.26 47.16
110 1.94 28.04 190 3.34 48.43
115 2.02 29.31 195 3.43 49.71
120 2.11 30.59 200 3.52 50.98
125 2.20 31.86 205 3.61 52.25
130 2.29 33.14 210 3.70 53.53
135 2.38 34.41 215 3.78 54.80
140 2.46 35.69 220 3.87 56.08
145 2.55 36.96 225 3.96 57.35
150 2.64 38.23 230 4.05 58.63
155 2.73 39.51 235 4.14 59.90
160 2.82 40.78 240 4.22 61.18
165 2.90 42.06 245 4.31 62.45
170 2.99 43.33 250 4.40 63.73
175 3.08 44.61 255 4.49 65.00
Approximate conversions
1 bit = 0.0176 bar = 0.255 p.s.i.
1 bar = 14.503 p.s.i. = 56.818 bits
1 p.s.i. = 3.923 bits = 0.069 bar
Figure 3-25. Pressure Conversion Table

NOTE: The maximum pressure that the ink system can develop under normal operating
conditions is 65.00 p.s.i. (lb/in2) or approximately 4.5 bar, and 90.00 p.s.i. (6.21
bar) under fault conditions.
FA69084–1
The various pressures and timings are printhead dependent. The following table lists the
pressures for the corresponding printhead types.
v2.1 68015
PRESSURES – bar (p.s.i.)
Condition Pressure Ultima Ultima plus Midi Midi plus Mini Micro
Default Reference * P0 3.24 (46.92) 2.55 (36.97) 3.24 (46.92) 2.52 (36.46) 3.20 (46.41) 3.15 (45.65)
Solvent Add Offset ** – 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02)
Solvent Add P1 – – – – – –
Test *** P3 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90)
Maximum Running P4 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00)
Solvent Jet P5 1.76 (25.49) 1.58 (22.95) 1.76 (25.49) 1.58 (22.95) 3.17 (45.90) 3.17 (45.90)
1st Solvent Add Offset 1 ** – 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78)
st
1 Solvent Add Offset 2 ** – 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80)
st
1 Solvent Add Offset 3 ** – 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82)
INK AND SOLVENT CONTROL
Condition Ultima Ultima plus Midi Midi plus Mini Micro
Viscosity Settle Time (minutes) 20 20 20 20 20 20

Ink Low Time Out (hours) 8 6 8 6 8 8
Solvent Low Time Out (hours) 12 12 12 12 12 12
* The Default Reference Pressure (P0) is the normal running default pressure for the printhead type,
but this will actually be the Reference Pressure for each individual printhead, as specified in the
printhead code.
** The Solvent Add Offset is added to the Reference Pressure to produce the Solvent Add
Pressure (P1). The 1st Solvent Add Offset 1, 2 or 3 is added to the Solvent Add Pressure (P1) to
produce the 1st Solvent Add Pressure (P7, P8 or P9 respectively). This is where the printer adds
solvent at startup, if required.
*** The Test Pressure is used during the Pressure and Filter check, before a normal jet start.
Figure 3-26. Printhead Dependent Parameters Table
See also: ‘Ink Type Dependent Parameters’ tables at the end of this ‘Ink System’ section.
FA69084–1
Normal Start Sequence
When the printer is first switched on and a message is selected for printing, all the valves
are switched off initially.
v2.1 68014
NORMAL START (2 m and 4 m conduits)
Action Description
tion Ultima Ultima Midi Midi Mini Micro
plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Pressure Maximu ning (P4)
Maximum Running 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar
Wait Pressure response 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Add small quantity of solvent 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Balance pressure in purge line 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start jet 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Purge gun 15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Pressure Default Reference Pressure (P0) 3.24 bar 2.55 bar 3.24 bar 2.52 bar 3.20 bar 3.15 bar
Wait Wait for TOF
Figure 3-27. Normal Start Summary Table
Jet Test – Start Sequence

This method of starting the printer is similar to the Normal Start, but the feed line purge is
omitted from the sequence. The Jet Test – Start sequence is initiated by selecting the Jet Test
– Start option on the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet
Functions > Jet Test – Start). For more information about the Jet Test – Start option, refer to
‘Maintenance Page’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
v2.1 68025
JET TEST – START (2 m and 4 m conduits)
Action Description Ultima Ultima Midi Midi Mini Micro

plus plus
Pressure Constant 4.05 bar 4.05 bar 4.05 bar 4.05 bar 4.05 bar 4.05 bar
Wait Pressure/filter check 3s 3s 3s 3s 3s 3s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Continue jet 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s
Figure 3-28. Jet Test – Start Summary Table
FA69084–1
Restart Sequence
There were modifications to the Restart sequence that were introduced in an earlier version
of System Software to include an extra flushing (‘soak’) period. These additional operations
are shown in italics in the summary table.
Before the jet starts, all the normal static checks are made, such as pressure/filter check, ink
and solvent levels, and time to the next Service. As the jet starts, the dynamic functional
checks and adjustments are carried out: ink in gutter check, pressure check, phasing and
TOF adjustments. The printer enters the Jet Running state only after all these functions
have been successfully completed. However, if any of the checks or adjustments are
invalid, the printer attempts a further three starts (four in total) using the Restart sequence.
If an invalid condition still exists, the printer provides an audible and on-screen warning,
or fails with a Print Failure message.
v2.1 68079
RESTART (2 m conduit; 4 m conduit figures in brackets)

plus plus
Pressure Maximum Running (P4) 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Stop jet 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Depressurize feed line 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed and gutter lines 30 s (40 s) 30 s (40 s) 30 s (40 s) 30 s (40 s) 30 s (40 s) 30 s (40 s)
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed and purge lines 20 s (40 s) 20 s (40 s) 20 s (40 s) 20 s (40 s) 20 s (40 s) 20 s (40 s)
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Solvent to gun and purge line 13 s (10 s) 9.5 s (5 s) 13 s (10 s) 9.5 s (5 s) 11 s (10 s) 18 s (10 s)
Wait Constant 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Solvent to gun and purge line 13 s (10 s) 9.5 s (5 s) 13 s (10 s) 9.5 s (5 s) 11 s (10 s) 18 s (10 s)
Pressure Solvent Jet Pressure (P5) 1.76 (0.88) 1.58 (0.88) 1.76 (0.88) 1.58 (0.88) 3.16 (3.16) 3.16 (0.88)
Wait Pre-solvent 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start solvent jet/clean gutter pipe 14 s (40 s) 14 s (30 s ) 14 s (40 s ) 14 s (30 s ) 14 s (40 s) 14 s (40 s)
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed and gutter pipe 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Restart
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Add small quantity of solvent 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Balance purge line pressure 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Figure 3-29. Restart Summary Table
FA69084–1
Normal Shutdown Sequence
The type of Normal Shutdown sequence depends on the length of the printhead conduit.
Valve sequence summary tables are shown for both the 2-metre and 4-metre printhead
conduit lengths. There were modifications to the 2-metre and 4-metre shutdown sequences
that were introduced in an earlier version of System Software to include an extra flushing
(‘soak’) period. These additional operations are shown in italics in the two summary tables.
Initially, the Feed valves are in the ‘on’ state and the jet is running under normal operating
conditions, that is, ink flow in both the primary and secondary circuits.
v2.1 68016
NORMAL SHUTDOWN (2 m conduit)

plus plus
Mod Set modulation to zero
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Vacuum to PF valve to stop jet 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line and gutter line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line and purge line 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Solvent to gun and purge line 13 s 9.5 s 13 s 9.5 s 11 s 18 s
Valve F PF P G T L (all off)

Wait Clear gutter line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valve F PF P G T L
Wait Solvent to gun and purge line 13 s 9.5 s 13 s 9.5 s 11 s 18 s
Pressure Solvent Jet Pressure (P5) 1.76 bar 1.58 bar 1.76 bar 1.58 bar 3.17 bar 3.17 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start solv. jet & clean gutter pipe 14 s 14 s 14 s 14 s 14 s 14 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Stop solvent jet 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear gun and purge line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Pressure Set to zero 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar
Figure 3-30. Normal Shutdown (2 m conduit) Summary Table
FA69084–1
v2.1 68151
NORMAL SHUTDOWN (4 m conduit)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Vacuum to PF valve to stop jet 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Depressurize feed line 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line/stop gutter vacuum 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear purge line only 40 s 40 s 40 s 40 s 40 s 40 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait 1st solvent to gun and purge line 10 s 5s 10 s 5s 10 s 10 s
Valve F PF P G T L (all off)

Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line/stop gutter vacuum 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Vacuum to purge line 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait 2nd solvent to gun & purge line 10 s 5s 10 s 5s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Pressure Solvent Jet Pressure (P5) 0.88 bar 0.88 bar 0.88 bar 0.88 bar 3.17 bar 0.88 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start solvent jet 40 s 30 s 40 s 30 s 40 s 40 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Stop solvent jet 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear gun and feed line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear gun and purge line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Figure 3-31. Normal Shutdown (4 m conduit) Summary Table
FA69084–1
Purge Line
Sep 2009
OFF Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
Gutter Line Ink

Filter
68150
Venturi
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Pressure
sequence has been successfully completed.
Transducer
3 — 48
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT
The following two diagrams show the state of the ink system after a Normal Shutdown

FA69084–1
Figure 3-32. Ink System after a Successful Normal Shutdown—Standard 7300 Printer
PIPE FLUID KEY
Purge Line
Ink
FA69084–1
Gutter Line
68584

Filter

Venturi
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 49
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-33. Ink System after a Successful Normal Shutdown—7300 Spectrum Printer
Jet Test – Stop Sequence
Jet Test – Stop is a jet-stop facility for use by maintenance technicians only.
The Jet Test – Stop facility is initiated by pressing the [stop] key while pressing and holding
the [ctrl] key. Alternatively, select the Jet Test – Stop option on the Jet Functions page (Print
Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet Functions > Jet Test – Stop). The printer immediately
aborts any other jet sequence and performs this one. This is the quickest method of
stopping the jet and should only be used for fault diagnosis purposes.
NOTE: Auto Power Down is disabled if a Jet Test – Stop occurs. When the jet has shut
down after a Jet Test – Stop, Auto Power Down remains disabled until the power
is switched off and then switched on again, or a jet start is performed.
Initially, the Feed valves are in the ‘on’ state and the jet is running under normal operating
conditions, that is, ink flow in both the primary and secondary circuits.
v2.1 68026
JET TEST – STOP (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear purge line 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Wait Clear gutter line 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Figure 3-34. Jet Test – Stop Summary Table
Fault Shutdown Sequence

A Fault Shutdown is initiated by the printer in response to a System Failure or Print Failure
condition (see also Chapter 6: ‘System Events’). When a fault is detected, the printer uses
the same shutdown sequence as the Jet Test – Stop sequence described above.
FA69084–1
3.6.7 Other Operating Sequences
Purge Dry Cycle Sequence
This is one of the valve drying sequences used in the System Flush procedure.
v2.1 68080
PURGE DRY CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Figure 3-35. Purge Dry Cycle Summary Table
Feed Dry Cycle Sequence

v2.1 68081
FEED DRY CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Figure 3-36. Feed Dry Cycle Summary Table
FA69084–1
Nozzle Clear Sequence
This sequence can be used when there is a suspected blocked or obstructed nozzle. The
Nozzle Clear sequence is initiated by selecting the Nozzle Clear option on the Jet
Sequences page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet Sequences > Nozzle Clear).
Alternatively, the sequence can be quickly accessed by selecting the Nozzle Clear option on
the Menu page (Print Monitor > Menu > Nozzle Clear). The jet must be stopped before the
option can be selected. Refer to the ‘Nozzle Clear Sequence’ part of the ‘Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’ for details about
how to perform this procedure.
At the start of the sequence all the valves are in the ‘off’ state and the pump is running,
with ink flowing in the primary circuit only. The system sets the pressure to the Maximum
Running value (P4) and, after a 5-second delay for the pressure to stabilize, the Gutter
valve is switched on for 15 seconds. This transfers the vacuum from the gutter to the
nozzle, via the Gutter valve and the Purge valve (off), and draws ink from the nozzle
chamber back along the purge line (through the Printhead Purge valve) to the tank. This
action attempts to clear the blocked nozzle by also sucking air in through the nozzle
aperture. Finally, the Gutter valve is switched off and the pump is stopped, reducing the
pressure to zero.
NOTE: It is recommended that a maximum of eight Nozzle Clear sequences are
performed in an attempt to clear an obstruction or blockage, with an attempt
made to start the jet after each sequence.
For more details, refer to ‘Maintenance Page’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
v2.1 68082
NOZZLE CLEAR (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Figure 3-37. Nozzle Clear Summary Table
FA69084–1
Flush Cycle Sequence
This is the main flush sequence used in the System Flush procedure.
v2.1 68083A
FLUSH CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L (allll off)
Pressure 4)
Maximum Running (P4) 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
(continued)
Figure 3-38. Flush Cycle Summary Table
FA69084–1
v2.1 68083B
FLUSH CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Figure 3-38. Flush Cycle Summary Table (continued)
Filter Purge Sequence

All the valves remain off and the pump is run at a fixed pressure of 2.11 bar (30.59 p.s.i.).
Ink is circulated around the primary circuit for 5 minutes to purge a new replacement
filter.
v2.1 68084
FILTER PURGE

plus plus
Pressure Normal Startup (P2) 2.11 bar 2.11 bar 2.11 bar 2.11 bar 2.11 bar 2.11 bar
Figure 3-39. Filter Purge Summary Table
FA69084–1
Gutter Dry Cycle Sequence
v2.1 68085
GUTTER DRY CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Figure 3-40. Gutter Dry Cycle Summary Table
Empty Tank Sequence

This sequence is one of the flush types used in the System Flush procedure.
v2.1 68086
EMPTY TANK

plus plus
Figure 3-41. Empty Tank Summary Table
Solvent Drain Sequence

This sequence is one of the flush types used in the System Flush procedure.
v2.1 68602
SOLVENT DRAIN

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Figure 3-42. Solvent Drain Summary Table
FA69084–1
Nozzle Flush Sequence
The Nozzle Flush sequence can be used as an alternative to, or in conjunction with, the
Nozzle Clear sequence when there is a suspected blocked or obstructed nozzle.
Unlike the Nozzle Clear sequence, where solvent is drawn in through the nozzle, the
Nozzle Flush sequence automatically fills the nozzle with solvent and then forces a jet of
solvent out of the nozzle and into the gutter to flush away any deposits.
IMPORTANT: The Nozzle Flush sequence attempts to establish a solvent jet, and if this
occurs the solvent is returned to the ink tank. Excessive use of the Nozzle
Flush sequence will, consequently, greatly reduce the viscosity of the ink
and cause the printer to fail. Therefore, the Nozzle Flush sequence must
not be used more than three times to clear a particular nozzle blockage.
The Nozzle Flush sequence is initiated by selecting the Nozzle Flush option on the Jet
Sequences page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet Sequences > Nozzle Flush).
Alternatively, the sequence can be quickly accessed by selecting the Nozzle Flush option on
the Menu page (Print Monitor > Menu > Nozzle Flush). The jet must be stopped before the
option can be selected.
For more details, refer to ‘Maintenance Page’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
At the start of the sequence all the valves are in the ‘off’ state and the pump is running,
with ink flowing in the primary circuit only.
v2.1 68089
NOZZLE FLUSH (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Solvent uptake 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Pressure Constant 2.64 bar 2.64 bar 2.64 bar 2.64 bar 2.64 bar 2.64 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Figure 3-43. Nozzle Flush Summary Table
FA69084–1
Ink Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only
After the printer is switched on, and before printing can take place, the pigmented ink is
mixed in the tank by the action of the Ink Mixing sequence. The duration of the sequence
varies between 5 and 15 minutes and is dependent on the time since the last ink mix.
At the start of the sequence all the valves are in the ‘off’ state, which begins with a 60-
second delay that allows the maintenance technician time to disable the mixing sequence, if
required.
Immediately before the start of the ink mixing part of the sequence, a ‘pump jog-start’
routine is done, where the pump is switched on and off continuously for a calculated time
(in seconds). This helps to stop the pigmented ink’s tendency to prevent the pump gears
from rotating during pump starting.
During the ink mixing sequence, ink is drawn from the tank and circulated through the
pump to the energized Ink Mixing valve. From the valve it is fed back in through the base
of the ink tank, where it mixes with the main body of ink. This continuous circulation of the
ink during the sequence thoroughly mixes the ink in the tank, keeping the ink pigment in
suspension, in preparation for printing.
Following this, ink is drawn from the tank through the pump to the main ink filter, and
then through the damper and energized Ink System Feed valve to purge the damper.
Finally, the Solvent Flush and Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valves are energized, which
allows the ink to be briefly drawn back from the printhead along the feed line.
v2.1 68601
INK MIXING—6800
IXING—6800 SPECTRUM PRINTER ONLY (2 m and 4 m conduits)

plus plus
Wait e
Abort opportunity time N/A 60 s N/A 60 s N/A N/A
Valves F PF P G T L M
Pressure Maximum Running (P4)
4) N/A 4.49 bar N/A 4.49 bar N/A N/A
Pump Pulsed mode
Wait Jog-Start time* N/A 10 – 40 s N/A 10 – 40 s N/A N/A
Pump Normal mode
Pressure Set to zero N/A 0.00 bar N/A 0.00 bar N/A N/A
Wait Constant N/A 10 s N/A 10 s N/A N/A
Pressure Ink Mixing pressure N/A 4.49 bar N/A 4.49 bar N/A N/A
Wait Ink Mixing time* N/A 5 – 15 min N/A 5 – 15 min N/A N/A
Valves F PF P G T L M (all off)
Wait Constant N/A 2s N/A 2s N/A N/A
Pressure Maximum Running (P4) N/A 4.49 bar N/A 4.49 bar N/A N/A
Wait Damper Purge time* N/A 1 – 3 min N/A 1 – 3 min N/A N/A
Valves F PF P G T L M (all off)
* Dependent on when the last ink mix occurred.
Figure 3-44. Ink Mixing Summary Table
FA69084–1
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (ULTIMA PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1065 1070 1075 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1506 1505 1565 1560 1575 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3560 3710
Sep 2009
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF
184 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
Reference Pressure Offset* (bits) Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
Normal Solvent Add Pressure Offset
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
Maximum number of consecutive
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation Offset
Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0
* Relative to 3103 ink.
Figure 3-45. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima Printhead)

3.6.8 Ink Type Dependent Parameters
3 — 58
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MIDI PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1065 1070 1075 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1506 1505 1565 1560 1560 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3560 3710
184 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 185 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0

FA69084–1
Figure 3-46. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi Printhead)
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (ULTIMA A PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1035 1055 1056 1058 1280 1290
Solvent type 3501 1535 1555 1555 1558 1540 1540
184 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
Adjusted manually according to published
Reference Pressure Offset* (bits)
offset data table
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation Offset Adjusted manually according to published
(VM + offset) (V) offset data table
Reference TOF (µs) 766 766 766 766 766 766 766
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 2.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.9 1.5 1.0
Figure 3-47. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima A Printhead)

INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MIDI A PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1035 1055 1056 1058 1280 1290
Solvent type 3501 1535 1555 1555 1558 1540 1540
184 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
Adjusted manually according to published
Reference Pressure Offset* (bits)
offset data table
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation Offset Adjusted manually according to published
(VM + offset) (V) offset data table
Reference TOF (µs) 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 2.0 1.0 0 1.2 1.4 0 1.0
Figure 3-48. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi A Printhead)
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MIDIEC PRINTHEAD)

Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 6100 6120 6220
Solvent type 6600 6650 6650
190 190 190
(bits)
+4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
25 25 25
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation VM (V) 125 125 80*
Reference TOF (µs) 1262 1262 1262

Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 10
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2400 2400 2400
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 14 14 14
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 0.0 0.0 0.0
*For 6220, at 35 °C decrease modulation voltage to 70. For temperatures below 25 °C, increase
modulation voltage by 4 V/°C to 140 V at 10 °C.
Figure 3-49. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (MidiEC Printhead)
FA69084–1
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MINI PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 1056 1240 1405
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF 178 178
188
(bits) fixed fixed
+4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
12 12 24
Solvent Adds
75 75
Reference Modulation VM (V) 50
fixed fixed
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 0 1.5 1.7
Figure 3-50. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Mini Printhead)
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MICRO PRINTHEAD)

Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 1075 1240 1405
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF 180 180 170
(bits) fixed fixed fixed
+4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
12 12 24
Solvent Adds
60 60 75
Reference Modulation VM (V)
fixed fixed fixed
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 0.3 1.2 1.0
Figure 3-51. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Micro Printhead)
FA69084–1
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (ULTIMA plus PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1009 1010 1014 1016 1018 1033 1035 1039 1043 1055 1056 1059 1065 1070 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1280 1290 1306 1311 1370 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1505 1506 1505 1505 1535 1505 1505 1555 1555 1505 1565 1560 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1540 1540 1605 1605 1670 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3561 3710
147 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FA69084–1
(bits)
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
12 24 12 12 12 12 24 12 24 24 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 24 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 5 10 10 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 5 10 10 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 1400 2000 1400 1400 2000 2000 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1400 1400 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 6 12 12 12 12 6 12 6 6 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 1.0 2.2 2.5 2.0 1.0 1.2 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.4 1.6 1.6 1.5 2.0 1.6 1.6 2.5 2.5 3.8 1.9 2.0 1.6 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5
Figure 3-52. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima plus Printhead)
3 — 61
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MIDI plus PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1009 1010 1014 1016 1018 1033 1035 1039 1043 1055 1056 1059 1065 1070 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1280 1290 1306 1311 1370 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1505 1506 1505 1505 1535 1505 1505 1555 1555 1505 1565 1560 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1540 1540 1605 1605 1670 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3560 3710
143 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
12 24 12 12 12 12 24 12 24 24 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 24 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 5 10 10 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 5 10 10 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 1400 2000 1400 1400 2000 2000 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1400 1400 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 6 12 12 12 12 6 12 6 6 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 1.0 2.2 2.5 1.7 1.5 1.2 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.4 1.6 1.6 1.5 2.0 1.6 1.6 2.5 2.5 3.8 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.5 1.5 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5
Sep 2009
Figure 3-53. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi plus Printhead)
3.7 Electrical Components
3.7.1 Overview
The 7300 printer has the following main electrical components:
• Mains Power Cable
• Mains Power Supply Switch
• Power On Switch
• Mains Filter
• Mains Input Fuses
• Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPSU)
• EHT Power Supply Unit (EHTPSU)
• Ink System Pump
• Ink System Valves and Cableform Assembly
• Cooling Fan
• Printhead Positive Air Pump (optional)
3.7.2 Mains Power Cable

The mains input power cable connects to the printer on the rear right side of the base unit.
IMPORTANT: For the printer to comply with EN 60204-1:1997. Safety of machinery.
Electrical equipment of machines. Specification for general requirements, the
printer must be connected to the mains supply in one of the following two
ways:
• By using a plug and socket arrangement.
• If the printer is hard wired to the mains supply, a mains disconnecting
device must be used between the printer and the mains supply.
Mains Cable Connector Protection

The cable connector is protected by an environmentally-sealed box with a hinged cover,
which must be opened to disconnect the mains cable from the printer. The cover is secured
by three screws, and the cable is routed out of the box through an opening in the bottom.
Orientation of the cable exit cannot be altered.
3.7.3 Mains Power Supply Switch

The mains power supply switch is mounted above the mains power cable connector cover,
on the rear outside face of the base unit on the right side.
It is a two-position, mains-rated rocker switch, protected by a splashproof cover, that
disconnects the printer from the mains supply. The on position is labelled ‘I’ and the off
position is labelled ‘0’.
The switch is a ‘fit once only’ component. The IP rating will be invalid if the switch is
removed and refitted or replaced.
FA69084–1
3.7.4 Power On Switch
This switch is mounted on the front right of the base unit.
It is a 2-pole, momentary-action ‘on’ switch, which, when pressed and released, connects mains
power to the LVPSU and thereby switches on the printer. Although it switches mains power
within the printer, it is not classified as a mains isolating switch, but is a mains voltage-rated
control device. To power down the printer, either the Auto Power Down feature must be
enabled, or the mains power supply switch on the rear of the printer must be manually set to
the ‘off’ position.
3.7.5 Mains Filter

The mains filter assembly is mounted on the rear inside face of the base unit on the right side,
below the mains on/off switch.
The purpose of this unit is to isolate and filter the mains input, preventing electrical noise and
‘spikes’ from interfering with the operation of the printer. It also prevents any electrical noise
from being transmitted from the printer to the mains supply wiring.
3.7.6 Mains Input Fuses

Two mains input fuses are housed in a dual fuse holder, which is part of the mains filter
assembly. The fuses are located below the mains cable connector, on the rear right side of the
base unit. To gain access to the fuses, the mains cable connector cover must be removed.
The fuses are 20 mm antisurge, ceramic, sand-filled, rated at 4 A for both 115 volts and 230
volts AC operation.
3.7.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPSU)

The LVPSU is mounted on a bracket, and this assembly is then mounted on the right outside
wall of the ink system enclosure.
It is a switch mode unit that provides the necessary voltage rails to power various systems
within the printer.
The input voltage range of the unit is between 85 volts and 264 volts AC, 50/60 Hz. A 10-way
Molex minifit junior connector receives the mains input as shown in the following table.
48209
Input 10-way Molex pin number
Live 1, 6
Neutral 3, 8
Earth 5, 10
Figure 3-54. LVPSU Input Details

There are four outputs of +5.1 V, +12 V, –16 V and +24 V DC. In addition, six outputs of 0 volts
are provided (all commoned), and a power fail (PF) control signal. If the input power is
interrupted causing the outputs to fall outside their tolerance of ≤ ±5%, the PF signal is asserted.
The following table provides details of the outputs on connector PL8, including connector pin
numbers.
68712
Output (V DC) Max. current (A) 16-way Molex pin number
+5.1 2.5 2, 10
+12.0 0.9 5, 13
–16.0 0.4 6, 14
+24.0 2.5 8, 16
0.0 N/A 3, 4, 7, 11, 12, 15
Power Fail N/A 1, 9
Figure 3-55. LVPSU Output Details
FA69084–1
3.7.8 EHT Power Supply Unit (EHTPSU)
The EHT Power Supply Unit is located at the front of the base unit on its own mounting
plate, which is attached to the front of the base unit and the air filter housing.
The unit generates the high voltages required for the printhead positive deflector plate, and
the modulation and charge generation circuits. It is powered by +24 volts DC from the
LVPSU via the IPM PCB.
A variable EHT output of 0 volts to +10 kV at 10 µA is provided, which is used to create
the +8 kV (maximum for all Mk7 printheads) electrostatic field between the printhead
deflector plates. The level of this output is determined by the EHT Program Input, which is
an analogue voltage of between 0 volts and 10 volts DC, with 10 volts equating to 10 kV.
The value required to generate 8 kV ±1.7% is entered into the printer (refer to ‘Charge
Calibration’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.)
The EHT default value for the particular message type (raster) being used is displayed (in
volts) on the Print Settings page (Print Monitor > Print Settings).
The EHT output is routed from the unit to the printhead via a red cable to a white Highvol-
style connector.
A further output of +300 volts, at a maximum current of 46 mA, supplies the charge and
the modulation amplifiers on the IPM PCB. On detection of output over-current between
52 mA and 58 mA, the output voltage falls to 0 volts.
Apart from the EHT output, all other voltages and signals are routed to and from the unit
via a 12-way Molex Mini-Fit Junior connector PL7.
The following table provides details of the inputs and outputs.
68005
Input Output 12-way Molex pin number
+24 V Power 6
EHT Program Input (0–10 V) 3
/EHT Enable 4
/300 V Enable 9
0V 5, 12
Chassis 11
+300 V 1
/EHT Over Current 10
Not connected 2, 7, 8
Figure 3-56. EHTPSU Input/Output Details
FA69084–1
3.7.9 Ink System Pump
This unit is a pump and brushless DC motor assembly mounted through an aperture in the
front wall of the ink system enclosure.
Its purpose is to pump ink round the ink system at different pressures as required by the
ink system control circuits. These pressure values depend on the different functions
performed by the printer during startup, normal running, nozzle clearing, and shutdown.
The motor is powered by +24 volts DC, and pressure control is achieved by a 0 volts to
5 volts DC drive signal supplied by the IPM PCB control circuits, via PL3.
Magnetic coupling from the motor to the pump ensures separation of the ink from the
electrical drive parts. The gears are made from polyetheretherketone (PEEK), which
provides reduced wear and long life. However, in the 7300 Spectrum printer a more robust
pump is used, which has gears made from more wear-resistant materials to combat the
abrasive nature of some pigmented inks.
The pump used in standard 7300 printers has an integral pressure relief valve (PRV),
whereas the 7300 Spectrum has an external PRV connected across the pump inlet and
outlet ports.
3.7.10 Ink System Valves and Cableform Assembly

The valves are mounted through the front wall of the ink system enclosure, which allows
the electrical and fluid connections to be isolated from each other. The fluid connections are
located on the inside of the enclosure, and the electrical connections on the outside.
Electrical connections to the valves are provided by the Valve Cableform Assembly from a
24-way Mini-Fit Junior connector (PL1) on the edge of the IPM PCB.
The following table gives details of the colour-coding and pin numbers of the Valve
Cableform Assembly wiring to the valves, the pressure transducer, the fluid level sensors
(float switches), and ink spillage detection. The electrical connectors for the valves are
numbered on their top surfaces for easy valve identification to prevent incorrect
connection, and this information is also provided in the table.
68596
VALVE CABLEFORM ASSEMBLY
Component Wire colours PL1 pin numbers
Feed Valve (1) Black; Purple 13; 14
(Red heatshrink)
Purge Valve (2) White/Yellow; Yellow/Brown 19; 20
(Yellow heatshrink)
Gutter Valve (3) Grey/Pink; Red/Blue 15; 16
(Green heatshrink)
Solvent Add Valve (4) White/Green; Brown/Green 17; 18
(Blue heatshrink)
Solvent Flush Valve (5) White/Grey; Grey/Brown 21; 22
(Violet heatshrink)
Ink Mixing Valve (6) Red; Black 1; 2
(6800 Spectrum only) (Black heatshrink)
Pressure Transducer Brown; Green; Yellow; Grey 6; 7; 8; 9
(Black heatshrink)
Level Sensor—Ink Red; White/Pink 12; 24
Level Sensor—Solvent White; Blue 5; 11
Ink Spillage Detection Pink (Green/Yellow heatshrink) 10
Figure 3-57. Valve Cableform Details
FA69084–1
3.7.11 Cooling Fan
The cooling fan is mounted on the top left side of the air filter housing. It is a 24 volts DC
device powered directly from the LVPSU and operates all the time that the printer is
switched on. Air is drawn in by the fan through the base of the cabinet, through the air
filter, around the inside of the cabinet and out through the vent holes in the sides.
The 7300 uses a fan that has a rating of 2.4 watts. In the 7300 (IP65 version) the fan is a more
powerful 6 watts unit because of the much thicker air filter used.
The cabinet air temperature is monitored by a thermistor set at a limit of 58 °C. If this
temperature is exceeded (for example, because of a fan failure or a blocked air filter), the
printer fails and the Print Failure message “2.08 Printer Over Temperature” is displayed.
3.7.12 Printhead Positive Air Pump

The printhead positive air pump is fitted to the top of the air filter housing, between the
EHTPSU and the cooling fan.
The pump has a rating of 2.4 watts and is supplied by +12 volts DC from connector PL9 on
the IPM PCB.
The purpose of the pump is to improve printer performance in environments where there
is dust, damp and condensation. A positive air pressure is supplied to the printhead to
reduce the ingress of airborne particles. The unit pumps filtered air from inside the printer
cabinet, along the printhead conduit to a stainless steel outlet fitting on the printhead. The
air flow to the printhead is greater than that through the gutter, which creates a positive air
pressure inside the printhead cover tube. This positive air pressure helps to keep the
printhead free of dust and other airborne particles.
The air supply pipe is fitted as standard to all Mk7 printheads. However, the pump is not
fitted as a standard part to the 7300 printer, but is available as an option (refer to the Linx
Ink Jet Printers Parts and Prices manual or contact your Linx Distributor).
FA69084–1
3.8 Electronics and Software
3.8.1 Overview
The main electronics system in the 7300 printer is contained on one printed circuit board
(PCB), known as the Integrated Processor Module (IPM) PCB, which is mounted vertically
on the left side of the cabinet. The Keyboard and Display Assembly in the printer top cover
contains the Display PCB.
There are also options of additional Auxiliary PCBs, which are vertically mounted towards
the rear of the base unit, to the left of the IPM PCB.
The functions of the circuit boards are briefly described as follows:
IPM PCB: Contains the main Central Processing Unit, which controls printer
operation. It also contains the Unique Number Identification Chip
(UNIC) and amplifiers for processing the printhead control
signals. The PCB also processes the inputs from the keyboard and
provides control of the display.
Display PCB: Simply provides connections from the IPM PCB for the display.
USB PCB: Controls the transfer of message data to and from a USB memory
stick connected to the printer. The PCB also controls the facility to
copy or back up the configuration of a printer and to restore a
configuration to any printer.
Auxiliary PCBs x 2: Optional boards for additional special functions, such as
Parallel I/O, and for future software options.
3.8.2 Circuit Diagrams

The elctrical system diagram for the 7300 printer is provided at the end of this manual.
3.8.3 IPM PCB
WARNING. LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST IN THIS

MAXIMUM CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE IPM PCB, BECAUSE
THERE CAN BE A MAXIMUM OF 300 VOLTS DC ON THE PCB WHEN THE PRINTER IS
TURNED ON. THE CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE
TAKEN.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
Test Points and Links

Test points and links are provided on the IPM PCB to help fault diagnosis. Links are also
used to enable or disable different printer functions, and some of the links must be fitted to
enable the printer to operate correctly.
Test points and links for the IPM PCB are listed below with details of their functions.
Details are applicable to Revision 7 of the IPM PCB, unless otherwise stated.
To make the test points and links easier to find, the board edges are marked with grid
square identifiers—A to D vertically, and 1 to 10 horizontally. A grid reference is provided
in brackets after each test point and link number in the following lists, which is used to find
it on the IPM PCB. Further help to find test points and links is provided after the following
lists in an illustration of the IPM PCB with a reference grid over it.
FA69084–1
Test Points
TP1 (B8/B9) HEAD TEMP. Analogue voltage of 0 volts to 11 volts DC relating to the
temperature sensed at the printhead by an embedded thermistor.
Hardware detects when the temperature exceeds +60 °C ±3 °C, at which
time Print Failure “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” is reported.
TP2 (B9) 300V. EHTPSU output of 300 volts DC.
TP3 (B9) EHT The EHTPSU requires calibrating to give a specific output of 8 kV by
EHT.
entering a calibration figure into the printer. An analogue voltage of
between 0 volts and 10 volts DC can be measured at this test point, with
10 volts equating to 10 kV.
TP4 (C7) –10VREF. This is the output of the –10 volts DC reference.
TP5 (C7) 5VREF. This is the output of the +5 volts DC reference.
TP6 (C9) GUTSENSE. The gutter sense circuit detects the presence of ink flow in
the gutter during a normal jet start sequence and under normal jet running
conditions (it is switched off during a Jet Test – Start sequence). If ink flow
is not detected in the gutter for any reason (for example, a misaligned jet),
the software shuts down the jet. The voltage measured at this test point
should be +5 volts DC if there is no ink jet detected, and less than +4 volts
DC if the jet is present in the gutter. These voltages may vary with time.
TP7 (C9) 10VREF. This is the output of the +10 volts DC reference.
TP9 (C8) VPOWERS. The energizing voltage rail for the valves can be checked at
this test point. It is either the energizing voltage of +24 volts DC, or the
valve hold-on voltage of +12 volts DC.
TP10 (C9) PUMP. Variable pump control voltage between 0 volts and +5.6 volts DC.
TP11 (C7) READPRESS. This is the amplified output of the pressure transducer and
is a voltage representation of the pressure in the ink system of between
0 volts and +5 volts DC. During normal operation, with link LK6 fitted, the
voltages measured at TP11 and TP12 are almost identical. The Actual
Pressure (Read Pressure) and Set Pressure values observed on the Monitor
Jet page (Maintenance page) are almost never the same due to tolerances
in the electronics.
TP12 (C6) SETPRESS. This is the Set Pressure value and has a range of 0 volts to
+5 volts DC. It represents the pressure set by the electronics to maintain
the required ink flow. During normal operation, with link LK6 fitted, the
voltages measured at TP11 and TP12 are almost identical.
TP13 (B3) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP14 (C3) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP16 (A2) SEC–DET. Secondary trigger input. This is the opto-isolated secondary
trigger signal, and is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital CMOS signal.
TP17 (A8) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP20 (C7) 12V. A convenient point to test for the presence of the supply on the
+12 volts rail from the LVPSU.
TP21 (C7) –16V. A convenient point to test for the presence of the supply on the
–16 volts rail from the LVPSU.
+5.1 volts rail from the LVPSU.
+24 volts rail from the LVPSU.
FA69084–1
TP24 (A8) PHASE A. Amplified analogue signal from the phase detector in the range
of approximately +11 volts to –15 volts. There should be less than 1 volt
peak-to-peak noise during quiescent (non-printing) conditions. When
printing, this signal looks erratic as the amplifier is driven firmly into
saturation by the presence of charged printing drops.
TP26 (B8) PHASE D. This is the peak value of the TOF digital signal of
approximately 5 volts.
TP27 (A2) PRI–DET. Next object input. This is the opto-isolated primary trigger
signal. It is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital signal, with the falling or rising edge
indicating the presence of the object.
TP28 (A2) MAINSE. Single-ended shaft encoder input. This is the opto-isolated shaft
encoder input, and is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital signal.
TP29 (C10) CHARGE. Charge amplifier output that is applied to the charge electrode.
The typical output range is 0 volts to +255 volts DC.
TP30 (B9) CHG–LOW. Low voltage charge signal, before amplification, of between
0 volts and –8 volts.
TP31 (A9) MOD–LOW. Low voltage modulation signal, before amplification, of
between 0 volts and –8 volts. A sine wave should be observed with a
frequency dependent on the type of printhead fitted: 64 kHz (Ultima plus
and Midi plus 75 µm); 80 kHz (Ultima and Midi 62 µm); 96 kHz
(Mini 50 µm); 120 kHz (Micro 40 µm).
TP32 (A10) MOD Modulation amplifier output. A sine wave of between 0 volts and
MOD.
255 volts AC should be observed with a frequency dependent on the type
of printhead fitted: 64 kHz (Ultima plus and Midi plus 75 µm); 80 kHz
(Ultima and Midi 62 µm); 96 kHz (Mini 50 µm); 120 kHz (Micro 40 µm).
The signal should be AC coupled with the peaks of the sine wave going
positive and negative with respect to 0 volts.
TP46 (A2) QUADSE Quadrature shaft encoder input. This is the opto-isolated
QUADSE.
quadrature shaft encoder signal, and is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital signal.
TP49 (A8) VBAT The state of the NiMH battery can be monitored at this test point,
VBAT.
and should be a maximum of 2.9 V DC and a minimum of 2.2 V DC.
TP50 (C3) 3.3V. A regulated supply voltage of 3.3 volts for the CPU, Gate Array, and
Memory circuits taken from the LVPSU +5.1 volts supply.
TP52 (A3/B3) 2.5V. A regulated supply voltage of 2.5 volts for the CPU, Gate Array, and
Memory circuits taken from the LVPSU +5.1 volts supply.
TP54 (C7) PRESST–. Pressure transducer output. A differential of 0 volts to 33 mV,
where 33 mV equates to 255 pressure bits. Measurement must be taken
between this test point and TP55.
TP55 (C7) PRESST+. Pressure transducer output. A differential of 0 volts to 33 mV,
where 33 mV equates to 255 pressure bits. Measurement must be taken
between this test point and TP54.
TP56 (C6) AIR TEMP. Analogue voltage of 0 volts to 5 volts DC, relating to the air
temperature sensed inside the printer enclosure by a thermistor located
close to the charge amplifier on the IPM PCB. The voltage rises with
increasing temperature but is non-linear. Hardware detects when the
temperature exceeds +58 °C ±2 °C, at which point Print Failure “2.08
Printer Over Temperature” is reported.
TP60 (B8) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP61 (A2) 0V. Zero volts test point.
FA69084–1
Links
LK4 (A7/A8) BAT. (Battery). Connects the NiMH battery to the message store so that
data is retained when the printer is switched off. The NiMH battery is also
trickle charged when this link is fitted. Removing this link deletes all
messages, datasets, downloaded fonts, logos and passwords from the NVR
(SRAM). In addition, various other parameters in flash memory are reset
to their default values, for example: Printhead Code, Ref Modulation,
Conduit Length, Ink Type, Head Height—these will all need to be re-
entered. It is recommended that the Linx Sync software is used to back up
the data prior to removing this link.
LK5 (B4) MONITOR. This link can be fitted to boot the software from a temporarily
fitted EPROM (IC62).
LK6 (C7) OPEN LOOP. Removal of this link breaks the feedback loop that controls
the pump and pressure circuits. By removing the link it is possible to
energize the pump even though there may be a fault in the pressure
transducer circuit or ink system. Because of the non-linearities in the
control loop, the scaling factors for the Set Pressure commands on the
Monitor Jet page (Maintenance page) do not apply when the link is
removed. The Actual Pressure (Read Pressure) command is unaffected.
This link should normally be fitted.
LK7 (A5/B5) S/W LINKS. Links LK7A, LK7B, LK7C, LK7D, LK7E, LK7F, LK7G, and
LK7H are software-readable links and as such should not be moved or
interfered with. More specifically, when link LK7B is fitted, the 7300
Spectrum ink options are enabled.
LK8 (B9) VC. Connects the 300 volts DC stabilized supply to the charge amplifier.
Selective removal of either LK8 or LK25 can be useful to isolate a fault if a
“2.04 300V Power Supply” fault is reported.
LK9 (B1/C1) 5V/24V. Selects the appropriate line driver for a single-ended shaft
encoder: either position A (pins 1 and 2) for 5 volts DC, or position B (pins
2 and 3) for 24 volts DC. For an open-collector device the position of link
LK9 is irrelevant.
LK11 (A1) ROLLBACK. When a quadrature shaft encoder is used, this link selects
between secondary sensor input and rollback output for direction sensing
of the production line. Position A (pins 1 and 2) selects secondary sensor
input, and position B (pins 2 and 3) selects rollback.
LK12 (B1) 5V/24V. Selects the appropriate line driver for a quadrature shaft encoder:
either position A (pins 1 and 2) for 5 volts DC, or position B (pins 2 and 3)
for 24 volts DC. For an open-collector device the position of link LK12 is
irrelevant.
LK19 (B4) SAFETY O/R.. (Safety Override). Software-readable link.
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. WHEN THE ‘COVER OVERRIDE’

LINK LK21 IS FITTED AND THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS REMOVED, 300
VOLTS DC CONTINUES TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE CHARGE ELECTRODE.
THE EHT ALSO CONTINUES TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE DEFLECTOR
PLATES.
THE CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE
TAKEN WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTHEAD WITH LINK LK21 FITTED
AND WITH THE COVER TUBE REMOVED. DO NOT FIT LINK LK21
PERMANENTLY AND DO NOT LEAVE THE PRINTER UNATTENDED WHILE
THE LINK IS FITTED.
THERE IS A DANGER OF INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK IF
THIS SAFETY WARNING IS IGNORED.
FA69084–1
When this link is fitted, the printhead Over Temperature sense and the
EHT Trip sense signals do not disable the 300 V, ink system pump, Feed
valves and EHT. However, the EHT Trip sense will disable the EHT
internally on the EHTPSU regardless of LK19 being fitted. The link may be
fitted with caution to aid fault diagnosis. See also System Warning “3.15
Safety Override Active”.
LK20 (B4/B5) POWER OFF O/R. (Power Off Override). Software-readable link. When
this link is fitted the auto power down mains on/off switch cannot be
switched off by the software. See also System Warning “3.14 Power Off
Override Active”.
LK21 (B4) COVER OFF O/R. (Cover Override). Software-readable link.
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE. WHEN THE ‘COVER OVERRIDE’ LINK LK21 IS

FITTED AND THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS REMOVED, 300 VOLTS DC
CONTINUES TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE CHARGE ELECTRODE. THE EHT
ALSO CONTINUES TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE DEFLECTOR PLATES.
THE CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE
TAKEN WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTHEAD WITH LINK LK21 FITTED
AND WITH THE COVER TUBE REMOVED. DO NOT FIT LINK LK21
PERMANENTLY AND DO NOT LEAVE THE PRINTER UNATTENDED WHILE
THE LINK IS FITTED.
THERE IS A DANGER OF INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK IF
THE CORRECT ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN.
When this link is fitted, the EHT and charge voltage remain on when the
printhead cover tube is removed (that is, they are not automatically
disabled). This allows printing to continue for fault diagnosis purposes.
The red strobe LED also remains lit. See also System Warnings “3.12
Printhead Cover Off” and “3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted”. After
removing the printhead cover tube and then fitting the link (or refitting the
printhead cover tube), a period of approximately 3 to 4 seconds elapses
before printing recommences.
See also: ‘Cover Override ‘ in Chapter 4: ‘System Options’ (Menu > Setup >
Installation > Printhead > Cover Override).
LK22 (A2) RXD3. Selects either RS232 or RS422 for the SCC3 port receive line.
Position A (pins 1 and 2) for RS232, or position B (pins 3 and 4) for RS422.
LK23 (A2) SMRXD2. Comms selection for SMRXD2. The options are:
Position A (pins 1 and 2)—RS422 Remote Display
Position B (pins 3 and 4)—RS232 SMC2 port (debug)
Position C (pins 5 and 6)—Auxiliary PCB
NOTE: Early 7300 IPM PCBs, part number AS13777 (FA71084), must have
LK23 fitted in position C, which allows the printer to identify that
a USB memory stick is fitted.
LK24 (A1) RS232. This is a bank of 18 pins that select RS232 for the SCC3 port. All
must be fitted for selection. This link is to be used in conjunction with link
LK46 RS422.
LK25 (A9) VM. Connects the 300 volts DC stabilized supply to the modulation
amplifier. Selective removal of either LK8 or LK25 can be useful to isolate a
fault if a “2.04 300V Power Supply” fault is reported.
FA69084–1
LK26 (B4/B5) BIST. (Built In Self-Test). Software-readable link. When fitted it places the
gate array (IC41) in self-test mode, which generates a staircase waveform
with historic correction.
LK27 (B4/B5) GUTTER O/R. (Gutter Sense Override). The gutter sense circuit detects the
presence of ink flow in the gutter during a normal jet start sequence and
under normal jet running conditions (it is switched off during a Jet Test –
Start sequence). If ink flow is not detected in the gutter for any reason (for
example, a misaligned jet), the software shuts down the jet. Absence of ink
in the gutter is detected within approximately 10 seconds. With link LK27
fitted, the software starts and maintains the jet regardless of the gutter
detection status. See also System Warning “3.16 Gutter Override Active”.
LK29 (C6) SPECTRUM. The ink system pump control characteristics are different in
the 7300 Spectrum printer from those in the standard 7300 printer. This
link determines the response time of the pump feedback loop, and its
position depends on which type of printer is being operated. It is fitted in
position A (pins 1 and 2) for a standard 7300 printer, and in position B
(pins 2 and 3) for the 7300 Spectrum printer. This link is to be used in
conjunction with link LK30.
LK30 (C6) SPECTRUM. The ink system pump control characteristics are different in
the 7300 Spectrum printer from those in the standard 7300 printer. This
link determines the response time of the pump feedback loop, and its
position depends on which type of printer is being operated. It is fitted in
position A (pins 1 and 2) for a standard 7300 printer, and in position B
(pins 2 and 3) for the 7300 Spectrum printer. This link is to be used in
conjunction with link LK29.
LK31 (C3) BUZZER. This link, when removed, inhibits the internal warning buzzer,
BUZZER
and may be removed when fault finding to relieve personal irritation! It
should normally be fitted.
LK32 (B1) NPN/PNP (PRI). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of primary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B (pins
2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK33 and
LK34.
LK34.
LK33.
LK35 (B1/B2) PRI–DBM When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3),
PRI–DBM.
and LK36 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM
debounce of 1 ms is set on the primary trigger input. The default position
for this link and link LK36 is position A (between pins 1 and 2), which both
together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of 55 µs. (See the subsection
‘Primary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
LK36 (B1/B2) PRI–DBS. When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and
LK35 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), SLOW debounce of up
to 25 ms is set on the primary trigger input, which filters out multiple
primary trigger edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly useful
when a relay contact is used as a trigger source. The default position for
this link and link LK35 is position A (between pins 1 and 2), which both
‘Primary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
FA69084–1
LK37 (A1) NPN/PNP (SEC). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of secondary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B
(pins 2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK38
and LK39.
and LK39.
and LK38.
LK40 (B1/B2) SEC–DBM. When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3),
and LK41 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM
debounce of 1 ms is set on the secondary trigger input. The default position
‘Secondary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
LK41 (A1/A2) SEC–DBS. When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and
LK40 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), SLOW debounce of up
to 25 ms is set on the secondary trigger input, which filters out multiple
secondary trigger edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly
useful when a relay contact is used as a trigger source. The default position
‘Secondary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
LK42 (A1) ISOL NON–ISOL. Selects between an isolated or a non-isolated secondary
trigger input. The link can be fitted in the ISOL position when triggering
from a device that has its own power supply (for example, a PLC) that
needs to be isolated from the printer, or when the printer is being operated
in particularly electrically noisy environments. Position A (pins 1 and 2)
for non-isolated; position B (pins 2 and 3) for isolated.
LK44 (A2/A3) USB PWR. Selects either internal or external power for USB
communication. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for external power; position B
(pins 2 and 3) for internal power.
LK46 (A1) RS422. This is a bank of 18 pins that select RS422 for the SCC3 port. All
must be fitted for selection. This link is to be used in conjunction with link
LK24 RS232.
FA69084–1
The following table gives the IPM PCB links, their functions and default positions. Also,
representations of some links are provided (where applicable) that show their default
positions and orientations as seen on the IPM PCB. This is to help the maintenance
technician ensure that links are fitted to the correct pins for the required functions.
68848
Link Function Default Position and Orientation
LK4 BAT Fitted

LK5 MONITOR Not fitted
LK6 OPEN LOOP Fitted
LK7 S/W LINKS Position 7B—Spectrum only
LK8 VC Fitted
LK9 5V/24V Position A—5V
LK11 ROLLBACK Position A
LK12 5V/24V Position A—5V

LK19 SAFETY O/R Not fitted
LK20 POWER OFF O/R Not fitted
LK21 COVER OFF O/R Not fitted
A
LK22 RXD3 Position A—RS232 B
C
B
LK23 SMRXD2 Position B—RS232 A
LK24 RS232 All Fitted

LK25 VM Fitted
LK26 BIST Not fitted
LK27 GUTTER O/R Not fitted
LK29 SPECTRUM Position A—STD
LK30 SPECTRUM Position A—STD

LK31 BUZZER Fitted
LK32 NPN/PNP (PRI) Position A—NPN

LK35 PRI–DBM Position A
LK36 PRI–DBS Position A

LK37 NPN/PNP (SEC) Position A—NPN

LK40 SEC–DBM Position A
LK41 SEC–DBS Position A
LK42 ISOL NON–ISOL Position A—NON–ISOL

LK44 USB POWER Position A—EXT
LK46 RS422 Not fitted
Figure 3-58. IPM PCB Link Default Positions
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
69393

3 — 75
Test Point Link
Figure 3-59. IPM PCB Test Points and Links Locations
Sep 2009
Safety Functions
Detection and safety lock-out hardware guards against hazardous situations arising as a
result of fault conditions, according to the following table.
68002
Fault condition Action
Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
EHT off 300 V off Ink Feed P’head Feed Pump off
valve off valve off
EHT Over Current ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Printhead Over Temp. ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Printhead Cover Off ✔ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Figure 3-60. Fault Conditions and Actions

NOTES:
1. Links enable unsafe conditions to be overridden.
2. The Cover Override link defeats the Printhead Cover Off detector.
3. The Safety Override link defeats all safety detectors.
4. All override links are readable by the software.
Replacement and Calibration

If the IPM PCB or pressure transducer is replaced, or the software is updated, the
electronics system must be calibrated. If a calibration is required, refer to the ‘Charge
Amplifier Calibration’ and ‘Pressure Transducer Calibration’ maintenance instructions in
Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
In addition, unless the Linx Sync Service Tool or the USB facility is used to back up the
parameter settings of the printer prior to replacing the IPM PCB, the original settings will
need to be re-entered. The same applies if the software is upgraded, which reinitializes the
NVR causing the line configuration settings of the printer to be reset to the default values.
Refer to the ‘Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures’ maintenance instruction in Chapter
The printer’s UNIC is located on the IPM PCB and this must also be removed and fitted to
the replacement PCB. The Printer Configuration Code must then be re-entered for the
printer to access the required options (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation > ID >
Printer Configuration Code).
3.8.4 Display PCB

The user interface consists of a full QWERTY membrane keypad (see Figure 3-2), a 1/4
VGA colour TFT-LCD display screen, and a Display PCB.
The Display PCB is fitted to the rear of the display screen, and the combined assembly is
fitted inside the top cover of the printer. A single Power PC CPU on the IPM PCB processes
the input from the keyboard and provides control of the display screen.
There are no test points or links on the Display PCB of the 7300 printer.
3.8.5 Auxiliary PCBs

An optional Auxiliary PCB is available for the 7300 printer that provides a Parallel Input/
Output (PIO) capability. The PIO PCB is fitted to a plate on the rear panel of the printer.
This accessory provides remote control of, for example, message selection, printing start
and stop, and indications for warnings and faults.
Refer to the section ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter for more information about the
Parallel Interface option.
FA69084–1
3.8.6 Software
Downloading Software
The 7300 System Software program is stored in Flash memory (IC58 and IC59) on the IPM
PCB.
The software is downloaded to the printer from a desktop or laptop PC via the serial
communications link. This comms link is used to communicate between the PC and the
printer, and internally between the IPM PCB and the Display PCB. Connection between the
PC and the printer is achieved via the RS232 interface cable connected to the printer rear
panel RS232 INTERFACE connector.
The procedure for downloading the 7300 System Software is described in the ‘Linx Sync
(Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
3.9 External Signals

The following external signals information contains descriptions of the Primary Trigger,
Secondary Trigger, Shaft Encoders, Alarm Output, RS232 and RS422 Interfaces, and the
USB facility.
3.9.1 Primary Trigger

rigger
Trigger Device Types
The primary trigger input can be from a photocell, a contact switch, a relay contact, a signal
from a PLC, or many other sources.
A photocell would normally be used to detect the presence of the product on the
production line as it approaches the printhead, and to supply a ‘next object’ signal to the
printer firmware. This initiates a print delay, after which a message is printed. By correctly
positioning the photocell and programming a suitable delay, the position of the message on
the product (print registration) can be controlled. The primary trigger can also perform the
same function as the secondary trigger.
The input is connected to either SK1 or SK2 on the IPM PCB. These two connectors are
located through the printer rear panel, and identified as PRIMARY TRIGGER/SHAFT
ENCODER and SECONDARY TRIGGER/SHAFT ENCODER, respectively. The two
connectors are wired in parallel so either may be used for a primary trigger device. The
hardware input circuit is separate from, but identical to, that of the secondary trigger.
Signal conditions for the primary trigger are a sink/source (NPN/PNP) current of greater
than 20 mA per printer input, and a signal duration of greater than 100 µs.
The primary trigger source should be an open-collector device, of either NPN or PNP type,
capable of using a 24 volts supply only, or it can be a volt-free relay contact. The choice of
photocell type is determined by fitting the three links LK32, LK33 and LK34 in one of two
positions—position A (between pins 1 and 2) for NPN, or position B (between pins 2 and 3)
for PNP.
FA69084–1
Typical configurations for NPN and PNP photocells used as primary triggers are shown in
the following two simplified illustrations.
69083
SK1/SK2
6900 PRINTER
NPN PHOTOCELL 1 24VF
LK33
PRIMARY
3 2 1
TRIGGER 6
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
LK32 LK34 signal to
24V IC73 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
Figure 3-61. Primary Trigger—NPN Configuration
69084
SK1/SK2
6900 PRINTER
PNP PHOTOCELL 1 24VF
LK33
PRIMARY
3 2 1
TRIGGER 6
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
LK32 LK34 signal to
24V IC73 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
Figure 3-62. Primary Trigger—PNP Configuration
Debounce
The software determines from which edge of the input signal (leading or trailing edge) the
‘next object’ triggers are being generated. SLOW debounce of approximately 25 ms can be
set on the primary trigger input by fitting link LK35 in position A (between pins 1 and 2),
and link LK36 in position B (between pins 2 and 3), which filters out multiple primary
trigger edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly useful when a relay contact is
used as a trigger source.
When link LK35 is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and link LK36 in position A
(between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM debounce of approximately 1 ms is set on the primary
trigger input. The default position for links LK35 and LK36 is position A (between pins 1
and 2), which both together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of approximately 50 µs.
FA69084–1
3.9.2 Secondary Trigger
Trigger Device Types
The secondary trigger input can be from a photocell, a contact switch, a relay contact, a
signal from a PLC, or many other sources. The secondary trigger would normally be used
to increment or reset sequential numbers or messages, or to change from printing one
message to another. The secondary trigger can also perform the same function as the
primary trigger.
The input is connected to either SK1 or SK2 on the IPM PCB. These two connectors are
located through the printer rear panel, and identified as PRIMARY TRIGGER/SHAFT
ENCODER and SECONDARY TRIGGER/SHAFT ENCODER, respectively. The two
connectors are wired in parallel so either may be used for a secondary trigger device. The
hardware input circuit is separate from, but identical to, that of the primary trigger.
Signal conditions for the secondary trigger are a sink/source (NPN/PNP) current of
greater than 20 mA per printer input, and a signal duration of greater than 100 µs.
The secondary trigger source should be an open-collector device, of either NPN or PNP
type, capable of using a 24 volts supply only, or it can be a volt-free relay contact. The
choice of trigger device type is determined by fitting the three links LK37, LK38 and LK39
in one of two positions—position A (between pins 1 and 2) for NPN, or position B (between
pins 2 and 3) for PNP.
Typical configurations for NPN and PNP photocells used as secondary triggers are shown
in the following two simplified illustrations. Note that, for clarity, the isolated secondary
input is not shown.
69085
SK1/SK2
6900 PRINTER
NPN PHOTOCELL 1 24VF
LK38
3 2 1
SECONDARY
TRIGGER 4
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
24V
LK37 LK39 signal to
IC74 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
Figure 3-63. Secondary Trigger—NPN Configuration

69086
SK1/SK2
6900 PRINTER
PNP PHOTOCELL 1 24VF
LK38
3 2 1
SECONDARY
TRIGGER 4
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
24V
LK37 LK39 signal to
IC74 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
Figure 3-64. Secondary Trigger—PNP Configuration
FA69084–1
Isolated/Non-Isolated Secondary Trigger Input
There is a choice of an isolated or non-isolated secondary trigger input. Link LK42 can be
fitted in the ISOL position (between pins 2 and 3) in the following circumstances:
• When triggering from a device that has its own power supply (for example, a PLC) and
it is preferred that this is not connected to the printer.
• When the printer is being operated in an environment where there is a high level of
electrical noise.
If an isolated secondary trigger input is used, links LK37, LK38, and LK39 must be fitted in
the NPN configuration. Also, the PRIMARY TRIGGER/SHAFT ENCODER connector must
have the positive trigger connected to pin 5, and the negative trigger connected to pin 4.
Fitting link LK42 between pins 1 and 2 selects the non-isolated secondary trigger input.
Debounce
The software determines from which edge of the input signal (leading or trailing edge) the
secondary triggers are being generated. SLOW debounce of approximately 25 ms can be set
on the secondary trigger input by fitting link LK40 in position A (between pins 1 and 2), and
link LK41 in position B (between pins 2 and 3), which filters out multiple secondary trigger
edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly useful when a relay contact is used as
a trigger source.
When link LK40 is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and link LK41 in position A
(between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM debounce of approximately 1 ms is set on the secondary
trigger input. The default position for links LK40 and LK41 is position A (between pins 1
and 2), which both together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of approximately 50 µs.
3.9.3 Shaft Encoders

Either a 5-volt or a 24-volt, single-ended or quadrature shaft encoder can be used. The
input circuit of the single-ended shaft encoder has a maximum frequency response of
80 kHz.
The shaft encoder is connected to either SK1 or SK2 on the IPM PCB. These two connectors
are located through the printer rear panel, and identified as PRIMARY TRIGGER/SHAFT
ENCODER and SECONDARY TRIGGER/SHAFT ENCODER. The two connectors are
wired in parallel so either may be used for a shaft encoder.
The supply voltage selection for a shaft encoder is determined by fitting link LK9 (single-
ended shaft encoder) or link LK12 (quadrature shaft encoder) in one of two positions. Pins
1 and 2 are linked for a 5-volt shaft encoder, and pins 2 and 3 are linked for a 24-volt shaft
encoder. The position of link LK9 or link LK12 is irrelevant when an open-collector type of
shaft encoder is used. Regardless of the supply voltage setting, the shaft encoder must be
capable of sinking 10 mA per printer.
NOTE: If a quadrature shaft encoder is used, the printer counts two pulses per encoder
pulse. For example, a 2500 p.p.r. encoder is seen as 5000 pulses per revolution.
FA69084–1
The following two simplified illustrations show the input connections for a 5-volt and a 24-
volt single-ended shaft encoder, respectively.
69087
5 V SINGLE-ENDED SK1/SK2 6900 PRINTER
SHAFT ENCODER 3 5VF
24VF
1
SE INPUT 8
4 x 910R 470R
NOTE: 2
LK9
Connections and
3 1
LK9 shown for a
5 V Shaft Encoder 1
ANODE
IC11A 7
OUTPUT
2
CATHODE
CA
2 0VF
Figure 3-65. 5 V Single-Ended Shaft Encoder Connections

69088
24 V SINGLE-ENDED SK1/SK2 6900 PRINTER
SHAFT ENCODER 3 5VF
1 24VF
SE INPUT 8
4 x 910R 470R
NOTE: 2
LK9
Connections and
3 1
LK9 shown for a
24 V Shaft Encoder 1
ANODE
IC11A 7
OUTPUT
2
CA
CATHODE
2 0VF
Figure 3-66. 24 V Single-Ended Shaft Encoder Connections

The following two simplified illustrations show the input connections for the second
channel of a 5-volt and a 24-volt quadrature shaft encoder, respectively.
69089
5 V QUADRATURE SK1/SK2 6900 PRINTER
SHAFT ENCODER 3 5VF
24VF
1
QSE INPUT 9
4 x 910R 470R
NOTE: 2
LK12
Connections and
3 1
LK12 shown for a
5 V Shaft Encoder 4
ANODE
IC11B 6
OUTPUT
3
CATHODE
2 0VF
Figure 3-67. 5 V Quadrature Shaft Encoder Connections
FA69084–1
69090
24 V QUADRATURE SK1/SK2 6900 PRINTER
SHAFT ENCODER 3 5VF
1 24VF
QSE INPUT 9
4 x 910R 470R
NOTE: 2
LK12
Connections and
3 1
LK12 shown for a
24 V Shaft Encoder 4
ANODE
IC11B 6
OUTPUT
3
CATHODE
2 0VF
Figure 3-68. 24 V Quadrature Shaft Encoder Connections
Width Adjuster Unit

A Width Adjuster Unit (WAU) is available, which can be connected between the shaft
encoder and the printer to intercept the shaft encoder signal. The WAU enables the printed
length of a message to be more finely adjusted to suit the application than would be
possible with the printer’s Pitch setting alone. Alternative values for print pitch are
generated by the WAU to provide precise positioning of the code within a restricted space
on a product.
Refer to the Width Adjuster Unit User Guide for details of how to set up and use the unit.
3.9.4 Alarm Output

The alarm internal switching signal can be used to operate either a 24 volts external alarm,
or a mains-powered external alarm via a volt-free contact (VFC) relay.
The printer is shipped in the 24 volts alarm operation configuration, but the mains-
powered external alarm capability is available as an option.
24 Volts External Alarm

CAUTION: Printer Electrical Damage. Do not connect the ALARM OUTPUT connector of the
printer to the mains electrical supply or any other power source. Damage to the printer can
occur if this caution is ignored.
The output circuit for the 24 volts external alarm is protected by a 200 mA, self-resetting
thermal fuse, designated F3 on the IPM PCB. The alarm output is routed from connector
PL10 on the IPM PCB to the Alarm PCB, which is fitted to the back of the ALARM
OUTPUT connector. The output of the Alarm PCB is routed to the ALARM OUTPUT
connector on the rear panel of the printer.
68651
24 VOLTS ‘ALARM OUTPUT’ CONNECTOR
Signal Pins used
24 V L
Return N
Figure 3-69. 24 Volts External Alarm Pin Connections
FA69084–1
Mains (VFC) External Alarm
For a mains-powered external alarm, the alarm switching signal is used to operate a volt-
free contact (VFC) relay (RLA1) on the IPM PCB.
WARNING. LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. DANGEROUS VOLTAGE EXISTS IN THE PRINTER

WHEN IT IS DISCONNECTED FROM ITS MAINS ELECTRICAL SUPPLY, BUT A MAINS-
OPERATED EXTERNAL ALARM IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER. THERE CAN BE MAINS
VOLTAGE ON THE PCB ATTACHED TO THE ALARM CONNECTOR AND ON THE IPM PCB IN
THE AREA OF THE EXTERNAL ALARM RELAY.
WHEN THE PRINTER COVER IS REMOVED, DO NOT TOUCH THE ALARM CONNECTOR PCB,
OR THE IPM PCB IN THE AREA OF THE EXTERNAL ALARM RELAY.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
The alarm relay is protected by a 1 A, sand-filled, ceramic, slow-blow fuse (F2). The output
is routed from connector PL11 on the IPM PCB to the Alarm PCB, which is fitted to the
back of the ALARM OUTPUT connector. The output of the Alarm PCB is routed to the
ALARM OUTPUT connector on the rear panel of the printer.
Either ‘normally open’ (NO) or ‘normally closed’ (NC) VFC relay contact operation is
available at the ALARM OUTPUT connector. The external alarm equipment connected to
this output should have its wiring connected in accordance with the following table.
68652
MAINS (VFC) ‘ALARM OUTPUT’ CONNECTOR
Signal Pins used
Common L
Normally Closed (NC) N
Normally Open (NO) E
Figure 3-70. Mains External Alarm (Volt-Free) Pin Connections
VFC Relay Operation (Events Only)

In the following description of the VFC relay contact operation, it is accepted that all failure
and warning events are set to ‘Pulsed’ on the Alarm Setup page.
Normally Closed (NC)

Before electrical power is applied to the printer, the NC relay contact is closed. When
electrical power is applied to the printer, the NC relay contact state is determined by
whether or not any failures or warnings are present. If no failures or warnings are detected,
the alarm relay is not energized and therefore the NC relay contact remains closed. When
any failures or warnings are detected, the alarm relay is energized and the NC relay
contact opens. Note that with ‘Pulsed’ applied to all failure and warning events, the relay
contact is activated twice for warnings, and remains open continuously for failures.
Normally Open (NO)

Before electrical power is applied to the printer, the NO relay contact is open. When
electrical power is applied to the printer, the NO relay contact state is determined by
whether or not any failures or warnings are present. If no failures or warnings are detected,
the alarm relay is not energized and therefore the NO relay contact remains open. When
any failures or warnings are detected, the alarm relay is energized and the NO relay
contact closes. Note that with ‘Pulsed’ applied to all failure and warning events, the relay
contact is activated twice for warnings, and remains closed continuously for failures.
FA69084–1
VFC Relay Operation (Printing Only)
In the following description of the VFC relay contact operation, it is accepted that the
‘Printing’ event is set to ‘Constant’ on the Alarm Setup page.
Normally Closed (NC)

Before electrical power is applied to the printer, the NC relay contact is closed. When
electrical power is applied to the printer, the alarm relay is not energized and therefore the
closed When the printer enters the ‘Printing’ state, the alarm
NC relay contact remains closed.
opens Note that with ‘Constant’ applied to the
relay is energized and the NC relay contact opens.
‘Printing’ event, the relay contact remains open continuously while the printer is in the
‘Printing’ state.
Normally Open (NO)

Before electrical power is applied to the printer, the NO relay contact is open. When
electrical power is applied to the printer, the alarm relay is not energized and therefore the
NO relay contact remains open.
open When the printer enters the ‘Printing’ state, the alarm relay
is energized and the NO relay contact closes.
closes Note that with ‘Constant’ applied to the
‘Printing’ event, the relay contact remains closed continuously while the printer is in the
‘Printing’ state.
3.9.5 Dual Alarm

The Dual Alarm upgrade for the 7300 printer allows both the Mains (VFC) External Alarm
accessory and the standard 24 Volts External Alarm to be used. A replacement rear panel
plate is supplied in the upgrade kit, which has two holes that allow the connectors of the
two different alarms to be fitted.
A configuration code is required to enable the second alarm in the software. When enabled,
Alarm 2 is available on the Alarm page (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Alarm).
The software detects the presence of the additional VFC Alarm accessory and controls the
two alarm outputs. When an alarm condition is detected by the printer, the alarm software
selects which output is triggered.
The following examples are a common arrangement:
• The 24 volts external alarm is activated when there is a System Warning, for example,
“Ink Low”, “Solvent Low”, or Printhead Cover Off”.
• The VFC external alarm is activated when there is a Print Failure, for example, “Time
of Flight Failure”, “Phase Failure”, or “Internal Spillage”.
Refer to the section ‘Maintenance Instructions’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’ for fitting
instructions.
3.9.6 Multi-Stage Alarm

The 7300 printer can be fitted with an optional Multi-Stage Alarm accessory. To operate,
this accessory also requires the Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade accessory to be installed. Up
to four outputs are provided that are used to control multi-stage alarm beacons.
The purpose of a Multi-Stage Alarm is to provide more information on the printer status to
operators who are at a distance from the printer. An example of a Multi-Stage Alarm is a
three-stage alarm with three different coloured beacons. These beacons are configured as
follows:
• Green beacon for ‘printing’.
• Amber beacon for ink or solvent low warnings.
• Red beacon for ‘not printing’.
FA69084–1
The operator can configure the printer conditions that illuminate each beacon.
Two types of Multi-Stage Alarm accessory are available to replace the standard 24 V
external alarm output or the VFC Alarm Conversion:
• A 24 V Multi-Stage Alarm type.
• A VFC Multi-Stage Alarm type.
For more information on alarms, see the section ‘Alarm Output’ earlier in this chapter.
instructions.
3.9.7 Serial Interface

The 7300 printer has a serial interface known as the Remote Communications Interface (RCI).
This facility provides a method to control all the functions of the printer from a remote
device, for example a PC or PLC, through the serial port. The printer is a ‘slave’ that receives
commands from a remote host, and returns status information and data as requested.
The protocol used is defined by Linx and is described in detail in the Linx Remote
Communications Interface Reference Manual.
The printer uses the RS232 interface as the standard, which gives point to point
communications. The serial interface output can also be configured for RS422.
The selection of either RS232 or RS422 is determined by the positions of links LK22, LK24 and
LK46. For RS232 communications, link LK22 must be fitted in position A (between pins 1 and
2). Also, all nine links of LK24 (RS232) must be fitted, and all nine links of LK46 (RS422) must
not be fitted.
For RS422 communications, link LK22 must be fitted in position B (between pins 3 and 4).
Also, all nine links of LK46 (RS422) must be fitted, and all nine links of LK24 (RS232) must
not be fitted.
Cable Connections
Connection for the RS232 and RS422 interfaces is by the RS232 INTERFACE connector on
the rear panel of the printer, which is a 9-way, D-type connector with numeric pin-out
designations. Pin connections for the RS232 and RS422 interface cables are shown in the
following two illustrations.
COMPUTER 68047 PRINTER
"RS232 INTERFACE"
1 1 not connected
RxD RxD
2 2
TxD TxD
3 3
4 4 not connected
Gnd Gnd 5
5
6 6 not connected
7 7 not connected
8 8 not connected
9 9 not connected
NOTE: The D-type connectors are to be marked either 'COMPUTER' or 'PRINTER'

to ensure correct fitting orientation of the cable assembly.
Figure 3-71. RS232 Interface Cable Pin Connections
FA69084–1
COMPUTER 69158 PRINTER
"RS232 INTERFACE"
Tx+ Rx+
Refer to the computer's RS422 card

1
2 not connected
for pin connections 3 not connected
4 not connected
Gnd Gnd 5
Tx– Rx– 6
Rx+ Tx+
7
Rx– Tx– 8
9 not connected
NOTE: The D-type connectors are to be marked either 'COMPUTER' or 'PRINTER'

to ensure correct fitting orientation of the cable assembly.
Figure 3-72. RS422 Interface Cable Pin Connections
3.9.8 Parallel I/O Interface

An optional Auxiliary PCB is available for the 7300 printer that provides a Parallel Input/
Output (PIO) capability. The PIO PCB and a 25-way, D-type connector assembly is fitted to
a plate on the rear panel of the printer. This accessory provides 8-off 24 V DC inputs and 8-
off 24 V DC outputs.
With this accessory, the input and output signals can be used by the software in the printer
for a variety of applications, including:
• Selecting a message for printing from a list.
• Remote start and stop, and production line interlocks.
• Separate indications for warnings and faults.
The following are two typical applications for the PIO accessory:
• Typical Application 1: connect the printer to a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) to
stop the printer at the end of the day, or pause print if the guards of the machine are
open.
• Typical Application 2: use a series of photocells to sense the size of the product and
select the correct message to print.
instructions.
NOTE: There is an incompatibility issue with the PIO PCB and 6800 IPM PCBs earlier
than Issue 6. If these earlier IPM PCBs are converted to 7300 IPM PCBs via a
software upgrade, the PIO PCB does not function (printing is disabled).
Supply Voltage for the Inputs and Outputs
Link Positions for the Inputs

The selection of the supply voltage for the PIO inputs is determined by fitting links
LK2 (0 V) and LK3 (24 V) on the PIO PCB in one of two positions. Position A (between pins
1 and 2) for the internal (printer) 24 volts supply, or position B (between pins 2 and 3) for
an external 24 volts supply.
Link Positions for the Outputs

The selection of the supply voltage for the PIO outputs is determined by fitting links LK4
(24 V) and LK5 (0 V) on the PIO PCB in one of two positions. Position A (between pins 1
and 2) for the internal (printer) 24 volts supply, or position B (between pins 2 and 3) for an
external 24 volts supply.
FA69084–1
Sinking or Sourcing the Supply Voltage
Regardless of the supply voltage setting, the inputs must be able to ‘sink’ or ‘source’
greater than 10 mA, and the outputs can ‘sink’ or ‘source’ up to 160 mA.
Linx recommends to sink instead of source both the inputs and the outputs, as this is easier
and safer for the printer.
Auxiliary Bus Position

The auxiliary bus position is determined by fitting link LK1 (Auxiliary Bus Pos) on the PIO
PCB in one of two positions. Position 0 (between pins 1 and 2) for the lower bus, or position
1 (between pins 2 and 3) for the higher bus.
Position 0 is the default position and the correct position for link LK1 on a 7300 printer.
NOTE: Position 1 is the setting used when a second PIO PCB is installed.
If the Parallel I/O option is not displayed in the Setup menu (Print Monitor > Menu >
Setup) after the PIO accessory is installed, move link LK1 to the other position.
The following illustration shows the positions of all the links on the PIO PCB.
73058
LK4 LK5
LK2 LK3 LK1

Figure 3-73. Parallel I/O PCB Links
FA69084–1
Pin Connections
Pin connections for the PIO Interface are shown in the following table.
69322
PARALLEL I/O PIN CONNECTIONS
Pin no. Function Pin no. Function
1 0 V (for inputs) 14 Input 2
2 Input 1 15 Not connected
3 Not connected 16 Input 8
4 Input 7 17 Input 6
5 Input 5 18 Input 4
6 Input 3 19 Latch input
7 +24 V supply (for inputs) 20 Latch output
8 0V 21 0 V (for outputs)
9 Output 8 22 Output 7
13 +24 V supply (for outputs) — —
Figure 3-74. Parallel I/O Interface Pin Connections
3.9.9 Ethernet Interface

An Ethernet accessory is available for the 7300 printer. This has a cable assembly that is fitted
between SK9 on the IPM PCB and a connector fitted to a plate on the rear panel of the printer.
The 7300 printer uses the standard Internet Protocol (IP) over Ethernet (10Base-T, half-duplex
standard), which allows the printer to be connected to a standard Ethernet network or
directly to a local PC. RCI over IP is the only protocol currently supported.
The Ethernet interface provides a high-speed data interface to the printer. There is no
configuration required for the Ethernet physical interface, but the IP network settings do
require configuration.
instructions.
3.9.10 USB Facility

The USB facility allows an operator to transfer message data to and from a USB memory
stick connected to the printer. The facility can also be used to copy or back up the
configuration of a printer and to restore a configuration to any printer.
NOTE: Early 7300 IPM PCBs, part number AS13777 (FA71084), must have LK23 fitted in
position C, which allows the printer to identify that a USB memory stick is fitted.
The IP68-rated USB Type A connector is fitted to the front left of the base unit and includes
a protective sealing cap.
A small USB PCB is fitted to the IPM PCB on two stand-off pillars and is connected to the
IPM PCB by a ribbon cable. The USB connector is connected to the USB PCB by a standard
USB cable.
FA69084–1
3.9.11 D-Type Connector Assembly
Correct assembly of the D-type connectors used for trigger devices, shaft encoder, Serial
Interface, and Parallel Interface connections to the printer, is shown in the following
illustration.
Cable screen to be terminated by removing the
outer sheath and folding the braid back on itself
by approximately 10 mm. Braid to be secured
6321 by the cable clamp over the exposed braid.
6
7
5 8
9 (see NOTE 1)
4
10 2 1
3
1. Cable 6. Rubber gasket

2. Locking screw 7. Main body of hood
3. Holding cap 8. Cable clamp
4. Top part of hood 9. D-type connector
5. Hood screw 10. Contact plate–internal (only for shielded version)
NOTES: 1. For RS232 and RS485 cables, item 9 is a female connector.

2. Test all cable connections for continuity and short circuits before use.
3. The cable clamp over the screen braid is to be pulled into the connector
hood until it 'clicks' into place.
4. Pad out the cable outside diameter with heatshrink, if necessary, to
ensure a good seal at the rubber gasket.
Figure 3-75. Correct Assembly of the IP67 D-Type Connector
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
CHAPTER 4: SYSTEM OPTIONS
4.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the system options that are available in the Linx 7300 printer. The
information shown in this chapter refers to printers with Version 4.1 System Software
installed, unless otherwise stated.
Refer to the 7300 How To ... documents for more information about how to edit messages
and how to use other functions that are available from the 7300 user interface.
4.2 Print Monitor

The Print Monitor is the first page that is displayed after the startup (splash) screen, when
the printer is turned on. During startup, the system performs automatic self-tests while the
splash screen is displayed.
The message that was last used is displayed in the Current Message area of the Print
Monitor page.
69151
Figure 4-1. Print Monitor Page
FA69084–1
4.2.1 How to Select and Change Options
Six soft keys to the left of the display are related to the available options shown on the left
side of the displayed page. Press the soft key that is related to the required option to select it.
For example, to select the Menu option on the Print Monitor page, press the fifth soft key.
The Menu page is then displayed with a further list of options on the right of the page.
73062
Figure 4-2. Soft Keys and Related Options

Use the Up and Down arrow keys to the right of the display to move the dark blue highlight
box to the menu option that is required. When the option is highlighted, press the Select soft
key. This action can display a further page of options. Continue to use this procedure to select
options until the required page is reached.
How the option settings are changed depends on the type of option page that is selected.
Some option pages have a list of settings, and the Up and Down arrow keys are pressed to
highlight the required setting. For example, the list of printheads on the Printhead Type
page, or the lengths of printhead conduit on the Conduit Length page. Other option pages
allow a value to be entered, for example, numbers on the Printer Serial Number page.
When the option setting has been changed, press the OK soft key to save the change. The
new setting is displayed in the option on the previous page. If a setting is made but the
change is not required, press the Cancel soft key instead of the OK soft key. This action
returns the display to the previous page and to the setting in use before the page was opened.
To return to the Print Monitor page, continue to press the Exit soft key until the page is reached.
FA69084–1
4.2.2 Total System Options
When the Menu key is pressed, the system options are displayed on the Menu page. The
complete list of system options that are available with the Level E password is shown in the
following screen.
73063
Figure 4-3. Total Menu Page Options

Refer to Chapter 5: Maintenance > Maintenance Page for information about the available
maintenance functions and how to use them.
4.2.3 Password Access

The correct Service level password must be entered on the Change User Level page before
the complete list of system options can be accessed.
Five security access levels are used: Level A (Base), Level B (User 1), Level C (User 2),
Level D (Service 1) and Level E (Service 2). For the purposes of this maintenance manual,
only the Service 1 and Service 2 access levels are described.
Each access level has its default password, but the Service level passwords are not printed
in this manual. This is because, not all personnel who have access to this manual have
received enough training to use the complete list of Maintenance functions. This complete
list is only available with the Level E (Service 2) password. However, the two Service
access levels that are applicable to the 7300 printer are printed on a separate page (without
a page number) at the end of this chapter. The related Service level default passwords are
supplied to personnel who are authorized by Linx and to those technicians who have been
given training on a maintenance course approved by Linx. These passwords must be
written in against the access levels on this last page. The page must then be removed from
the manual and kept in a safe location.
FA69084–1
To get access to the complete list of system options (and therefore all of the Maintenance
functions), perform the following steps:
If the system is set to Level D (Service 1) or lower level.
1. On the Print Monitor page, press the Menu key.
2. On the Menu page, select the Change User Level option.
3. On the Change User Level page, enter the Level E password.
4. Press the OK key.
NOTE: All passwords are case sensitive. The default passwords are in upper case letters
and must be entered as such. If “ABC” is entered, it will be accepted, but “abc” or
“Abc” will be rejected. Passwords created by the operator can be a mixture of
upper and lower case letters.
69155
Figure 4-4. Change User Level Page
FA69084–1
4.2.4 Option Availability
The jet has three states: ‘Idle’, ‘Jet Running’, and ‘Printing’ (printing or ready to receive a
‘print go’ signal). Some options on the Menu pages are influenced by these states, which
can change the availability of some options and also the ability to select an option or
change its parameters.
Menu pages and their options are only displayed if they are valid for the password used
and the current jet state. For example, the Conduit Length option (Print Monitor > Menu >
Setup > Installation > Printhead) is only displayed when the two Service level passwords
are used. The Conduit Length option can be selected or changed only at Level E, and only
when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state. At Level D or when the jet is in the ‘Jet Running’ or
‘Printing’ states, the Conduit Length option is displayed but is dimmed and cannot be
selected or changed.
The following table shows when each page and the options the page contains are available,
related to the jet state and the level of password used. The symbols used in the table to
show when the pages and options are available are as follows:
• Pages and options that are displayed and can be selected or changed are identified with
a solid circle.
• Pages and options that are displayed, but cannot be selected or changed are identified
with an empty circle.
• Pages and options that are not available because of the jet state or password level, and
therefore are not displayed, are identified with a grey box.
NOTE: The Line Setup option on the Print Monitor page (shown in the following table) is
described first in this chapter.
73064A
LEVEL D LEVEL E
1st level page 2nd level page 3rd level page 4th level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
Print Monitor > Line Setup >

Trigger Refer to the Linx 7300 How To … documents ● ● ● ● ● ●
Speed Refer to the Linx 7300 How To … documents ● ● ● ● ● ●
Alarm Refer to the Linx 7300 How To … documents ● ● ● ● ● ●
Power Down — — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
After Jet Shutdown — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Delayed on Idle — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Delayed on Jet Run. — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Delayed on Printing — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Delay — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Print Monitor > Menu >
Event Log — — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Show Event History — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Event Setup — — ● ● ●
Block New Events — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Event Filtering — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Clear Event History — — ● ● ●
Hide Faults — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hide Warnings — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hide Information — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Stores Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide ● ● ● ● ● ●
Maintenance Refer to Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’ ● ● ● ● ● ●
(continued)
Figure 4-5. System Options Availability Table
FA69084–1
73064B
LEVEL D LEVEL E
st nd rd th
1 level page 2 level page 3 level page 4 level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
Setup Installation — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Date & Time — ● ● | ● ● |
Current Time ● ● | ● ● |
Current Date ● ● | ● ● |
Hijri Date | | | | | |
Nudge Hijri Date ● ● | ● ● |
Printhead — ● | | ● | |
Printhead Type | | | ● | |
Conduit Length | | | ● | |
Printhead Height ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cover Override ● ● ● ● ● ●
Printhead Code ● | | ● | |
Mod Slope | | | ● | |
ID — ● | | ● | |
UNIC Code | | | | | |
Printer Conf Code ● | | ● | |
Printer Serial No. | | | ● ● ●
Ink/Solvent — ● | | ● | |
Ink/Solvent Type | | | ● | |
Next Mix | | | ● | |
Last Mix | | | | | |
Mix Time | | | | | |
Disable Mix | | | ● | |
Locale — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Language ● ● ● ● ● ●
Use Language Defaults ● ● ● ● ● ●
Units ● ● ● ● ● ●
Calendar ● ● | ● ● |
Keyboard ● ● ● ● ● ●
Secondary Keyboard ● ● ● ● ● ●
Photocells — ● ● ●
Pri. Photocell Deadtime ● ● |
Sec. Photocell Deadtime ● ● |
USB Refer to the Linx 7300 How To … documents ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change User Level — — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Nozzle Flush Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide ● | | ● | |
Nozzle Clear Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide ● | | ● | |
System Information Refer to the Linx 7300 How To … documents ● ● ● ● ● ●
Figure 4-5. System Options Availability Table (continued)
FA69084–1
4.3 Line Setup Page
There are four options on the Line Setup page:
• Trigger
69154
• Speed
• Alarm
• Power Down
Figure 4-6. Line Setup Page

Only the Power Down option is described in this chapter, because it is the only option of
the four that requires a Service level password for access. Refer to the 7300 How To ...
documents for descriptions of the Trigger, Speed, and Alarm options.
4.3.1 Power Down

The Power Down option allows the printer to be configured for automatic power-down.
The electrical power is supplied to the printer by the Mains Power Supply Switch, which is
on the rear panel. To turn on the printer, set the Mains Power Supply Switch from the ‘0’
(off) position to the ‘I’ (on) position. Then press and hold (for 2 seconds) the Power On
push-button switch on the front of the printer.
A latching relay is fitted to the 7300 printer, which enables the printer to turn off
automatically under defined conditions.
The printer is turned off by the following methods:
• The power save functions on the Power Down page.
• The red [stop] key when the jet is not running (‘Idle’ state).
• The Mains Power Supply Switch on the rear panel. This is not a recommended method
to use to turn off the printer and must be used only in an emergency.
IMPORTANT: Although the automatic power-down function allows the printer to turn
off automatically, it is the responsibility of the operator to make sure that
the printer does actually turn off. The automatic power-down function
must be regarded as a convenience, NOT a safety device.
IMPORTANT: The automatic power-down function on the 7300 printer removes electrical
power from the control electronics, which safely disables the functions of
the printer. However, when power-down is completed, electrical power is
present in the internal cableform from the Mains Power Supply Switch on
the rear panel. This cableform is connected to the Power On push-button
switch on the front panel, and the relay on the IPM PCB.
During normal day-to-day routine maintenance, for example, when the
printer is washed, there is no need to turn off the printer at the rear.
IMPORTANT: The automatic power-down function is disabled if the Power Off Override
link LK20 is fitted. The Power Down option is not displayed on the Line
Setup page, and therefore the option cannot be activated.
FA69084–1
The power-down options and conditions are displayed when the Power Down option is
selected on the Line Setup page.
69157
Figure 4-7. Power Down Page

The printer can be set to automatically power down under configured conditions.
These conditions are shown on the Power Down page as After Jet Shutdown, Delayed on
Idle, Delayed on Jet Running,, and Delayed on Printing. The required condition is
enabled when it is highlighted and the Select key is pressed. This action changes the state
of the condition from No to Yes. The default condition is After Jet Shutdown set to Yes. A
combination of these conditions can be enabled at the same time.
The Delay option changes the power-down delay time.
If there are no conditions enabled, the printer will not automatically power down. The red
[stop] key on the control panel turns off the printer manually in this configuration.
Automatic power-down is disabled if the keylock timer is enabled and the time has
expired. Automatic power-down is disabled while a printer fault (System Failure or Print
Failure) is active. With either of these conditions, the printer must be turned off manually
with the red [stop] key on the control panel, and not with the Mains Power Supply Switch
on the rear of the printer. This method makes sure that data is saved before the printer is
turned off.
The word ‘activity’ in the following descriptions is defined as:
• Any events that cause the printer to print.
• Any external events that change the print data (that is, not time-based events that are
generated in the printer).
• Keyboard activity (that is, if any key is pressed).
• External communications (transmitted or received of data over the remote interface).
The descriptions of the four conditions when they are in their enabled states, and the Delay
option are as follows:
After Jet Shutdown

After the jet has shut down, the printer will automatically power down immediately
without any delay.
Delayed on Idle
If there has been no activity during the power-down delay time, AND the jet is in the ‘Idle’
state, the printer will automatically power down.
FA69084–1
Delayed on Jet Running
If there has been no activity during the power-down delay time, AND the jet is in the ‘Jet
Running’ state, a normal jet shutdown is performed followed by automatic power-down.
Delayed on Printing
If there has been no activity during the power-down delay time, AND the jet is in the
‘Printing’ state, printing is stopped and a normal jet shutdown is performed followed by
automatic power-down.
Delay
The power-down delay is the time, in minutes, during which there must be no activity
before the power-down sequence can begin. If any activity occurs during the power-down
delay time, the delay period is restarted. To change the delay time, highlight the Delay
option and press the Select key. The Up or Down arrow keys are used to increase or
decrease the time, and the OK key is pressed to accept the change. The default setting for
the Delay option is 60 minutes, the minimum setting is 1 minute, and the maximum setting
is 36000 minutes (600 hours).
When the power-down delay time has expired and the jet has shut down, a 5-second delay
occurs before power-down. This additional delay allows the printer data to be saved. After
this period, an information message is displayed that shows a countdown from 10 seconds.
Any activity during this period cancels the whole process and the printer remains turned
on.
4.4 Menu Page

73063
Figure 4-8. Menu Page

Only the Event Log, Maintenance, Setup, and Change User Level options are described in
this chapter. This is because some of the submenu options require a Service level password
for access. Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide and the 7300 How To ... documents for
descriptions of the remaining options.
FA69084–1
4.4.1 Event Log
The Event Log (Print Monitor > Menu > Event Log) contains information about the current
state of the printer. The information includes all current events and an event history.
Functions are also available for event filtering, and for configuring how and when each
event is logged. The total number of times an event has occurred is also provided.
Current Events
69093
Figure 4-9. Current Events Page

The Current Events page shows all the events that are present on the printer. All the events
are recorded in the lower Event part of the page in group order, that is, failures together at
the top of the list followed by warnings and then information events.
Show Event History

When the Show Event History key is pressed on the Current Events page, the Event
History page is displayed.
69094
3.03 Ink Low 06-07-13 15:16:51

3.04 Solvent Low 06-07-12 11:41:52
Figure 4-10. Event History Page
FA69084–1
All logged events, up to a maximum of 1000, are displayed in the lower part of the page
with a timestamp for each one. All the events in the list appear in date and time order, with
the most recent displayed at the top of the list.
The convention for the timestamp is ‘year-month-day hours:minutes:seconds’. For example, 06-
07-13 15:16:51 means that the event occurred on the 13th of July 2006 at 16 minutes and 51
seconds past 3 o’clock in the afternoon.
When the list is full (1000 events), the next event to occur is added to the top of the list and
the oldest event at the bottom of the list is deleted, and so on for all subsequent events.
Block New Events

When the Block New Events key is pressed on the Event History page, all further new
events are prevented from being added to the list. This function can be used when there are
many occurrences of a particular event in quick succession, for example, Over Speed
errors. The events continue to be logged, but are not reported in the list.
The key switches between the Block New Events and the Track New Events options (see
the following ‘Track New Events’ description).
Track New Events

69095
3.03 Ink Low 06-07-13 15:16:51

3.04 Solvent Low 06-07-12 11:41:52
Figure 4-11. Track New Events Option

This key switches off the ‘Block New Events’ function and the system returns to reporting
all new events that occur. The list scrolls to the top to show the most recent event first. All
new events that occurred while the ‘Block New Events’ function was used continue to be
logged, but are not reported in the list. When the Track New Events key is pressed, these
logged events are added to the list.
FA69084–1
Event Filtering
When the Event Filtering key is pressed on the Event History page, the Event Filtering
page is displayed.
69096
3.03 Ink Low 06-07-13 15:16:51

3.04 Solvent Low 06-07-12 11:41:52
Figure 4-12. Event Filtering Page

This page provides three keys—Hide Faults, Hide Warnings, and Hide Information—for
selecting which events from the Event History are displayed in the lower part of the page. The
keys switch between the Hide … and Show … options for each of the three groups of events.
Any combination of failures, warnings, and information events can be configured for display.
When different combinations of groups are selected for display (Show
Show …), events that
occur but are not in the selected groups are still logged but not displayed until that group is
selected. The System Event page is still displayed for all events that occur. System Failures
are always displayed in the Event History.
Hide/Show Faults
If the Show Faults key is pressed, all Print Failures that have occurred since the last Clear
Event History option was used are displayed.
Hide/Show Warnings
If the Show Warnings key is pressed, all System Warnings that have occurred since the last
Clear Event History option was used are displayed.
Hide/Show Information
If the Show Information key is pressed, all Information Events that have occurred since the
last Clear Event History option was used are displayed.
There are four Information Events, which are designated as follows:
• 4.00 Jet Test Start
• 4.01 Jet Test Stop
• 4.02 Normal Start
• 4.03 Normal Stop
FA69084–1
Clear Event History
When the Clear Event History key is pressed on the Event History page, the Clear Event
History page is displayed.
69097
Figure 4-13. Clear Event History Page

Yes
When the Yes key is pressed, all the events in the Event History are cleared and also all
event counts (see Reset Count on the Event Setup page). The confirmation message “The
Event Log has been cleared.” is then displayed.
After the log is cleared, any current events remain visible on the Current Events page.
No
When the No key is pressed, the display returns to the Event History page.
Event Setup
How each event is reported and logged is configured on the Event Setup page.
69098
1.00 Internal Failure

1.01 Stack Overflow
1.02 Corrupt Program Data
2.00 Printhead Over Temperature
2.01 EHT Trip
2.02 Phase Failure
Figure 4-14. Event Setup Page

All the possible events that can occur in the printer are displayed in a list in the lower
Setup part of the Event Setup page. The events are displayed in group order, that is,
failures together at the top of the list followed by warnings and then advisory messages.
To configure an event, the Up or Down arrow key is pressed to scroll the list until the
required event is highlighted. The highlighted event is displayed in the top box of the
Event Setup page and includes the numbers of times the event has occurred. The following
key options are used to configure the events.
FA69084–1
Always Log
When this key is pressed, every new occurrence of the selected event is always reported
and logged. The condition for the event is displayed in the second box from the top of the
page.
69099
This event is always logged.

1.01 Stack Overflow
2.01 EHT Trip
2.02 Phase Failure
Figure 4-15. Always Log Option

NOTE: This function must be used with discretion when the printer is receiving many
events in quick succession, for example, Over Speed errors. In this situation, the
user interface can become swamped with continuously displayed reports.
Log At Intervals
This function applies a default time interval, after an event has occurred, during which
new occurrences of the same event are not reported or logged. When the time interval has
elapsed, the next new occurrence of the same event is then reported and logged.
The default setting for all events is ‘Log At Intervals’.
When the Log At Intervals key is pressed, the selected event is logged at intervals of 20
seconds (the default interval). The condition for the event is displayed in the second box
from the top of the page (see Figure 4-14).
Never Log
When this key is pressed, the selected event is never reported but is logged. This function
contradicts the label for the key and is a known software error.
The condition for the event is displayed in the second box from the top of the page.
69101
This event is never logged.

1.01 Stack Overflow
2.01 EHT Trip
2.02 Phase Failure
Figure 4-16. Never Log Option
FA69084–1
Edit Interval
When this key is pressed, the Edit Interval page is displayed.
69100
Figure 4-17. Edit Interval Page

This page is used to change the reporting interval for the selected event. The time interval
(in minutes and seconds) is highlighted ready for a different time to be entered. When the
OK key is pressed, the display returns to the Event Setup page and the new reporting
interval is shown in the event condition box.
If the Cancel key is pressed, the display returns to the Event Setup page and the reporting
interval in the event condition box remains the same.
Reset Count
Every occurrence of an event is automatically logged, regardless of the rate at which it is
reported (see the preceding ‘Log At Intervals’). The number of times the event occurs is
included in the selected event that is displayed in the top box of the Event Setup page.
When the Reset Count key is pressed, the number of times the event has occurred is reset
to 0 (zero).
4.4.2 Maintenance
For full information about the Maintenance options, refer to ‘Maintenance Page’ in Chapter
FA69084–1
4.4.3 Setup
When the Setup option is highlighted on the Menu page and the Select key is pressed, the
following page is displayed.
73066
Figure 4-18. Setup Page

When the Installation option is highlighted on the Setup page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed.
73067
Figure 4-19. Installation Page

The Installation page allows configuration of the printer date and time, printhead
parameters, printer identification, the type of ink and solvent, locale parameters, and
photocell debounce.
FA69084–1
Date & Time
When the Date & Time option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
69162
Figure 4-20. Date & Time Page

The Date & Time page sets the correct date and time in European and Hijri formats.
NOTE: The Hijri Date and Hijri Date Offset (Days) options only appear on the Date &
Time page when the Hijri calendar is selected on the Calendar page (Print Monitor
> Menu > Setup > Installation > Locale > Calendar).
Current Time
This option displays the current time in the form ‘HH:MM:SS’, which can be changed if necessary.
When the Current Time option is highlighted and the Select key is pressed, a page is
displayed that allows the current time to be changed.
The current local time is entered from the keyboard, in the 24-hour format, as follows:
1. Enter two digits for the hours.
2. Enter two digits for the minutes after the first colon.
3. Enter two digits for the seconds after the second colon.
If a time setting is made but the change is not required, press the Cancel key instead of the
OK key. This action returns the display to the Date & Time page, and the Current Time is
not changed.
Current Date
This option displays the current, Gregorian calendar date in the form ‘YYYY-MM-DD’,
which can be changed if necessary.
When the Current Date option is highlighted and the Select key is pressed, a page is
displayed that allows the current date to be changed.
The current date is entered from the keyboard, in the numeric European format, as follows:
1. Enter four digits for the year.
2. Enter two digits for the month after the first hyphen.
3. Enter two digits for the day after the second hyphen.
If a date setting is made but the change is not required, press the Cancel key instead of the
OK key. This action returns the display to the Date & Time page, and the Current Date is
not changed.
FA69084–1
Hijri Date
This option displays the current, Hijri calendar date in the form ‘yyyy-mm-dd’, which is for
display only and cannot be changed. The Hijri date is automatically calculated from the
Gregorian date.
Hijri Date Offset (Days)

The Hijri calendar is a lunar calendar used by many Muslim countries. Each month has
either 29 or 30 days. The first day of each month is the day that the moon is first seen after
sunset. Different Muslim countries use different rules to decide exactly when the moon is
first seen. The Hijri Date Offset (Days) facility allows one or more days to be added or
subtracted to adjust for the different rules in different countries. Press the Up and Down
arrow keys to add or subtract a maximum of 4 days.
Printhead
When the Printhead option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
73068
Figure 4-21. Printhead Page

The Printhead page configures the printhead-related parameters.
Printhead Type
The 7300 printer can use any of the following eight printhead types: Ultima, Ultima plus,
Micro, Midi, Midi plus, Mini, Ultima A, and Midi A. The printhead type that is fitted to the
printer is selected from the list on the Printhead Type page. The default printhead type is
Ultima. If a printhead type is not selected, the printer will not start. When a printhead type
is selected, a default printhead code is displayed. See ‘Printhead Code’ later in this section
for more information.
Conduit Length
The Conduit Length page selects which of the two standard lengths of conduit is fitted to
the printhead. The correct length must be selected, which makes sure that the correct
timings for the startup and shutdown sequences are used. There are two printhead conduit
lengths, 2 metres and 4 metres. The default conduit length is 2 metres.
Printhead Height
The ink system pressure must be compensated for when the printhead is installed above or
below the height of the printer. Pressure is altered by 0.0047 bar (0.0012 p.s.i.) for every
millimetre the printhead is above or below the printer. For practical purposes, the
measurement is made vertically from the keyboard space bar to the printhead nozzle. (In
reality, the vertical distance is from the printer pressure transducer to the printhead nozzle.)
FA69084–1
The vertical distance is entered on the Printhead Height page in millimetres (mm). The
maximum distance accepted by the software is +2000 millimetres to –2000 millimetres. If a
greater distance is entered, the displayed value changes from black text to red text and the
OK key is dimmed.
If the printhead is installed below the printer, the distance is entered in the format ‘–X.X’. If
the printhead is installed above the printer, it is not necessary to enter a ‘+’ prefix; the value
is entered simply as ‘X.X’. The default setting is ‘0 mm’.
If the Printhead Height setting is changed, the printhead Reference Pressure is also
automatically changed. The Solvent Add Pressure value is calculated from the Reference
Pressure. Therefore, the Monitor Jet page (Print Monitor Menu > Maintenance > Monitor
Jet) displays different Solvent Add pressures for different Printhead Height settings.
IMPORTANT: Be careful with this option, otherwise bad printer performance can occur if
incorrectly set.
Cover Override
When the Yes option is selected on the Cover Override page, the Cover Override link LK21
on the IPM PCB is enabled. The function of link LK21 is described as follows:
• If the Yes option is selected and link LK21 is fitted, the link overrides the automatic
‘printhead cover off’ function. The printer does not disable the printhead EHT and
charge voltage when the removal of the printhead cover tube has been detected.
• If the No option is selected and link LK21 is fitted, the link is ignored. The printer
automatically disables the printhead EHT and charge voltage when the removal of the
printhead cover tube has been detected.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM PCB > Test
Points and Links > LK21 (Cover Override).
Chapter 6: System Events > System Warnings > 3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted.
Printhead Code
All 7300 printhead conduit labels contain important calibration information. This
information must be entered on the Printhead Code page when a new printhead is fitted,
when the software is reloaded, or when the IPM PCB is replaced. These calibration
parameters are used by the printer to get the best performance. An example of a printhead
conduit label and the calibration parameters are shown in the following illustration.
69173
Vmod
Reference SERIAL No. DV040 130

Pressure MODEL / INK MIDI 3103 Reference
CAL. CODE 179 255 Modulation
DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE. DISCONNECT FROM MAINS BEFORE REMOVING COVER
LINX PRINTING TECHNOLOGIES plc

Charge
MADE IN ENGLAND Calibration
Factor
Figure 4-22. Printhead Conduit Label
The composition of the nine-digit code displayed in the Printhead Code option is as follows:
• Digits 1 to 3 give the Reference Pressure value. The normal range of operation is 000 to
255 bits. This value is always displayed in bits, regardless of the units of measurement
selected in the Units option of the Locale page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup >
Installation > Locale > Units).
• Digits 4 to 6 give the Reference Modulation voltage, in the range 000 to 255 volts.
• Digits 7 to 9 give the Charge Calibration Factor, in the range 050 to 300.
FA69084–1
When a replacement printhead is fitted, the related code must be entered correctly on the
Printhead Code page. Make sure that every digit is exactly as shown on the printhead
conduit label.
The printhead code can be entered when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state only. When a correct
code has been entered, the code is stored in the printer memory until a new code is entered.
IMPORTANT: Be careful with this option, otherwise bad printer performance can occur if
incorrectly set. When a new printhead type and printhead code are
entered, the printhead type must be entered first. If the printhead code is
changed first, when the printhead type is changed the printhead code
reverts to the default printhead code.
Mod Slope
The Modulation Tracking Slope (measured in V/bit of pressure) is normally set as a default
that depends on the printhead type and ink type being used.
When the printhead type or ink type is changed (and the Printhead Type option in the
Printhead menu, or the Ink/Solvent Type option in the Ink/Solvent menu is changed), the
default Modulation Tracking Slope value for the new printhead and ink type combination
is used.
The Mod Slope option allows the maintenance technician to manually adjust the
Modulation Tracking Slope setting to match a different printhead and ink type
combination. This facility allows support of special printheads and inks.
The setting is variable from 0.0 V/bit to 5.0 V/bit in 0.1 increments. For example, a setting
of 1.0 is equal to an increase in modulation voltage of 1.0 V for every 1 bit of pressure
change. A setting of 5.0 is equal to an increase in modulation voltage of 5.0 V for every 1 bit
of pressure change. The setting is stored in non-volatile memory.
This option is only available with the Level E (Service 2) password and only when the jet is
in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state.
ID
When the ID option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is pressed,
the following page is displayed.
69166
Figure 4-23. ID Page

The ID page allows the printer to be configured with codes supplied by Linx to the
requirements of a customer.
FA69084–1
UNIC Code
The UNIC Code option displays the 12-character serial number used to identify each
printer. The number is provided by the Unique Number Identification Chip (UNIC) on the
IPM PCB, which has the same number printed on the chip, for example, ‘000002D9899F’.
The system software detects the presence of the UNIC on power-up and displays the serial
number in the UNIC Code option. If a UNIC is not found on power-up, an error page with
the advisory message “Valid UNIC Chip not found” is displayed. (“Invalid UNIC” is also
displayed in the UNIC Code option.) The printer must then be turned off and a valid
UNIC must be fitted before the printer can continue. To turn off the printer, press either the
red [stop] key or the OK key on the error page.
If the IPM PCB is replaced, the UNIC must be removed from the old PCB and fitted to the
replacement one. If this is not done, the replacement PCB will not acknowledge any
configuration code (see below).
Printer Configuration Code

The Printer Configuration Code is a 24-character code, which tells the system software:
• What the printer configuration is (for example, 2-Line SS or 4-Line HP).
• What message types (rasters) are available.
• What software options are enabled to the customer.
This Printer Configuration Code is supplied with the printer and is different for each
printer. The serial number from the UNIC, and the printer configuration and software
option information are combined to generate the Printer Configuration Code at Linx.
All printer software options are programmed into the software, but only those options that
a customer has requested are enabled with the applicable configuration code.
During manufacturing, the printer serial number, the printer UNIC serial number, and the
Printer Configuration Code are associated and held on the Configuration Database. Linx
Order Administration can supply the code again if the code is lost, or a new code can be
purchased to enable additional printer options.
NOTE: The printhead type and the ink type are not configured through the Printer
Configuration Code. These parameters are selected separately through the
Printhead and Ink/Solvent pages. The software also cannot tell if the printer is a
7300 or a 7300 (IP65 version).
The Printer Configuration Code is entered in four sets of six characters each, and each set is
separated by a hyphen. When a code is entered, the hyphens are automatically inserted
after each set of six characters. If a Configuration Code is not entered, the default of a 2-
Line SS (Standard Speed) printer is used, but the default code is not displayed. Only
another valid code to the default code can be entered and remain displayed. For example,
when a customer requests a change to the configuration.
When a valid Printer Configuration Code is entered and the OK key is pressed, the code is
accepted, remembered, and displayed in the Printer Configuration Code option.
As a code is entered, the digits are displayed as red text and the OK key is dimmed. If the
completed code is valid, the displayed digits change from red text to black text and the OK
key is available. If an invalid code is entered, the displayed digits remain as red text and
the OK key remains dimmed.
If three invalid codes are entered, the following advisory message is displayed and the
code is ignored:
“Please Wait”
After 1 minute, another code can be entered. If the code is again invalid, the “Please Wait”
advisory message is displayed again. The time is doubled on every occurrence of another
invalid code entry.
FA69084–1
Printer Serial Number
The printer serial number is also on the printer identification label found on the rear panel
of the chassis. This label is not always easy to access because of the installation in some
environments. This software feature allows operators and maintenance personnel to easily
find the serial number of the printer.
The serial number is not entered by Linx, but is entered by the maintenance technician who
installs the printer.
NOTE: The serial number is cleared from the memory of the printer if a new version of
system software is installed.
Ink/Solvent
When the Ink/Solvent option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
69167
15/11/06 15:03:17
No
Figure 4-24. Ink/Solvent Page

The ink type being used in the printer and related parameters are selected on this page.
The four options Next Mix, Last Mix, Mix Time and Disable Mix are only applicable to
the 7300 Spectrum printer, which uses pigmented inks. These options are displayed when
both of the following conditions apply:
• Software link LK7B is fitted on the IPM PCB (which enables the Spectrum printer
options).
• A pigmented ink is selected on the Ink/Solvent Type page.
Refer to Chapter 2: ‘General’ for the pigmented inks used in the Spectrum printer.
When a Spectrum printer has not been switched on for a period of time, the pigment in the
ink falls to the bottom of the tank. The ink in the tank is briefly mixed before the printer is
next used to make sure that the pigment is completely distributed in the ink.
All pigmented inks must be shaken before being added to the printer. An electrically-
powered shaker is used to perform this task automatically for Brilliant White Ink 1305 and
High-Opacity Grey Ink 1310 to thoroughly mix the ink. More information can be found in
the Linx Ink Shaker User Guide. All other pigmented inks must be hand shaken only before
being added to the printer.
FA69084–1
Ink/Solvent Type
All the inks available for use in the 7300 printer are displayed in a list on the Ink/Solvent
Type page when the Select key is pressed. The inks are identified by their type numbers
followed by their related solvent type numbers. For example, MEK ink ‘Black Water
Removable ink 1035’ is identified as ‘1035/1535’. Inks that have a different solvent base, for
example Ethanol, are identified generically. For example, ‘Black Ethanol ink 2035’ is
identified as ‘2xxx/25xx’.
Refer to the ‘Ink Conversion Calibration’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’ for a complete list of inks approved for use in the 7300 printer.
Next Mix
This option sets the time (in hours, minutes and seconds) that the next ink premix sequence
is required to be performed. For example, the Next Mix option can be set for a premix to be
performed 30 minutes before printing is planned to start each day. This time is then
displayed in the Next Mix option.
To help customers who use their printers less than every 2 weeks, a standby mode is also
available. This mode is automatically entered if the printer is continuously turned on, but it
is not used to print. The printer enters a 5-minute mixing sequence every 24 hours in this
mode, which begins at a time set by the maintenance technician.
Last Mix
The Last Mix option is for display only, and shows the time (in hours, minutes and
seconds) and the date that the last ink mix occurred (that is, jet shutdown). The time and
date is used by the software to calculate the length of the next ink premix (see Mix Time)
before printing.
NOTES:
1. The recommended maximum time that the printer is turned off for is:
• Four weeks if the ambient temperature is not more than 35 degrees Celsius.
• Two weeks if the ambient temperature is not more than 45 degrees Celsius.
2. Where possible, it is also recommended that the printer is turned on and the jet
started for 30 minutes every 2 weeks during a shutdown period.
Mix Time
The Mix Time option is for display only and shows the length (in minutes and seconds) of
the next ink premix before printing. The Last Mix time and date is used by the software to
calculate the length of the premix. This time changes between 5 and 17 minutes according
to the length of time from the last jet shutdown.
Disable Mix
A 1-minute delay is included at the start of the mix sequence to allow time for the
maintenance technician to disable the sequence at power-up.
If an ink mix is not required, when the printer is turned on the maintenance technician has
1 minute to disable the ink mix sequence. To disable the sequence, the Disable Mix option
is set to Yes on the Ink/Solvent page.
The state of the Disable Mix function is not remembered when the printer is turned off.
The mix sequence is always enabled at power-up.
When the Disable Mix option is set to No, the software considers the time that the mix
sequence was disabled to calculate when the next ink mix occurs.
When the Disable Mix option is set to Yes, the occurrence is logged in the Event Log as
System Warning “3.27 Mix Disabled”.
FA69084–1
Locale
When the Locale option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
69499
Figure 4-25. Locale Page

This page allows the international parameters of the printer to be configured for different
countries and languages.
Language
The language that pages and system messages are displayed in is selected on the
Language page (English is always present and is the default language).
NOTE: When the language is changed, the new language is used immediately the
Language page is exited.
Use Language Defaults

If the Use Language Defaults option is set to Yes and the language is changed, the Units,
Calendar, and Keyboard settings are automatically changed to the default values for that
language. Metric, Gregorian and European are selected for all the European languages.
The Units, Calendar, and Keyboard options are dimmed in this configuration and cannot
be changed.
If the Use Language Defaults option is set to No, the Units, Calendar, and Keyboard
settings can be changed (refer to these options below for more information).
Units
There are three available units-of-measurement systems: Metric, Engineering, and
Imperial. The required units of measurement are selected from the list on the Units page.
The units of the three systems are:
• Metric units—bar, m/s and mm
• Engineering units—bits, m/s and mm
• Imperial units—p.s.i., ft/minute and inches
The default units-of-measurement system is Metric.
FA69084–1
Calendar
The type of calendar is selected from the list on the Calendar page—Gregorian, Gregorian
(USA) or Hijri. How the date field formats are calculated depends on which type of
calendar is selected. When the type of calendar is changed, this only affects any new date
format calendars that are created. Existing date format calendars that have been created are
not affected.
If this option is set to the Gregorian calendar, the date fields are calculated on the current
printer date. If the Gregorian (USA) calendar is selected, the date fields are calculated on
the Gregorian (USA) calendar. The default calendar is Gregorian. The difference between
these two calendars is shown in the following table.
68019
Gregorian Gregorian (USA)
Non-leap Year 01 Jan = Day 001 01 Jan = Day 001
28 Feb = Day 059 28 Feb = Day 059
01 Mar = Day 060 01 Mar = Day 060
31 Dec = Day 365 31 Dec = Day 365
Leap Year 01 Jan = Day 001 01 Jan = Day 001
28 Feb = Day 059 28 Feb = Day 059
29 Feb = Day 366 29 Feb = Day 60
01 Mar = Day 060 01 Mar = Day 061
31 Dec = Day 365 31 Dec = Day 366
Figure 4-26. Gregorian Calendars
Keyboard
The correct keyboard for the language that messages are created in is selected on the
Keyboard page.
The printer can create and print messages in one language while the display uses a
different language for the pages and system messages. For example, to create messages in
Russian, but read the display in English, set the Keyboard option to Russian, and set the
Language option to English.
On power-down, the keyboard selection is remembered by the software.
Refer to the Linx 7300 How To ... documents for more information.
Secondary Keyboard
This option allows the operator to select a secondary keyboard layout that is different from
the primary keyboard. For example, to use the European keyboard to generate Japanese
characters, set the Keyboard option to European, and set the Secondary Keyboard option
to Japanese.
If a different secondary keyboard is selected, the [alt] + [k] keyboard shortcut can be used
to change between the selected primary and secondary keyboards.
On power-down, the secondary keyboard selection is remembered by the software.
Refer to the Linx 7300 How To ... documents for more information.
FA69084–1
Photocells
When the Photocells option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
69647
Figure 4-27. Photocells Page

The Photocells option is only available with the Level E (Service 2) password.
Normally, hardware debounce links on the IPM PCB are used to help filter out several
primary and secondary trigger edges to give one true pulse. The Photocells option uses
software ‘deadtime’ as an alternative and faster method to give a true trigger pulse.
The printer responds to a level change immediately, but does not respond to further level
changes during the ‘deadtime’ period. A deadtime of 0 ms, 1 ms, 5 ms or 25 ms can be set
for either the primary or secondary photocell.
Linx recommends that this feature is not used with a printer that has the IPM PCB
debounce links (LK35, LK36, LK40 and LK41) fitted in any position except the default
position.
The Primary Photocell Deadtime and the Secondary Photocell Deadtime options are only
available with the Level E (Service 2) password and only when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ (jet off)
or ‘Jet Running’ states.
Refer to Chapter 3: Technical Description > External Signals > Primary/Secondary Trigger
> Debounce for more information about the debounce links.
FA69084–1
4.4.4 Change User Level
When the Change User Level option is highlighted on the Menu page and the Select key is
69169
Figure 4-28. Change User Level Page

The ability to access the system options depends on the password entered. To get access to
all of these options and their related pages, the Level E password must be used.
The Change User Level page displays the soft keys for all the access levels that are
available with the current password. The Change User Level page shown in the figure
above has all the access levels available (from Level A to Level D) because the Level E
(Service 2) password is used.
To change the security level to a different (but lower only) level, press the soft key for the
security level that is required. The display then returns to the Menu page. When the
Change User Level page is accessed again, the page is changed to display only those
security levels that are lower than the current new level.
To get access at a higher security level, select the Change User Level option. Enter the
password for the (higher) access level that is required and press the OK key. If the
password is valid, it is accepted and the display returns to the Menu page.
If an invalid password is entered and the OK key is pressed, the following advisory
message is displayed:
“The password was not recognised”
The display returns to the Change User Level page in approximately 3 seconds, where a
valid password can be entered.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Passwords
Write the related service password against the printed service access level below. Remove
this page and keep it in a safe location.
Level D (Service 1): “…………....….”
Level E (Service 2): “…………….….”
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 5: MAINTENANCE
5.1 Introduction
This chapter is divided into two parts. The first part describes the functions that are
available on the Maintenance menu. The second part contains Maintenance Instruction
procedures, which describe how to test and repair the 7300 printer, and how to install
additional features.
The information shown in this chapter refers to printers with Version 4.1 software installed,
unless otherwise stated.
5.2 Maintenance Options

5.2.1 How to Select and Change Options
Six soft keys to the left of the display are related to the available options shown on the left
side of the displayed page. Press the soft key that is related to the required option to select
it. For example, to select the Menu option on the Print Monitor page, press the fifth soft
key. The Menu page is then displayed with a further list of options on the right of the page.
69394
Figure 5-1. Soft Keys and Related Options

Use the Up and Down arrow keys to the right of the display to move the dark blue
highlight box to the menu option that is required. When the option is highlighted, press the
Select soft key. This action can display a further page of options. Continue to use this
procedure to select options until the required page is reached.
How the option settings are changed depends on the type of option page that is selected.
Some option pages have a list of settings, and the Up and Down arrow keys are pressed to
highlight the required setting. For example, the list of calibration modes on the Calibration
Mode page. Other option pages allow a value to be entered, for example, a time period on
the Maintenance Due In page.
FA69084–1
When the option setting has been changed, press the OK soft key to save the change. The
new setting is displayed against the option on the previous page. If a setting is made but the
change is not required, press the Cancel soft key instead of the OK soft key. This action
returns the display to the previous page and to the setting in use before the page was opened.
To return to the Print Monitor page, continue to press the Exit soft key until the page is
reached.
5.2.2 Total Maintenance Options

When the Maintenance option is highlighted on the Menu page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed. The complete list of Maintenance options that are
available with the Level E password is shown in the following screen.
69170
Figure 5-2. Total Maintenance Options
5.2.3 Password Access

Access to the system options is by password, which is described in Chapter 4: ‘System
Options’.
Five security access levels are used: Level A (Base), Level B (User 1), Level C (User 2),
Level D (Service 1) and Level E (Service 2). Level A (Base) and Level B (User 1) are for use
by operators at the basic operation level of the printer and have controlled or no access to
the Maintenance options. Level C (User 2) has increased access to the options. Level D
(Service 1) and Level E (Service 2) allow full access to all of the Maintenance options.
These options are only for use by maintenance technicians who are trained and authorized
by Linx. Only Level D and Level E access levels are described in this chapter.
The default passwords for the two Service levels are not printed in this manual. This is
because, not all personnel who have access to this manual have received enough training to
use the complete list of Maintenance functions. However, the two Service access levels that
are applicable to the 7300 printer are printed on a separate page (without a page number)
at the end of Chapter 4: ‘System Options’. The related Service level default passwords are
supplied to personnel who are authorized by Linx and to those technicians who have been
given training on a maintenance course approved by Linx. These passwords must be
written in against the access levels on this last page. The page must then be removed from
the manual and kept in a safe location.
FA69084–1
5.2.4 Option Availability
The jet has three states: 'Idle', 'Jet Running', and 'Printing' (printing or ready to receive a
‘print go’ signal). Some options on the Maintenance pages are influenced by these states,
which can change the availability of some options and also the ability to select an option or
change its parameters.
Menu pages and their options are only displayed if they are valid for the password used
and the current jet state. For example, the System Flush option (Print Monitor > Menu >
Maintenance) is only displayed when the Level E password is used. The System Flush
option can be selected only at Level E, and only when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state.
When the jet is in the ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’ states, the System Flush option is
displayed but is dimmed and cannot be selected.
The following table shows when each page and the options the page contains are available,
related to the jet state and the level of password used. The symbols used in the table to
show when the pages and options are available are as follows:
• Pages and options that are displayed and can be selected or changed are identified with
a solid circle.
• Pages and options that are displayed, but cannot be selected or changed are identified
with an empty circle.
• Pages and options that are not available because of the jet state or password level, and
therefore are not displayed, are identified with a grey box.
73070A
LEVEL D LEVEL E
st nd rd
1 level page 2 level page 3 level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
Print Monitor > Menu >

Maintenance — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Jet Functions — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Jet Test – Start ● | | ● | |
Jet Test – Stop | ● | | ● |
Start Print | ● | | ● |
Stop Print | | ● | | ●
Test Print | | ● | | ●
Monitor Jet — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Edit Pressure ● ● ● ● ● ●
Edit Modulation | ● ● | ● ●
TOF Mode | ● ● | ● ●
Pressure in … ● ● ● ● ● ●
Maintenance Times — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Power On Times | | | | | |
Jet Run Times | | | | | |
Maintenance Due … | | | ● ● ●
Maintenance Finished ● ● ● ● ● ●
(continued)
Figure 5-3. Maintenance Options Availability Table
FA69084–1
69164B
LEVEL D LEVEL E
st nd rd
1 level page 2 level page 3 level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
Maintenance Charge Calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ●

(continued)
tion Mode
Calibration ● | | ● | |
Calibration Value ● | | ● | |
XCAL125 ● | | ● | |
XCAL255 ● | | ● | |
CALCHG1 ● ● ● ● ● ●
EHTPSU1 ● | | ● | |
ces
Jet Sequences — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Start ● | | ● | |
Stop ● | | ● | |
Reset Sequence Count ● ● ● ● ● ●
Valves — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Open/Close ● | | ● | |
Valve Reset ● | | ● | |
Test Message — ● ● ● ● ● ●
System Flush — ● | |
Empty Tank ● | |
Flush Cycle ● | |
Solvent Drain ● | |
Stop Sequence | ● |
Print and Consumables — ● ● ● ● ● ●
History
Messages | | | | | |
Drops | | | | | |
Ink Bottles | | | | | |
Solvent Bottles | | | | | |
Recent Messages | | | | | |
Recent Drops | | | | | |
Recent Ink Bottles | | | | | |
Recent Solvent Bottles | | | | | |
Reset Recent ● ● ●
Figure 5-3. Maintenance Options Availability Table (continued)
FA69084–1
5.3 Maintenance Page
All of the options on the Maintenance page are described in this chapter. This is because
all of the options or submenu options require a Service level password for access.
69170
Figure 5-4. Maintenance Page
5.3.1 Jet Functions

The Jet Functions page contains options to start and stop the jet and print, which can help
with fault diagnosis. The following page is shown for a jet state of ‘Idle’.
69171
Figure 5-5. Jet Functions Page
FA69084–1
Jet Test – Start
The Jet Test – Start option starts the jet but with a shorter method than a Normal Start
sequence to help with fault diagnosis. The total jet start time is 25 seconds compared to a
Normal Start of 32.5 seconds. The differences between a Normal Start sequence and a Jet
Test – Start sequence are described below.
The sequence for a Normal Start is as follows:
1. Check the pressure.
2. Start the jet.
3. Make sure that the jet is in the gutter.
4. Set the pressure to the Reference Pressure.
5. Apply a ‘block’ charge to all the drops (“TOF Only” message is displayed).
6. Measure the Time Of Flight.
7. Adjust the pressure if the Time Of Flight is out of range.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the Time Of Flight is in range.
9. Find the phase position (“Phase/TOF” message is displayed).
10. Jet state is ‘Jet Running’.
When the Jet Test – Start function is used, the sequence is arranged as follows:
1. Check the pressure.
2. Start the jet.
3. Set the pressure to the Reference Pressure.
4. Jet state is ‘Jet Running’.
5. Try to get good jet-phase.
6. Measure the Time Of Flight.
7. Adjust the pressure if the Time Of Flight is out of range.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the Time Of Flight is in range.
It can be seen from the above Jet Test – Start sequence that the printer enters the ‘Jet
Running’ state before the phase and TOF checks are started. The Normal Start checks and
adjustments of phase and TOF are ignored, and the printer uses the printhead reference
pressure and reference modulation values to start the jet. The printer enters the ‘Jet
Running’ state, then adjusts the pressure to get the correct TOF.
When Jet Test – Start is used, Print Failure reports are disabled, except for the following:
• 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature
• 2.01 EHT Trip
• 2.04 300V Power Supply
• 2.07 Internal Spillage
After 45 minutes, the printer returns to the Normal Start mode and all Print Failures are
reported again as they occur.
If the Monitor Jet page is looked at to check the jet control values when the jet is first
started, the readings may not equal their reference values until TOF is established.
The system can only use TOF correction if all the feedback signals are present. If the
feedback signals are not present, the printer operates at the printhead reference values.
FA69084–1
When Jet Test – Start is used and the fault is repaired, stop the jet and turn off the printer.
Then turn on and start the printer normally with the [start] key. These actions are necessary
because the fault can continue to be present when the jet is started with the Normal Start
sequence.
CAUTION: Pump Damage. The Jet Test – Start option starts the jet even if the ink level is low.
Do not allow the ink system pump to run in a dry condition. The pump must not be run for
longer than 30 seconds after the change in the sound of the pump indicates that cavitation
(no ink in the pump) has occurred. Damage to the pump can occur if the pump is allowed to
run continuously in a dry condition.
While the jet is starting, the following message is displayed in the top line of the Printer
Status area of the Print Monitor page:
“JET STARTING”
NOTE: If [ctrl] + [start] are pressed when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ state, a Normal jet start is
performed but print is not started. This shortcut is an additional help during
fault diagnosis.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Startup and Shutdown
Sequences, for a summary of the valve sequences for this option.
Jet Test – Stop

The Jet Test – Stop option stops the jet; clears the feed line for 5 seconds; clears the nozzle,
feed and gutter lines for 5 seconds; clears the feed and purge lines for 5 seconds; and clears
the gutter line for 5 seconds. The use of this stop method is for fault diagnosis ONLY. Do
NOT use the Jet Test – Stop option to shut down the printer before a period during which
the printer will not be used. This method does not adequately prepare the printer for a
restart.
A shortcut can also be used to perform a quick stop. Press and hold down the [ctrl] key,
and then press the [stop] key.
While the Jet Test – Stop sequence is performed, the following message is displayed in the
top line of the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page:
“JET STOPPING”
Sequences, for a summary of the valve sequences for this option.
Start Print
The Start Print option changes the jet state from ‘Jet Running’ to ‘Printing’ only, that is, the
option does not start the jet. The change of jet state only occurs if a message is currently
selected and displayed in the Current Message area of the Print Monitor page. Refer to the
7300 Quick Start Guide for descriptions of how to select and edit messages.
An advisory message is displayed if the Start Print key is pressed and no print message is
selected.
If the jet was started with the Jet Test – Start key, when the Start Print option is used the
disabled Print Failures are reported again as they occur.
Stop Print
The Stop Print option changes the jet state from ‘Printing’ to ‘Jet Running’ only, that is, the
option disables printing, but maintains the jet. The change of jet state allows some other
diagnostic options to be displayed and selected, which are not available in the ‘Printing’
state.
FA69084–1
Test Print
The Test Print option is only available in the ‘Printing’ state.
The Test Print option generates a simulation of a single ‘print trigger’ to print a single
message manually, instead of from an automatically generated signal from a trigger device.
The current message displayed in the Current Message area of the Print Monitor page is
printed. The Trigger to Printhead Distance setting (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Trigger)
and the Print Delay setting (Print Monitor > Print Settings) apply like a normal trigger
device. The Test Print function also updates sequential numbers and print counters.
If the Speed Selection option is set to Shaft Encoder (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Speed),
printing will only start when shaft encoder pulses are received, as is normally the condition
when a production line is in operation. The shaft encoder is disabled when Fixed Speed or
Dual Trigger are selected on the Speed Selection page. The printer then prints at a speed
calculated by the Trigger to Printhead Distance and Print Delay settings.
The printer operates normally for all the other functions. For example, checks for the
printhead cover not fitted, and overspeed are made, and any associated event messages are
displayed.
5.3.2 Monitor Jet

The Monitor Jet page displays the main jet control parameters on a single page. The values
shown in the following example are for a Midi printhead with the jet in operation, and 3103
ink. The values are like those that are normally seen. Some parameters are for display only,
while other parameters can be changed.
69172
3.37 3.04 3.24 3.04
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Figure 5-6. Monitor Jet Page

All displayed values on the Monitor Jet page are updated every second.
The following paragraphs describe each of the options and parameters on the Monitor Jet
page.
Pressure
The Pressure area of the Monitor Jet page displays four pressure values: Solvent Add
Pressure, Set Pressure, Reference Pressure, and Actual Pressure.
FA69084–1
SOLV (Solvent Add Pressure)
The value displayed in the SOLV box is the Solvent Add Pressure, which is a pressure
value that the printer uses as a trigger to add solvent. This Solvent Add Pressure value,
which is different for every single printhead, is calculated from the printhead Reference
Pressure value (default pressure in normal operation) with an offset added.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Printhead Theory of Operation > Viscosity
Control.
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Ink and Solvent Flows > Solvent
Addition.
SET (Set Pressure)

The value displayed in the SET box is the ink system pressure that is used by the software
for the following functions.
Set Pressure performs two separate functions. First, when the jet is in the ‘Jet Running’ or
‘Printing’ states, the Set Pressure is adjusted by the software to maintain the Time Of Flight
(TOF) within the control parameters. The Set Pressure value also indicates the different
pressures required by the software to perform the different jet sequences, for example,
startup and shutdown. Therefore, the Set Pressure value can be used to monitor the series
of pressure changes during each jet sequence.
Second, when the jet is stopped, the Set Pressure function becomes a very useful diagnostic
tool. The pressure can be used to start and stop the pump. Also, if the pump is operating
and ink is flowing through the venturi, the pressure can help with fault diagnosis of the ink
system. Under these conditions the pressure provides a vacuum in the gutter line, which
can be used to help clear blockages or to flush the printhead.
Edit Pressure
When the Edit Pressure key is pressed, the Set Pressure can be changed to a different
value. The Edit Pressure page allows values in the range of 0 to 4.48 bar (0 to 65.00 p.s.i. or
0 to 255 bits) to be set.
NOTE: 1.0 bar = 14.49 p.s.i. ≈ 56 bits.
4.49 bar = 65.00 p.s.i. = 255 bits.
Sequences > Pressure Conversion Table.
69175
3.37 3.04 3.24 3.04
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Figure 5-7. Edit Pressure Page
FA69084–1
Diagnostic uses for setting a Set Pressure value are as follows:
• To find faults caused by pressure loss.
• To clean the printhead.
• To purge the main ink filter.
• When the Jet Test – Start function is used, the pressure can be increased and decreased
to try to get TOF measurements, to see if the ink is of high or low viscosity.
Automatic Tracking (Pressure)

During normal operation (Jet Running), the Set Pressure value is automatically adjusted by
the system to maintain the correct TOF.
For diagnostic purposes, it may be required to change the Set Pressure value while the jet is
in operation. If the Set Pressure was manually changed, the system would automatically
correct the pressure again to maintain the correct TOF. When the Edit Pressure key is
pressed on the Monitor Jet page, the automatic pressure control (Automatic Tracking) is
disabled. This action allows the Set Pressure to be freely adjusted as required.
By default, automatic pressure control is enabled during startup, and disabled during
shutdown.
When the Set Pressure value is manually changed on the Edit Pressure page and the Exit
key or [enter] key is pressed, the system uses the new pressure. The printer returns to the
Monitor Jet page and the new pressure value is displayed in the SET box. If the Up and
Down arrow keys are used to change the value, the new pressure value is applied
immediately.
When the Automatic Tracking key is pressed on the Edit Pressure page (after the Set
Pressure has been manually changed), the printer returns to the Monitor Jet page and
automatic pressure control is enabled again. The value then displayed in the SET box is the
pressure that the system uses to automatically control the jet.
REF (Reference Pressure)

The value displayed in the REF box is the Reference Pressure used by the printer during
normal operation. The value is for display only and cannot be changed.
The Reference Pressure value, which is different for every printhead, forms part of the
printhead code. The Reference Pressure is also found on the printhead conduit label. The
complete printhead code must be entered into the printer on the Printhead Code page
(Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation > Printhead > Printhead Code).
NOTE: The printhead Reference Pressure value is automatically adjusted when the
Printhead Height option is changed (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation
> Printhead > Printhead Height).
See also: Chapter 4: System Options > Installation > Printhead > Printhead Code and
Printhead Height.
ACT (Actual Pressure)

The value displayed in the ACT box is the pressure measured by the ink system pressure
transducer. The value normally reflects the Set Pressure value (refer to ‘Set Pressure’ earlier
in this section) with only a small difference of normally 0.07 to 0.09 bar (1.02 to 1.27 p.s.i.).
During the pressure and filter check part of the Normal Start sequence, if the Actual
Pressure is more than 0.09 bar (1.27 p.s.i.) below the Set Pressure, the System Warning
“3.18 Low Pressure” is reported.
See also: Chapter 6: System Events > System Warnings > 3.18 Low Pressure.
FA69084–1
Pressure in p.s.i./bar/bits
The units of measurement for the system parameters are normally selected on the Units
page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation > Locale > Units). However, on the
Monitor Jet page there is a Pressure in… key that allows the local pressure values to be
displayed in p.s.i., bar, or bits. The label on the key changes and depends on which units
are currently used to display the pressure values. For example, when the Monitor Jet page
is first opened, the pressure values are displayed in bits and the key label is Pressure in
p.s.i. When the Pressure in p.s.i. key is pressed, the pressure values are displayed in p.s.i.
and the key label changes to Pressure in bar.
Modulation
The Modulation area of the Monitor Jet page displays the Reference Modulation, and the
Actual Modulation.
REF (Reference Modulation)

The value displayed in the REF box is the Reference Modulation (shown in volts) used by
the printer during normal operation. The value is for display only and cannot be changed.
During normal operation, there is normally a small difference between the Reference
Modulation value and the Actual Modulation value (refer to ‘Actual Modulation’ later in
this section). These two values are approximately the same voltage when the Automatic
Tracking function is disabled (refer to ‘Automatic Tracking’ for modulation later in this
section). The value is also the same as the ‘Vmod’ value found on the printhead conduit
label. The complete printhead code must be entered into the printer on the Printhead Code
page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation > Printhead > Printhead Code).
See also: Chapter 4: System Options > Installation > Printhead > Printhead Code.
ACT (Actual Modulation)

The Actual Modulation value displayed in the ACT box is the current modulation voltage
used by the printer to control the break-up of the jet.
During normal operation, there is normally a small difference between this value and the
Reference Modulation value (refer to ‘Reference Modulation’ earlier in this section). These
two values are approximately the same voltage when the Automatic Tracking function is
disabled (refer to ‘Automatic Tracking’ for modulation later in this section).
Edit Modulation
When the Edit Modulation key is pressed, the Actual Modulation can be changed to a
different value. The Edit Modulation page allows values in the range of 0 to 255 volts to be
set.
69176
3.37 3.04 3.24 3.04
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Figure 5-8. Edit Modulation Page
FA69084–1
Automatic Tracking (Modulation)
The current Reference Modulation values are set as defaults of modulation and viscosity
slopes. During normal operation (Jet Running), the Actual Modulation is used by the
printer to control the drop break-off point of the jet. As the Set Pressure moves away from
the Reference Pressure, the modulation voltage is adjusted to follow the Set Pressure by an
offset value (in V/bit). This offset depends on the type of ink and the printhead.
For diagnostic purposes, it may be required to change the Actual Modulation voltage while
the jet is in operation. If the Actual Modulation was manually changed, the system would
automatically correct the modulation again to maintain the correct point of drop break-off.
When the Edit Modulation key is pressed on the Monitor Jet page, the automatic
modulation control (Automatic Tracking) is disabled. This action allows the Actual
Modulation to be freely adjusted as required.
If the jet is stopped then restarted while the automatic modulation control (Automatic
Tracking) is disabled, the modulation is set to the Reference Modulation.
By default, automatic modulation control is enabled during power-up, and disabled during
power-down.
When the Actual Modulation voltage is manually changed on the Edit Modulation page
and the Exit key or [enter] key is pressed, the system uses the new modulation voltage. The
printer returns to the Monitor Jet page and the new modulation voltage is displayed in the
ACT box. If the Up and Down arrow keys are used to change the value, the new
modulation voltage is applied immediately.
When the Automatic Tracking key is pressed on the Edit Modulation page (after the
Actual Modulation has been manually changed), the printer returns to the Monitor Jet
page and automatic modulation control is enabled again. The value then displayed in the
ACT box is the modulation voltage that the system uses to automatically maintain the
correct point of drop break-off.
TOF
The TOF (Time Of Flight) area of the Monitor Jet page displays the Reference TOF and the
Actual TOF. The TOF values are displayed in microseconds (µs).
Reference TOF
The value displayed in the REF box is the Reference TOF, which is the jet velocity
reference. The software uses this value with the Actual TOF value to maintain the correct
TOF. The value is for display only and cannot be changed.
Actual TOF
The value displayed in the ACT box is the Actual TOF. This value is the measured TOF
displayed as an average reading. The displayed value is related to the jet speed—the
higher the reading, the slower the jet; the lower the reading, the faster the jet.
The time taken for a special ‘packet’ of low-charged drops to pass between two datum
points (the phase and TOF sensors) is measured to get TOF values. These sensors are in the
printhead Deflector and Phase Plate (DPP). The software makes a number TOF
measurements, all of which must be within ±40% of the Reference TOF. An average of
these TOF measurements is the displayed TOF value. Three average readings, one after the
other, must be more or less than ±0.3% (or ±0.2%—see below) of the Reference TOF before
the readings can be used to control the system pressure.
The software uses the average value to increase or decrease the pressure, as necessary, to
maintain the TOF at the Reference TOF. There is a small tolerance of ±0.3% for all Mk7
printheads except the Ultima, where the tolerance is ±0.2%.
The Print Failure message “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure” is displayed if there are no valid
TOF readings for a period of 40 minutes.
FA69084–1
TOF Mode
The TOF Mode key selects how TOF and Phasing are performed. During normal operation
the printer changes between these two functions automatically, but with this option the
operation of these functions can be changed.
69174
3.37 3.04 3.24 3.04
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Figure 5-9. TOF Mode Page
TOF/Phase
When the TOF/Phase key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, TOF and Phasing
measurements are both performed at the same time. TOF/Phase is the normal mode when
the jet is in operation.
TOF Only
When the TOF Only key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, Phase measurements are not
performed. When this mode is selected, a TOF can be found for an ink jet that has bad
break-up.
The TOF Only mode is automatically used for a short period during jet startup while the
pressure is being adjusted to get the correct TOF.
Manual Phase
For diagnostic purposes, it may be required to change the phase position (drop break-off
point) while the jet is in operation (refer to ‘Phase’ later in this section).
When the Manual Phase key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, the Phase value can be
changed. The Manual Phase function allows phase positions in the range of 0 to 15 to be
set. The main use for this function is for calibration. The Manual Phase option can also be
used to find the size of the phase window so that the best phase position can be manually
set. When the Phase value is manually changed on the TOF Mode page and the Exit key or
[enter] key is pressed, the system uses the new phase position. The printer returns to the
Monitor Jet page and the new phase position is displayed in the Phase box. If the Up and
Down arrow keys are used to change the value, the new phase position is applied
immediately.
When the TOF/Phase key is pressed on the TOF Mode page and the Exit key or [enter] key
is pressed, the printer returns to the Monitor Jet page and automatic phase measurements
are performed again. The value then displayed in the Phase box is the phase position that
controls the drop break-off point of the jet.
FA69084–1
Off
When the Off key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, neither TOF measurements nor
Phasing are performed. The Off setting is the normal mode when the jet is not in operation
(‘Idle’ state).
When this function is set to Off, the pressure can be manually changed, which changes the
jet speed and therefore the TOF. The TOF Mode can then be reset to TOF/Phase so that the
pressure can be monitored as control of the jet is restored. This test can confirm the correct
operation of the jet control system.
Phase
The value displayed in the Phase box reflects the drop break-off point of the jet (phase
position). The phase position makes sure that the drop break-off and the drop charge occur
at the same time. The printer checks the phase position at regular intervals during jet
startup, jet running, or printing. The period between checks changes, and depends on the
jet state.
The displayed Phase value depends on the setting of the TOF Mode option (refer to ‘TOF
Mode’ earlier in this section). When the TOF Mode is set to TOF/Phase, the value is the
phase position when the jet is in normal operation. This value is for display only and
cannot be changed.
When the TOF Mode is set to TOF Only, there are no phase position checks made and
there is no phase position displayed.
When the TOF Mode is set to Manual Phase, the phase position can be changed (refer to
‘Manual Phase’ earlier in this section).
Solvent Add Count

The value displayed in the Solvent Add Count box is the number of times solvent has been
added, from the time the jet was last started. The value is reset to 0 (zero) when the jet is
started. The Solvent Add Count value is for display only and cannot be changed.
Temp
The value displayed in the Temp box is the printhead temperature. If the temperature
inside the printhead reaches more than 60 °C, the Print Failure message “2.00 Printhead
Over Temperature” is displayed.
WARNING: HIGH TEMPERATURE HAZARD. WHEN THIS FAULT IS REPORTED, THE

PRINTHEAD AND COVER TUBE CAN BE VERY HOT.
MAXIMUM CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT SKIN BURNS AND TO DECREASE THE
RISK OF A FIRE. DO NOT TOUCH THE PRINTHEAD, OR TRY TO REMOVE THE
PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE UNTIL THE PARTS BECOME SAFELY COOL NATURALLY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE BURNS TO THE HANDS IF THE PRINTHEAD COVER
TUBE IS REMOVED BEFORE IT HAS BECOME SAFELY COOL. THERE IS ALSO AN
INCREASED RISK OF FIRE CAUSED BY THE SUDDEN INCREASE OF AIR AROUND THE
OPEN PRINTHEAD.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Printhead Components > Printhead
Temperature Sensor.
FA69084–1
5.3.3 Maintenance Times
The Maintenance Times page displays the operating times of the printer in three
categories.
69177
812:25
4:15
762:50
4:05
1237:10
2007-01-22
Figure 5-10. Maintenance Times Page

The two Power On Time … and the two Jet Run Time … options are for display only at
the Level D and Level E access levels, and cannot be changed. The Maintenance Due In
and Maintenance Due By times can be changed by the maintenance technician only at
Level E.
NOTES:
1. The Power On Time (Total) and Jet Run Time (Total) stored values are reset to
zero if the battery link LK4 on the IPM PCB is removed.
2. A note must be made of the Maintenance Due In and Maintenance Due By
times before the system software is changed, the battery link LK4 is removed, or
the IPM PCB is replaced. If the system software is changed or link LK4 is
removed, the printer memory is initialized and the maintenance times are reset
to their default settings.
3. Linx recommends that the Linx Sync software or the USB facility is used to save
the data (which includes the Maintenance Due … times) before the system
software is changed or the battery link LK4 is removed. When the maintenance is
completed, the Linx Sync software or the USB facility is then used to restore the
data.
Power On Time (Total)

The Power On Time (Total) displays the total time (from manufacturing), in hours and
minutes, that the printer has been powered up. This value is for display only and cannot be
changed. The time is updated while the printer is powered up.
Power On Time (Present)

The Power On Time (Present) displays the time, in hours and minutes, that the printer has
currently been powered up. The time is reset to zero when the printer is turned on, and it is
updated while the printer is powered up.
FA69084–1
Jet Run Time (Total)
The Jet Run Time (Total) displays the total time (from manufacturing), in hours and
minutes, that the jet has been in the ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’ states. This value is for
display only and cannot be changed. The time is updated while the jet is in operation.
Jet Run Time (Present)

The Jet Run Time (Present) displays the time, in hours and minutes, that the jet has
currently been in the ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’ states. The time is reset to zero when the
printer is turned on, and it is updated while the jet is in operation.
Maintenance Due Within

The Maintenance Due Within option displays the time that remains, in hours and
minutes, until the next scheduled maintenance of the printer is required. The time
decreases (when the jet is in operation) from a basic maximum interval for the scheduled
maintenance (refer to ‘Maintenance Finished’ later in this section).
When the Maintenance Due Within interval reaches zero, the System Warning message
“3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance” is displayed. This warning message
continues to be displayed when the printer is next turned on, until the scheduled
maintenance is done and the maintenance intervals are reset by the maintenance
technician.
If the warning message is ignored, the Maintenance Due Within time continues to
decrease and the time is displayed as a negative value. This negative time indicates how
long ago the scheduled maintenance should have been done.
When the Maintenance Due Within key is pressed, the scheduled maintenance interval
can be manually set to a different time from the basic scheduled maintenance interval for
the ink type. The maximum scheduled maintenance interval that can be set in the software
for some inks is 6000:00 hours. (see Maintenance Finished below)
Maintenance Due By
The Maintenance Due By option displays the date that the next scheduled maintenance of
the printer is required.
When the Maintenance Due By date is reached, the System Warning message “3.11 Printer
Requires Scheduled Maintenance” is displayed. This warning message continues to be
displayed when the printer is next turned on, until the scheduled maintenance is done and
the maintenance intervals are reset by the maintenance technician.
When the Maintenance Due By key is pressed, the scheduled maintenance interval can be
manually set to a different date from the basic scheduled maintenance interval for the ink
type (see Maintenance Finished below). The maximum scheduled maintenance interval
that can be set in the software is 420 days from the current date. However, the maximum
scheduled maintenance interval must not be more than one year, because of the
requirement to replace the damper annually.
Maintenance Finished
The basic maximum interval for the scheduled maintenance is automatically set when the
Maintenance Finished key is pressed, and is ink-type-dependent, as shown in the
following table.
68038
Ink type Basic (maximum) sheduled maintenance interval

MEK 2000 hours/12 months
Mixed Base (3XXX) 2000 hours/12 months
Ethanol 2000 hours/12 months
Pigmented 1400 hours/6 months
Figure 5-11. Scheduled Maintenance Intervals
FA69084–1
Normally, the maximum scheduled maintenance interval is 2000 hours, but some inks are
set to a maximum interval of 4000 hours or 6000 hours. The maximum scheduled
maintenance interval depends on the environmental conditions, and other factors (for
example, the risk of ink contamination and poor-quality customer maintenance). Refer to
the 7300 How To Select the Scheduled Maintenance Interval Maintenance Level document for
more information about these inks.
When the printer is commissioned, the maintenance technician sets the scheduled
maintenance interval according to the table above or the 7300 How To Select the Scheduled
Maintenance Interval Maintenance Level document. Each time the scheduled maintenance is
performed and the Maintenance Finished key is pressed, the Maintenance Due Within
interval returns to that set when the printer was commissioned.
See also: Maintenance Instructions > Scheduled Maintenance, later in this section.
5.3.4 Charge Calibration

The Charge Calibration page provides the functions for the maintenance technician to
calibrate the Charge hardware and to enter different calibration figures.
69178
Figure 5-12. Charge Calibration Page
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. WHEN THE CALIBRATION MODE IS SET TO

‘CALIBRATION’, A MAXIMUM OF 300 V DC IS APPLIED TO THE PRINTHEAD CHARGE
ELECTRODE.
MAKE SURE THAT THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS CORRECTLY FITTED AND THE
SECURING SCREW IS FIRMLY TIGHTENED BEFORE THE CHARGE CALIBRATION
PROCEDURE IS PERFORMED. DO NOT REMOVE THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE DURING
THE CHARGE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
NOTE: Refer to the ‘Charge Amplifier Calibration’ maintenance instruction later in this
chapter for how to correctly perform the calibration procedure referred to in the
following description.
FA69084–1
Calibration Mode
The Calibration Mode option has three modes of operation: Off, Zero, and Calibration.
These modes are used during the Charge Amplifier Calibration.
Off
The Off setting resets the charge DAC to normal mode for printing. This setting is the
default mode.
Zero
The Zero setting allows VR3 (Zero Offset) on the IPM PCB to be adjusted to a zero datum
point before the Charge Amplifier Calibration is started.
Calibration
The Calibration setting puts the charge DAC control system in the calibration mode, so
that the charge voltage can be calibrated.
Calibration Value
NOTE: The Calibration Value option is only available when the Calibration Mode is set
to Calibration.
Values are entered on the Calibration Value page during the calibration procedure to find
the XCAL125 and XCAL255 voltage levels.
During the calibration procedure, the Apply key on the Calibration Value page is used
after each value change to update the DVM reading.
When a new value is entered on the Calibration Value page and the OK key is pressed,
the new calibration value is used by the system. The printer returns to the Charge
Calibration page and the new value is displayed in the Calibration Value option.
XCAL125/XCAL255
The final calibration values found from the Charge Amplifier Calibration procedure are
entered in these two options.
CALCHG1
The value displayed in the CALCHG1 option must be the final three digits of the printhead
code (refer to Chapter 4: System Options > Menu page > Setup > Printhead > Printhead
Code). Make sure that the digits are the same. If the digits are not the same, enter the
correct value on the CALCHG1 page.
EHTPSU1
The EHT Program Input voltage is used during manufacturing to calibrate each EHTPSU to
give an output of 8 kV ±1.7%. The calibration voltage is printed on a label attached to the
EHTPSU, and this value must be entered on the EHTPSU1 page.
FA69084–1
5.3.5 Jet Sequences
The Jet Sequences page provides a range of operating sequences and allows these
sequences to be selected and started individually.
69179
Figure 5-13. Jet Sequences Page
Start Sequence
When an operating sequence is highlighted in the Jet Sequences list and the Start Sequence
key is pressed, the selected sequence is started. A progress bar is provided at the bottom of
the Jet Sequences page that shows how much of the sequence has been completed.
NOTE: The printer must be in the ‘Idle’ state (jet off) before any of the sequences can be
started.
Stop Sequence
When a sequence is in operation, the Stop Sequence key can be pressed to stop the
sequence. The Stop Sequence option is dimmed until a sequence is started.
Reset Sequence Count

A temporary record is kept of the number of times each sequence has been used. Next to
each operating sequence in the list is a counter, which increases by one when the sequence
is started. When the Reset Sequence Count key is pressed, the count is reset to zero.
Jet State
The Jet State box below the Jet Sequences list displays the current jet state of the printer.
The following are all of the possible state messages:
“IDLE”
“JET STARTING”
“JET RUNNING”
“JET STOPPING”
“PRINTING”
“JET SEQUENCE”
“JET CALIBRATING”
“JET FAULT”
“MIX”
While a sequence is being performed, the displayed Jet State is “Jet Sequence”.
FA69084–1
Jet Sequences
The following paragraphs describe the operating sequences that are available in the Jet
Sequences list.
Nozzle Flush

FLAMMABLE, AND THE LIQUID, VAPOUR OR SPRAY CAN CAUSE IRRITATION TO THE
EYES AND SKIN.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND SOLVENT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN
THERE IS DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE INKS AND SOLVENTS, WHEN WORK IS DONE ON
THE PRINTER, AND WHEN THE PRINTER IS CLEANED.
THERE IS A RISK OF SEVERE IRRITATION AND TEMPORARY (REVERSIBLE) DAMAGE
TO THE EYES, AND IRRITATION OF THE SKIN IF THIS SAFETY WARNING IS IGNORED.
WARNING: HIGH-PRESSURE SOLVENT JET HAZARD. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THE

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE NOZZLE FLUSH SEQUENCE AND THE NOZZLE CLEAR
SEQUENCE IS UNDERSTOOD. DURING THE NOZZLE FLUSH SEQUENCE, SOLVENT IS
EJECTED FROM THE PRINTHEAD NOZZLE AT MAXIMUM PRESSURE.
WHEN THE NOZZLE FLUSH SEQUENCE IS IN OPERATION, ENCLOSE THE PRINTHEAD IN
AN ACCEPTABLE CONTAINER TO CONTAIN THE SOLVENT JET. WEAR SAFETY
GLASSES AND SOLVENT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES.
The Nozzle Clear sequence described later in this section removes particles from the
printhead jewel and nozzle area. These particles can then remain distributed within the
gun chamber where they can collect on the jewel again. This effect can cause the problems
of jet alignment or nozzle blockage to occur again in the future, if not immediately.
Therefore, the Nozzle Flush sequence can be used instead of the Nozzle Clear sequence or
with the Nozzle Clear sequence, when there is a known nozzle obstruction or blockage.
The Nozzle Flush sequence is different from the Nozzle Clear sequence, which draws
solvent into the nozzle. The Nozzle Flush sequence automatically fills the nozzle with
solvent, then ejects a jet of solvent from the nozzle and into the gutter to flush away any
deposits.
IMPORTANT: The Nozzle Flush sequence tries to create a solvent jet. If a jet is started, the
solvent is returned to the ink tank, which can decrease the viscosity of the
ink. If the Nozzle Flush sequence is used too many times, the decreased
ink viscosity causes the printer to fail. The Nozzle Flush sequence must not
be used more than three times to clear a nozzle blockage.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Other Operating Sequences, for
a summary of the valve sequences for the Nozzle Flush sequence.
FA69084–1
Nozzle Clear

FLAMMABLE, AND THE LIQUID, VAPOUR OR SPRAY CAN CAUSE IRRITATION TO THE
EYES AND SKIN.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND SOLVENT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN
THERE IS DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE INKS AND SOLVENTS, WHEN WORK IS DONE ON
THE PRINTER, AND WHEN THE PRINTER IS CLEANED.
The Nozzle Clear sequence can be used instead of the Nozzle Flush sequence or with the
Nozzle Flush sequence, when there is a known nozzle obstruction or blockage. (Refer to
‘Nozzle Flush’ later in this section.)
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. The printhead can be damaged or the printer
can fail if the wrong solvent is allowed to enter the ink or solvent tanks. Make sure that the
solvent used during the following procedure is the correct type for the ink and solvent used in
the printer. Use only Linx solvents.
The Nozzle Clear sequence applies vacuum to the printhead nozzle to clear an obstruction
or blockage. While the printer is performing the Nozzle Clear sequence, the printhead must
be turned upside down and solvent applied in small drops to the nozzle assembly face.
Refer to the ‘Nozzle Clear Sequence’ part of the ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’
maintenance instruction later in this chapter.
A single Nozzle Clear sequence continues for 20 seconds. The pump is run at the maximum
pressure of 4.48 bar (65.00 p.s.i.) for 5 seconds, then the gutter valve is energized (opened).
This action transfers the vacuum from the gutter to the nozzle assembly for a further 15
seconds. The gutter valve is then closed and the pump is stopped, which decreases the
pressure to zero.
Linx recommends that a maximum of eight Nozzle Clear sequences are performed to try to
clear an obstruction or blockage, with an attempt made to start the jet after each sequence.
If this procedure does not remove the nozzle blockage, perform the necessary ‘Nozzle
Soak’ and ‘Nozzle Wash’ procedures described in the ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’
maintenance instruction. If these procedures do not clear the nozzle blockage, the nozzle
assembly or complete printhead must be replaced.
a summary of the valve sequences for the Nozzle Clear sequence.
Filter Purge
The Filter Purge sequence is used during the printer commissioning procedure to circulate
ink through the primary ink circuit to purge the main ink filter of air. Refer to the ‘Main Ink
Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction later in this chapter for information about how to
perform this procedure.
a summary of the valve sequences for the Filter Purge sequence.
FA69084–1
Feed Dry Cycle
The Feed Dry Cycle sequence is used at Linx during printer manufacturing and final test
only and, therefore, the sequence does not have a maintenance application.
a summary of the valve sequences for the Feed Dry Cycle sequence.
Gutter Dry Cycle

The Gutter Dry Cycle sequence is used at Linx during printer manufacturing and final test
a summary of the valve sequences for the Gutter Dry Cycle sequence.
Purge Dry Cycle

The Purge Dry Cycle sequence is used at Linx during printer manufacturing and final test
a summary of the valve sequences for the Purge Dry Cycle sequence.
Empty Tank
The Empty Tank sequence is used during the ‘Draining the Ink System’ and the ‘System
Flush’ procedures, which are provided in the ‘Maintenance Instructions’ section later in
this chapter.
a summary of the valve sequences for the Empty Tank sequence.
Flush Cycle
The Flush Cycle sequence is used during the ‘System Flush’ procedure, which is provided
in the ‘Maintenance Instructions’ section later in this chapter.
a summary of the valve sequences for the Flush Cycle sequence.
Solvent Drain
The Solvent Drain sequence is used during the ‘System Flush’ procedure, which is
provided in the ‘Maintenance Instructions’ section later in this chapter.
a summary of the valve sequences for the Solvent Drain sequence.
FA69084–1
5.3.6 Valves
The Valves page allows each of the ink system valves to be opened and closed manually to
help fault diagnosis. The state of each valve can also be monitored (to the right of the valve
name ) as it opens and closes during any of the operating sequences.
69180
Figure 5-14. Valves Page
Open/Close
When a valve is highlighted in the Valves list and the Open/Close key is pressed, the
selected valve is energized (opened). The valve remains energized until the Open/Close
key is pressed again or the Valve Reset key is pressed (see ‘Valve Reset’ later in this
section). If a valve is opened and the Exit key is pressed, the valve remains open. The
Valves page must be accessed again to close the valve.
There can be seven valves displayed in the Valves list:
• Printhead Feed
• Feed
• Purge
• Gutter
• Solvent Add
• Solvent Flush
• Mix (Spectrum printer only)
The valves can be manually operated only when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ state (jet off). When
the printer is in the ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’ states, the Open/Close and Valve Reset keys
are dimmed. The Valves page then shows only the current states of the valves and they
cannot be manually operated.
The 7300 Spectrum printer has an additional Mix valve, which is used during the Mixing
sequence for white pigmented ink. This additional valve is not displayed in the Valves list
if the printer is a standard ink printer.
To help with fault diagnosis, the Set Pressure function (Monitor Jet page) can be used with
the options on the Valves page.
Valve Reset
If more than one valve has been manually opened, all the valves can be closed at the same
time when the Valve Reset key is pressed.
See also: Monitor Jet > SET (Set Pressure).
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Startup and Shutdown
Sequences, and Other Operating Sequences.
FA69084–1
5.3.7 Test Message
A test message can be created from this page for any of the message types (rasters)
installed in the printer.
69181
Figure 5-15. Test Message Page

The Test Message list displays, by name, all of the current message types that are available
in the printer—for example, ‘18 Linear Quality’. The message type that is required to be
used to create a test message is selected from this list.
Create
When a message type has been highlighted in the Test Message list and the Create key is
pressed, the Save As page is displayed.
69182
Figure 5-16. Test Message—Save As Page
FA69084–1
Save
A default name for the test message is provided on the Save As page. If the message is the
first to be created for a message type, the message name is “Msg1” (by default) followed by
the message type name—for example, in the form “Msg1_18_Linear_Quality”. If there are
one or more test messages of the same message type stored in the memory, the next
message to be created is given the prefix of the next number in sequence. For example, if
there are three test messages of the same message type, the next message to be created is
given the prefix of the next number—that is, “Msg4_18_Linear_Quality”.
The default message name can be changed. For example, if a special name is required to fit
the purpose of the test message.
When the name of the test message is confirmed and the Save key is pressed, the test
message is created and stored in the memory.
5.3.8 System Flush

NOTE: The System Flush option can be accessed only at Level E and only when the jet
state is ‘Idle’ (jet off).
The System Flush option provides the functions to completely flush the printer for the
following reasons:
• To prepare the printer to be shipped or stored.
• To remove contaminated ink.
• To change an ‘in use’ printer to a new ink, in preparation for calibration.
• To prepare a new printer with new ink, in preparation for calibration.
The procedure is easy to understand and provides instructions at each step, displayed at
the top of each page, to take the maintenance technician through the procedure.
When the System Flush option is selected on the Maintenance page, the first preparation
page of the System Flush procedure is displayed.
69183
Figure 5-17. System Flush—First Preparation Page
FA69084–1
After the first four preparation pages, there is an options page that allows different
operations to be performed.
69184
Figure 5-18. System Flush—Options Page

Refer to the ‘System Flush’ maintenance instruction later in this chapter for information
about how to perform this procedure.
5.3.9 Print and Consumables History

The Print and Consumables History page provides the Distributor and the customer with
an indication of the rate at which the printer has used ink and solvent.
69185
Figure 5-19. Print and Consumables History Page

A counter next to each item shows the number of the items that have been used. The
counters calculate from the installation of the printer and from the time that the counters
were reset to zero.
FA69084–1
NOTES:
1. A note must be made of the Print and Consumables History counts before the
system software is changed, the battery link LK4 is removed, or the IPM PCB is
replaced. If the system software is changed or link LK4 is removed, the printer
memory is initialized and the counters are reset to zero.
2. Linx recommends that the Linx Sync software or the USB facility is used to save
the data before the system software is changed or the battery link LK4 is
removed. When the maintenance is completed, the Linx Sync software or the
USB facility is then used to restore the data.
The information can be used for the following purposes:
• To allow more flexible commercial arrangements between the supplier and the
customer.
• To provide customers with a greater knowledge of ink and solvent use from day to
day.
• To provide maintenance technicians with information about the past performance of
the printer.
The information in the Print and Consumables History page is only a general indication.
Many variables control the rate at which ink and solvent are used. For this reason,
calculations for the next time that the ink or solvent are refilled are approximate. Refer to
the information displayed on the Print and Consumables Data page (Print Monitor >
Menu > System Information > Print and Consumables Data).
Messages
This item shows the total number of messages that have been printed from the time that the
printer was installed.
Drops
This item shows the total number of drops that have been printed from the time that the
printer was installed.
Ink Bottles
This item shows the total number of ink bottles that have been used in the printer from the
time that the printer was installed.
Solvent Bottles
This item shows the total number of solvent bottles that have been used in the printer from
the time that the printer was installed.
Recent Messages
This item shows the number of messages that have been printed from the time that the
counter was last reset to zero.
Recent Drops
This item shows the number of drops that have been printed from the time that the counter
was last reset to zero.
Recent Ink Bottles

This item shows the number of ink bottles that have been used in the printer from the time
that the counter was last reset to zero.
FA69084–1
Recent Solvent Bottles
This item shows the number of solvent bottles that have been used in the printer from the
time that the counter was last reset to zero.
Reset Recent
When the Reset Recent option is highlighted and the Select key is pressed, all four of the
Recent ... counters are reset to zero. That is, the Recent Messages, Recent Drops, Recent
Ink Bottles, and Recent Solvent Bottles items.
FA69084–1
5.4 Maintenance Instructions
5.4.1 Introduction
The following Maintenance Instructions are provided for use by maintenance technicians
who are trained and authorized by Linx. These instructions describe how to perform a
range of maintenance tasks on the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer. The primary instruction is the
‘Scheduled Maintenance’ procedure, which describes the maintenance that is required at
the recommended intervals for the ink type used in the printer. The purpose of scheduled
maintenance is to prevent possible future causes of failure.
The remaining instructions describe different tasks to maintain the printer. For example,
how to drain and flush the ink system, replace parts in the ink system, test the valves, align
the jet, calibrate the IPM PCB. Some of these instructions are also referred to in the
‘Scheduled Maintenance’ instruction, and are performed during that maintenance task.
5.4.2 Maintenance Terminology

erminology
Some maintenance actions used in this section have special meanings, which are defined as
follows:
Check Make a comparison of a measurement of time, pressure, temperature,
resistance, dimension or other quantity, with a known figure for that
measurement.
Test Confirm, with the use of the correct test equipment, that a component or
system correctly functions.
Examine Inspect the condition of an item. For example, any of the following can
have an effect on the condition of an item:
• Loose connection or installation.
• Cracks.
• Corrosion or contamination.
• Distortion.
• Loose or missing rivets.
• Cuts or wear.
• Damaged or broken locks or fasteners.
• Loose pipeline clips or protective material. Obstruction of pipelines or
leaks from pipelines.
• Change of colour due to high temperature or fluid leaks.
Operate Make sure that an item or system functions correctly, without the use of
test equipment or reference to measurements.
Refill Add a material to a tank, bottle or other container to a known level or
quantity, and as necessary:
• Remove caps or covers from filler openings.
• Clear filler openings.
• Make sure that gaskets and caps or covers are not damaged.
• Refit caps or covers.
• Fit locks or fasteners as necessary.
FA69084–1
Fit Correctly attach one item to another item.
Refit Fit an item that was previously removed.
Replace Remove an item and fit a serviced or new item.
Connect Join or attach electrical cables, pipelines or controls.
Disconnect Separate or remove electrical cables, pipelines or controls.
Reconnect Join or attach electrical cables, pipelines or controls that were previously
disconnected.
5.4.3 Antistatic Precautions
The PCBs in Linx printers use some electrostatic-sensitive components that can be severely
damaged if these components are submitted to static discharge. Static electricity, which is
generated on a person through friction and movement, is discharged through the first route
to earth that is contacted. Damage caused by a static discharge is not always immediately
detected after the static discharge has occurred, and can cause component failure in the
future. It is very important that maintenance technicians use the following antistatic
precautions when PCBs are touched:
• Wear an antistatic wrist strap that is approved by industry and includes a resistive
component (greater than 2 MΩ) in the lead. The antistatic wrist strap must be
connected to a good electrical earth. The continuity of the antistatic wrist strap and the
electrical earth must be checked at regular intervals.
• Always hold a PCB by its edges and do not touch the components or printed circuit
tracks. After a PCB is removed from a printer or its packaging, the PCB must be put on
a static-dissipative mat.
• Always use antistatic packaging when PCBs and software components are shipped or
moved between locations. All Linx PCBs are shipped in special antistatic boxes and
these boxes must be used again for any further transportation.
5.4.4 Recommended Procedures

After the printer is turned off, it is recommended to wait a minimum of 30 seconds before
the printer is turned on again. This action allows the capacitors to discharge to an
acceptable level before power is applied again.
FA69084–1
5.4.5 7300 CE Approval Checklist
CE approval for the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer depends on the conditions given below. If the
printer is not left in the correct condition, the CE approval for the printer may be
invalidated. All maintenance technicians must make sure that the printer meets the
following conditions after any maintenance task is completed, so that the CE approval and
general safety are maintained.
Electronics
• All IPM PCB and Display PCB securing screws must be fitted and correctly tightened.
• The fan must be connected to the LVPSU and must be operating.
• Links LK5, LK19, LK20, LK21,LK26 and LK27 must NOT be left fitted on the IPM PCB.
Ink System
• The ink spillage detector must be fitted and connected.
• Gland fittings from the printhead to the ink system enclosure, and from the ink system
enclosure to the electronics compartment, must be undamaged, correctly fitted and
tight.
• The ink and solvent filler cap/bottle O-ring and the filler tube O-ring must be present,
undamaged and correctly fitted.
• The valves and valve gaskets must be correctly fitted, and the valve caps must be
tightly connected.
• The pressure transducer connector and protective boot must be correctly fitted.
Printhead
• The bonding wire between the printhead and the chassis must be tightly connected.
• The printhead cover tube must be correctly fitted and the thumb screw tightened.
Cabinet
• EMC gaskets on the top cover must not be damaged and be correctly fitted.
• The keyboard must be correctly and tightly fitted.
• There must not be any obstruction to the ventilation of the printer—for example, no
obstruction of the air filter.
• The external alarm connector (PL5 on the rear panel) earth stud and nut must be
connected.
• The protective earth (PE) connector of the mains power cable must be tightly connected
to the earth terminal in the cabinet. All of the other earth connections within the cabinet
must be tightly connected.
• The earth bonding wire between the top cover and the chassis must be tightly
connected.
• The top cover must be correctly engaged with the hinge bracket on the rear chassis,
and the cover latch must be correctly fastened.
• The ink and solvent caps must be correctly fitted.
FA69084–1
5.4.6 Scheduled Maintenance Checklist
The Scheduled Maintenance Checklist is a summary of the ‘Scheduled Maintenance’
instruction and provides useful information about the history of the printer. An example of
the form is given at the end of the ‘Scheduled Maintenance’ instruction and the form is for
use by Distributor maintenance technicians. The form must be completed by the
maintenance technician on completion of a scheduled maintenance on a printer, then filed
with the history documents of the printer.
NOTE: Linx maintenance technicians must use the authorized Service Report form on
completion of a scheduled maintenance of a printer.
If Distributors use this form, Linx recommends that the form is created as a two-page,
carbon-copy document. The top copy is the Customer Copy and the bottom copy is the
Service Copy (printer history).
5.4.7 Maintenance Instruction Documents

The Maintenance Instructions that describe the correct procedures on how to perform
different maintenance tasks on the 7300 printer are contained in the following pages. These
instructions are created as single documents, which can be removed and copied for
separate use.
FA69084–1
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Parts Required
FA65027 4200CE/4800/6800 Scheduled Maintenance Kit

comprising:
FA13004 Ink Dip Tube Assembly
FA72050 Feed Damper Assembly
FA73044 Main Ink Filter 10 µm
FA65026 4200CE/4800/6800 Basic Scheduled Maintenance Kit

comprising:
Additional Parts Required

FA73014 O-ring 7.66 x 1.78 EPDM—Pack as required
FA74135 M3 x 28 Csk333- Poz SS Screw—Pack as required
FA74136 Gasket Fluid Connector 3-Way—Pack as required
FA74163 3-Way Connector Replacement Filter (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro
printheads)
FA74189 3-Way Connector Replacement Filter (Ultima plus and Midi plus
printheads)
FA13178 6800 Air Filter for IP55 (as necessary)
FA13179 6800 Air Filter for IP65
Equipment Required
FA65016 Scheduled Maintenance Tool Kit

comprising:
FA65007 Blanking Set 1/8 Union Fitting
FA65022 Fluid Connector 3-Way—Service Accessories
FA65023 Pre-Pump Swage Tool
FA69012 Lubricant Small—Main Ink Filter
FA74005 Damper Drain Tube
FA65337 4800/6800 Dip Tube Removal Tool
FA79018 Tube PTFE 1/8 OD x 1/16 ID, Natural, 5 metres
FA79019 Tube PTFE 1/8 OD x 1/16 ID, Blue, 5 metres
FA79020 Tube PTFE 1/8 OD x 1/16 ID, Red, 5 metres
FA79021 Tube PTFE 6 mm OD x 4 mm ID, Natural, 5 metres
FA79022 Tube PTFE 3/16 OD x 1/8 ID, Natural, 5 metres
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA69084–1
FA900005 Beaker 0.25 Litre

FA940003 Eyeglass x9 Magnification
FA940021 Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml
FA940029 Solvent Resistant Cleaning Brush
FA940067 Double-Ended Trim Tool
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
FA30054 Tygon 4040A Tube 1/4 in. OD x 1/8 in. ID (IJ600 only)
FA30058 Tygon 4040A Tube 3/16 in. OD x 3/32 in. ID (IJ600 only)
Additional Equipment Required

FA72150 Fluid Connector 3-Way—Service Accessories—Pigmented
FA74046 Nozzle Cleaning Service Accessory
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA65339 Mandrel Extraction Tool
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
FA100007 Tube PTFE 6 mm OD x 4 mm ID, Coil 25 mm ID, 5 metres (Spectrum
printer only)
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 ) where recommended
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) where recommended
Antistatic Wrist Strap and Lead
DVM (Digital Voltmeter)
Tweezers
Waste ink container (at least 5 litres capacity)
Beaker, stainless steel or glass
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Recording
Raise and complete a Scheduled Maintenance Checklist (not applicable to Linx maintenance
technicians). An example of the document is provided at the end of this Scheduled
Maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Procedures

AND SKIN.
All 7300 Printers

1 Speak to the operators and enquire if there are any problems with the printer’s
performance.
2 Record the printer model and serial number, and the printhead type and serial
number.
3 Record the printhead calibration code and Reference Modulation taken from the
printhead conduit label. Record these same parameters from the Printhead page
and the Monitor Jet page, respectively.
4 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
5 Examine the printhead conduit for damage and make sure that it is secured
correctly at the terminating bushes.
6 Examine the mains electrical supply cable for damage, and make sure that the
connector is in good condition and correctly connected. Replace as necessary.
7 Remove the printhead cover tube. Examine the printhead and components for
damage or obvious misalignment.
8 Clean the printhead using the correct solvent for the type of ink being used in
the printer. If the printer uses a pigmented ink, carry out the procedure described
in the ‘Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks’ maintenance instruction.
9 Switch on the printer and start the jet. Record all of the required data from the
Monitor Jet and Maintenance Times pages (Print Monitor > Menu >
Maintenance). Monitor and record any fault or warning messages.
10 Shutdown the jet and switch off the printer.
11 Drain the ink from the ink system. Refer to the ‘Draining the Ink System’
maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Standard 7300 Printers Only

12 Pigmented ink printers only (not Spectrum printer):
(a) Remove the ink tank.
(b) Half fill the tank with clean solvent (of the correct type) and leave to stand in a
suitable container for 10 minutes to allow the pigment and conductive salts to
soften.
(c) Rinse out the tank with solvent until all deposits have been removed.
(d) Wash the outside of the tank using solvent and the Solvent Cleaning Bottle.
(e) Invert the tank in the container and leave to drain and dry before refitting.
13 Remove the mandrel and filter assemblies from the ink and solvent filler tubes
using the Mandrel Extraction Tool. Examine the filters and filler tubes for any
debris (for example, foil seals from ink or solvent bottles) and remove if found.
Refit the mandrel and filter assemblies.
14 Examine the filler cap/bottle O-ring and the filler tube O-ring (ink and solvent).
Replace any damaged O-rings.
15 Replace the ink dip (pick-up) tube, which includes the in-line filter. Refer to the
‘Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement’ maintenance instruction. This replacement must
be carried out at every Scheduled Maintenance.
16 It is recommended that the damper is replaced annually. Determine when the
damper was last replaced, and replace it if it is between 12 and 18 months old. A
‘damper replacement date’ label is supplied with the replacement damper kit,
which should be filled in and attached to the front of the ink system enclosure.
17 Examine the ink system tubing for trapping and kinks. Replace any damaged tubing.
18 Replace the filter in the 3-way fluid connector (pigmented ink printers only).
Refer to the ‘3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement’ maintenance instruction.
19 Turn on the printer.
20 Enter the SureFill code for the first bottle of new ink, and then refill the ink system
with two 0.5-litre bottles of new ink. (A SureFill code is not required for the second
bottle of ink.) Make sure that the ink is the correct type for the printer type.
21 Turn off the printer.
22 Replace the main ink filter. Refer to the ‘Main Ink Filter Replacement’ maintenance
instruction.
23 Purge the main ink filter. Refer to the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance
instruction.
7300 Spectrum Printer Only

12 Remove the ink tank lid and examine the inside of the tank for pigment build-up.
Clean the inside of the tank as necessary. Refer to the ‘Spectrum Ink Tank
Removal’ maintenance instruction.
13 Replace the main ink filter. Refer to the ‘Main Ink Filter Replacement’ maintenance
instruction.
14 Remove the mandrel and filter assemblies from the ink and solvent filler tubes
using the Mandrel Extraction Tool. Examine the filters and filler tubes for any
debris (for example, foil seals from ink or solvent bottles) and remove if found.
FA69084–1
15 Refit the mandrel and filter assemblies.

16 Examine the filler cap/bottle O-ring and the filler tube O-ring (ink and solvent).
Replace any damaged O-rings.
17 It is recommended that the damper is replaced annually. Determine when the
damper was last replaced, and replace it if it is between 12 and 18 months old. A
‘damper replacement date’ label is supplied with the replacement damper kit,
which should be filled in and attached to the front of the ink system enclosure.
18 Examine the ink system tubing for trapping and kinks. Replace any damaged tubing.
19 Replace the filter in the 3-way fluid connector. Refer to the ‘3-Way Fluid Connector
Filter Replacement’ maintenance instruction.
20 Turn on the printer.
21 Enter the SureFill code for the first bottle of new ink, and then refill the ink system
with two 0.5-litre bottles of new ink. (A SureFill code is not required for the second
bottle of ink.) Make sure that the ink is the correct type for the printer type.
22 Turn off the printer.
23 Purge the main ink filter. Refer to the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance
instruction.
All 7300 Printers

24 Examine the wiring and connectors within the electronics compartment and to the
Display PCB for trapping and signs of abrasion. Replace any damaged cables.
25 Remove the air filter as shown in Figures 1 or 2. The 7300 (IP65 version) filter is
disposable, that is, it must be replaced rather than cleaned and refitted.
The 7300 filter must be cleaned, using compressed air blown through in the reverse
direction to the normal airflow, and refitted. Examine the 7300 filter and replace it
if it is severely blocked or damaged. Make sure that the new filter is fitted with the
metal side facing down.
73050
Figure 1. Removing the 7300 (IP65 version) Air Filter
FA69084–1
73049
Figure 2. Removing the 7300 Air Filter

26 Examine the printer for any loose hardware and secure as necessary.
CAUTION: Static-Sensitive Devices. The PCBs contain static-sensitive devices. Take the
following antistatic precautions when PCBs are touched. Wear an antistatic wrist strap and
connect the lead to a good electrical earth. Always hold PCBs by their edges and do not touch
the components, printed circuit tracks or connector pins.
27 Examine the PCBs for physical damage, signs of arcing between high and low
voltage tracks, and ink contamination. Rectify any faults. Clean off any dust or
debris from the PCBs using a soft brush.

MAXIMUM CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTER WHILE
WARNING IS IGNORED.
28 Calibrate the Charge Amplifier. Refer to the ‘Charge Amplifier Calibration’

29 Perform printhead valves tests. Refer to the ‘Printhead Valves Tests’ maintenance
instruction.
30 Make sure that the jet is correctly aligned. Refer to the ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle
Cleaning’ maintenance instruction.
31 Start the printer (if necessary) and record the parameters displayed on the Monitor
Jet page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
FA69084–1
32 While observing the printhead, shut down and then restart the jet using the [stop]
and [start] keys. Repeat the shutdown and startup operation four times,
monitoring the time taken to start up, and recording all the parameters and times
taken. Both the shutdown and startup should be clean. If any startup takes longer
than nominally 2 minutes, check for any associated fault or warning messages and
investigate the cause of the problem.
33 Take print samples using the standard test message and record the calculated Ref
Modulation on the Scheduled Maintenance Checklist. Refer to the ‘Modulation Range
Checks’ maintenance instruction.
34 Remove the printhead cover tube and reconfirm correct jet alignment. Refer to the
‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction.
35 Refit the printhead cover tube, making sure that the securing screw is fully
tightened.
36 On the Maintenance Times page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance), reset the
Maintenance Due Within and Maintenance Due By values to the recommended
maintenance intervals for the ink type used in the printer and the environmental
conditions. To do this, select the Maintenance Finished option. Refer to
Maintenance Page > Maintenance Times earlier in this chapter.
37 Run the printer for 30 minutes, taking print samples every 10 minutes using the
standard test message. Record the calculated Reference Modulation on the
Scheduled Maintenance Checklist.. Refer to the ‘Modulation Range Checks’
38 Run the printer on the production line. Advise the operator or production manager
of any specific points relating to the operation of the printer, its location, or the
mounting of the printhead. Record any advice given on the Service Report form.
39 Make sure that the printer top cover is securely refitted.
40 Clean the printer top cover and base unit.
41 On completion of the scheduled maintenance, make sure that the customer signs
the Service Report form.
42 Make sure that all print samples are retained with the Service Report form.
43 The ‘Scheduled Maintenance’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
CUSTOMER DATE CALL NUMBER
PRINTER MODEL PRINTER SERIAL No.
PRINTHEAD TYPE PRINTHEAD SERIAL No.
PRINTHEAD CAL. CODE (CONDUIT) REF MOD PRINTHEAD CAL. CODE (PRINTER) REF MOD
POWER ON TIME (HRS) TOTAL JET RUNNING TIME (HRS) TOTAL
POWER ON TIME (HRS) PRESENT JET RUNNING TIME (HRS) PRESENT
ITEM ✔ ITEM ✔
• Speak with Operators to determine any problems • Examine for loose hardware
• Record printer and printhead details • Remove, examine, clean and refit PCBs
• Examine conduit/supply cable • Calibrate Charge Amplifier
• Examine and clean printhead • Perform valve tests
• Start printer and record data • Ensure correct jet alignment
Pressure TOF Phase Solvent Read Pressure TOF Phase Solvent Read
steady? Add Pressure steady? Add Pressure
• Drain ink system • Start printer and record jet parameters

• Clean ink tank (pigmented inks
n only) • Stop/start checks
• Examine ink/solvent filler tubes for debris • Perform Mod range checks with print samples
• Replace pre-pump filter (N/A* to 49/68/69/7300) • Record calculated Ref Mod value ➨
• Replace ink dip tube (N/A* to 6200 & Spectrum) • Reconfirm jet alignment
• Replace damper • Reset Service/Maintenance time interval
• Replace solv. pick-up filter (N/A* to 49/68/69/7300) • Perform Mod range checks with print samples
• Examine ink system tubing • Record calculated Ref Mod value ➨
• Replace 3-way fluid connector filter (pig. inks only) • Run printer ‘on line’ and advise operator
• Refill ink system • Refit and secure top cover and all screws
• Replace main ink filter • Clean printer top cover and base unit
• Examine electronics wiring and connectors • Complete paperwork
• Clean/replace air filter
* N/A = Not Applicable
CUSTOMER’S SIGNATURE
NAME
SIGNATURE
Issue 9 Aug 09
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks
Equipment Required
FA81505/5L General Purpose MEK 1505
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 loves Nitrile Large 8–8.5
Gloves )
Introduction
This maintenance instruction details the procedure for cleaning Mk7 printheads fitted to
7300 printers that use the following pigmented inks:
• Black Pigmented Ink 1009
• Yellow Pigmented Ink 1039
• White Pigmented Ink 1059
• Brilliant White Ink 1305 and 1306
• High-Opacity Grey Ink 1310 and 1311
• Opaque Blue ink 1043
Linx recommends that the printhead should be checked daily for ink build-up and cleaned
if necessary. It should also be cleaned at intervals of 1 working week using a non-abrasive,
solvent resistant brush (FA940029).

AND SKIN.
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Nozzle Assembly. Blockages and print failures can
occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead nozzle assembly. Wear powder-free
protective gloves during the following procedure to prevent contamination of the printhead
nozzle assembly. If the standard protective gloves that contain powder are worn, powder
contamination can enter the printhead nozzle assembly.
FA69084–1
Procedure
1 Stop the jet and wait for the following message to appear in the Printer Status area
of the Print Monitor page:
“IDLE”
or wait until the Auto Power Down facility switches the printer off.
2 Switch off the printer and disconnect it from the mains electrical supply.
3 Remove the printhead cover tube.
CAUTION: Solvent Precautions for the Printhead and Nozzle. The printhead and nozzle can
be damaged if important precautions are not taken. Make sure that the solvent used to wash
the printhead is the correct type for the ink used in the printer. Do not wash the nozzle with
solvent unless the nozzle has an ink obstruction or blockage. NEVER USE A BRUSH ON
THE NOZZLE.
4 Hold the printhead over a beaker, as shown in Figure 1, and wash the area (shown
circled) from the charge electrode downwards with solvent.
68123
MIDI -PLUS
WASH THIS
AREA ONLY
Figure 1. Correct Area of the Printhead to Wash with Solvent
FA69084–1
5 Use the brush to gently remove any ink deposits that will not wash off from the
circled area shown in Figure 1, paying particular attention to the deflector plates
(Figure 2). Do not use the brush to clean the nozzle.
68124
MIDI -PLUS
CLEAN ONLY THIS

AREA WITH THE BRUSH.
DO NOT USE THE BRUSH
ON THE NOZZLE
Figure 2. Correct Area of the Printhead to Clean with the Brush

CAUTION: Printhead Damage. Black pigmented ink 1009 contains carbon particles, which are
very conductive. It is most important to make sure that ALL traces of carbon are removed
from the printhead surface around the charge electrode and between the deflector plates. If
these areas are not cleaned completely, the remaining carbon can cause short circuits, which
can damage the printhead.
6 Alternately, wash and then gently brush the circled area of the printhead (Figure
2), finishing with a wash when all the ink deposits have been removed. Only use
new solvent. Do not recycle the solvent.
7 Allow the printhead to dry.
FA69084–1
8 Wash the inside of the printhead cover tube with solvent, as shown in Figure 3,
until all ink has been removed. Use the brush, where possible, to remove ink
deposits that do not immediately wash off. Finish the cleaning with a wash and
allow the cover tube to dry.
Figure 3. Washing the Printhead Cover Tube with Solvent

9 Refit the printhead cover tube and firmly tighten the knurled securing screw.
10 The ‘Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Draining the Ink System
Equipment Required
FA65339 Mandrel Extraction Tool
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
Waste ink container (at least 5 litres capacity)
Procedure

AND SKIN.
All 7300 Printers

electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover. Position the
cover so that the keyboard and display can be accessed.
FA69084–1
4 Switch the printer on and select the System Flush option on the Maintenance
page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance). The first page of the System Flush
procedure is displayed with the instruction “Check solvent level.”.
69183
Figure 1. System Flush—First Page

5 To continue with the System Flush procedure (and therefore the Empty Tank
sequence), it is necessary to perform a number of actions on the printer before the
flush cycles can begin. These required actions are displayed on each successive
System Flush page, and must be performed in accordance with the following
expanded explanations for each instruction. Once each action has been completed,
press the OK key, which displays the next instruction.
6 Check solvent level. This action is not applicable when draining the ink system; it
is only necessary to press the OK key to proceed to the next instruction.
7 Prop up the printer. (Not applicable to the 7300 Spectrum printer—see NOTE
below.) Before commencing the ink draining procedure, the printer must be raised
by approximately 50 mm at the front left side to aid drainage of the ink. This is
because the ink dip tube is situated at the rear right side of the tank.
NOTE: The 7300 Spectrum printer does not require propping up, but the OK key
must be pressed to continue the procedure.

WARNING IS IGNORED.
8 Orientate filter and damper. Ignore the instruction regarding the filter. Carefully
lift the feed damper clear of the ink system enclosure. Hold the feed damper in
the vertical position with the drain cap uppermost.
FA69084–1
9 Connect bleed line to damper. Remove the damper drain cap and connect the
Damper Drain Tube Luer fitting (included in the Damper Drain Tube kit) to the
damper drain. Insert the other end of the drain tube into a waste container of at
least 5 litres capacity. Orientate the damper so that the drain is at the bottom, that
is, at its lowest position, as shown in the following illustration.
68050
Drain Tube
Figure 2. Feed Damper Orientation with Drain Tube Connected

10 When the required actions have been completed, the following page is displayed.
69184
Figure 3. System Flush Options Page

11 Press the Empty Tank key, which displays the instruction “Turn on tap to bleed
line.”.
IMPORTANT: The bleed line tap is used in the Linx manufacturing process only.
There is no bleed line in the maintenance technician’s Damper
Drain Tube kit, therefore, any action referring to the bleed line tap
should be ignored.
12 Due to the unique design of the 7300 Spectrum ink tank, it is not possible to drain
all of the ink with the Empty Tank function. Therefore, to enable all of the ink to
be removed, proceed with the following step 12 sub-items.
FA69084–1

12a Disconnect and remove the ink pick-up pipe, which is connected between the ink
tank lid (Festo connection) and the pump/PRV (pressure relief valve) T-piece.
Discard the pipe but retain the Festo nut.
12b Connect a new 360 mm length of 6 mm OD tube to the pump/PRV T-piece.
12c Remove the mandrel and filter assembly from the ink filler tube using the
Mandrel Extraction Tool.
12d Insert the free end of the new length of pipe into the ink tank and push it down
until it reaches the base of the tank. Hold the pipe in place for the duration of the
Empty Tank sequence to make sure that all the ink is removed.
All 7300 Printers

CAUTION: Pump Damage. Do not allow the ink system pump to run in a dry condition. Use the
Empty Tank sequence only the number of times required to empty the system of ink. The
pump must not be run for longer than 30 seconds after the change in the sound of the pump
indicates that cavitation (no ink in the pump) has occurred. Damage to the pump can occur if
the pump is allowed to run continuously in a dry condition.
13 Press the OK key to continue the procedure, which starts the pump. The pump
runs at maximum pressure for approximately 1 minute and 40 seconds, and then
automatically stops on completion of the Empty Tank sequence. During the
sequence a Progress bar gives an indication of how much of the sequence has
been completed. Press the Stop Sequence key if the audible pitch of the pump
changes indicating that the ink tank is empty.
69307
Figure 4. Empty Tank Sequence in Progress

14 At some point towards the end of the Empty Tank sequence the ‘ink low’
condition will be reached. Make sure that the System Event page is displayed
with the System Warning message “3.03 Ink Low”. Press the OK key on the
System Event page to accept the warning.
15 If the tank is not empty after a single Empty Tank sequence, select the Empty
Tank option again to repeat the sequence. Press the Stop Sequence key when the
audible pitch of the pump changes, indicating that the ink tank is empty.
FA69084–1
16 At this point the ink pick-up pipe on the 7300 Spectrum must be reconnected to the
ink pick-up connection on the tank lid. To do this, proceed with the following
step 16 sub-items.

16a Withdraw the drain pipe from the ink tank and wipe off any surplus ink from the
end.
16b Cut the pipe to a length of 55 mm using the Tube Cutter.
16c Fit the Festo nut (retained earlier) over the end of the newly cut pipe.
16d Insert the end of the pipe into the ink pick-up connection on the tank lid, and fit
and tighten the Festo nut.
16e Refit the mandrel and filter assembly to the ink filler tube using the Mandrel
Extraction Tool.
All 7300 Printers

17 Disconnect the drain tube from the damper and refit the drain cap.
18 Reposition the damper back in its original location in the ink system enclosure.
19 The ‘Draining the Ink System’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Equipment Required
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm as required
Correct solvent for the ink used in the printer as required
Introduction
This maintenance instruction describes the procedure for removing the 7300 Spectrum ink
tank for access to the main ink filter. It also details the procedure for removing the ink
tank lid to enable the tank to be cleaned, and includes the cleaning recommendations.

AND SKIN.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES GLASSES AND SOLVENT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES
WHEN THERE IS DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE INKS AND SOLVENTS, WHEN WORK IS DONE
ON THE PRINTER, AND WHEN THE PRINTER IS CLEANED.
Procedure
Removal for Access

1 Make sure that the ink system has been drained before proceeding with this
procedure. Refer to the ‘Draining the Ink System’ maintenance instruction.
2 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the
mains electrical supply.
4 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
5 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
FA69084–1
6 Disconnect the ink tank float switch sensor cable. Gently pull the cable through
the grommet in the ink system enclosure wall until the connector is touching the
grommet. This makes sure that there is sufficient slack to enable the tank to be
removed.
7 Unclip the PRV (pressure relief valve) from its retaining clip located on the left
side of the tank.
8 Disconnect the ink pick-up and return pipes (connections shown in Figure 1) from
the tank lid using a 12 mm AF spanner.
69390
Ink Tank Vent Pipe
and Purge Pipe
Connections
Ink Pick-up Pipe

and Ink Return Pipe
Connections
Ink Tank
Base Plate
Bracket
Figure 1. 7300 Spectrum Ink Tank

9 If there is insufficient slack in the ink tank vent and purge pipes to allow removal
of the tank, remove the pipes from the tank lid barb connections (shown in Figure
1) using the tube cutter.
10 Loosen the four pump securing bolts using a 7 mm AF spanner and pull the pump
forward a few millimetres, away from the ink tank.
11 Pull the ink tank assembly forward until the tank is clear of the lip of the ink
system enclosure.
12 Lift the tank clear and suspend it from the right-hand side of the ink system
enclosure using the bracket formed in the ink tank base plate (shown in Figure 1).
13 The main ink filter can now be replaced if required. Refer to the ‘Main Ink Filter
Replacement’ maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Ink Tank Cleaning and Refitting

14 Remove the ink filler cap.
15 Remove the six tank lid securing screws using a 3 mm hexagon key.
16 Remove the lid and rubber gasket.
NOTE: If the 7300 Spectrum printer is left idle for a period in excess of 4 weeks or there
has been a fault with the ink mixing circuit, the inside of the ink tank can become
heavily stained with pigment. This pigment build-up must be removed and the
tank thoroughly cleaned to make sure that the ink system can circulate and mix
the ink correctly, keeping the pigment in suspension.
17 To clean the ink tank, a combination of the correct solvent and a stiff brush must
be used to remove the pigment lining the inside of the tank. Do not use any other
tools that might scratch the stainless steel surface of the tank.
18 Refit the rubber gasket to the lid making sure that it is firmly seated in the gasket
recess. Hold the gasket in place with the lid securing screws to make sure that it
does not become trapped when the lid is refitted.
19 Refit the lid to the tank and secure with the six hexagon screws.
20 Temporarily refit the ink filler cap to reduce evaporation of the ink.
21 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure.
22 Unhook the tank from the side of the ink system enclosure and reposition it in the
ink system enclosure. Push the tank rearwards making sure that it fits under the
lip of the ink system enclosure.
23 Reposition the pump and tighten the four pump securing bolts.
24 If the ink tank vent and purge pipes were removed, reconnect them to the tank lid
barb connections.
25 Reconnect the ink pick-up and return pipes to the tank lid.
26 Refit the PRV (pressure relief valve) in its retaining clip.
27 Gently push the float switch sensor cable back through the grommet in the ink
system enclosure wall and reconnect it.
29 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
30 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
31 The ‘Spectrum Ink Tank Removal’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement
Parts Required
Equipment Required
FA69012 Lubricant Small—Main Ink Filter
FA65337 4800/6800 Dip Tube Removal Tool
Abrasive paper
Introduction
The ink tank dip (pick-up) tube has an integral 40 µm, stainless steel, in-line filter fitted
inside the tube. The dip tube and filter, together with relevant O-rings, come ready
assembled in the spare part pack. A compression fitting is also included.
48216
Figure 1. Ink Tank Dip (Pick-up) Tube and Filter Assembly

This maintenance instruction describes the procedure for replacing the ink tank dip tube
and filter assembly, which must be carried out at every Scheduled Maintenance.
FA69084–1
Procedure

AND SKIN.
electrical supply.
Position the cover so that the keyboard can be accessed.
and solvent.
5 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel around the area of the ink dip tube to contain
any ink that might be spilt.
6 Remove the dip tube from the ink tank using the Dip Tube Removal Tool. Note
that the dip tube is not threaded but is a push fit.
7 Unscrew the ink dip tube compression fitting and disconnect the ink pick-up pipe.
Discard the compression fitting and the dip tube.
8 Prepare the end of the ink pick-up pipe by cutting off the portion previously
compressed by the compression fitting and containing the steel insert
(approximately 20 mm). Use the Tube Cutter to make sure that the pipe is cut clean
and straight.
9 Remove the stainless steel insert from the cut portion of pipe and push it back into
the pick-up pipe until it is flush with the end. (It may help to grip the pipe if it is
held in a piece of abrasive paper.)
10 Slide the new compression fitting onto the ink pick-up pipe. Insert the pipe into the
new dip tube outlet and slide the compression fitting down to the dip tube
connection.
11 Apply two drops of thread assembly lubricant to the dip tube threads and screw
the compression fitting firmly onto the connection.
12 Lightly lubricate the two O-rings fitted to the neck of the new dip tube assembly
with thread assembly lubricant. Fit the dip tube to the ink tank by pushing it firmly
into place.
FA69084–1

WARNING IS IGNORED.
NOTE: If the ink tank dip tube replacement is being done as part of the Scheduled
Maintenance, there will be no ink in the tank at this point. Therefore, the following
leak check must be carried out at a later stage in the Scheduled Maintenance once
the tank has been refilled with ink.
13 Switch on the printer.
14 Start the jet and examine the dip tube compression fitting for leaks.
15 Shut down and switch off the printer.
16 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system.
20 The ‘Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement
Parts Required
FA74163 3-Way Connector Replacement Filter (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro
printheads)
or
FA74189 3-Way Connector Replacement Filter (Ultima plus and Midi plus
printheads)
Equipment Required
Tweezers
Procedure

AND SKIN.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
5 Carefully lift the 3-way fluid connector clear of the ink system enclosure.
6 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the 3-way fluid connector to contain
FA69084–1
7 Unscrew and remove the 3-way fluid connector assembly screw and separate the
two parts of the connector (see Figure 1).
68053
Assembly Filter
screw
O-ring gasket
Locating
lug
Locating
recess
Figure 1. 3-Way Fluid Connector Disassembled

8 Remove and discard the old O-ring gasket from the fluid connector.
9 Remove and discard the old filter from inside the larger of the two parts of the
fluid connector, using the thicker, grooved end of the plastic insert/extract tool
supplied with the new filter.
CAUTION: Contamination of the 3-Way Fluid Connector Filter and O-Ring Gasket. Blockages
and print failures can occur if contamination is allowed to enter the 3-way fluid connector.
The following procedure must be performed in a clean, dust-free environment, and a special
Clean Room is recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the new filter and gasket
are fitted. Use tweezers to carefully hold and fit the components. The new filter and gasket
must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be prevented. Wear powder-free
protective gloves during the procedure. If the standard protective gloves that contain powder
are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle assembly.
10 Remove the new filter from its protective bag and examine it for any damage and
contamination.
11 Insert the new filter fully into the fluid connector using the thinner, smooth end of
the insert/extract tool supplied with the new filter.
12 Remove the new O-ring gasket from its protective bag and examine it for any
damage and flash.
13 Using the tweezers, carefully position the new O-ring gasket in the shaped recess
in the larger part of the fluid connector.
14 Fit and hold the two parts of the fluid connector together, making sure that the
locating lug and recess are correctly aligned.
FA69084–1
15 Refit and fully tighten the fluid connector assembly screw.

NOTE: If the 3-way fluid connector filter replacement is being done as part of the
Scheduled Maintenance, there will be no ink in the tank at this point. Therefore, the
following jet alignment, nozzle cleaning, and leak check must be carried out at a
later stage in the Scheduled Maintenance once the tank has been refilled with ink.
16 Carry out the ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction,
checking the 3-way fluid connector for leaks at the same time.
17 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure and reposition the
3-way fluid connector back in its original location.
21 The ‘3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Main Ink Filter Replacement
Parts Required
Equipment Required
Abrasive paper
Introduction
This maintenance instruction describes the procedure for replacing the main ink filter on
both the Standard 7300 printer and the 7300 Spectrum printer. Where there are differences
in the procedure for the 7300 Spectrum printer, these are stated at the relevant points in the
instruction.
The main ink filter (which has a post-LOT #L087 number) has pre-lubricated fluid
connections, and therefore does not require the application of assembly lubricant.
Procedure

AND SKIN.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
5 7300 Spectrum printer only. Remove the ink tank to gain access to the main ink
filter (refer to the ‘Spectrum Ink Tank Removal’ maintenance instruction).
6 Carefully lift the main ink filter clear of the ink system enclosure.
FA69084–1
7 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the main ink filter and venturi
manifold to contain any ink that might be spilt.
8 Remove the new filter, two lengths of pipe and two stainless steel inserts from their
packaging.
9 Cut the two lengths of pipe to the following printer-dependent lengths (if
necessary), using the Tube Cutter to make sure that they are cut cleanly and
straight.
69319
MAIN INK FILTER INLET AND OUTLET PIPE LENGTHS
Printer model Filter inlet pipe Filter outlet pipe

(mm) (mm)
6900 IP55 & IP65 230 185
6900 Spectrum 75 220
Figure 1. Main Ink Filter Inlet and Outlet Pipe Lengths

10 Push a stainless steel insert into one end of each of the two lengths of pipe making
sure that the inserts are pushed in flush with the end of the pipes.
11 Remove the nuts, grippers and sleeves from both sides of the new filter and fit
them over the steel insert ends of the pipes, in the correct order (see Figure 2).
Insert Sleeve Gripper Nut

6203
Figure 2. Correct Assembly of the Main Ink Filter Fluid Connections

12 Insert the 230 mm or 75 mm pipe (refer to step 9) into the inlet port of the new
filter until it meets the pipe stop inside the elbow. Do not push the pipe past the
pipe stop.
13 Push the sleeve, gripper and nut up to the elbow and screw the nut on until finger
tight.
14 Mark the nut on one face and, using a spanner, tighten it two full turns only. Note
that if the nut reaches the end of the threaded portion of the elbow, the nut has
been over tightened and there is a risk of the elbow shearing.
FA69084–1
15 Repeat steps 12 to 14 for the outlet port of the new filter using the 185 mm or
220 mm pipe (refer to step 9).
16 Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the inlet port of the old filter.
17 Hold the disconnected end of the filter, and pull off the glove from the hand
holding the filter so that the glove turns inside out over the filter (see Figure 3). Fit
a new glove on the bare hand.
68051
Figure 3. One End of the Main Ink Filter Enclosed in a Latex Glove
18 7300 Spectrum printer only. Remove the old filter inlet pipe from the pipe size
adaptor by cutting it off the metal barb. Discard the pipe.
18 Standard 7300 printer only. Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the
pump outlet. Discard the pipe but retain the blue Festo nut and pipe elbow
support.
19 Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the outlet port (venturi
manifold side) of the old filter.
FA69084–1
20 Hold the disconnected end of the filter, and pull off the glove from the hand
holding the filter so that the glove turns inside out over the filter. Both ends of the
filter are now enclosed in gloves (see Figure 4). Dispose of the old filter and fit a
new glove on the bare hand.
68052
Figure 4. Both Ends of the Main Ink Filter Enclosed in Latex Gloves
21 Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the venturi manifold inlet.
Discard the pipe but retain the blue Festo nut and pipe elbow support.
22 7300 Spectrum printer only. Connect the inlet pipe of the new filter to the metal
barb of the pipe size adaptor.
22 Standard 7300 printer only. Fit the blue Festo nut that was removed from the
pump over the end of the new filter inlet pipe. Push the pipe onto the pump
connection (it may help to grip the pipe with a piece of abrasive paper). Screw the
Festo nut firmly onto the pump connection. Refit the pipe elbow support.
23 Fit the blue Festo nut that was removed from the venturi manifold over the end of
the new filter outlet pipe. Push the pipe onto the manifold connection (it may help
to grip the pipe with a piece of abrasive paper). Screw the Festo nut firmly onto the
manifold connection.
24 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure and position the
new main ink filter in its original location.
25 7300 Spectrum printer only. Refit the ink tank (refer to the ‘Spectrum Ink Tank
Removal’ maintenance instruction).
29 The ‘Main Ink Filter Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Main Ink Filter Purging
Parts Required
0.5 litres of the appropriate ink as required
Procedure

AND SKIN.

WARNING IS IGNORED.

2 Access the Jet Sequences page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
3 Highlight the Filter Purge sequence in the list.
4 Press the Start Sequence key to initiate the Filter Purge sequence. During the
sequence, ink is circulated through the ink system primary circuit at a Set Pressure
of 2.11 bar (30.59 p.s.i.) for 5 minutes.
5 While the Filter Purge sequence is running, check for leaks at the main ink filter
and all other fluid connections. If any leaks are observed from the filter
connections, press the Stop Sequence key to stop the pump, then tighten the
appropriate elbow nut by half a turn. Remember to hold the elbow with a spanner
(wrench) to avoid damage to the filter, and use only fingers to tighten the nut.
Repeat the Filter Purge sequence after tightening the connections.
6 If the System Warning message “3.03 Ink Low” is reported, add another 0.5 litre
bottle of ink to the tank.
7 Switch off the printer.
8 The ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Main Ink Filter Purging
FA69084–1
Charge Amplifier Calibration
Equipment Required
Introduction
Calibration of the Charge Amplifier is required only when the IPM PCB is replaced and
during scheduled maintenance. The Charge Amplifier must not be calibrated when a
new printer is commissioned.
If the software alone is changed, the non-volatile RAM is initialized, which causes the
calibration values to be reset to the default values. Therefore, before the software is
changed, the XCAL125, XCAL255, CALCHG1 and EHTPSU1 values must be noted from
the Charge Calibration page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and then entered
again after the software is changed.
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
1 Make sure that the printer is switched off at the mains electrical supply.
Position the cover so that the IPM PCB and the keyboard can both be accessed.
and solvent.
5 Switch on the mains electrical supply to the printer and switch on the printer.
IMPORTANT: Leave the printer switched on for at least 30 minutes before proceeding
with the following calibration.
6 Connect the DVM negative lead to a convenient 0 V test point (for example, TP17
or TP18) and the positive lead to test point TP29 (CHARGE).
FA69084–1
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. WHEN THE CALIBRATION MODE IS SET TO

‘CALIBRATION’, A MAXIMUM OF 300 V DC IS APPLIED TO THE PRINTHEAD CHARGE
ELECTRODE.
MAKE SURE THAT THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS CORRECTLY FITTED AND THE
SECURING SCREW IS FIRMLY TIGHTENED BEFORE THE CHARGE CALIBRATION
PROCEDURE IS PERFORMED. DO NOT REMOVE THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE DURING
THE CHARGE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
7 Access the Charge Calibration page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and
set the Calibration Mode option to Zero.
69321
Figure 1. Calibration Mode Page

8 Adjust VR3 on the IPM PCB to give a reading of 0 volts ±100 mV. Leave the DVM
connected to these test points.
9 Set the Calibration Mode option to Calibration.
10 Enter a value (for example, 30) on the Calibration Value page. Change this value
as necessary to obtain a DVM reading of 125 volts ±0.5 volts. Press the Apply key
after each value change to update the DVM reading.
11 Note the value now displayed on the Calibration Value page.
12 Continue to change the value on the Calibration Value page until the DVM reads
255 volts ±0.5 volts. Press the Apply key after each value change to update the
DVM reading.
13 Note the new value now displayed on the Calibration Value page and press the
OK key.
14 Open the XCAL125 page and enter the value that was noted at step 11, and then
press the OK key.
15 Open the XCAL255 page and enter the value that was noted at step 13, and then
press the OK key.
FA69084–1
16 Set the Calibration Mode option to Off.

17 Check that the value displayed next to the EHTPSU1 option is the same as the
EHTPSU calibration voltage that is printed on a label attached to the PSU. If the
value is different, open the EHTPSU1 page and enter the correct value.
18 Check that the value displayed next to the CALCHG1 option is the same as the
charge calibration voltage on the printhead conduit label. The charge calibration
voltage is the final three digits of the CAL. CODE on the label. If the value is
different, open the CALCHG1 page and enter the correct value.
20 Disconnect the DVM leads from the IPM PCB.
24 The ‘Charge Amplifier Calibration’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Printhead Valves Tests
Equipment Required
Procedures

AND SKIN.
Testing for a Leaking Printhead Feed Valve

1 Make sure that the printer is switched on.
2 Access the Edit Pressure page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Monitor
Jet) and enter the maximum Set Pressure of 4.49 bar (65.00 p.s.i.).
69329
3.37 4.49 3.24 0.00
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
Figure 1. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page
FA69084–1
3 Access the Valves page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
4 Open the ink system Feed valve by highlighting Feed in the Valves list and pressing
the Open/Close key.
69332
Figure 2. Feed Valve Open on the Valves Page

5 Remove the printhead cover tube and observe the printhead nozzle for 2 to 3
minutes for leakage. If leakage is not observed, proceed to step 6.
If there is leakage from the nozzle, proceed with the following sub-items:
(a) Close the ink system Feed valve by pressing the Open/Close key.
(b) On the Edit Pressure page, enter a Set Pressure of 0.
(c) Switch off the printer.
(d) Replace the Printhead Feed valve.
(e) Repeat the test from step 1.
6 Close the ink system Feed valve by pressing the Open/Close key.
7 On the Edit Pressure page, enter a Set Pressure of 0.
9 Refit and secure the printhead cover tube.
10 The ‘Testing for a Leaking Printhead Feed Valve’ procedure is now completed.
FA69084–1
Testing for a Leaking Printhead Purge Valve

3 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start the
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
69171
Figure 3. Jet Test – Start Option on the Jet Functions Page

4 While the jet is running, switch off the printer using the mains power supply
switch on the rear panel. The jet should stop abruptly. If the jet decays slowly, the
Printhead Purge valve is leaking. Therefore, the printhead must be replaced, and
the test repeated from step 1.
5 Observe the printhead nozzle for 1 minute for signs of leakage. If leakage is not
observed, proceed to step 6.
If there are signs of leakage, replace the printhead, and then repeat the test from
step 1.
7 The ‘Testing for a Leaking Printhead Purge Valve’ procedure is now completedd.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Ink System Feed Valve Test
Equipment Required
Procedure

AND SKIN.
Testing for a Leaking Ink System Feed Valve (closed)

69329
3.37 4.49 3.24 0.00
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
FA69084–1
Ink System Feed Valve Test
4 Open the Printhead Feed valve by highlighting Printhead Feed in the Valves list
and pressing the Open/Close key.
69345
Figure 2. Printhead Feed Valve Open on the Valves Page

5 Remove the printhead cover tube and observe the printhead nozzle for 2 to 3
minutes for leakage. If leakage is not observed, proceed to step 6.
If there is leakage from the nozzle, proceed with the following sub-items:
(a) Close the Printhead Feed valve by pressing the Open/Close key.
(b) On the Edit Pressure page, enter a Set Pressure of 0.
(c) Switch off the printer.
(d) Replace the ink system Feed valve.
(e) Repeat the test from step 1.
6 Close the Printhead Feed valve by pressing the Open/Close key.
7 On the Edit Pressure page, enter a Set Pressure of 0.
10 The ‘Ink System Feed Valve Test’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests
Parts Required
or
FA74135 M3 x 28 CSK POZ SS Screw—Pack as required
Equipment Required
Procedures

AND SKIN.
FA69084–1
Testing for a Leaking Purge or Gutter Valve (closed)

69171

3 Access the Monitor Jet page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
4 Observe the jet parameters. Wait until the Actual TOF reading is within ±0.3% of
the Reference TOF reading, and the Set Pressure reading has stabilized. Note the
Set Pressure reading.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
two parts of the connector.
FA69084–1
12 Connect the Purge/Gutter Test fluid connector between the printhead and the ink
system parts of the 3-way fluid connector, using the extra screw supplied with the
assembly (Figure 2). Make sure that the O-ring gaskets are fitted to both
connections before assembly to avoid the possibility of leaks. Make sure that the
assembly screws are tight.
NOTE: The purpose of the Purge Test fluid connector is to blank off the purge line.
O-ring gasket
68094
Assembly
screw
O-ring gasket
ead
Assembly Printh
To the
screw
Purge line tube

Locating
lug
Locating
recess
System
e Ink
m th
Fro
Figure 2. Purge Test Fluid Connector Fitted in the 3-Way Fluid Connector
15 Observe the jet parameters. Wait until the Actual TOF reading is within ±0.3% of
the Reference TOF reading, and the Set Pressure reading has stabilized. Note the
Set Pressure reading.
16 If the Set Pressure reading is less than the reading noted at step 4 minus 0.05 bar
(0.77 p.s.i.), the Purge or Gutter valve is leaking. To determine which valve is
leaking, continue from step 18.
17 Otherwise, proceed with the following sub-items:
(a) Shut down the printer.
(b) Disconnect and remove the Purge/Gutter Test fluid connector.
(c) Reconnect the 3-way fluid connector using a new O-ring gasket (supplied in
FA74136 Gasket Fluid Connector 3-way—Pack). Make sure that the assembly
screw is tight.
(d) Proceed to step 21.
FA69084–1
18 Place the free end of the purge line tube in a container of clean solvent (Figure 3). If
solvent is seen to be drawn up the tube, the Gutter valve is leaking and must be
replaced. If solvent is not drawn up the tube, and the Set Pressure values from step
16 are different, the Purge valve is leaking and must be replaced.
68095
Purge/Gutter Test
fluid connector
Purge line of the

Purge/Gutter Test fluid connector
placed in a beaker of solvent
Figure 3. Testing for a Leaking Purge or Gutter Valve (closed)
FA69084–1
19 Repeat this instruction from the beginning after replacing either valve as both
valves may have been leaking.
20 On completion of the test, proceed with the following sub-items:
(a) Shut down the printer.
(b) Disconnect and remove the Purge/Gutter Test fluid connector.
(c) Reconnect the 3-way fluid connector using a new O-ring gasket (supplied in
FA74136 Gasket Fluid Connector 3-way—Pack). Make sure that the assembly
screw is tight.
Testing for a Leaking or Inoperative Gutter Valve (open)

23 Initiate a Nozzle Clear sequence by highlighting Nozzle Clear in the Jet Sequences
list and pressing the Start Sequence key.
69346
Figure 4. Nozzle Clear Option on the Jet Sequences Page

24 While the Nozzle Clear sequence is in operation (20 seconds), apply small amounts
of solvent to the gutter. The solvent should not be drawn into the gutter except for
the first 5 seconds of the sequence. If solvent is drawn into the gutter during the
remaining 15 seconds of the sequence, the Gutter valve is leaking. If solvent is not
drawn in at all, the Gutter valve is not operating. To repair either fault, replace the
Gutter valve and repeat the test.
FA69084–1

30 The ‘Purge and Gutter Valves Tests’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Solvent Flush Valve Tests
Equipment Required
Procedures

AND SKIN.
Testing for an Inoperative Solvent Flush Valve

IMPORTANT: Only perform this test after having successfully completed the ‘Purge and
Gutter Valves’ Tests’ maintenance instruction, steps 21 to 30.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
FA69084–1
69171

7 When the jet has successfully started, press the red [stop] key on the control panel
to cause a full normal shutdown to occur. During the shutdown sequence, observe
the feed line (red striped pipe) and make sure that it is drained of ink and then
refilled with solvent. Note that the solvent in the tank may not be clear but
coloured slightly with ink. If the feed line is not drained, the Solvent Flush valve
may not be operating. This symptom could be caused by a faulty Solvent Flush
valve, but is more likely to be no solenoid energizing voltage from the IPM PCB.
9 Test for an audible click when the Solvent Flush valve is opened and closed. To do
this, highlight Solvent Flush in the Valves list and press the Open/Close key twice.
69347
Figure 2. Solvent Flush Valve Open on the Valves Page

10 If the Solvent Flush valve is heard to operate (audible click), the fault is more likely
to be elsewhere in the solvent pick-up circuit. For example, no solvent in the tank; a
blocked solvent dip (pick-up) tube filter; inefficient venturi; blocked in-line feed
filter. All possibilities must be investigated before deciding to replace the Solvent
Flush valve.
FA69084–1
11 Repeat the test after investigating and repairing either fault.
Testing for a Leaking Solvent Flush Valve

13 Open the Printhead Feed valve by highlighting Printhead Feed in the Valves list
and pressing the Open/Close key.
69346

16 While the Nozzle Clear sequence is in operation (20 seconds), use a finger to gently
flick the pipe connecting the solvent tank to the Solvent Add and Solvent Flush
valves to cause bubbles to appear (Figure 4). Observe the bubbles, and if
movement is seen in the direction of the Solvent Flush valve, the valve is leaking
and must be replaced.
68104
Solvent Flush
valve
From solvent tank

pick-up tube
Figure 4. Creating Bubbles to Test the Solvent Flush Valve for Leakage
FA69084–1

21 The ‘Solvent Flush Valve Tests’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Solvent Add Valve Tests
Equipment Required
Procedures

AND SKIN.
Testing for a Leaking Solvent Add Valve

electrical supply.
and solvent.
FA69084–1
6 Using a finger, gently flick the pipe connecting the solvent tank to the Solvent Add
and Solvent Flush valves to cause bubbles to appear (Figure 1).
68104
Solvent Flush
valve
From solvent tank

pick-up tube
Figure 1. Creating Bubbles to Test the Solvent Add Valve for Leakage
69329
3.37 4.49 3.24 0.00
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
8 Observe the bubbles in the pipe between the Y-piece connector and the Solvent
Flush valve. If the bubbles are seen to move in the direction of the Solvent Flush
valve, the Solvent Add valve is leaking and must be replaced.
Testing for an Inoperative Solvent Add Valve

IMPORTANT: Only perform the following test if the ‘Solvent Flush Valve Tests’
maintenance instruction has been successfully completed proving that the
Solvent Flush valve is serviceable.
9 Using a finger, gently flick the pipe connecting the solvent tank to the Solvent Add
and Solvent Flush valves to cause bubbles to appear (Figure 1).
FA69084–1
Jet) and enter a Set Pressure of 0.9 bar (12.75 p.s.i.).
12 Open the Solvent Add valve by highlighting Solvent Add in the Valves list and
pressing the Open/Close key.
69348
Figure 3. Solvent Add Valve Open on the Valves Page

13 Observe the bubbles in the pipe between the Y-piece connector and the Solvent
Flush valve. The bubbles should be seen moving along the pipe in the direction of
the Solvent Flush valve. If the bubbles do not move and the Solvent Add valve is
not heard to operate when opened (no audible click), the Solvent Add valve is not
operating. This symptom could be caused by a faulty Solvent Add valve, but is
more likely to be no solenoid energizing voltage from the IPM PCB.
If the bubbles do not move but the Solvent Add valve is heard to operate (audible
click), the fault is more likely to be elsewhere in the solvent pick-up circuit. For
example, no solvent in the tank; a blocked solvent dip (pick-up) tube filter;
inefficient venturi. All possibilities must be investigated before deciding to replace
the Solvent Add valve.
14 Repeat the test after investigating and repairing either fault.
15 On the Edit Pressure page, set the Set Pressure to 0.
16 Make sure that the Solvent Add valve is closed by pressing the Open/Close key on
the Valves page to display Closed next to the Solvent Add option.
21 The ‘Solvent Add Valve Tests’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
Parts Required
FA73051 Screw M2 x 6 Pan Poz SS—Pack
FA73052 Washer Shakeproof M2 SS—Pack
Equipment Required
FA74046 Nozzle Cleaning Service Accessory
Ultrasonic bath
Empty 0.5 litre ink bottle
Beaker, stainless steel or glass
Correct solvent for the printer as required
Clean hot water (preferably deionized)
between 55 °C and 100 °C as required
Procedures

AND SKIN.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage. Extended contact with solvent can damage the printhead. Do
not put the printhead into solvent to clean it and do not use an ultrasonic bath. These
incorrect methods can cause damage to the printhead and can make your warranty invalid.
Correct Jet Alignment

FA69084–1
69171

4 Examine the alignment of the jet with an eyeglass. The jet should pass exactly
through the centre of the charge electrode and enter the gutter as shown in the
following illustration.
Vertical 50% 50%

gutter alignment
Mk7
Midi 50% The jet must enter
Midi plus the horizontal centre
Ultima 50% of the gutter
Ultima plus
68055
70% 30%
Mk7 50%
Mini
Micro 50%
The jet must pass exactly

through the centre of
the charge electrode
Figure 2. Correct Alignment of the Jet into the Gutter
FA69084–1
5 Examine the jet to make sure that it is perpendicular to the nozzle face (Figure 3).
Misaligned jet
For correct jet alignment,

this angle must be
90˚
6219
Figure 3. Correct Alignment of the Jet from the Nozzle

6 If the jet is misaligned or non-existent due to dried ink or debris in the nozzle,
carry out the following ‘Nozzle Clear Sequence’ procedure.
Nozzle Clear Sequence

1 Shutdown the jet by pressing the Jet Test – Stop key.
2 Invert the printhead and wrap absorbent, lint-free paper towel around the area
below the nozzle (Figure 5).
3 Access the Jet Sequences page (Maintenance menu).
69346
FA69084–1
5 While the Nozzle Clear sequence is in operation (20 seconds), apply small amounts
of solvent to the inverted nozzle face. Observe that the solvent is drawn in through
the nozzle (Figure 5).
68056
Take care to build up MIDI
a good coating of
solvent on the nozzle
face, as shown here
Figure 5. Nozzle Clear Sequence—Applying Solvent to the Nozzle Face

6 When the Nozzle Clear sequence has finished, access the Jet Functions page (Print
Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and attempt to start the jet by pressing the Jet
Test – Start key.
7 Observe the alignment of the jet. If the jet is misaligned or the nozzle is still
blocked, press the Jet Test – Stop key to stop the jet.
8 Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the jet is perpendicular to the nozzle face, but no more
than a further seven times (that is, a Nozzle Clear sequence with an attempt to
start the jet carried out after each sequence). The Nozzle Clear sequence must not
be performed more than a total of eight times.
FA69084–1
9 If the jet is now correctly aligned, this maintenance instruction can be terminated.
Shut down and switch off the printer, and refit the printhead cover tube.
10 If after eight Nozzle Clear sequences the jet is still misaligned due to a partial
nozzle blockage or is non-existent, continue with the ‘Nozzle Soaking’ procedure.
If the jet is now perpendicular to the nozzle face (Figure 3) but is misaligned with
the gutter, proceed to the ‘Nozzle Realignment’ part of this maintenance
instruction.
Nozzle Soaking
occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead nozzle assembly. The following
procedure must be performed in a clean, dust-free environment, and a special Clean Room is
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the nozzle assembly is fitted. The pipe on
the rear of the nozzle assembly must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the following procedure to prevent
contamination of the printhead nozzle assembly. If the standard protective gloves that contain
powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle assembly.

2 Remove the securing screw from the printhead nozzle protection cover and
remove the cover.
3 Clean the printhead thoroughly with the correct solvent type, paying particular
attention to the nozzle and surrounding area.
4 Remove the two securing screws and shakeproof washers from the nozzle
assembly plate and remove the nozzle assembly. Remove the nozzle O-ring from
the nozzle assembly and retain it in a safe place.
5 Using a paper clip or similar device as a hanger, suspend the nozzle in a beaker
(stainless steel or glass, not plastic) of solvent with the nozzle face uppermost
(Figure 6).
6220
Figure 6. Suspending the Nozzle in a Beaker of Solvent

6 Place the beaker in an ultrasonic bath partly filled with water for 20 minutes.
7 Refit the nozzle O-ring to the nozzle assembly, and then refit the nozzle assembly
to the printhead using new securing screws and shakeproof washers. While doing
this, avoid touching the nozzle assembly pipe with fingers.
FA69084–1

10 Check that the jet is now correctly aligned into the gutter, as described in ‘Correct
Jet Alignment’ at the beginning of this maintenance instruction. If the jet is now
correctly aligned, this maintenance instruction can be terminated by carrying out
the following sub-items:
(a) Carefully refit the nozzle protection cover making sure that the jet alignment is
not disturbed.
(b) Shut down and switch off the printer.
(c) Refit the printhead cover tube.
11 If the jet is still not perpendicular to the nozzle face (Figure 3), this may be due to a
build-up of conductive salts in the nozzle. If this is suspected, the following
‘Nozzle Washing’ procedures can be tried.
12 If the jet is perpendicular to the nozzle face but is not correctly aligned into the
gutter, use the procedure described in ‘Nozzle Realignment’.
Nozzle Washing
This procedure is intended for use on nozzles that are experiencing jet misalignment due to
severe blockages, which cannot be cleared using the normal Nozzle Clear function or by
nozzle soaking. It is especially useful when the insides of nozzle assemblies have become
obstructed by deposits of the water-soluble conductive salts present in the ink.
The Nozzle Cleaning Service Accessory is required for this procedure.
Solvent Wash
remove the cover (if not previously removed).
assembly plate and remove the nozzle assembly. Remove the nozzle O-ring from
the nozzle assembly and retain it in a safe place.
4 Wash the nozzle assembly with the same type of solvent that is used in the printer.
FA69084–1
5 Soften the free end of the PTFE tube supplied with the Nozzle Cleaning Service
Accessory by dipping it into hot water for a few seconds. Fit the end of the tube to
the pipe on the back of the nozzle assembly.
6 Connect the syringe to the Luer fitting on the other end of the PTFE tube.
7 Fill a clean, dry beaker or similar container (stainless steel or glass, not plastic)
with the same type of solvent that is used in the printer.
8 Position the nozzle assembly in the solvent and withdraw the syringe plunger to
draw solvent back through the nozzle assembly and into the syringe. Depress the
syringe plunger and withdraw it again, with the nozzle assembly remaining in the
solvent in the beaker. Take care at this point because the syringe may dribble
slightly around the plunger. Repeat this operation three times.
9 Lift the nozzle assembly out of the solvent, and empty the syringe and nozzle
assembly into the beaker by depressing the plunger to the bottom of the syringe.
10 Dry the nozzle assembly by withdrawing the syringe plunger to suck only air into
the syringe through the nozzle. Depress the syringe plunger again to force air
through the nozzle assembly. Repeat this drying process three times.
Hot Water Wash

11 Fill a clean beaker or similar container (stainless steel or glass, not plastic) with hot
water (preferably deionized and between 55 °C and 100 °C).
12 Position the nozzle assembly in the water and withdraw the syringe plunger to
draw water back through the nozzle assembly and into the syringe. Depress the
syringe plunger and withdraw it again, with the nozzle assembly remaining in the
water in the beaker. Repeat this operation three times.
13 Lift the nozzle assembly out of the water, and empty the syringe and nozzle
assembly into the beaker by depressing the plunger to the bottom of the syringe.
While doing this, check that the jet of water from the nozzle is perpendicular to the
nozzle face. If the jet emerges at an angle other than 90 degrees, this indicates that a
blockage is still present in the nozzle, and the washing process must be repeated
until the blockage is cleared.
14 Dry the nozzle assembly by withdrawing the syringe plunger to suck only air into
the syringe through the nozzle. Depress the syringe plunger again to force air
through the nozzle assembly. Repeat this drying process three times.
15 Repeat the solvent washing and nozzle drying procedures described in steps 7 to 10
inclusive.
16 Before refitting the nozzle assembly, the gun assembly must be flushed with ink.
Place the printhead in an empty 0.5 litre ink bottle, making sure that the gun body
is well below the neck of the bottle. Seal the neck of the bottle around the printhead
using a plastic bag or absorbent, lint-free paper towel.
Jet) and enter a Set Pressure of 2.11 bar (30.59 p.s.i.).
FA69084–1
20 Open the Feed and Printhead Feed valves by highlighting Feed and Printhead
Feed in the Valves list and pressing the Open/Close key for each. Leave the valves
open for 5 seconds, during which time ink is ejected from the nozzle.
69350
Figure 7. Feed and Printhead Feed Valves Open on the Valves Page
21 Press the Valve Reset key to close the valves after 5 seconds.
24 Remove the printhead from the ink bottle and thoroughly wash the printhead with
the correct solvent type. Pay particular attention to the nozzle assembly and
surrounding area.
25 Disconnect the syringe from the PTFE tube and remove the tube from the pipe at
the rear of the nozzle assembly.
26 Refit the nozzle O-ring to the nozzle assembly, and then refit the nozzle assembly
to the printhead using new securing screws and shakeproof washers. While doing
this, avoid touching the nozzle assembly pipe with fingers.
27 Switch on the printer
29 Check that the jet is now correctly aligned into the gutter, as described in ‘Correct
Jet Alignment’ at the beginning of this maintenance instruction. The jet should now
be perpendicular to the nozzle face. If this is correct but the jet is not correctly
aligned into the gutter, proceed to the following ‘Nozzle Realignment’ procedure.
30 If the jet alignment is correct, carefully refit the nozzle protection cover making
sure that the jet alignment is not disturbed.
32 Refit the printhead cover tube.
FA69084–1
Nozzle Realignment
remove the cover (if not previously removed).
2 The best method to realign the nozzle is to use a finger and thumb only with very
little force applied until the alignment is correct (do not use pliers or any other
tool). The nozzle will move a little, and will probably return to its original position.
Apply a little more force so that the nozzle is deflected, but when released does not
return completely to its original position. Continue to use this method until the jet
is correctly aligned into the gutter, as described in ‘Correct Jet Alignment’ at the
beginning of this maintenance instruction.
3 Shut down the printer and then restart the jet using the [start] key on the control
panel. Repeat this four times to make sure that the jet alignment is maintained, the
jet is stable during the start and stop sequences, and that no warning or fault
messages are reported.
4 Carefully refit the nozzle protection cover and securing screw, making sure that
the jet alignment is not disturbed.
7 The ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Modulation Range Checks
Introduction
This maintenance instruction checks the quality of the printed message and makes sure
that the Reference Modulation value is set so that optimum print quality is maintained
with varying ink viscosity. It can also be used to assess the relative viscosity of the ink.
Procedure
2 Access the Test Message page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
3 Create a test message by highlighting the biggest available message type (raster) in
the Test Message list and pressing the Create key.
69352
Figure 1. Creating a Test Message on the Test Message Page

4 Select the test message on the Message Store page (Print Monitor).
FA69084–1
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key, then press the Start Print key.
69353
Figure 2. Jet Test – Start and Start Print Options on the Jet Functions Page
6 Access the Monitor Jet page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and note the
Reference Modulation value (circled in Figure 3). Also note the Actual Modulation
value (displayed in the box to the right of the Reference Modulation) so that it can
be reset to this at the end of the procedure.
69354
3.37 3.04 3.24 3.04
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Figure 3. Reference Modulation Value on the Monitor Jet Page
FA69084–1
7 Access the Edit Modulation page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Monitor
Jet).
69176
3.37 3.04 3.24 3.04
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Figure 4. Changing the Actual Modulation Value on the Edit Modulation Page
8 Carry out a modulation range analysis using the following method. Produce a
series of print samples, starting at the original Reference Modulation value and
then decreasing the Actual Modulation value in steps of 10 volts on the Edit
Modulation page. Press the Back key after each value change. Continue to
decrease the Actual Modulation until the print quality just starts to deteriorate
(see Figure 5), and record the value (Vm1). Then increase the Actual Modulation
from the original Reference Modulation value in steps of 10 volts. Continue to
increase the Actual Modulation until the print quality just starts to deteriorate (see
Figure 6), or until the maximum of 255 is reached, and record the value (Vm2).
NOTE: It may be that the maximum setting for Vm2 is reached without there being
evidence of over modulation. In this case record Vm2 as the maximum
value. The same applies to under modulation.
48168
Figure 5. Under Modulation—Expected Deterioration when Reference Mod is < Vm1

48169
Figure 6. Over Modulation—Expected Deterioration when Reference Mod is > Vm2

9 Check that the original Reference Modulation value is approximately equal to the
calculated modulation, as follows:
68092
Vmc = Vm1 + (Vm2 – Vm1)

3
FA69084–1
10 Record the calculated value (Vmc) on the Scheduled Maintenance Checklist.

11 On the Edit Modulation page, reset the Actual Modulation to the original value
noted in step 6 and press the Automatic Tracking key.
Evaluating the Relative Viscosity

12 Compare the Reference Modulation with the calculated modulation (Vmc):
(Vmc) = Ref Modulation viscosity is correct.
(Vmc) < Ref Modulation viscosity is low but no action is required.
(Vmc) << Ref Modulation viscosity is too low. If the printer is
failing, change the ink.
(Vmc) > Ref Modulation viscosity is high but no action is required.
(Vmc) >> Ref Modulation viscosity is too high. If the printer is
failing, change the ink.
13 If the printer has been failing because the ink viscosity is too low or too high,
appropriate action must be taken to determine the root cause of the viscosity
problem.
14 The ‘Modulation Range Checks’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Blocked Gutter Clearance
Parts Required
or
FA74135 M3 x 28 Csk Poz SS Screw—Pack as required
Equipment Required
Empty 0.5 litre ink bottle
Introduction
If the gutter has become totally blocked with dried ink, it can be cleared by connecting the
feed line directly to the gutter line and starting the jet. This forces ink out of the gutter (that
is, in the reverse direction), which should clear the blockage.
This procedure is best carried out with the printhead positioned in an empty 0.5 litre ink
bottle with absorbent, lint-free paper towel wrapped around the top to contain the ink jet.
Alternatively, the printhead can be enclosed in a suitable size plastic bag, again sealed to
contain the ink jet.
IMPORTANT: The Linx 7300 Solver printer is fitted with the Dynamic Flow Control
(DFC) device. Two fluid pipes connect the DFC module to the printhead
gutter line instead of the gutter restrictor. Because the DFC module is part
of the gutter line, additional steps must be performed if this ‘Blocked
Gutter Clearance’ procedure is done on a 7300 Solver printer. These
additional steps are included in the following procedure at the applicable
point. If these additional steps are ignored, the DFC will be damaged.
FA69084–1
Procedure

AND SKIN.
WARNING: HIGH-PRESSURE INK JET HAZARD. DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE INK
IS EJECTED FROM THE PRINTHEAD GUTTER AT MAXIMUM PRESSURE.
WHEN THE PROCEDURE IS BEING PERFORMED, ENCLOSE THE PRINTHEAD IN AN
ACCEPTABLE CONTAINER TO CONTAIN THE INK JET. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND
SOLVENT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
two parts of the connector.
FA69084–1
8 Connect the Gutter Clear fluid connector between the printhead and the ink
system parts of the 3-way fluid connector, using the extra screw supplied with the
assembly (Figure 1). Make sure that the O-ring gaskets are fitted to both
connections before assembly to avoid the possibility of leaks. Make sure that the
assembly screws are tight.
O-ring gasket
68096
Assembly
screw
O-ring gasket
ead
Assembly Pr inth
To the
screw
Ink system feed line

Locating connected to the
lug printhead gutter line
Locating
recess
System
Ink
the
From
Figure 1. Gutter Clear Fluid Connector Fitted in the 3-Way Fluid Connector
7300 Solver Printer Only

8a Cut the pipes off the barb connectors as shown in Figure 2 to remove the DFC from
the gutter line. Use a Tube Cutter to make sure that the pipes are cut cleanly and
straight.
69644
Printhead In-line A1
conduit barb connector
Cut the pipe here
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
Cut the
GUTTER
pipe here
Figure 2. Removal of the DFC Pipe Connections
FA69084–1
8b Connect the pipe from the 3-way fluid connector to the A1 barb connector, as
shown in Figure 3. The DFC is now removed from the gutter line.
69645
Printhead
conduit Connect
this pipe to the
A1 barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
GUTTER
Figure 3. Gutter Line Connection
All 7300 Printers

10 Place the printhead in an empty 0.5 litre ink bottle and seal the neck of the bottle
around the printhead using a plastic bag or absorbent, lint-free paper towel.
69329
3.37 4.49 3.24 0.00
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
FA69084–1
14 Open the ink system Feed valve by highlighting Feed in the Valves list and pressing
the Open/Close key. The full force of the maximum running pressure is now
applied to the gutter.
69332
Figure 5. Feed Valve Open on the Valves Page

15 Leave the Feed valve open until ink is ejected from the gutter or for a maximum of
1 minute. As soon as ink pours from the gutter or 1 minute has elapsed, press the
Valve Reset key to close the valve.
17 If the gutter is still blocked after 1 minute, repeat steps 12 to 16. If after this the
gutter is still blocked, the printhead must be replaced.
19 Remove the printhead and sealing material from the ink bottle.
20 Thoroughly wash the printhead with the correct solvent type. Pay particular
attention to the gutter assembly area on the printhead.
7300 Solver Printer Only

20a Cut the pipe at the A1 barb connector and reconnect the pipe to the DFC P/HD
CONNECTOR barb. Use a Tube Cutter to make sure that the pipe is cut cleanly
and straight.
20b Reconnect the DFC GUTTER pipe to the A1 barb connector.
NOTE Replacement pipes will be required if this procedure is performed many times,
because the existing pipes can become too short to reconnect to the DFC.
All 7300 Printers

21 Disconnect and remove the Gutter Clear fluid connector, and reconnect the 3-way
fluid connector using a new O-ring gasket (supplied in FA74136 Gasket Fluid
Connector 3-Way—Pack). Make sure that the assembly screw is tight.
FA69084–1
24 Refit the printhead cover tube making sure that the securing screw is fully
tightened.
28 The ‘Blocked Gutter Clearance’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
System Flush
Equipment Required
FA940021 Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml as required
Correct solvent for the ink used in the printer as required
Waste container—15 litres capacity
Empty solvent bottle—base removed
Introduction
NOTE: This maintenance instruction is not applicable to the 7300 Spectrum printer.
This maintenance instruction provides the procedures to completely flush a 7300 printer in
the following three circumstances:
1. To prepare the printer to be shipped or for storage.
2. To remove contaminated ink.
3. To change an ‘in use’ printer to a new ink, in preparation for calibration.
The detailed ‘System Flush Procedure’ referred to within the individual procedures for the
above circumstances, is provided separately in Part B of this maintenance instruction.
The procedure for purging the main ink filter is referred out to the ‘Main Ink Filter
Purging’ maintenance instruction, which is provided earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
It is important to make sure that the procedures outlined in this maintenance instruction
are followed carefully to achieve reliable printer operation.
Printer Conditions during the Flush Cycle

• The system Flush Cycle will not run if the pressure test at the beginning of the cycle fails.
• The level of solvent in the ink tank is checked at each stage of the cycle, and the cycle
terminates if the level is low. If this error is detected, the advisory message “Flush Cycle
Stopped” is displayed.
• The cycle terminates with all valves off and zero system pressure.
• The cycle can be terminated by the operator at any stage by pressing the Stop Sequence
key on the System Flush page. This action takes immediate effect, so no advisory message,
such as “Stopping Cycle : Please Wait”, is displayed. It is used for speed in preference to
the mains power supply switch in situations, for example, where a pressurized leak has
occurred. Use of the Stop Sequence key may leave the ink system in an undefined state. If
the cycle is terminated for any reason, the sequence counter is not incremented.
FA69084–1
System Flush
Procedures

AND SKIN.
Part A—System Flush Circumstances
1. To Prepare the Printer to be Shipped or Stored

electrical supply.
Position the cover so that the keyboard and display can be accessed.
4 Carry out the ‘System Flush Procedure’ described in Part B of this maintenance
instruction (that is, ‘Empty Ink Tank’, ‘Flush Cycle’ and’ Solvent Drain’).
5 Repeat step 4 two more times before proceeding to step 6.
6 Carry out the ‘Empty Ink Tank’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ once more.
The solvent tank should be empty, but if it is not, syphon off any remaining
solvent.
10 The printer is now flushed ready for packing.
FA69084–1
System Flush
2. To Remove Contaminated Ink

electrical supply.
solvent.
7 Replace the main ink filter and the ink tank dip (pick-up) tube. Maintenance
instructions for these tasks can be found earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
8 The printer may now be recommissioned with fresh ink (one or two bottles, until
the ‘ink low’ warning has cleared) and fresh solvent (one or two bottles, until the
‘solvent low’ warning has cleared).
9 Carry out the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction.
NOTE: If the main ink filter or damper do not fill with ink, the pump must be primed. This
must be done with the printer switched off. Insert the nozzle of the syringe (Linx
part number FA940021—Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml) into the Luer fitting on the
damper. Withdraw the syringe plunger to draw ink through the pump. Continue
withdrawing the plunger until ink is present in the pipe on the outlet side of the
pump. Note that the syringe is a disposable item, with a limited functional life of
approximately two applications when used with solvent-based inks.
10 Carry out at least six Nozzle Clear sequences (refer to the ‘Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction).
14 Press the [start] key to start the jet.
15 The printer is now clear of contaminated ink and ready for use.
FA69084–1
System Flush
3. To Change an ‘In Use’ Printer to a New Ink, in Preparation for Calibration

electrical supply.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. Make sure that the solvent added to the ink
tank during the following process is the correct type for the ink type that is cleared from the
printer.
solvent.
7 Replace the main ink filter and the ink tank dip (pick-up) tube. Maintenance
instructions for these tasks can be found earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. Make sure that the solvent added to the ink
tank during the following process is the correct type for the ink type that will be added when
the printer is recommissioned.
8 Carry out the ‘System Flush Procedure’ again (that is, ‘Empty Ink Tank’, ‘Flush
Cycle’ and’ Solvent Drain’).
solvent.
11 The printer may now be recommissioned with the new ink (one or two bottles,
until the ‘ink low’ warning has cleared) and the new solvent (one or two bottles,
until the ‘solvent low’ warning has cleared).
12 Carry out the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction.
NOTE: If the main ink filter or damper do not fill with ink, the pump must be
primed. This must be done with the printer switched off. Insert the nozzle
of the syringe (Linx part number FA940021—Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml)
into the Luer fitting on the damper. Withdraw the syringe plunger to draw
ink through the pump. Continue withdrawing the plunger until ink is
present in the pipe on the outlet side of the pump. Note that the syringe is
a disposable item, with a limited functional life of approximately two
applications when used with solvent-based inks.
13 Carry out at least six Nozzle Clear sequences (refer to the ‘Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction).
14 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start
the jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
15 Run the jet for 10 minutes.
16 Stop the jet.
FA69084–1
System Flush
NOTE: It is important to make sure that the ink tank, damper, and main ink filter
are drained completely of ink.
18 The printer may now be recommissioned with fresh, new ink (one or two bottles,
until the ‘ink low’ warning has cleared), which must be of the same batch and
viscosity, as marked on the ink bottle label.
NOTE: Steps 11 to 18 must be carried out, despite the apparent duplication of ink
commissioning. These steps help to remove traces of solvent that remain
from the flushing process, which could decrease the viscosity of the ink
and cause incorrect calibration.
19 Repeat the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction.
NOTE: If the main ink filter or damper do not fill with ink, the pump must be
primed. This must be done with the printer switched off. Insert the nozzle
of the syringe (Linx part number FA940021—Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml)
into the Luer fitting on the damper. Withdraw the syringe plunger to draw
ink through the pump. Continue withdrawing the plunger until ink is
present in the pipe on the outlet side of the pump. Note that the syringe is
a disposable item, with a limited functional life of approximately two
applications when used with solvent-based inks.
20 Place an earthed container under the printhead because solvent will be present in
the pipes.
24 The printer is now ready for calibration. Refer to the ‘Ink Conversion Calibration
(Offset Calibration)’ maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
System Flush
Part B—System Flush Procedure
Precautions
During the system flush, the solvent tank must contain only enough solvent
(approximately 600 ml) to successfully complete the task. Too much solvent in the solvent
tank may result in the ink tank overflowing during the cycle, due to solvent being dumped
into the ink tank as solvent is used to fill the system. Therefore, fill the solvent tank just
until the System Warning message “3.04 Solvent Low” is cleared. This may require
drawing off some solvent first to see the warning message appear, and then refilling with
solvent until the warning message clears.
As a precaution, fit an empty solvent bottle (with its base removed) to the ink tank filler
tube during the flush cycles in case the tank overflows. Also, it is advisable to put the
printhead in a beaker to contain any spillage from the nozzle.
NOTE: The ‘Flush Cycle’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ thoroughly flushes all the
valves and pipework with solvent.
Empty Ink Tank

2 Select the System Flush option on the Maintenance page (Print Monitor > Menu >
Maintenance). The first page of the System Flush procedure is displayed with the
instruction “Check solvent level.”.
69183
Figure 1. System Flush—First Page

3 To continue with the System Flush procedure, it is necessary to perform a number
of actions on the printer before the flush cycles can begin. These required actions
are displayed on each successive System Flush page, and must be performed in
accordance with the following expanded explanations for each instruction. Once
each action has been completed, press the OK key, which displays the next
instruction.
4 Check solvent level. Carry out the actions described in ‘Precautions’ at the
beginning of this ‘Part B—System Flush Procedure’.
FA69084–1
System Flush
5 Prop up the printer. (Not applicable to the 7300 Spectrum printer—see NOTE
below.) Before commencing the ink draining procedure, the printer must be raised
by approximately 50 mm at the front left side to aid drainage of the ink. This is
because the ink dip tube is situated at the rear right side of the tank.
NOTE: The 7300 Spectrum printer does not require propping up, but the OK key
must be pressed to continue the procedure.

WARNING IS IGNORED.
6 Orientate filter and damper. Ignore the instruction regarding the filter. Carefully
lift the feed damper clear of the ink system enclosure. Hold the feed damper in the
vertical position with the drain cap uppermost.
7 Connect bleed line to damper. Remove the damper drain cap and connect the
Damper Drain Tube Luer fitting (included in the Damper Drain Tube kit) to the
damper drain. Insert the other end of the drain tube into a waste container of at
least 5 litres capacity. Orientate the damper so that the drain is at the bottom, that
is, at its lowest position, as shown in the following illustration.
68050
Drain Tube
Figure 2. Feed Damper Orientation with Drain Tube Connected
FA69084–1
System Flush
8 When the required actions have been completed, the following page is displayed.
69184
Figure 3. System Flush Options Page

9 Press the Empty Tank key, which displays the instruction “Turn on tap to bleed
line.”.
IMPORTANT: The bleed line tap is used in the Linx manufacturing process only.
There is no bleed line in the maintenance technician’s Damper
Drain Tube kit, therefore, any action referring to the bleed line tap
should be ignored.
10 Due to the unique design of the 7300 Spectrum ink tank, it is not possible to drain
all of the ink with the Empty Tank function. Therefore, to enable all of the ink to be
removed, proceed with the following step 10 sub-items.

10a Disconnect and remove the ink pick-up pipe, which is connected between the ink
tank lid (Festo connection) and the pump/PRV (pressure relief valve) T-piece.
Discard the pipe but retain the Festo nut.
10b Connect a new 360 mm length of 6 mm OD tube to the pump/PRV T-piece.
10c Remove the mandrel and filter assembly from the ink filler tube using the Mandrel
Extraction Tool.
10d Insert the free end of the new length of pipe into the ink tank and push it down
until it reaches the base of the tank. Hold the pipe in place for the duration of the
Empty Tank sequence to make sure that all the ink is removed.
All 7300 Printers

CAUTION: Pump Damage. Do not allow the ink system pump to run in a dry condition. Use the
Empty Tank sequence only the number of times required to empty the system of ink. The
pump must not be run for longer than 30 seconds after the change in the sound of the pump
indicates that cavitation (no ink in the pump) has occurred. Damage to the pump can occur if
the pump is allowed to run continuously in a dry condition.
FA69084–1
System Flush
11 Press the OK key to continue the procedure, which starts the pump and increments
the sequence count by 1. The pump runs at maximum pressure for approximately 1
minute and 40 seconds, and then automatically stops on completion of the Empty
Tank sequence. During the sequence a Progress bar gives an indication of how
much of the sequence has been completed. Press the Stop Sequence key if the
audible pitch of the pump changes indicating that the ink tank is empty.
69307
Figure 4. Empty Tank Sequence in Progress

12 At some point towards the end of the Empty Tank sequence the ‘ink low’ condition
will be reached. Make sure that the SureFill page is displayed with the System
Warning message “3.03 Ink Low”. Press the Exit key on the SureFill page.
13 Make sure that the ink tank is empty before continuing with the following Flush
Cycle sequence. If the tank is not empty after a single Empty Tank sequence, select
the Empty Tank option again to repeat the sequence. Press the Stop Sequence key
when the audible pitch of the pump changes, indicating that the ink tank is empty.
14 At this point the ink pick-up pipe on the 7300 Spectrum must be reconnected to the
ink pick-up connection on the tank lid. To do this, proceed with the following step
14 sub-items.

14a Withdraw the drain pipe from the ink tank and wipe off any surplus ink from the
end.
14b Cut the pipe to a length of 55 mm using the Tube Cutter.
14c Fit the Festo nut (retained earlier) over the end of the newly cut pipe.
14d Insert the end of the pipe into the ink pick-up connection on the tank lid, and fit
and tighten the Festo nut.
14e Refit the mandrel and filter assembly to the ink filler tube using the Mandrel
Extraction Tool.
All 7300 Printers

15 Disconnect the drain tube from the damper and refit the drain cap.
FA69084–1
System Flush
Flush Cycle
69355
Figure 5. System Flush Options Page—Empty Tank Sequence Count of 1

17 Press the Flush Cycle key, which displays the instruction “Turn off bleed tap.”.
18 Ignore the “Turn off bleed tap.” instruction and press the OK key, which displays
the instruction “Fill ink tank with 0.5 litres of solvent”.
19 It is necessary to add solvent to the ink tank before the Flush Cycle can begin. Add
1.0 litre of solvent to the ink tank. If this is the first time the Flush Cycle has been
run (sequence count is 0) and a “3.04 Solvent Low” warning message is displayed,
the Flush Cycle cannot proceed. If necessary, fill the solvent tank just until the
“3.04 Solvent Low” warning message is cleared.
20 Press the OK key to continue, which starts the pump and increments the sequence
count by 1. The pump runs at maximum pressure for approximately 1 minute and
40 seconds, and then automatically stops on completion of the Flush Cycle
sequence. During the sequence a Progress bar gives an indication of how much of
the sequence has been completed. The Flush Cycle sequence can be terminated at
any time by pressing the Stop Sequence key.
NOTE: The “3.04 Solvent Low” warning message may be reported during the
Flush Cycle as solvent is used to fill the system. This warning can be
ignored, except when the software does not allow the sequence to continue
and action is required, as described in step 19.
FA69084–1
System Flush
Solvent Drain
69356
Figure 6. System Flush Options Page—Flush Cycle Sequence Count of 1

21 Make sure that the drain tube from the damper is disconnected and the damper
drain cap is refitted before proceeding.
22 Press the Solvent Drain key, which displays the instruction “Turn off bleed tap.”.
23 Ignore the “Turn off bleed tap.” instruction and press the OK key, which starts the
pump and increments the sequence count by 1. The pump runs at maximum
pressure for approximately 10 minutes, and then automatically stops on
completion of the Solvent Drain sequence. During the sequence a Progress bar
gives an indication of how much of the sequence has been completed. The Solvent
Drain sequence can be terminated at any time by pressing the Stop Sequence key.
24 When the ‘System Flush Procedure’ is completed, it is necessary to flush the gutter
line (from the gutter through the gutter valve). To do this, first press the Exit key
on the System Flush page to return to the Maintenance page.
69329
3.37 4.49 3.24 0.00
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
FA69084–1
System Flush
26 Apply solvent to the gutter using the solvent cleaning bottle until the solvent in the
gutter line flows clear. Note that a minimum of 250 ml of solvent must be used.
28 Return to Part A of this maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Parts Required
FA20012 Printhead Calibration Label–Pack
Introduction
This maintenance instruction details the procedure for calibrating a 7300 printer, fitted
with a Mk7 Ultima plus 75 µm, Midi plus 75 µm, Ultima 62 µm, Midi 62 µm, Mini 50 µm or
Micro 40 µm printhead, following a conversion from one ink type to another. See Figures 5
to 13 for allowed ink conversions.
New printheads and new nozzles are supplied with a calibration sheet, and Reference
Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Tables, which give offset values for conversion to
(printhead specific) approved inks.
IMPORTANT: It is most important that the Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation
Offset Tables sheet supplied with each individual printhead or nozzle is
retained and filed. If it is required to convert a printer to a different ink in
the future, the offset values from the original sheet for the printhead or
nozzle must be used. However, if the original offset values are not
available or were not supplied, they must be obtained from the Linx
International Technical Support department before carrying out a
recalibration.
Preparation
NOTE: The ‘System Flush’ part of this procedure (referred to below) is not applicable to
new ‘dry’ printers received from Linx when they are first commissioned with ink.
The ‘System Flush’ procedure is only applicable to ‘in use’ printers that have the
ink changed to a different ink in preparation for calibration.
Before this calibration is attempted, the printer must be flushed and recommissioned with
the new ink in accordance with the ‘System Flush’ maintenance instruction, which can be
found earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
It is important that the procedures outlined in the following maintenance instruction are
understood fully and followed carefully to make sure of reliable printer operation.
FA69084–1
Procedure
1 Carry out the ‘Preparation’ instructions detailed above.
2 Access the Ink/Solvent Type page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation >
Ink/Solvent) and select the correct ink type for the ink that the printer is to be
converted to.
3 Access the Printhead Code page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation >
Printhead).
4 Adjust the existing Reference Pressure (circled in Figure 1) in accordance with the
‘Reference Pressure Offset (bits)’ value given for the new ink in the offset table
supplied with the printhead or nozzle.
69359
Figure 1. Reference Pressure Value on the Printhead Code Page

An example of the offset table is shown below.
68723
PRESSURE AND MODULATION OFFSET TABLE.
FROM 3103 TO DYE BASED OR PIGMENTED INK TYPES
Ink Type
Mk7 ULTIMA 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1035 1055 1070 1121 1240 1270 1290 1405 2030 2035 3123 3124 3240
Reference Pressure
— 0 1 13 4 3 9 –1 –1 1 2 6 3 1 1 0 0 1
Offset (bits)
Reference Modulation
— 10 –10 –15 0 –30 –25 –10 –10 10 20 –30 5 –10 –10 0 0 10
Offset (VM + offset) (V)
Modulation Slope 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.3 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.0
4900 Ink Type B B B B B B B B B B B B A C C B B C
Table issue no: 2.4
Figure 2. Example of a Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Table

NOTE: The Reference Pressure offset is relative to 3103 ink for all Mk7 printheads
except the Mini, where it is relative to 2035 ink.
FA69084–1
The following are two examples of the method:

1. When calibrating a printer fitted with a Mk7 Ultima printhead, after
converting from 3103 to 1270 ink, add 2 bits to the existing 3103 Reference
Pressure value.
converting from 1290 to 1240 ink, subtract 6 bits from the existing 1290
Reference Pressure to obtain the 3103 value, then add 1 bit to obtain the new
1240 Reference Pressure value.
5 Adjust the existing Reference Modulation (circled in Figure 3) in accordance with
the ‘Reference Modulation Offset (VM + offset) (V)’ value given for the new ink in
the offset table supplied with the printhead or nozzle.
69360
Figure 3. Reference Modulation Value on the Printhead Code Page

NOTE: The Reference Modulation offset is relative to 3103 ink for all Mk7
printheads except the Mini, where it is relative to 2035 ink.
The following are two examples of the method:
converting from 3103 to 1270 ink, add 20 volts to the existing 3103 Reference
Modulation value.
converting from 1290 to 1240 ink, add 30 volts to the existing 1290 Reference
Modulation to obtain the 3103 value, then add 10 volts to obtain the new 1240
Reference Modulation value.
6 Check the new Reference Modulation value by carrying out a modulation range
analysis in accordance with the ‘Modulation Range Checks’ maintenance
instruction.
7 Enter the following information onto a new Printhead Calibration Label, using an
indelible pen:
• The new Reference Pressure (in the CODE box).
• The new Reference Modulation (in the MODULATION box).
• The new ink type (in the INK TYPE box).
• The date (in the FITTED ON box).
FA69084–1
8 Remove any dust or dirt from the existing printhead conduit label protective
sheath using a damp cloth, and then it wipe dry. Do not use any solvents to clean
this conduit label.
9 Remove the backing paper from the completed Printhead Calibration Label and
attach it to the printhead conduit, on the existing conduit label. The label should
be wrapped around the conduit in such a way that it extends out from the conduit
at 90 degrees, and all written information is covered by the transparent tail (see
Figure 4).
6318
1 Write the date of fitting here. 2 Remove the backing paper from
the flag label.
3 Fold the label in half around the
conduit and stick the sides together
so that the label is tight on the
conduit.
Figure 4. Correct Fitting of the Printhead Calibration Label on the Conduit

10 The ‘Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)’ maintenance instruction is
now completed and the printer is now calibrated for use with the new ink.
FA69084–1
Figure 5. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Figure 6. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima plus Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Figure 7. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Figure 8. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi plus Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Figure 9. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima A Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
5 — 135
Sep 2009
Figure 10. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi A Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
Figure 11. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300FG Printers with Mk7 MidiEC Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Figure 12. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Mini Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
5 — 137
Figure 13. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Micro Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)
Parts Required
FA74194/3103 Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 75 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
or
FA74070/3103 Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 62 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
or
FA74218/XXXX Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 50 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
or
FA74241/XXXX Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 40 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
plus
FA20012 Printhead Calibration Label–Pack
Equipment Required
Tweezers
Introduction
The procedure in this maintenance instruction is primarily for use when replacing the
nozzles on Mk7 Ultima plus 75 µm, Midi plus 75 µm, Ultima 62 µm, Midi 62 µm, Mini 50
µm and Micro 40 µm printheads, in circumstances where it has not been possible to clear a
blocked nozzle after carrying out the full ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance
instruction.
This instruction also contains details for recalibrating a 7300 printer to operate with a new
printhead/nozzle combination following a printhead or nozzle replacement.
New printheads and nozzles are supplied with a calibration sheet, and Reference Pressure
and Reference Modulation Offset Tables, which give offset values to be used when the
printhead or nozzle is replaced.
IMPORTANT: It is most important that the Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation
Offset Tables sheet supplied with each individual printhead or nozzle is
retained and filed. If it is required to convert a printer to a different ink in
the future, the offset values from the original sheet for the printhead or
nozzle must be used. However, if the original offset values are not
available or were not supplied, they must be obtained from the Linx
International Technical Support department before carrying out a
recalibration.
FA69084–1
Procedure

AND SKIN.
Nozzle Replacement
electrical supply.
remove the cover.
assembly plate and remove the nozzle assembly.
5 Remove the old O-ring from the recess of the gun body, or from the nozzle
assembly plate if it has become adhered. Discard the O-ring.
CAUTION: Nozzle O-Ring Quality. Blockages and print failures can occur if rubber particles
from the new O-ring are allowed to enter the nozzle plate or the gun assembly. Examine the
new O-ring before it is fitted to make sure that the part is clean and not damaged.
6 Carefully remove the new calibrated nozzle assembly and O-ring from the
packaging, and examine them for cleanliness and damage.
7 Thoroughly clean the nozzle assembly plate location and the gun body recess with
solvent.
8 Using the tweezers, carefully place the new O-ring into the recess of the gun body.
9 Position the nozzle assembly on the printhead and loosely refit the two securing
screws and shakeproof washers.
FA69084–1
CAUTION: Nozzle Damage. Damage to the nozzle can occur if tools are used to adjust the
nozzle position. Do not use pliers or any other tool to adjust the nozzle. Use only fingers to
adjust the nozzle until the alignment is correct.
10 Adjust the nozzle alignment until the jewel is visible through the slot in the charge
electrode when viewed from the gutter.
11 Fully tighten the two nozzle assembly securing screws.
13 Access the Printhead Code page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation >
Printhead).
14 Adjust the existing Reference Pressure (circled in Figure 1) in accordance with the
‘Reference Pressure Offset (bits)’ value given for the new ink in the offset table
supplied with the printhead or nozzle.
69359
Figure 1. Reference Pressure Value on the Printhead Code Page

An example of the offset table is shown below.
68723
PRESSURE AND MODULATION OFFSET TABLE.
FROM 3103 TO DYE BASED OR PIGMENTED INK TYPES
Ink Type
Mk7 ULTIMA 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1035 1055 1070 1121 1240 1270 1290 1405 2030 2035 3123 3124 3240
Reference Pressure
— 0 1 13 4 3 9 –1 –1 1 2 6 3 1 1 0 0 1
Offset (bits)
Reference Modulation
— 10 –10 –15 0 –30 –25 –10 –10 10 20 –30 5 –10 –10 0 0 10
Offset (VM + offset) (V)
Modulation Slope 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.3 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.0
4900 Ink Type B B B B B B B B B B B B A C C B B C
Table issue no: 2.4
Figure 2. Example of a Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Table
FA69084–1
15 Adjust the existing Reference Modulation (circled in Figure 3) in accordance with

the ‘Reference Modulation Offset (VM + offset) (V)’ value given for the new ink in
the offset table supplied with the printhead or nozzle.
69360
Figure 3. Reference Modulation Value on the Printhead Code Page
Jet Realignment
69171
FA69084–1
17 Examine the alignment of the jet with an eyeglass. The jet should pass exactly
through the centre of the charge electrode and enter the gutter as shown in the
following illustration.
Vertical 50% 50%

gutter alignment
Mk7
Midi 50% The jet must enter
Midi plus the horizontal centre
Ultima 50% of the gutter
Ultima plus
68055
70% 30%
Mk7 50%
Mini
Micro 50%
The jet must pass exactly

through the centre of
the charge electrode
Figure 5. Correct Alignment of the Jet into the Gutter
18 If the jet is not correctly aligned, the nozzle may require adjustment to realign the
jet. The best method to realign the nozzle is to use a finger and thumb only with
very little force applied until the alignment is correct (do not use pliers or any
other tool). The nozzle will move a little, and will probably return to its original
position. Apply a little more force so that the nozzle is deflected, but when released
does not return completely to its original position. Continue to use this method
until the jet is correctly aligned into the gutter, as shown in Figure 5.
19 Shut down the printer and then restart the jet using the [start] key on the control
panel. Repeat this four times to make sure that the jet alignment is maintained, the
jet is stable during the start and stop sequences, and that no warning or fault
messages are reported.
20 Carefully refit the nozzle protection cover and securing screw, making sure that
the jet alignment is not disturbed.
22 Check the new Reference Modulation value by carrying out a modulation range
analysis in accordance with the ‘Modulation Range Checks’ maintenance
instruction.
FA69084–1
Fitting the Flag Label

24 Enter the following information onto a new Printhead Calibration Label, using an
indelible pen:
• The new Reference Pressure (in the CODE box).
• The new Reference Modulation (in the MODULATION box).
• The new ink type (in the INK TYPE box).
• The date (in the FITTED ON box).
25 Remove any dust or dirt from the existing printhead conduit label protective
sheath using a damp cloth, and then it wipe dry. Do not use any solvents to clean
this conduit label.
26 Remove the backing paper from the completed Printhead Calibration Label and
attach it to the printhead conduit, on the existing conduit label. The label should be
wrapped around the conduit in such a way that it extends out from the conduit at
90 degrees, and all written information is covered by the transparent tail (see
Figure 6).
6318
1 Write the date of fitting here. 2 Remove the backing paper from
the flag label.
3 Fold the label in half around the
conduit and stick the sides together
so that the label is tight on the
conduit.
Figure 6. Correct Fitting of the Printhead Calibration Label on the Conduit

27 The ‘Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)’ maintenance instruction
is now completed.
FA69084–1
Printer Installation
Equipment Required
FA65838 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
MP65317 Commissioning Procedure (supplied with printer)
FA65839 Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide
Linx 7300 How To … documents
Service/Install Report
Procedure

AND SKIN.
1 Configuration
Configure the printer by entering the supplied Configuration Code on the ID page
(Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation). Also enter the printer serial number
on the ID page.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual, Chapter 4: ‘System Options’.
2 Installation Parameters
Enter the required parameters on the Installation pages (Date & Time, ID,
Printhead, Ink/Solvent, and Locale pages).
3 Commissioning
Commission the printer in accordance with the Commissioning Procedure.
4 Installation on the Line
Position the printer on the production line and install the relevant accessories (for
example, cabinet, gantry, product sensor, and line speed detector). Refer also to the
‘Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads’ maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Printer Installation
5 Line Parameters
Enter the required parameters on the Line Setup pages (Trigger, Speed, Alarm,
and Power Down pages).
6 Message Creation
Set the message defaults. Create a template and adjust the print parameters as
necessary.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide and the Linx 7300 How To … documents.
7 Operator/Supervisor Training
Carry out operator training.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual, Chapter 8: ‘Training Course Guides’.
8 Password
Set the required password level.
Refer to the ‘Linx 7300 How To Change the System Setup’.
9 Documentation
Complete the Service/Install Report making sure that the customer signs the
report.
10 The ‘Printer Installation’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mounted)
Parts Required
FA61094 Alarm Beacon 6800
Procedure
electrical supply.
2 Loosely fit the Alarm Beacon Mounting Bracket to the Alarm Beacon Stalk
Assembly, in the correct orientation as shown in Figure 1, using two of the four
screws provided in the kit.
48173
Clamp screw (x2)
Stalk assembly Mounting bracket
Figure 1. Alarm Beacon Mounting Bracket Fitted to the Stalk Assembly
FA69084–1
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Fitting (Printer Mounted)
3 Fit the mounting bracket and stalk assembly to the two holes in the ink system vent
on the rear panel of the printer, using the two remaining screws provided in the kit
(Figure 2).
NOTE: Figure 2 shows a 6900 printer, but the fitting procedure for the alarm
beacon is the same on the 7300 printer.
69361
Alarm Beacon
Stalk Assembly
Mounting Bracket
clamp screws (x2)
Ink System Vent
Fit Mounting Bracket Alarm Beacon

securing screws Cableform – connect to
here (x2) ALARM OUTPUT
connector
Figure 2. Fitting the Alarm Beacon to the Rear of the Printer

4 Adjust the vertical position of the stalk assembly in the mounting bracket so that
the cableform exit from the stalk is clear of the printer mounting surface. Tighten
the mounting bracket clamp screws.
FA69084–1
CAUTION: Printer Electrical Damage. Do not connect the ALARM OUTPUT connector of the
printer to the mains electrical supply or any other power source. Damage to the printer can
occur if this caution is ignored.
5 Connect the stalk assembly cableform connector to the ALARM OUTPUT

connector on the rear of the printer.
7 Access the Alarm Setup page (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Alarm).
8 Highlight the “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” warning message and press the
Constant key.
69362
Figure 3. Alarm Setup Page — “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” Set to Constant
9 Remove the printhead cover tube and make sure that the alarm beacon flashes on
and off continuously.
10 Make sure that the System Event page is displayed with the warning message
“3.12 Printhead Cover Off”.
69363
3.12 Printhead Cover Off

06-10-26 13:29:51
3.12 Printhead Cover Of 06-10-26 13:29:51
Figure 4. System Event Page — “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” Displayed

11 Press the OK key to acknowledge the warning message.
FA69084–1
12 Make sure that the message “Printer Warnings Exist” is displayed in the bottom
box of the Printer Status area on the Print Monitor page.
69364
Figure 5. Print Monitor Page — “Printer Warnings Exist” Displayed

13 Refit the printhead cover tube and make sure that, after a few seconds, the error
message disappears from the Printer Status and the alarm beacon is not
illuminated.
15 The ‘24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mounted)’ maintenance
instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion
Parts Required
FA71080 VFC Alarm Conversion
Equipment Required
Procedure

TURN OFF AND DISCONNECT THE PRINTER FROM THE MAINS ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
BEFORE THE COVER IS OPENED.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
NOTE: There are two yellow and black labels (‘PL10’ and ‘PL11’) supplied in the VFC
Alarm Conversion kit. These labels are not used on the 7300 printer.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
5 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the Alarm PCB and the IPM PCB
(PL10). (This cableform is not required for the Mains External Alarm Conversion,
but it can be retained for future reinstallation of the 24 V Alarm, if required.)
6 Remove the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of the ALARM
OUTPUT connector. Retain the nuts for future reinstallation of the 24 V Alarm, if
required.
7 Remove and retain the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
8 Remove and retain the Alarm PCB.
9 Remove the ALARM OUTPUT connector dust cap and unclip the retaining strip
from the connector; retain both items.
10 Remove the locking ring from the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector
and remove the connector from the standard rear panel plate. (This alarm output
connector is not required for the Mains External Alarm Conversion, but it can be
retained for future reinstallation of the 24 V Alarm, if required.)
11 Remove and discard the three screw terminals from the back of the new 3-pin
ALARM OUTPUT connector supplied in the kit.
FA69084–1
12 Fit the three brass pillars, supplied in the kit, to the three terminals on the new
3-pin connector.
13 Fit the new connector through the standard rear panel plate; refit and tighten the
connector locking ring.
14 Refit the dust cap and retaining strip to the new connector.
15 Refit the Alarm PCB to the three pillars on the connector and secure using the three
new Nyloc nuts.
16 Refit the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
17 Connect the new VFC (volt-free contact) Alarm Cableform to the Alarm PCB and
the IPM PCB (PL11).
18 Remove the warning label below the ALARM OUTPUT connector on the standard
rear panel plate (“Do Not Connect A Power Source To The Alarm Output”).
19 If a mains-powered alarm beacon is available, proceed with the ‘Mains-Powered
Alarm Test’. If a mains-powered alarm beacon is not available, proceed with the
‘DVM Test’.
Mains-Powered Alarm Test

20 Connect the mains-powered alarm beacon to the ALARM OUTPUT connector on
the rear panel of the printer.
WARNING. LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. DANGEROUS VOLTAGE EXISTS IN THE PRINTER

WHEN IT IS DISCONNECTED FROM ITS MAINS ELECTRICAL SUPPLY, BUT A MAINS-
OPERATED EXTERNAL ALARM IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER. THERE CAN BE MAINS
VOLTAGE ON THE PCB ATTACHED TO THE ALARM CONNECTOR AND ON THE IPM PCB IN
THE AREA OF THE EXTERNAL ALARM RELAY.
WHEN THE PRINTER COVER IS REMOVED, DO NOT TOUCH THE ALARM CONNECTOR PCB,
OR THE IPM PCB IN THE AREA OF THE EXTERNAL ALARM RELAY.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
21 Switch on the mains electrical supply to the alarm beacon.

FA69084–1
Constant key.
69362
25 Remove the printhead cover tube and make sure that the alarm beacon lights and
remains lit while the printhead cover tube is removed.
69363

06-10-26 13:29:51

FA69084–1
69364

message disappears from the Printer Status and the alarm beacon is not
illuminated.
31 Switch off the mains electrical supply to the alarm beacon.
35 The ‘Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
DVM Test
Constant key.
69362
23 Set the DVM to the resistance range and connect it between pins L and N
(‘normally closed’ contacts) on the ALARM OUTPUT connector. The DVM should
indicate a short circuit.
24 Remove the printhead cover tube and make sure that the DVM indicates an open
circuit.
69363

06-10-26 13:29:51

FA69084–1
69364

message disappears from the Printer Status and the DVM indicates a short circuit
again.
NOTE: If it is required that the alarm output operates in the opposite sense (that is,
‘normally open’ contacts), the two wires on the external alarm device connector
must be connected to the pins corresponding to L and E on the ALARM OUTPUT
connector.
30 Disconnect the DVM from the ALARM OUTPUT connector.
34 The ‘Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Positive Air Pump Installation
Parts Required
FA67050 Positive Air Upgrade Internal
Equipment Required
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
5 Locate the coiled, yellow-striped positive air pipe. It is routed from the printhead
conduit entry point in the rear panel of the printer, through the ink system
enclosure and out through a grommet in the ink system enclosure wall to the
electronics area (see Figure 1).
6 Remove and discard the cable tie securing the coiled pipe, and neatly cut off the
protective end cap using the Tube Cutter.
FA69084–1
7 Connect the pipe to the A1–C1 barb fitted to the short pipe on the pump assembly
(see magnified view in Figure 1).
NOTE: Figure 1 shows a 6900 printer, but the fitting procedure for the positive air
pump is the same on the 7300 printer.
69365
Yellow-striped
positive air pipe
To PL9 on the
IPM PCB
Positive Air Pump
A1–C1 barb
Figure 1. Connecting and Fitting the Printhead Positive Air Pump

8 Position the pump assembly on the air filter housing, between the cooling fan and
the EHTPSU, in the orientation shown in Figure 1. Secure the pump assembly to
the air filter housing using the ear clamp and the two M3x5 pan head screws, two
plain washers and two spring washers supplied in the kit.
9 Connect the pump assembly’s electrical supply cable to PL9 on the IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
10 Tidy and secure the electrical cable and air supply pipe using the cable ties
supplied in the kit. Make sure that the electrical cable is routed clear of the pump
assembly’s body.
12 Remove the printhead cover tube and check for airflow from the positive air pipe
outlet on the printhead (see Figure 2).
68144
Positve Air Pipe Outlet
Figure 2. Printhead Positive Air Pipe Outlet

18 The ‘Positive Air Pump Installation’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement
Parts Required
FA74160 Printhead Valve Assembly Mk7
comprising:
1 x 6800 Micro Valve Body
1 x O-ring
FA74219 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 15 µm (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and
Micro)
comprising:
1 x Feed Filter 15 µm
1 x O-ring
OR
FA74221 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 35 µm (Ultima plus and Midi plus)
comprising:
1 x O-ring
Equipment Required
Procedure
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Feed Valve Components. Blockages and print
failures can occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead feed line. The following
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the feed valve assembly, filter and O-ring
are fitted. These components must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the procedure. If the standard
protective gloves that contain powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle
assembly.
electrical supply.
FA69084–1
2 Remove the one or two small cross head securing screw(s) from the printhead
upper cover (see Figure 1 below), and slide the cover back along the conduit to
expose the feed valve assembly.
Printhead
Upper Cover
68800
MIDI
Cross Head
Securing Screw(s) (x1 or x2)
Figure 1. Printhead Upper Cover and Securing Screw(s)

3 Refer to Figure 2 and Figure 3 below for identification of the valve assembly parts
referred to in this procedure.
68801
Pipe Valve Assembly

Elbow Supports Knurled
Connecting Nut
Feed Valve
Solenoid
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
Feed Valve
Body
Figure 2. Printhead Feed Valve Assembly
FA69084–1
Valve Assembly
Knurled Connecting Nut Barb Connection
68803
Valve Solenoid
Valve Body
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
O-ring Filter
Filter Housing Valve Mounting Block
Figure 3. Printhead Feed Valve Component Parts

4 Remove the two hexagonal-drive securing screws from the front face of the feed
valve assembly and carefully ease the assembly away from the valve mounting
block.
5 Carefully remove and discard the O-ring from the valve mounting block.
6 Remove the elbow supports from the ink feed pipe, and carefully cut the pipe off
the barb connection as close as possible to the barb.
7 Unscrew the valve assembly knurled connecting nut from the top of the valve
solenoid, being careful to retain the metal washer, and separate the valve body
from the solenoid.
8 Fit the new valve body from the spare parts pack (FA74160) to the solenoid. Secure
with the knurled nut, making sure that the retained metal washer is in place and
the two parts of the valve assembly are squarely in line with each other.
9 Prepare the end of the ink feed pipe using the Tube Cutter to make sure that the
pipe is cut cleanly and straight.
10 Connect the ink feed pipe to the valve barb connection.
NOTE: At this stage it is recommended that the feed filter in the valve mounting block is
replaced.
FA69084–1
CAUTION: Contamination from Dried Ink Deposits. Blockages and print failures can occur if
dried ink deposits are allowed to enter the filter housing. During the following process, be
very careful to make sure that ink deposits or build-up do not enter the filter housing.
11 Carefully remove the filter from its housing and discard it.
12 Carefully insert the new filter into its housing and make sure that the notches on
the filter are facing the inside of the valve mounting block. Take care not to
damage the filter when inserting it fully.
13 Refit the elbow supports to the ink feed pipe.
14 Fit the new O-ring (supplied in the spare parts pack FA74160) to the valve
mounting block.
15 Position the valve assembly onto the valve mounting block, and make sure that the
filter and O-ring are correctly seated. Secure the valve assembly using the two
hexagonal-drive screws. Tighten the screws until firm resistance is felt, then
tighten a further ¼ turn.
16 Slide the printhead upper cover back down the conduit into position, and make
sure that the cover does not trap any wires or pipes. Secure the cover using the
one or two small cross head screw(s).
17 The ‘Printhead Feed Valve Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement
Parts Required
FA74219 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 15 µm (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and
Micro)
comprising:
1 x O-ring
OR
FA74221 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 35 µm (Ultima plus and Midi plus)
comprising:
1 x O-ring
Equipment Required
Procedure
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Feed Valve Components. Blockages and print
failures can occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead feed line. The following
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the feed valve assembly, filter and O-ring
are fitted. These components must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the procedure. If the standard
protective gloves that contain powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle
assembly.
electrical supply.
2 Remove the one or two small cross head securing screw(s) from the printhead
upper cover (see Figure 1 below), and slide the cover back along the conduit to
expose the feed valve assembly.
Printhead
Upper Cover
68800
MIDI
Cross Head
Securing Screw(s) (x1 or x2)
Figure 1. Printhead Upper Cover and Securing Screw(s)
FA69084–1
3 Refer to Figure 2 and Figure 3 below for identification of the valve assembly parts
referred to in this procedure.
68801
Pipe Valve Assembly

Elbow Supports Knurled
Connecting Nut
Feed Valve
Solenoid
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
Feed Valve
Body
Figure 2. Printhead Feed Valve Assembly
Valve Assembly
Knurled Connecting Nut Barb Connection
68803
Valve Solenoid
Valve Body
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
O-ring Filter
Filter Housing Valve Mounting Block
Figure 3. Printhead Feed Valve Component Parts
FA69084–1
4 Remove the two hexagonal-drive securing screws from the front face of the feed
valve assembly and carefully ease the assembly away from the valve mounting
block.
5 Carefully remove and discard the O-ring from the valve mounting block.
CAUTION: Contamination from Dried Ink Deposits. Blockages and print failures can occur if
dried ink deposits are allowed to enter the filter housing. During the following process, be
very careful to make sure that ink deposits or build-up do not enter the filter housing.
6 Carefully remove the filter from its housing and discard it.
7 Carefully insert the new filter into its housing and make sure that the notches on
the filter are facing the inside of the valve mounting block. Take care not to
damage the filter when inserting it fully.
8 Fit the new O-ring (supplied in the spare parts pack FA74219) to the valve
mounting block.
9 Position the valve assembly onto the valve mounting block, and make sure that the
filter and O-ring are correctly seated. Secure the valve assembly using the two
hexagonal-drive screws. Tighten the screws until firm resistance is felt, then
tighten a further ¼ turn.
10 Slide the printhead upper cover back down the conduit into position, and make
sure that the cover does not trap any wires or pipes. Secure the cover using the
one or two small cross head screw(s).
11 The ‘Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads
Introduction
Correct installation and routing is critical to the life and reliability of the conduit. By
adhering to the following basic installation guidelines, the life of the conduit is significantly
increased.
The most important factor limiting the life of a conduit is the minimum bend radius it is
subjected to in an application. The recommendations are therefore to install the printhead
in a manner that maximizes this radius, and to make sure that the bend radius is never less
than the minimum.
This document is divided into three main topics, namely:
1. Printhead Choice (for a particular application)
2. Conduit Routing (for particular applications)
3. Printer Position
Topics 1 and 2 are further sub-divided into two categories, dealing with the dynamics of
the application, namely:
• Static applications. The printhead is fixed in position relative to the printer or product
line, and the product moved relative to it. A conveyor line is a typical example.
• Dynamic applications. The printhead is moved relative to a stationary product. A
printhead mounted on a traversing system to cross a multi-lane indexing line is a
typical example.
1 Printhead Choice
Linx Mk7 printheads are available in both straight and right-angled designs—it is
important to specify the correct one for the installation. The following diagrams illustrate
some of the factors to consider.
1.1 Printhead Choice for Static Applications

The printhead must be chosen so that the conduit can be routed with the minimum strain
on the conduit due to bending. The conduit must never be bent to a radius less than 75 mm
(measured to the inside of the conduit). Always select the printhead to give the most gentle
curves on the conduit, particularly in the area at the back of the printhead.
AS167
The conduit is strained if a There is very little strain if a

straight printhead is used right-angled printhead is used
FA69084–1
AS168

straight printhead is used. right-angled printhead is used
The conduit is also exposed
and vulnerable to damage
AS169

right-angled printhead is used straight printhead is used
AS170

straight printhead is used right-angled printhead is used
FA69084–1
AS171

1.2 Printhead Choice for Dynamic Installations

The printhead must be chosen so that the conduit can be routed with the minimum strain
on the conduit due to bending, or pulling the conduit away from the printhead. The
conduit must not be repeatedly bent to a radius less than 150 mm (measured to the inside
of the conduit). Always select the printhead to give the most gentle curves on the conduit,
particularly in the area at the back of the printhead.
AS172
The conduit is repeatedly tugged if a The conduit is gently flexed if a

2 Conduit Routing
• Do not force the conduit to take on a sharp bend.
• Leave a loop to take up movements on dynamic applications; use a 4-m conduit to help
achieve this.
• Support the conduit to stop it flopping around or making contact with other
machinery, but remember to allow access to the printhead for cleaning. Make sure that
there are cut-outs in guarding to prevent the conduit being crushed when the guards
are closed.
FA69084–1
2.1 Conduit Routing for Static Applications

The conduit must never be bent to a radius less than 75 mm (measured to the inside of the
conduit). Always select the route to give the most gentle curves on the conduit, supporting
it where necessary.
AS173
The conduit is left to hang down The conduit is supported out of the
towards the production line way of the production line
AS174
The conduit will be crushed when the The conduit lies in a cut-out to prevent it
machine guard is closed being crushed when the guard is closed
AS175
The conduit is forced into a tight bend A conduit support prevents the conduit
over a sharp edge being bent over a sharp edge
FA69084–1
AS176
The conduit is forced into a tight bend A conduit support prevents the conduit
round a sharp edge being bent round a sharp edge
2.2 Conduit Routing for Dynamic Applications

AS177
The conduit is bent tighter than necessary Use a loop of conduit to take up the motion
when the printhead moves. This reduces over the greatest length of conduit. This
reliability improves reliability
AS178
The conduit is pulled tight to prevent it hitting The conduit is supported on rollers to prevent
the web below as the printhead moves it hitting the web below as the printhead moves
FA69084–1
AS179
The conduit is twisted as the printhead The conduit is only bent as the printhead
moves. This reduces reliability moves. This improves reliability
3 Printer Installation
The printer must be installed so that the conduit is not bent sharply at the rear of the
printer. Always allow 150 mm clearance for the conduit to bend.
AS180
<150 mm >150 mm
The conduit will be unreliable if it is The conduit will be more reliable if

bent tight, because there is less than there is more than 150 mm behind the
150 mm behind the printer printer for it to bend
FA69084–1
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads
Equipment Required
2.5 mm hexagon key
Introduction
The 2-metre and 4-metre Mk7 right-angled printheads have the facility to orientate the
right angle in any one of eight positions through 360° (that is, at 45° intervals). This allows
the printhead to be correctly installed in any given application, with the minimum strain
on the conduit due to bending. (See also the ‘Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads’
maintenance instruction).
This maintenance instruction details the procedure for changing the orientation of the right
angle on Mk7 right-angled printheads.
Procedure
1 Support the printhead in the vertical position, preferably in a Linx Printhead
Mounting Assembly.
Referring to Figure 1
2 Remove the two Conduit Collar securing screws.
3 Unscrew and remove the four securing screws from the Right-Angle Adaptor Top
Section, and remove the Top Section.
Right-Angle Adaptor
—Top Section
Securing Screws
Right-Angle Adaptor
Top Section
Gasket
O-Ring
Conduit Collar
Conduit Collar
Securing Screws
Right-Angle
Orientation
Screw
AS181
Figure 1. Removing the Right-Angle Adaptor Top Section
FA69084–1
4 Lift the conduit clear of the Right-Angle Adaptor Bottom Section and hold it in the
vertical position.
5 Unscrew and remove the Orientation Location Screw.
Orientation Location Screw
Orientation Location Screw Hole
O-Ring Right-Angle Adaptor

Bottom Section
8 x orientation location
holes at 45° intervals
AS182
Figure 2. Changing the Orientation of the Right-Angle Adaptor Bottom Section

6 Whilst holding the conduit firmly to make sure that it does not twist, rotate the
Right-Angle Adaptor Bottom Section to the desired position.
7 Align the Orientation Location Screw Hole with the nearest of the eight
orientation holes in the printhead body and refit the Orientation Location Screw,
making sure that the O-ring is correctly seated.
FA69084–1
8 Lay the conduit straight back down in the Right-Angle Adaptor Bottom Section
making sure that it does not twist.
9 Refit the Right-Angle Adaptor Top Section and loosely refit the four securing
screws, making sure that the gasket is correctly seated.
10 Refit and tighten the two Conduit Collar securing screws, making sure that the O-
ring is correctly seated.
11 Fully tighten the four securing screws on the Right-Angle Adaptor Top Section.
12 The ‘Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads’ maintenance
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation
Parts Required
FA67058 Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit
Equipment Required
Introduction
The purpose of the Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit is to remove the auto Power-Off
facility from the printer to allow it to be integrated into OEM applications. This means that
the power control for the printer is provided solely by the mains power supply switch on
the rear panel of the printer.
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
4 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
5 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
and solvent.
FA69084–1
Removing the Existing Auto Power On/Off Cableform

7 Disconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB,
which is located at the top-left corner of the PCB as viewed from the component
side (see Figure 1, and item ‘A’ in Figures 2 and 3).
NOTE: Figures 2 and 3 show a 6900 printer, but the fitting procedure for the auto
mains power-off bypass kit is the same on the 7300 printer.
Auto Power On/Off
Connector PL20
69366
Figure 1. Location of the Auto Power On/Off Connector PL20 on the IPM PCB
8 Disconnect the four connections on the Power On Switch at the front of the printer
(labelled ‘B’ in Figures 2 and 3).
69387
B
C
D
A
KEY
A Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20
B Power On Switch
C Low Voltage Power Supply Unit connector
D Mains Power Supply Switch
Figure 2. Printer Rear View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections
FA69084–1
KEY 69388 A
A Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20
B Power On Switch
C Low Voltage Power Supply Unit connector
D Mains Power Supply Switch
D
Figure 3. Printer Front View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections
9 Disconnect the cableform’s two earth connections from the push-on blade
connectors adjacent to the Power On Switch.
10 Disconnect the cableform connector on the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
(labelled ‘C’ in Figures 2 and 3).
11 Disconnect the cableform’s four connections (2 x brown and 2 x blue) on the
Mains Power Supply Switch at the rear of the printer, noting the colour coding of
these connections (labelled ‘D’ in Figures 2 and 3).
12 Disconnect the cableform’s three connections (brown, blue, and yellow and green)
from the Mains Filter located below the Mains Power Supply Switch, noting the
colour coding of these connections.
13 Remove the Auto Power On/Off cableform from the printer.
14 Remove the Power On Switch from the front of the printer by unscrewing its
retaining nut.
15 Insert the blanking plug supplied in the spares kit into the vacant hole and secure
with its retaining nut.
FA69084–1
Connecting the New Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Cableform (refer to Figure 4)
D
69389
KEY
C To Low Voltage Power Supply Unit connector
D To Mains Power Supply Switch
E To Mains Filter
F To push-on blade earth connectors adjacent to Power On Switch
G Power On Switch blanking plug and retaining nut
Figure 4. Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit

16 Connect the Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Cableform’s three connections (brown,
blue, and yellow and green) to the Mains Filter (labelled ‘E’ in Figure 4), making
sure that the colour-coded wires are connected in the same sequence as those
removed.
17 Connect the cableform’s four connections (2 x brown and 2 x blue) to the Mains
Power Supply Switch at the rear of the printer (labelled ‘D’ in Figure 4), making
sure that the colour-coded wires are connected in the same sequence as those
removed.
18 Connect the cableform connector to the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (labelled
‘C’ in Figure 4).
19 Connect the cableform’s two earth connections to the push-on blade connectors
adjacent to the redundant Power On Switch location (labelled ‘F’ in Figure 4).
20 Fit link LK20 ‘POW_O/R’ (Power-Off Override) on the IPM PCB.
21 Reconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors to PL17 and PL21 on the IPM
PCB.
22 Reconnect the top cover’s earth lead to the push-on blade connector in the base of
the cabinet.
FA69084–1

NOTE: Make sure that the customer is made aware that this mains power modification has
been embodied on this printer, which means that the Auto Power-Off facility has
been removed.
26 The ‘Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation’ maintenance instruction is
now complete.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Parallel I/O Interface Installation
Parts Required
FA67078 Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Parallel I/O PCB Assembly
Screwlock x2
PCB Bracket
Snap Rivet x2
PCB Bracket M4 Securing Screw
USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable
Warning Label
FA72167 Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
Introduction
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with a Parallel I/O Interface, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of an extra PCB and D-type connector on a mounting plate, which is
fitted to the rear panel of the printer. The accessory provides 8-off 24 V DC inputs and 8-off
24 V DC outputs. The interface can be used by the software in the printer for a variety of
applications, including:
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to interface easily with Programmable Logic
Controllers (PLCs) and similar machine controls.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is only fitted with the standard rear
panel plate.
FA69084–1
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
IPM PCB.
7 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the IPM PCB (PL10).
8 Remove the six Nyloc nuts that secure the standard rear panel plate to the rear
panel of the printer. Retain the nuts.
9 Remove the standard rear panel plate and gasket (with the alarm connector still
fitted).
10 Remove and retain the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of
the ALARM OUTPUT connector.
13 Remove and retain the supporting pillar from the standard rear panel plate.
and remove the connector from the standard rear panel plate. Retain the connector
and locking ring.
15 Fit the ALARM OUTPUT connector to the new Alarm and Parallel I/O options
plate. Refit the locking ring to the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector.
FA69084–1
16 Fit the supporting pillar to the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
17 Fit the Alarm PCB to the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
18 Fit the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
19 Fit the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of the ALARM
OUTPUT connector.
20 Fit the warning label below the ALARM OUTPUT connector on the outside of the
options plate.
21 Fit the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate to the D-type connector (SK10) on the
Parallel I/O PCB using the two screwlocks.
22 Fit the PCB bracket to the solder side (underside) of the Parallel I/O PCB, at the
wider end of the board, using the two snap rivets. Push the rivets in from the
component side of the PCB.
side. Move the cableform to one side to give easy access to the options plate area.
24 Position the PCB and options plate assembly in the printer, with connector PL30
uppermost and the plate against the rear panel of the printer. Insert the studs
through the holes in the rear panel of the printer.
25 Loosely fit the M4 screw through the slot in the PCB bracket and into the hole in
the base of the cabinet. (Use the nearest of the two holes to the IPM PCB.)
26 Secure the PCB and options plate assembly to the rear panel of the printer using
the Nyloc nuts retained in step 8.
27 Tighten the M4 screw in the base of the cabinet.
28 Reconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform to the IPM PCB (PL10).
29 Reconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB.
30 Connect the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL30 (labelled ‘IPM PCB’) on
the Parallel I/O PCB.
31 Connect the middle connector of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL1
on the USB PCB.
32 Connect the other end of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL14 on the
IPM PCB (location 3D and 4D—refer to the IPM PCB component locations
illustration in Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM
PCB > Test Points and Links).
PCB.
the cabinet.
38 The ‘Parallel I/O Interface Installation’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion
Parts Required
FA67065 Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Assembly
6-Way IP67 Buccaneer Plug Connector
6-Way IP67 Buccaneer Socket Connector
Screws x6
Brass Pillar
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Cableform
comprising:
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
Introduction
The Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Upgrade provides up to four outputs that are used to control
multi-stage alarm beacons.
This accessory can only be used if the Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade accessory (FA67063)
has also been installed.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is fitted with the standard 24 volts
external alarm.
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
FA69084–1
IPM PCB.
fitted). Retain the option plate for future reinstallation of the standard 24 V Alarm,
if required.
11 Fit the new supporting pillar to the new Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
12 Remove the locking ring from the new 6-pin ALARM OUTPUT plug connector and
insert the connector through the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate. Make sure
that the gasket is in place on the connector before fitting it to the options plate.
13 Rotate the connector until the locating lug on the connector engages in the cut-out
in the options plate. It is most important to make sure that the connector is
correctly located on the options plate.
14 Refit and tighten the connector locking ring.
15 Fit the Multi-Stage Alarm PCB to the new ALARM OUTPUT connector as follows:
(a) Orientate the PCB as shown in Figure 1, with the component side of the PCB
facing towards you.
(b) Fit the six terminal screws, supplied in the kit, through the holes in the PCB.
(c) Align the threaded stud of the supporting pillar with the hole in the bottom left
corner of the PCB. Push the PCB onto the connector so that the connector
terminals are flush with PCB spring terminals.
(d) Screw the six terminal screws into the connector to secure the PCB.
(e) Refit the nut (that was retained earlier) to the threaded stud of the supporting
pillar, to secure the Alarm PCB.
69384
Location of the
six connector
terminal screws
PL1
Location of the brass

pillar securing screw
Figure 1. Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Details
FA69084–1
24 Connect the new Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Cableform to PL1 on the Multi-Stage
Alarm PCB and PL27 on the Parallel I/O PCB.
on the USB PCB.
PCB.
the cabinet.
FA69084–1
34 Connect the multi-stage alarm input cable to the 6-Way IP67 Buccaneer Socket
Connector in accordance with the details in the following table.
69391
MULTI-STAGE ALARM (VFC) CONNECTOR
Signal Pin
N/C (Normally Closed) 4 1

2
N/O (Normally Open) 4 2
1 3
Common 3
N/O (Normally Open) 3 4 6 4
5
N/O (Normally Open) 2 5
6-Way Plug Connector
N/C (Normally Closed) 1 6
on the Printer
Figure 2. Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Connector Details

35 The ‘Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion
Parts Required
FA67064 Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Assembly
Screws x6
Brass Pillar
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Cableform
Warning Label
FA67066 7-Way IP67 Buccaneer Plug Connector
comprising:
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
Introduction
The Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Upgrade provides up to four outputs that are used to control
multi-stage alarm beacons.
This accessory can only be used if the Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade accessory (FA67063)
has also been installed.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is fitted with the standard 24 volts
external alarm.
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
FA69084–1
IPM PCB.
fitted). Retain the option plate for future reinstallation of the standard 24 V Alarm,
if required.
11 Fit the new supporting pillar to the new Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
12 Remove the locking ring from the new 7-pin ALARM OUTPUT socket connector
and insert the connector through the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate. Make
sure that the gasket is in place on the connector before fitting it to the options plate.
13 Rotate the connector until the locating lug on the connector engages in the cut-out
in the options plate. It is most important to make sure that the connector is
correctly located on the options plate.
14 Refit and tighten the connector locking ring.
15 Fit the Multi-Stage Alarm PCB to the new ALARM OUTPUT connector as follows:
(a) Orientate the PCB as shown in Figure 1, with the component side of the PCB
facing towards you.
(b) Fit the six terminal screws, supplied in the kit, through the holes in the PCB.
(c) Align the threaded stud of the supporting pillar with the hole in the bottom left
corner of the PCB. Push the PCB onto the connector so that the connector
terminals are flush with PCB spring terminals.
(d) Screw the six terminal screws into the connector to secure the PCB.
(e) Refit the nut (that was retained earlier) to the threaded stud of the supporting
pillar, to secure the Alarm PCB.
69384
Location of the
six connector
terminal screws
PL1
Location of the brass

pillar securing screw
Figure 1. Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Details
FA69084–1
options plate.
25 Connect the new Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Cableform to PL1 on the Multi-Stage
Alarm PCB and PL29 on the Parallel I/O PCB.
on the USB PCB.
PCB.
the cabinet.
FA69084–1
35 Connect the multi-stage alarm input cable to the 7-Way IP67 Buccaneer Plug
Connector (FA67066) in accordance with the details in the following table.
69392
MULTI-STAGE ALARM (24 V) CONNECTOR
Signal Pin
Alarm 1 1
Alarm 2 2
5
Alarm 3 3 6 4
7
24 V 4
1 3
Not used 5 2
Alarm 4 6
7-Way Socket Connector
on the Printer
Not used 7
Figure 2. Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Connector Details

28 The ‘Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Dual Alarm Installation
Parts Required
FA67077 Dual Alarm Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
VFC Alarm PCB Assembly
3-Way IP65 Buccaneer Plug Connector
Pillar x1
M4 Nyloc Nut x9
Dual Alarm Options Plate
Connector Plastic IP67 Dust Cap
VFC Alarm Cableform
Equipment Required
Introduction
Linx 7300 printers are fitted with a single 24 V alarm output as standard. The Dual Alarm
Upgrade allows an additional VFC alarm to be connected to the printer. Therefore, the
printer can control two alarm outputs (24 V and VFC).
NOTE: A configuration code is required to enable the second alarm in the software. When
enabled, Alarm 2 is available on the Alarm page (Print Monitor > Line Setup >
Alarm).
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
fitted).
and locking ring.
24 Volt Alarm Connector

15 Fit the ALARM OUTPUT connector to the top hole of the new Dual Alarm options
plate. Refit the locking ring to the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector.
16 Fit the supporting pillar to the Dual Alarm options plate.
17 Fit the Alarm PCB to the Dual Alarm options plate.
OUTPUT connector.
VFC Alarm Connector

20 Remove the locking ring from the back of the 3-pin VFC Alarm connector and
remove the connector.
21 Fit the VFC Alarm connector to the new Dual Alarm options plate. Refit the
locking ring to the back of the 3-pin VFC Alarm connector.
22 Fit the supporting pillar to the Dual Alarm options plate.
23 Fit the VFC Alarm PCB to the Dual Alarm options plate.
24 Fit the nut that secures the VFC Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
25 Fit the three Nyloc nuts that secure the VFC Alarm PCB to the back of the VFC
Alarm connector.
Dual Alarm Options Plate

26 Position the options plate assembly in the printer, with the 24 V Alarm connector
27 Secure the options plate assembly to the rear panel of the printer using the six
Nyloc nuts retained in step 8.
FA69084–1

29 Connect the new VFC Alarm Cableform to the VFC Alarm PCB and the IPM PCB
(PL11).
PCB.
the cabinet.
35 The ‘Dual Alarm Installation’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Ethernet Interface Installation
Parts Required
FA67079 Ethernet RJ45 Connector Socket Assembly
comprising:
RJF544 Ethernet Metal Connector Socket
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Gasket
Screw x4
Ethernet Patch Lead
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Plastic IP67 Dust Cap
Warning label
FA72166 Alarm and Ethernet Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm and Ethernet Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
Introduction
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with an Ethernet capability, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of a patch lead that connects the IPM PCB to a connector that is fitted
to a mounting plate on the rear panel of the printer.
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to be connected to a standard Ethernet network or
directly to a local PC.
panel plate.
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
FA69084–1
IPM PCB.
fitted).
and locking ring.
15 Fit the ALARM OUTPUT connector to the new Alarm and Ethernet options plate.
Refit the locking ring to the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector.
16 Fit the supporting pillar to the Alarm and Ethernet options plate.
17 Fit the Alarm PCB to the Alarm and Ethernet options plate.
OUTPUT connector.
options plate.
21 Fit the Ethernet connector to the Alarm and Ethernet options plate as follows (refer
to Figure 1):
(a) Fit the Ethernet connector gasket to the inside mating face on the Ethernet
connector.
(b) Insert the miniature PCB end of the connector through the hole in the Alarm
and Ethernet options plate from the outside face of the plate.
(c) Orientate the connector as shown in Figure 1, with the miniature PCB of the
connector facing down.
(d) Fit the four screws, supplied in the kit, to secure the connector to the options
plate.
FA69084–1
69385
Insert this end of the
connector through Fit the gasket to this
the Ethernet option mating face of the
plate from the outside connector
face of the plate
Miniature PCB
Figure 1. Ethernet Connector Details

22 Position the connector and options plate assembly in the printer, with the Alarm
connector uppermost and the plate against the rear panel of the printer. Insert the
studs through the holes in the rear panel of the printer.
23 Secure the options plate assembly to the rear panel of the printer using the six
Nyloc nuts retained in step 8. Fit the retaining strip of the Ethernet connector dust
cap to one of the threaded studs.
25 Connect the Ethernet patch lead to the Ethernet connector.
26 Connect the other end of the Ethernet patch lead to SK9 on the IPM PCB (location
2C—refer to the IPM PCB component locations illustration in Chapter 3: Technical
Description > Electronics and Software > IPM PCB > Test Points and Links).
27 Fit the Ethernet connector dust cap.
PCB.
the cabinet.
33 The ‘Ethernet Interface Installation’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation
Parts Required
FA67079 Ethernet RJ45 Connector Socket Assembly
comprising:
RJF544 Ethernet Metal Connector Socket
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Gasket
Screw x4
Ethernet Patch Lead
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Plastic IP67 Dust Cap
FA67078 Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Parallel I/O PCB Assembly
Screwlock x2
PCB Bracket
Snap Rivet x2
PCB Bracket M4 Securing Screw
USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable
FA72168 Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
Introduction
The Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet Options Plate (FA72168) must be used in the
following procedure to install the combined Ethernet and Parallel I/O Interface options.
panel plate.
Ethernet
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with an Ethernet capability, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of a patch lead that connects the IPM PCB to a connector that is fitted
to a mounting plate on the rear panel of the printer.
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to be connected to a standard Ethernet network or
directly to a local PC.
FA69084–1
Parallel I/O
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with a Parallel I/O Interface, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of an extra PCB and D-type connector on a mounting plate, which is
fitted to the rear panel of the printer. The accessory provides 8-off 24 V DC inputs and 8-off
24 V DC outputs. The interface can be used by the software in the printer for a variety of
applications, including:
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to interface easily with Programmable Logic
Controllers (PLCs) and similar machine controls.
Procedure

WARNING IS IGNORED.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
IPM PCB.
fitted).
FA69084–1
and locking ring.
15 Fit the ALARM OUTPUT connector to the new Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet
options plate. Refit the locking ring to the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT
connector.
16 Fit the supporting pillar to the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate.
17 Fit the Alarm PCB to the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate.
OUTPUT connector.
options plate.
21 Fit the Ethernet connector to the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate
(FA72168) as follows (refer to Figure 1):
(a) Fit the Ethernet connector gasket to the inside mating face of the Ethernet
connector.
(b) Insert the miniature PCB end of the connector through the hole in the Alarm,
Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate from the outside face of the plate.
(c) Orientate the connector as shown in Figure 1, with the miniature PCB on the
connector facing down.
(d) Fit the four screws, supplied in the kit, to secure the connector to the options
plate.
69385
Insert this end of the
connector through Fit the gasket to this
the Ethernet option mating face of the
plate from the outside connector
face of the plate
Miniature PCB
Figure 1. Ethernet Connector Details
FA69084–1
22 Fit the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate to the D-type connector
(SK10) on the Parallel I/O PCB using the two screwlocks.
23 Fit the PCB bracket to the component side of the Parallel I/O PCB, at the wider end
of the board, using the two snap rivets. Push the rivets in from the component side
of the PCB.
the six Nyloc nuts retained in step 8. Fit the retaining strip of the Ethernet
connector dust cap to one of the screws or threaded studs.
on the USB PCB.
34 Connect the Ethernet patch lead to the Ethernet connector.
35 Connect the other end of the Ethernet patch lead to SK9 on the IPM PCB (location
2C—refer to the IPM PCB component locations illustration in Chapter 3: Technical
Description > Electronics and Software > IPM PCB > Test Points and Links).
36 Fit the Ethernet connector dust cap.
PCB.
the cabinet.
42 The ‘Combined Ethernet and Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation’ maintenance
FA69084–1
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
Equipment Required
Desktop or laptop PC running Microsoft® Windows® 2000 or XP
Professional.
System requirements: Pentium® II 450 MHz; 128 MB of RAM; CD-ROM
drive; an available COM port; 256 colour, 800 x 600-pixel display; 200 MB
of disc space; additional 25 MB of disc space for each Linx Sync system
software file (if downloaded from ExtraLinx), and up to 2 MB for each
backup file.
FA67059 6800(SP) and 6900 Reboot Kit, comprising:
FA75038 6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM Set, comprising:
6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM (A-6-8-056 IPM IC62)
FA63033 RS232 PC Cable IP67 2-metre
Introduction
Linx Sync v4.0 is compatible with 6900 and 7300 System Software and backward
compatible with all versions of 6800 System Software. In addition, 6800 data can be backed
up and upgraded from any version up to the latest version of System Software.
Linx Sync v4.0 is compatible with the Boot PROMs issued with Linx Sync v2.0 and 6800
v1.6 System Software.
The table below shows the compatibility issues.
v3.1 69511
Linx Sync v1.2 Linx Sync v2.1 Linx Sync v3.0 Linx Sync v4.0
v1.2 Boot PROMs Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
v2.0 Boot PROMs Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
v3.0 Boot PROMs Not supported Not supported Compatible Compatible
.lsf file format Not supported Supported Supported Supported
.mot file format Supported Supported Supported Supported
Backup and Restore Not supported Supported Supported Supported
Figure 1. Linx Sync Compatibility Issues

The Linx Sync Service Tool is intended for use only by maintenance technicians to perform
the following three tasks:
1. Program (upgrade) a printer with a new version of system software.
2. Backup and restore a printer’s data.
3. Transfer data between a printer and a PC, or between printers via a PC using Linx Sync.
FA69084–1
IMPORTANT:
1. The printer must be in the Idle state (that is, not printing) before any of the
following procedures can be carried out.
2. Some PC screen savers can severely impact the Linx Sync software by causing
programming problems if they are running at the same time. It is strongly
recommended that any screen savers and any power saving features are disabled
before starting the programming, backing up or transferring procedures.
Procedures
This maintenance instruction includes the following procedures:
• Software Programming—Normal.
• Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software.
• Backing Up and Restoring Data.
• Transferring Data.
The first programming procedure (‘Software Programming—Normal’) details the normal
procedure for programming a printer with the system software from a PC in the following
circumstances:
• When upgrading the 7300 System Software (that is, installing a new version of system
software in place of a previous version).
• When the IPM PCB is replaced with a board that does not have 7300 System Software
installed.
The second programming procedure (‘Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty
Software’) uses a PROM to copy software onto the printer that is then used for
programming the printer. This procedure is to be used in the following circumstances:
• When the system software installed on the printer is corrupt and Linx Sync does not
recognize the printer. More specifically, this would be to rectify a fatal software
corruption or a total software failure, which cannot be cleared by switching the printer
off and then back on (rebooting).
• When a printer is new and has no software installed, or when an IPM PCB is fitted that
has no software installed.
A ‘Failures While Programming’ problem solving guide is also provided at the end of the
two programming procedures.
FA69084–1
Software Programming—Normal
NOTE: Only one printer can be programmed at a time.
2 Connect the RS232 interface cable between the PC and the RS232 INTERFACE
connector on the rear panel of the printer.
3 Switch on the printer and the PC. Wait until the printer has carried out the startup
checks and the Welcome screen is displayed.
4 Make sure that the communications protocol is set to RPC (Print Monitor > Menu
> Setup > Communications > Protocol > RS232 Protocol).
NOTE: If it is necessary to change the protocol to RPC, remember to reset it to its
original setting at the end of this procedure.
5 Download the Linx Sync v4.0 software and the latest version of Linx 7300 System
Software from ExtraLinx (Linx’s Extranet site) to the PC.
IMPORTANT: The Linx Sync Service Tool must never be copied to a customer’s PC. It
must only be used by Linx and Linx Distributor maintenance
technicians. Unauthorized use may result in loss of printer data.
6 Double click the ‘Linx Sync.exe’ file. (If required, a shortcut to the application can
be made now and placed on the desktop.)
7 All available COM ports are displayed in the left pane of the Linx Sync window,
with a ‘+’ symbol next to each one that has a printer connected to it. Click a COM
port’s ‘+’ symbol to reveal the connected printer, which is identified by its UNIC
code or “Printer Ready for Download”.
69512
Figure 2. Connected Printers in the Linx Sync Window

If “Printer Ready for Download” is displayed, this means that the printer is not
programmed with a version of system software. If nothing is displayed, check that
the interface cable is connected correctly and that the correct protocol is selected
(see step 4). If after doing this there is still nothing displayed, proceed with the
second part of this maintenance instruction, ‘Software Programming—Corrupt/
Faulty Software’.
FA69084–1
8 Use one of the following three methods to program a printer with system
software (the system software file has an ‘.lsf’ file extension, for example
‘6900v3.1.lsf’):
• Drag and drop the system software file onto the printer in the left pane.
69513
Figure 3. Dragging and Dropping the System Software File

• Select and copy the system software file (right-click to select the file, and then
click Copy), Select the printer in the left pane and paste the file to the printer
(Edit menu > Paste).
69514
Figure 4. Copying and Pasting the System Software File
FA69084–1
• Select the printer in the left pane. On the File menu, click Download, which
displays the Open dialog box:
(a) Browse for the system software file and select it.
(b) Click the Open button to start the programming process.
69515
Figure 5. Downloading the System Software File Using the Download Menu Command
When programming has started, if the printer already has software installed, the
option is given to maintain the store during the programming process.
Maintaining the store simply backs up stored items (that is, messages, logos and
all configuration data, including calibration values and configuration codes) to the
PC before software installation, and then restores the data after software
installation. The following message dialog box is displayed.
69516
Figure 6. “Maintain the store during download?” Message Dialog Box
FA69084–1
9 Click the Yes button to restore the store when the software installation is
complete, or click the No button if you no longer wish to maintain the store.
A dialog box is displayed during the programming process, which shows the
progress of the software installation. It displays the total size of the file being
installed and how much has been installed so far. A progress bar also displays the
progress pictorially.
69517
Figure 7. Download Progress Dialog Box

10 To abort the programming process, click the Cancel button. However, cancelling
programming may leave the printer in an unusable state. The 6800/6900 Boot
PROM Set is then needed to recover the printer to a useable state (refer to the
procedure, ‘Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software’ in this
maintenance instruction). To help avoid this situation, a message dialog box is
displayed that warns of the consequences of cancelling and asks if you wish to
continue.
11 Close Linx Sync when the software has been installed.
13 Disconnect the RS232 interface cable from the printer.
15 The ‘Software Programming—Normal’ procedure is now complete and the
printer is ready for use.
FA69084–1
Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software

WARNING IS IGNORED.
and solvent.
NOTE: Make sure that you have the latest version of the 6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM Set
(FA75038).
5 Fit the 6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM (A-6-8-056) to the IPM PCB socket IC62.
6 Fit link LK5 to the IPM PCB.
8 Wait approximately 25 seconds while the reboot software is copied to the PCB. On
completion of the reboot, the LEDs adjacent to LK5 on the IPM PCB scroll in sequence.
10 Remove link LK5 from the IPM PCB.
11 Remove the Boot PROM from the IPM PCB.
12 Download the system software as described in steps 1 to 12 of the ‘Software
Programming—Normal’ procedure. Note that in this circumstance the Welcome
screen is not displayed as stated in step 3, but the indication to continue from step
4 is the LEDs adjacent to LK5 scrolling.
17 The ‘Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software’ procedure is now
complete and the printer is ready for use.
FA69084–1
Failures While Programming

It is possible that a failure occurs while programming a printer. The following are some
possible problems and how to recover from them.
Printer Is Switched off While Programming

If the power is switched off during the programming process, the programming will fail
and will need to be restarted. Switch the power back on and refer to ‘Restarting
Programming’ later in this section.
Serial Cable Is Disconnected While Programming

If the serial cable is disconnected during the programming, Linx Sync will time out. A
message dialog box is displayed informing of the loss of the connection and asking if you
wish to either retry or cancel. Reconnect the cable and click the Retry button to allow the
programming to continue. After three attempts at retrying, the only option that is made
available is to cancel. If the Cancel button is clicked at any time, the programming will fail
and will need to be restarted. Refer to ‘Restarting Programming’ later in this section.
Linx Sync is Cancelled

If for some reason programming is cancelled or Linx Sync quits, the programming will fail
and will need to be restarted. Refer to ‘Restarting Programming’ later in this section.
Possible PC-Related Problems

If there are still problems programming the printer or downloading software, carry out
one or more of the following:
• Disable any screen savers.
• Disable any power saving features, especially on laptops.
• Shut down other PC applications, especially any that use the serial ports.
• If necessary, try restarting the PC.
Restarting Programming
If programming fails and cannot be restarted, begin the programming again.
If the LEDs on the IPM PCB are not flashing, the first step is to prepare the printer for
programming using the Boot PROMs as detailed in the procedure, ‘Software
Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software’.
If the store was maintained during the previous programming, a message dialog box is
displayed asking if you wish to maintain that store.
69518
Figure 8. “Maintain the store backed up last time?” Message Dialog Box
Click the Yes button to restore the store when the programming is complete, or click the
No button if you no longer wish to maintain the store.
FA69084–1
Backing Up and Restoring Data
Backing Up
The backup files are stored in a default base directory (also known as a folder) called
‘C:\backup’, but this directory can be changed if required. If you wish to change the base
directory, carry out step 1 first; if not, proceed to step 2.
1 To change the base directory: on the Setup menu, click Backup Directory, which
displays the Backup Directory dialog box.
69519
Figure 9. Changing the Base Directory of the Backup Files

(a) Click the Modify button, which displays the Browse for Folder dialog box.
(b) Browse for the required new directory and select it.
(c) Click the OK button.
2 In the left pane of the Linx Sync window, select the printer to be backed up.
FA69084–1
3 On the File menu, click Backup.
69520
Figure 10. Selecting a Printer to Back Up

The selected printer is backed up and the backup file is automatically named
using the time and date, and put in the printer’s backup directory on the PC.
69521
Figure 11. Named Backup File in the Printer’s Backup Directory
FA69084–1
Restoring
NOTES:
1. If a backup file was taken from a printer that has an earlier version of system
software than the printer it is being restored to, the data items (see NOTE 2 below)
being restored are upgraded as necessary. For example, if a 6900 printer with v3.7
System Software was backed up, and then the backup file is restored to a 7300
printer with v4.1 System Software, data items in the backup file are upgraded to
work with v4.1.
2. When a backup file from a 6800 printer is restored to a 6900 or 7300 printer, Linx
Sync v4.0 only upgrades messages, logos and sequences data items. Setup data is
not maintained.
1 In the left pane of the Linx Sync window, select the printer to restore a backup to.
2 On the File menu, click Restore, which displays the Select Backup File dialog box
containing a list of backup files for the selected printer.
69522
Figure 12. Selecting a Backup File to Restore to a Printer

3 If required, browse for the required backup file to restore, and then select it.
4 Click the OK button to restore the backup file to the selected printer.
Transferring Data
Data can be transferred between one printer and another, between a printer and a backup
file, and between a printer and a PC.
Transferring data is achieved by using either copy and paste, or drag and drop methods.
NOTE: As with backing up and restoring, a store item copied from one printer to another
is upgraded according to the versions of system software on the printers. See
NOTE at the beginning of the procedure, ‘Restoring’.
FA69084–1
Transferring from a Printer

Data can be transferred from a printer to another printer, to a backup, or to an explorer
application.
NOTE: Data types cannot be transferred from a printer to an explorer application.
1 To transfer one or more data items from a printer, copy them from the printer and
paste them to the destination, or drag them from the printer onto the destination
(see the following NOTE), as shown in the following screen.
69523
Figure 13. Transferring Data Items from a Printer

NOTE: It is not possible to drag and drop data items from a printer to an explorer
application.
2 To transfer one or more data types from a printer to a backup, copy them from the
printer and paste them to the backup, or drag them from the printer onto the
backup, as shown in the following screen.
69524
Figure 14. Transferring Data Types from a Printer to a Backup
FA69084–1
Transferring from a Backup

Data can be transferred from a backup to a printer, to another backup, or to an explorer
application.
1 To transfer one or more data items from a backup, copy them from the backup and
paste them to the destination, or drag them from the backup onto the destination,
as shown in the following screen.
69525
Figure 15. Transferring Data Items from a Backup

2 To transfer one or more data types from a backup, copy them from the backup and
paste them to the destination, or drag them from the backup onto the destination,
as shown in the following screen.
69526
Figure 16. Transferring Data Types from a Backup
FA69084–1
Transferring from a PC
Data can be transferred from a PC to a printer or a backup.
1 To transfer one or more data items from a PC, copy them from the explorer
application and paste them to the destination, or drag them from the explorer
application onto the destination, as shown in the following screen.
69527
Figure 17. Transferring Data Items from a PC
FA69084–1
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning
Equipment Required
FA69034 Cleaning Swab Pack
FA999004 Hand Cleaner Reinolen, 100 ml Tube
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile (small) )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile (medium) ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile (large) )
Food Grade Solvent, 5L
Introduction
For trouble-free operation, the printhead must be kept free of any ink build-up or moisture.
The following cleaning procedure is intended to be used for weekly cleaning, and after any
uncontrolled shutdown (for example, power failure while the jet is running).
A cleaning kit is available from Linx—order as FA69035, 6800EC and 6900 FG Cleaning Kit.
This contains a cleaning swab pack, solvent cleaning bottle, beaker for waste solvent, hand
cleaning cream, nitrile gloves and safety spectacles.
About the Cleaning Procedure

• The cleaning procedure described in this maintenance instruction applies only to Linx
food grade inks.
• Food grade solvent can take up to 20 minutes to dry completely. The printhead must
be completely dry before starting the printer.
• To minimize startup delays, printhead cleaning should be carried out at the end of the
working shift.
• If ink build-up is observed on the nozzle, use the Nozzle Clear procedure. (Refer to the
‘Nozzle Clear Sequence’ part of the ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance
instruction in this chapter.)
Procedure

AND SKIN.
FA69084–1
CAUTION: Printhead Damage. Extended contact with solvent can damage the printhead. Do
not put the printhead into solvent to clean it and do not use an ultrasonic bath. These
incorrect methods can cause damage to the printhead and can make your warranty invalid.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage. Only the correct Linx food grade solvent for the ink must be
used with the cleaning swabs supplied with the cleaning kit. The use of any other materials or
fluid can cause damage to the printer and make the Food Grade status invalid.
CAUTION: Print Obstructions. Do not dry the printhead with a cloth or any other material,
because these items can leave fibres that can cause obstructions to the ink jet.
electrical supply.
3 Mount the printhead on a washstation, or hold the printhead over a beaker or
suitable container.
4 Remove the dried ink by gently squirting the correct Linx food grade solvent onto
the printhead area shown in Figure 1. Use short bursts, allowing the ink to
dissolve between bursts. Repeat the solvent application until all (or most) of the
ink is removed.
68754
MIDI 62 EC
WASH THIS
AREA ONLY
Figure 1. Area of the Printhead to Wash with Solvent
FA69084–1
5 Squirt more solvent onto the components shown circled in Figure 1. While they
are still wet, use the foam cleaning swabs to gently remove any ink deposits from
the components, as shown in Figure 2.
68780
MIDI 62 EC
THOROUGHLY
CLEAN
ALL THESE
COMPONENTS
Figure 2. Printhead Components to Clean with the Swabs
FA69084–1
6 Pay particular attention to the printhead components and parts that are identified
in Figure 3.
A
68711
D E
Figure 3. Identification of the Printhead Components
• Charge Electrode (A).
• EHT plate (C)—paying particular attention to the underside of the EHT plate.
• EHT plate mounting pillars (B).
• Deflector and Phase Plate (E)—paying particular attention to the blue face
plate (D).
• Deflector and Phase Plate mounting pillars (F)—paying particular attention to
the sides facing the EHT plate.
• PCB—clean only the area circled in Figure 2.
7 Continue using the solvent and cleaning swabs until any remaining ink deposits
are removed and the components and PCB are clean.
8 Allow a minimum of 10 minutes for the printhead to dry completely before
starting the printer (this may take up to 20 minutes on a cold day). This is
important as the printer may fail on startup if the printhead is not completely dry.
FA69084–1
9 Wash the inside of the printhead cover tube with the correct Linx food grade
solvent , as shown in Figure 4, until all ink is removed. Use the cleaning swabs,
where possible, to remove ink deposits that do not immediately wash off.
Figure 4. Washing the Printhead Cover Tube with Solvent

10 Allow a minimum of 10 minutes for the printhead cover tube to dry completely
before refitting it (this may take up to 20 minutes on a cold day).
11 Refit the printhead cover tube and firmly tighten the knurled securing screw.
12 The ‘MidiEC Printhead Cleaning’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement
Parts Required
FA67074 Dynamic Flow Control
FA74275 DFC/Printhead Signal Wire Connector
Equipment Required
Introduction
The Dynamic Flow Control (DFC) option is a factory-fit module that is installed in the ink
system enclosure. The module replaces the function of the standard gutter restrictor in the
printhead gutter line.
This maintenance instruction describes only the replacement procedure for a DFC module
that has a fault. The DFC option cannot be retrofitted, because a Configuration Code is
required to enable the DFC software control, which is entered during manufacturing.
If the printhead is replaced on a printer that has the DFC module fitted (a 7300 Solver
printer), refer to the replacement procedure in the ‘Printhead Replacement (Printer with
DFC)’ maintenance instruction.
Procedure

AND SKIN.
electrical supply.
and solvent.
5 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the in-line A1 barb connector in the
gutter return line and the 3-way fluid connector to contain any ink that might be
spilt during the following process.
FA69084–1
6 Identify the pipe labelled “GUTTER” on the DFC module. Cut the pipe off the in-
line barb connection in the gutter return line from the printhead, as shown in
Figure 1. Cut the pipe as close as possible to the barb connection and use the Tube
Cutter to make sure that the pipe is cut cleanly and straight. The gutter line must
be cut on the printhead side of the in-line A1 barb connector, leaving the barb
connector in the end of the gutter line to the DFC module.
69626
Cut the pipe here
Printhead
conduit
In-line A1
barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
Cut the
pipe here GUTTER
Figure 1. DFC Module Removal

7 Identify the pipe labelled “P/HD CONNECTOR” on the DFC module. Cut the
pipe off the barb connector of the gutter return line on the 3-way fluid connector,
as shown in Figure 1.
8 Disconnect the in-line electrical connectors labelled ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ in Figure 2.
NOTE: Figures 2 and 3 show a 6900 printer, but the replacement procedure for the DFC
module is the same on the 7300 printer.
(Connector A carries the control signal for the DFC module. Connector B carries
the 24 volts supply to the fan. Connector C carries the 24 volts fan supply from the
LVPSU.)
69627
DFC module
cableform
B
Location
C of the coiled
positive air pipe
A
Figure 2. DFC Module Cableform and Connectors
FA69084–1
9 Uncoil the positive air pipe and remove the pipe from the grommet in the wall of
the ink system enclosure.
10 Remove the DFC module cableform and the grommet from the wall of the ink
system enclosure.
11 Remove the DFC module from the ink system enclosure.
12 Fit the replacement DFC module in its correct location in the ink system enclosure.
13 Route the DFC module cableform as shown in Figure 3 and feed the cableform
through the grommet hole in the wall of the ink system enclosure.
14 Insert the positive air pipe through the grommet, and then fit the DFC module
cableform and the grommet to the wall of the ink system enclosure.
Correct DFC
cableform routing DFC module
69628
Figure 3. DFC Module Cableform Routing

15 Coil the positive air pipe, fit a cable tie and reposition the pipe as shown in
Figure 2.
16 Reconnect the in-line electrical connectors labelled ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ in Figure 2.
17 Identify the pipe labelled “P/HD CONNECTOR” on the DFC module. Connect
the pipe to the barb connector for the gutter return line on the 3-way fluid
connector.
18 Identify the pipe labelled “GUTTER” on the DFC module (this pipe has an in-line
barb connector inserted in the end). Connect the pipe to the gutter return line
from the printhead.
19 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure and put the 3-way
fluid connector back in its original location.
FA69084–1
20 Switch on the printer and make sure that the fan operates.
21 Make sure that the green LED on the DFC module illuminates (that is, in the ‘Idle’
jet state).
22 Start the jet and make sure that the red LED on the DFC module is illuminated
during the jet start sequence (that is, in the ‘Jet Starting’ state).
23 When the jet has started (‘Jet Running’ state) and is running normally, make sure
that the green LED is illuminated. (The green LED illuminates provided that the
Set Pressure is between Reference Pressure and Solvent Add Pressure + 1 bit.)
28 The ‘Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC)
Parts Required
FA74275 DFC/Printhead Signal Wire Connector
Equipment Required
Introduction
The Dynamic Flow Control (DFC) option is a factory-fit module that is installed in the ink
system enclosure. The module replaces the function of the standard gutter restrictor in the
printhead gutter line.
If the printhead is replaced on a printer that has the DFC module fitted (a 7300 Solver
printer), the spare part DFC/Printhead Signal Wire Connector (FA74275) is required. This
spare part is an in-line connector with a single wire connected to it and a single pin
connector on the other end.
This maintenance instruction describes only the replacement procedure for a standard
printhead on a printer that has the DFC module fitted.
Procedure

AND SKIN.
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the
mains electrical supply.
and solvent.
FA69084–1
5 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the in-line A1 barb connector in the
gutter return line and the 3-way fluid connector to contain any ink that might be
spilt during the following process.
6 Remove the printhead using the normal procedure for non-DFC printers.
Important additional points are:
(a) Cut the pipes off the two barb connectors as shown in Figure 1.
(b) Cut the pipes as close as possible to the barb connectors and use the Tube Cutter to
make sure that the pipes are cut cleanly and straight.
(c) The gutter line must be cut on the printhead side of the in-line A1 barb connector,
leaving the barb connector in the end of the gutter line to the DFC module.
(d) Disconnect the DFC signal wire in-line connector from the DFC module cableform
(connector A in Figure 4).
NOTE: Figure 4 shows a 6900 printer, but the replacement procedure for the printhead
(printer with DFC) is the same on the 7300 printer.
69626
Cut the pipe here
Printhead
conduit
In-line A1
barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
Cut the
pipe here GUTTER
Figure 1. Printhead Removal

7 Fit the new printhead using the normal procedure for non-DFC printers. Connect
all electrical and fluid connections except the printhead connector PL6 on the IPM
PCB.
8 Remove the gutter restrictor from the gutter return line by cutting the pipe as
shown in Figure 2. Cut the pipe as close as possible to the 3-way fluid connector
barb and the gutter restrictor, and use the Tube Cutter to make sure that the pipes
are cut cleanly and straight. Discard the gutter restrictor.
FA69084–1
69629
Printhead
conduit Cut the pipe here
In-line A1
barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
GUTTER
Figure 2. Printhead Fitting

9 Identify the pipe labelled “GUTTER” on the DFC module (this pipe has an in-line
barb connector inserted in the end). Connect the pipe to the gutter return line
from the printhead.
10 Identify the pipe labelled “P/HD CONNECTOR” on the DFC module. Connect
the pipe to the barb connector for the gutter return line on the 3-way fluid
connector.
11 Insert the pin connector of the ‘DFC/Printhead Signal Wire Connector’ (blue wire)
into position 15 of the printhead connector PL6 (refer to Figure 3). (Position 15 is
above the orange wire.)
Connect blue DFC signal wire
to position 15 on PL6
(above orange wire)
69630
Figure 3. DFC Module Cableform—Location of Position 15 on PL6

12 Connect the printhead connector (PL6) to the IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
13 Connect the in-line connector that is on the other end of the ‘DFC/Printhead
Signal Wire Connector’ to the control signal connector of the DFC module
(connector A in Figure 4).
DFC module
cableform
69631
Figure 4. DFC Module Cableform—Control Signal Connector ‘A’

14 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure and put the 3-way
fluid connector back in its original location.
18 The ‘Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC)’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Pressure Transducer Calibration
Equipment Required
Introduction
Calibration of the Pressure Transducer is required only when the IPM PCB or Pressure
Transducer is replaced. The Pressure Transducer must not be calibrated when a new
printer is commissioned or during scheduled maintenance.
IMPORTANT: This maintenance instruction describes a static calibration procedure.
During manufacturing a dynamic calibration procedure is used, therefore,
there can be a difference in calibration settings between printers when new
printers are received. New printers must not be calibrated when
commissioned.
Procedures

WARNING IS IGNORED.
Position the cover so that the IPM PCB and the keyboard can both be accessed.
and solvent.
5 Switch on the mains electrical supply to the printer and switch on the printer.
6 Set the Digital Volt Meter (DVM) to DC Volts. Connect the DVM negative lead to a
convenient 0 V test point (for example, TP17 or TP18) and the positive lead to TP11
(READPRESS) on the IPM PCB.
7 Turn VR2 on the IPM PCB anticlockwise (using the Double-Ended Trim Tool) until
the DVM reading is greater than 1 volt.
8 Slowly turn VR2 clockwise until a reading of +20 millivolts is achieved, with a
tolerance of ±2 millivolts.
10 Disconnect the DVM.
11 The ‘Pressure Transducer Calibration’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Pressure Transducer Calibration
FA69084–1
CHAPTER 6: SYSTEM EVENTS
6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the system events that can occur on 7300 printers. System events
are divided into four categories:
1. System Failures
2. Print Failures
3. System Warnings
4. Information Events
System Failures, Print Failures, and System Warnings are defined as those that can occur at
any time and are not a direct response to operator commands.
Information events are not failures or warnings, but are events that are reported when
specific jet functions have occurred.
Each event message is given a unique code number, which identifies the type and source of
the event, and is followed by a short description, for example:
“3.18 Low Pressure”
When an event occurs, the System Event page is displayed, which provides information
about the event that includes the time and date that it occurred (the Timestamp). The page
shows a list of the last six reported events.
NOTE: The Event Log and System Event pages are mutually exclusive, which means
that if one page is displayed, the other page cannot be displayed. Therefore, if
the Event Log is being used when an event occurs, the System Event page is not
displayed. Refer to Chapter 4: ‘System Options’ for information about the Event
Log.
73065
3.18 Low Pressure.

09-07-31 11:07:46
3.18 Low Pressure 09-07-31 11:07:46
Figure 6-1. System Event Page

The internal alarm tone is activated when a system event occurs. If the OK key on the
System Event page is pressed, the event message is acknowledged and the page is closed.
If the same event occurs again after its time interval (refer to ‘Log At Intervals’ later in this
section), the event is reported again.
When the System Event page is closed, the message “Print Failures Exist” or “System
Warnings Exist” is displayed in the bottom line of the Printer Status area of the Print
Monitor. This message is a continuous prompt that there is a problem with the printer.
FA69084–1
6.2 System Event Identifications
6.2.1 System Failures
These failures prevent normal printer operation. The messages are prefixed with ‘1’, that
is, 1.XX.
6.2.2 Print Failures

These failures occur when the software detects a problem that affects printing. The
messages are prefixed with ‘2’, that is, 2.XX.
6.2.3 System Warnings

These are events that are not serious enough to shut down the printer, but give advanced
warning of potential problems. The messages are prefixed with ‘3’, that is, 3.XX.
6.2.4 Information Events

These are events that inform the operator that specific jet functions have occurred. The
messages are prefixed with ‘4’, that is, 4.XX, and the limited number of designated ones are
listed in the ‘Event Filtering’ description in Chapter 4: System Options > Menu Page >
Event Log.
FA69084–1
6.3 Summary of System Events
69281
1. System Failures 2. Print Failures 3. System Warnings
1.00 Internal Failure 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature 3.00 Shutdown Incomplete
1.01 Stack Overflow 2.01 EHT Trip 3.01 Shutdown Incomplete (Failure)
1.02 Corrupt Program Data 2.02 Phase Failure 3.02 Memory Corrupt
2.03 Time Of Flight Failure 3.03 Ink Low
2.04 300V Power Supply 3.04 Solvent Low
2.05 Ink Tank Empty 3.05 Over Speed (Print Trigger)
2.06 Solvent Tank Empty 3.06 Over Speed (Synchronous Data)
2.07 Internal Spillage 3.07 Over Speed (Asynchronous Data)
2.08 Printer Over Temperature 3.08 Over Speed (Line Speed)
2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet 3.09 Over Speed (Compensation)
2.10 Not used 3.10 Under Speed (Line Speed)
2.11 Pressure Limit Reached 3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled
2.12 Viscosity Maintenance
2.13 Hardware Safety Trip 3.12 Printhead Cover Off
2.14 Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped 3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted
3.14 Power Off Override Active
3.15 Safety Override Active
3.16 Gutter Override Active
3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active
3.18 Low Pressure
3.19 Valid UNIC Chip Not Found
3.20 No Time Of Flight
3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix
3.22 Fault Prevented Mix
3.23 Power Off Occurred During Mixing
3.24 Restart In Progress
3.25 Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks
3.26 User Data Corrupt–Please contact
your local Linx Service Centre
3.27 Mix Disabled
3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at
shutdown
3.29 Over Speed (No Remote Data)
3.30 Remote Error
3.31 Restarted Print Delay
Figure 6-2. System Events Summary Table
FA69084–1
6.4 System Failures
System Failures occur when the software detects a condition that prevents the software
from operating. System Failures are fatal; it is not possible to continue to operate the
printer after a System Failure has occurred. The only way to clear the failure is to switch
the printer off and then on again.
Most System Failures are reported while the software is performing the self test and
initialization routines, which are carried out after the printer is switched on, that is, while
the splash screen is displayed. When the Print Monitor is displayed, all the initialization
and self tests have been completed.
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE. BECAUSE SYSTEM FAILURES 1.00 AND 1.01 INDICATE A
FAILURE IN THE MICROPROCESSOR, THE SOFTWARE CANNOT BE DEPENDED ON TO
SET THE PRINTER TO A SAFE STATE. THE EHT AND THE 300 VOLTS DC CAN
CONTINUE TO BE GENERATED IN THE PRINTER.
EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTER WHILE
SYSTEM FAILURES 1.00 AND 1.01 EXIST AND THE TOP COVER IS REMOVED. THE
CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN.
THERE IS A DANGER OF INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK IF THE CORRECT
ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN.
System Failures that occur during normal operation indicate a serious problem that
prevents further printer operation. The software attempts to set the printer to a safe state
when the failure occurs, as follows:
• Set the pressure to zero.
• Switch off the EHT.
• Close all valves.
• Switch off the 300 V DC.
System Failures cause the printer to stop printing by simply closing the ink system and
printhead Feed valves; a normal jet shutdown is NOT performed. This leads to a
subsequent messy startup and can cause permanent damage to the printhead if it is left in
this condition.
When a System Failure occurs, the ‘print ready’ line is set low and a System Failure
message is displayed. The internal alarm tone is switched on continuously, but the external
alarm is not activated because the software cannot be certain of the ‘alarm enable’ state
following some System Failures.
FA69084–1
6.4.1 “1.00 Internal Failure”
Undefined software failure. This failure message indicates that the software has received a
corrupting signal and the software has been reset in an undefined manner. It would more
commonly be expected to occur when the printer is in operation, having successfully
completed the normal switch-on system checks.
Possible Causes:
• Printer top cover not correctly secured or printhead cover tube screw not in place.
• Dirty IPM PCB caused by a damaged or missing air inlet filter.
• Faulty IPM PCB.
• EMC interference or spike on mains power supply.
• Static discharge to the printhead from the operating environment.
• Poor electrical connections.
6.4.2 “1.01 Stack Overflow”

Software failure. The software stack has exceeded the maximum expected size. The stack is
an area of memory used by the microprocessor in which information is temporarily stored.
Possible Causes:
• Faulty or corrupt microprocessor.
• Faulty IPM peripheral that is issuing too many interrupts.
6.4.3 “1.02 Corrupt Program Data”

Program and/or Data stored in Flash memory is corrupt.
Possible Causes:
• Faulty or corrupt Flash memory—reload the software.
• Faulty IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
6.5 Print Failures
Print Failures occur when the software detects an electrical or mechanical failure that
prevents printing. When a Print Failure occurs, the ‘print ready’ line is set low, the System
Event page is displayed, and a jet shutdown sequence is started. The internal alarm tone is
switched on continuously and, depending on the settings of the Alarm Setup options
(Print Monitor > Line Setup > Alarm), the external alarm may be activated continuously.
In some cases, although some message editing facilities may still be available, the printer
must be switched off at the mains power switch and then back on before printing can be
continued. This is to reset the hardware. With these Print Failures the conditions cannot be
altered until the cause of the failure has been rectified, that is, the jet cannot be restarted.
However, most Print Failures start a normal shutdown sequence and the printer can be
restarted in the normal manner afterwards without the need to switch the mains power off
and then on.
Following a Print Failure shutdown, the software will have completed the following:
• Set the pressure to zero.
• Switched off the EHT.
• Closed all valves.
• Switched off the 300 V DC.
FA69084–1
6.5.1 “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature”
WARNING: HIGH TEMPERATURE. WHEN THIS FAULT IS REPORTED, THE PRINTHEAD

AND COVER TUBE CAN BE VERY HOT.
EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT SKIN BURNS AND TO DECREASE THE
RISK OF A FIRE. DO NOT TOUCH THE PRINTHEAD, OR TRY TO REMOVE THE
PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE UNTIL THE PARTS BECOME SAFELY COOL NATURALLY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE BURNS TO THE HANDS IF THE PRINTHEAD COVER
TUBE IS REMOVED BEFORE IT HAS BECOME SAFELY COOL. THERE IS ALSO AN
INCREASED RISK OF FIRE CAUSED BY THE SUDDEN INCREASE OF AIR AROUND THE
OPEN PRINTHEAD.
An excessive high temperature has been detected at the printhead indicating a high
ambient temperature or a possible fire condition. The trip temperature is approximately
60 °C.
Possible Causes:
• Printhead too close to source of high temperature.
• Short circuit printhead thermistor.
• Short circuit connection on printhead connector.
• Faulty IPM PCB.
NOTE: Hot substrates should be printed on from the side to avoid heat convection to the
printhead.
6.5.2 “2.01 EHT Trip”

The EHT trip sense software has detected that an EHT trip has occurred, that is, the EHT
output has been switched off.
Possible Causes:
• Excessive build-up of ink on the EHT deflector plate, or the ink is shorting the plate to
another item in the printhead, for example, the gutter.
• Static discharge.
• High humidity.
• Vibration.
• Jet instability caused by contaminated ink or debris in the nozzle.
• Printhead too close to the substrate.
• High or low ink viscosity causing satellite drops, which have built up on the deflector
plates.
• No modulation.
FA69084–1
6.5.3 “2.02 Phase Failure”
The printer failed to obtain a valid phase position. This failure is normally associated with
invalid data from the hardware and can be caused if the printhead becomes very dirty with
ink, particularly around the DPP.
When the jet is running, the phase position must be adjusted to ensure the correct charge is
applied to the drops to give a good print.
A phase failure occurs if the microprocessor has not received a phase feedback signal to
indicate the true phase position. A maximum number of attempts are made to find the
phase position, after which the printer fails and performs the jet shutdown sequence.
Possible Causes:
• No jet:
❐ Nozzle blocked.
❐ No ink feed to the printhead.
• Poor jet break-up:
❐ Ink viscosity too high or too low.
❐ Reference modulation set very low.
❐ Modulation too high or too low.
❐ No modulation signal.
• Jet misalignment:
❐ Partly blocked nozzle.
❐ Debris in the nozzle.
❐ Contaminated ink.
❐ Mechanical misalignment.
❐ An obstruction such as a fine hair impeding the jet, for example, through the
charge electrode.
• No charge to the charge electrode caused by bad connections, faulty charge amplifier
or incorrect charge DAC calibration.
• No signal from the phase/TOF connections.
• Faulty phase amplifier on IPM PCB.
• Faulty gate array circuitry on the IPM PCB.
• Conductivity problems due to contaminated ink.
• Very heavy ink build-up in the printhead.
• EHT tracking on the printhead due to very damp/humid environments.
NOTE: This failure detection is disabled whenever the Jet Test – Start option is used.
FA69084–1
6.5.4 “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure”
This failure occurs if, after the jet has been started, there are no valid TOF readings for a
period of 40 minutes.
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder or production line stops mid-print (only applicable to IPM PCBs
that have an earlier than Issue 4 Gate Array).
• Incorrect or no signal from the TOF sensor caused by a partially blocked nozzle or jet
misalignment.
• Poor drop break-up caused by incorrect modulation/ink viscosity.
• The ink viscosity is so far out of range that correctly measured TOF values are rejected
as being spurious readings.
• Heavy build-up of dry ink on the deflector plates.
• Noise (EMC) interference.
• The inter-print distance is too small to allow TOF measurement.
6.5.5 “2.04 300V Power Supply”

The 300 volts sense signal has detected that the 300 V output from the EHTPSU is not
present.
Possible Causes:
• The EHTPSU 300 V output has failed.
• Faulty 5 volts reference, which is compared with a proportion of the 300 volts line to
determine the presence of the 300 volts.
• Printhead modulation/charge short circuit.
• Faulty 300 volts control circuit on IPM PCB.
• Faulty 300 volts sense comparator (IC35A).
6.5.6 “2.05 Ink Tank Empty”

This failure occurs when the ink level sensor has been indicating low (“3.03 Ink Low”
warning) for a predetermined time of 6 hours for Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads,
and 8 hours for Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads.
The time limit prevents the ink from running out completely, and damaging the pump, if
the operator fails to refill the ink reservoir following a System Warning “3.03 Ink Low”
message. This failure only occurs when the jet is running, as the jet cannot normally be
started when the ink is low.
6.5.7 “2.06 Solvent Tank Empty”

This failure occurs when the solvent level sensor has been indicating low (“3.04 Solvent
Low” warning) for a predetermined time of 12 hours for all printheads.
The time limit prevents the solvent from running out completely if the operator fails to
refill the solvent reservoir following a System Warning “3.04 Solvent Low” message. This
failure only occurs when the jet is running, as the jet cannot normally be started when the
solvent is low.
FA69084–1
6.5.8 “2.07 Internal Spillage”
The base of the ink system enclosure is sealed in order to contain any ink or solvent
spillage, preventing external leakage. In the event of a pressurized ink leak from an ink
system pipe, manifold assembly or pump head, a spillage sensor stops the pump within 5
seconds of detection (that is, there is no jet shutdown). The sensor is fitted through (but
insulated from) the lower front wall of the ink system enclosure. When a spillage reaches a
minimum of 50 ml, a short circuit occurs between the sensor and the ink system enclosure
through the conductive ink. This short circuit is detected by the microprocessor on the IPM
PCB and the System Failure “2.07 Internal Spillage” is reported.
Possible Causes:
• Ink or solvent reservoir overflow.
• Incorrect ink replenishment procedure.
• Leak within the ink system.
• Faulty spillage detection circuit.
6.5.9 “2.08 Printer Over Temperature”

The printer cabinet maximum internal temperature has been reached. The threshold of the
cooling failure detection circuit is 58 °C.
Possible Causes:
• Blocked air filter.
• Fan failure, caused by:
❐ Bad electrical connections to the fan.
❐ Fan blade obstruction.
❐ Fan control circuit failure.
• Fire within the printer cabinet.
6.5.10 “2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet”

Under normal operating conditions, the gutter sense circuit detects the presence of ink flow
in the gutter. If ink flow is not detected in the gutter for any reason (for example, a
misaligned jet), the software shuts down the jet. Absence of ink in the gutter is detected
within approximately 10 seconds.
Possible Causes:
• Partly blocked nozzle.
• Debris in the nozzle.
• Blocked gutter.
• Contaminated ink.
• Mechanical misalignment.
• An obstruction, such as a fine hair, impeding the jet through the charge electrode.
FA69084–1
6.5.11 “2.11 Pressure Limit Reached”
The software is unable to increase the pressure sufficiently to achieve a TOF measurement
equal to the Reference TOF. This can occur during the jet start process.
Possible Causes:
• Blocked ink pick-up tube in-line filter or main ink filter.
• Leaking purge or gutter valve.
• Very high ink viscosity.
• No modulation.
• No charge.
• Worn pump.
• Faulty pressure transducer.
• Incorrect calibration code entered.
• Incorrect printhead type selected.
• Excessive noise on the phase/TOF signal.
6.5.12 “2.12 Viscosity”

The software is unable to establish Reference TOF at or below the Solvent Add Pressure.
The printer has added solvent eight times (for MEK inks, 12 times for Mixed Base inks)
without being able to bring the pressure below the Solvent Add Pressure.
When the jet is running, the normal TOF adjustment routine may add solvent if the Solvent
Add conditions are met (refer to Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Ink and
Solvent Flows > Solvent Addition—All 7300 Printers). A Solvent Add allows a fixed
amount of solvent to be added to the ink reservoir. Typically, it takes approximately 20
minutes for the full effect of the solvent addition to be seen at the nozzle.
After a solvent addition, the pressure is adjusted to control the TOF. However, if after 20
minutes the pressure is still greater than the Solvent Add Pressure, a further solvent
addition is allowed. This is repeated until the pressure is below the Solvent Add Pressure.
A maximum limit of eight successive solvent additions (for MEK inks, 12 for Mixed Base
inks) is allowed in any one TOF correction loop. If this limit is exceeded, this failure is
reported and the jet is shut down.
Possible Causes:
• Blocked ink pick-up tube in-line filter or main ink filter.
• Leaking purge or gutter valve.
• Incorrect calibration code entered.
• Solvent pick-up tube in-line filter blocked.
• There is a loss of pressure in the ink system and the pressure has been set artificially
high in order to reach the TOF reference. Consequently, the maximum number of
solvent additions may have been exceeded, which results in this failure being
reported.
• Ink has been added to the solvent tank by mistake.
FA69084–1
6.5.13 “2.13 Hardware Safety Trip”
The hardware safety trip has activated locking out certain hardware functions. This may be
initially reported as Print Failures “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” or “2.01 EHT Trip”.
Possible Causes:
• See Print Failures “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” or “2.01 EHT Trip”.
6.5.14 “2.14 Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped”

Currently not used.
FA69084–1
6.6 System Warnings
System Warnings inform the operator of problems that may affect the operation of the
printer, but are not serious enough to require a shutdown. When a System Warning event
occurs, the System Event page containing the warning message is displayed. The internal
alarm tone is switched on and off twice and, depending on the settings of the Alarm
options (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Alarm > Alarm Setup), the external alarm may be
activated twice.
6.6.1 “3.00 Shutdown Incomplete”

The printer was powered down before the shutdown sequence was completed.
This warning is reported at power-up. It indicates that the printer was previously switched
off while the jet was still running, or before the printer had completed the shutdown
sequence. Printer start problems may be experienced if the shutdown sequence was
incomplete; these could be a blocked nozzle, a dirty start or a misaligned jet.
The warning is reported on every subsequent printer power-up until a jet shutdown
sequence is fully completed.
6.6.2 “3.01 Shutdown Incomplete (Failure)”

The printer did not perform a complete shutdown following a System Failure or Print
Failure.
If a System Failure or Print Failure occurs while the jet is running, the jet is simply stopped.
Printer start problems may be experienced if the shutdown sequence was incomplete; these
could be a blocked nozzle, a dirty start or a misaligned jet.
The warning is reported on every subsequent printer power-up until a jet shutdown
sequence is fully completed.
6.6.3 “3.02 Memory Corrupt”

When the printer is switched on, each individual item stored in the back-up NVR is checked.
If one or more items are corrupt, the default values for those items are loaded and this event
is reported. The system still functions, but some values may have been reset to the defaults.
Possible Causes:
• The battery back-up has partially failed (flat battery).
• Link LK4 is not fitted on the IPM PCB.
• Electrical spikes.
• Faulty memory ICs.
6.6.4 “3.03 Ink Low”

If the ink level sensor indicates that the volume of ink in the tank is low, this warning is
reported. Unlike other event messages that are displayed on the System Event page, the
Ink Low warning is displayed on the SureFill page. This page includes a request to enter
the SureFill code, which is on the ink bottle label, before the new ink is added.
The warning is cleared automatically when a sufficient quantity of ink is added to the tank.
If this event is detected before the jet is started, the jet cannot be started until the event has
been cleared (that is, the ink tank is refilled). If the event is detected while the jet is
running, the jet continues to run for 6 hours (Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads) or 8
hours (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads) until the ink level is critically low, at
which point the printer fails (see Print Failure “2.05 Ink Tank Empty”).
IMPORTANT: The ink tank should be refilled only when this warning is reported (one
bottle of ink only).
FA69084–1
6.6.5 “3.04 Solvent Low”
If the solvent level sensor indicates that the volume of solvent in the tank is low, this
warning is reported. Unlike other event messages that are displayed on the System Event
page, the Solvent Low warning is displayed on the SureFill page. This page includes a
request to enter the SureFill code, which is on the solvent bottle label, before the new
solvent is added.
The warning is cleared automatically when a sufficient quantity of solvent is added to the
tank.
If this event is detected before the jet is started, the jet cannot be started until the event has
been cleared (that is, the solvent tank is refilled). If the event is detected while the jet is
running, the jet continues to run for 12 hours (all printheads) until the solvent level is
critically low, at which point the printer fails (see Print Failure “2.06 Solvent Tank Empty”).
IMPORTANT: The solvent tank should be refilled only when this warning is reported
(one bottle of solvent only).
6.6.6 “3.05 Over Speed (Print Trigger)”

Print triggers are occurring more quickly than the printer can print. This indicates that the
printer has received a second or false print trigger, and the delay has expired, when it is
currently printing a message.
When the Print Trigger option (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Trigger > Print Trigger) is set
to Edge Triggers or Level Triggers, each print delay is started following the trigger signal.
At the end of the delay a ‘print go’ is issued to start printing, and if the printer has not
printed the last message by this time, the warning is reported and the new message is not
printed. In effect, this means that alternate objects may not be printed upon.
Possible Causes:
• The trigger device is providing false triggers due to electrical noise, or an inadequate
trigger device is being used for the application.
• There is electrical ‘bounce’ on the trigger device input. Try moving the debounce link
LK36 to the SLOW position.
• The distance from the trigger device to the printhead is greater than the distance from
one product to the next.
6.6.7 “3.06 Over Speed (Synchronous Data)”

A ‘print go’ occurred before the message data could be generated and printing may or may
not take place. When this warning is reported, one message may be missed but the printer
continues to print.
This warning indicates that the printer may have missed printing at least one message
because it was unable to generate the message’s variable data (for example, sequential
numbers) before the next ‘print go’. That is, the printer was still generating the pixel data
for the next message.
NOTE: This warning indicates that the printer cannot generate pixels fast enough,
whereas System Warning “3.05 Over Speed (Print Trigger)” indicates that the
printer cannot print the rasters fast enough. This event is only likely to occur
with fast rasters, where pixel generation by the software is slower than the rate
at which the hardware can print rasters.
Possible Causes:
• The amount of variable data in the message is too high for the current rate of print
triggers.
• False trigger device triggers.
FA69084–1
6.6.8 “3.07 Over Speed (Asynchronous Data)”
A ‘print go’ occurred before the message data could be generated in response to an
asynchronous event. The unmodified message may be printed without the asynchronous
data.
While printing is taking place an asynchronous command may be received, which attempts
to change the printed message, for example, invert or reverse the message. The software
may assume that the data has not arrived and ignore the command, depending on the
software setting, in which case the printer continues to print the unchanged previous
message.
Possible Causes:
• The printer has received a command to change the message during the delay time.
• ‘Time change’ related data (a sequential message with a time trigger) has changed
after the delay time has started.
6.6.9 “3.08 Over Speed (Line Speed)”

The production line is travelling too fast for the printer to generate the raster, typically
because the shaft encoder is giving more pulses than the gear ratio has been calculated for.
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder gear ratio is too big.
• The shaft encoder gear wheel is too small.
• The production line speed is greater than the maximum speed for the message type
(raster).
6.6.10 “3.09 Over Speed (Compensation)”

This warning message is similar to “3.08 Over Speed (Line Speed)”. The production line is
travelling too fast, or the print delay is too short to perform line speed compensation.
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder gear ratio is too big.
• The shaft encoder gear wheel is too small.
• The production line speed is greater than the maximum speed for the message type
(raster).
6.6.11 “3.10 Under Speed (Line Speed)”

The pitch value is too big, which results in the shaft encoder counter exceeding its
maximum value.
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder gear ratio is too small.
• The shaft encoder gear wheel is too big.
• The production line is travelling too slowly or has stopped.
FA69084–1
6.6.12 “3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance”
The time remaining to the next scheduled maintenance is monitored. If it is zero or a
negative value, this warning is reported and the jet can be started as normal. The time
remaining decrements only when the jet is running.
When the Maintenance Due Within or Maintenance Due By time (Print Monitor > Menu
> Maintenance > Maintenance Times > Maintenance Due Within/Maintenance Due By)
reaches zero, this warning message is displayed every time the printer is switched on. It
continues to be displayed until the scheduled maintenance has been carried out and the
intervals to the next maintenance have been reset by the maintenance technician. This is
achieved by selecting Maintenance Finished on the Maintenance Times page, which
automatically resets the maintenance intervals according to the ink type being used in the
printer.
See also: Chapter 5: Maintenance > Maintenance Menu > Maintenance Times.
6.6.13 “3.12 Printhead Cover Off”
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. WHEN THE ‘COVER OVERRIDE’ LINK LK21 IS
FITTED AND THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS REMOVED, 300 VOLTS DC CONTINUES
TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE CHARGE ELECTRODE. THE EHT ALSO CONTINUES TO BE
SUPPLIED TO THE DEFLECTOR PLATES.
THE CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN
WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTHEAD WITH LINK LK21 FITTED AND WITH THE
COVER TUBE REMOVED. DO NOT FIT LINK LK21 PERMANENTLY AND DO NOT LEAVE
THE PRINTER UNATTENDED WHILE THE LINK IS FITTED.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
This warning is reported if the printhead cover tube is removed. The +8 kV EHT supply to
the positive deflector plate is automatically switched off and printing is suspended when
the cover tube is removed. Printing is resumed a few seconds after the cover tube is
refitted. The red strobe LED is also switched on when the cover tube is removed.
See also: System Warning “3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted” below.
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Printhead Components > Printhead Cover
Sensor.
6.6.14 “3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted”
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. WHEN THE ‘COVER OVERRIDE’ LINK LK21 IS
FITTED AND THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS REMOVED, 300 VOLTS DC CONTINUES
TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE CHARGE ELECTRODE. THE EHT ALSO CONTINUES TO BE
SUPPLIED TO THE DEFLECTOR PLATES.
WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTHEAD WITH LINK LK21 FITTED AND WITH THE
COVER TUBE REMOVED. DO NOT FIT LINK LK21 PERMANENTLY AND DO NOT LEAVE
THE PRINTER UNATTENDED WHILE THE LINK IS FITTED.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
This warning is reported if link LK21 (Cover Override) is fitted on the IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
When this software-readable link is fitted, the EHT and charge voltage remain on while the
printhead cover tube is removed (that is, they are not automatically disabled). This allows
printing to continue for fault diagnosis purposes. The red strobe LED also remains lit. After
removing the printhead cover tube and then fitting the link (or refitting the printhead cover
tube), a few seconds elapse before printing recommences.
See also: System Warning “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” above.
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM PCB > Test
Points and Links > LK21 (Cover Off Override).
Chapter 4: System Options > Setup > Installation > Printhead > Cover Override.
6.6.15 “3.14 Power Off Override Active”

This warning is reported if link LK20 (Power Off Override) is fitted on the IPM PCB.
When this link is fitted, the auto power down mains on/off switch cannot be switched off
by the software.
6.6.16 “3.15 Safety Override Active”
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. IF LINK LK19 IS FITTED WHILE THE

‘PRINTHEAD OVER TEMPERATURE’ OR ‘EHT TRIP’ FAULT CONDITIONS OCCUR, 300
VOLTS DC CONTINUES TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE PRINTHEAD.
WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTHEAD WITH LINK LK19 FITTED. DO NOT FIT LINK
LK19 PERMANENTLY AND DO NOT LEAVE THE PRINTER UNATTENDED WHILE THE
LINK IS FITTED.
WARNING IS IGNORED.
This warning is reported if link LK19 (Safety Override) is fitted on the IPM PCB.
When this link is fitted, the printhead Over Temperature sense and the EHT Trip sense
signals do not disable the 300 V, ink system pump, feed valves, and EHT. However, the
EHT Trip sense will disable the EHT internally on the EHTPSU regardless of LK19 being
fitted. The link may be fitted with caution to aid fault diagnosis.
6.6.17 “3.16 Gutter Override Active”

This warning is reported if link LK27 (Gutter Sense Override) is fitted on the IPM PCB.
The purpose of the gutter sense function is to detect the presence of ink flow in the gutter
during a normal jet start sequence and under normal jet running conditions.
During a normal jet start sequence, the gutter detection is regularly switched on and off
while the printer is attempting to establish a jet. When the jet is established, the gutter
detection remains on throughout the jet running state.
If ink flow is not detected in the gutter for any reason (for example, a misaligned jet), the
software shuts down the jet. Absence of ink from the gutter is detected within
approximately 10 seconds. With link LK27 fitted, the software starts and maintains the jet
regardless of the gutter detection status.
When the Jet Test – Start function is used, the gutter detection remains off while the jet start
sequence is in progress. Because there is no attempt to establish the jet properly during a
Jet Test – Start sequence, there is no need to switch the gutter detection on and off
regularly. When the jet start sequence is completed, the jet parameters are set to their
defaults and the gutter detection is switched on, and remains on throughout the jet running
state.
FA69084–1
6.6.18 “3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active”
This warning is reported if link LK26 (Built In Self-Test) is fitted on the IPM PCB.
When this link is fitted, it places the gate array (IC58) in test mode, which generates a
staircase waveform with historic correction.
6.6.19 “3.18 Low Pressure”

Each time the jet is started a pressure and filter check is carried out—the pressure is set to
4.14 bar (59.90 p.s.i.) and the pressure ADC is used to check that this pressure is actually
reached. If the difference between the pressure DAC setting (Set Pressure) and the pressure
ADC reading (Actual Pressure) is greater than a predetermined value—currently 0.09 bar
(1.27 p.s.i.)—this warning is reported. The jet continues to run.
The primary function of this test is to detect ink system faults or pressure loss. The test
pressure is well above normal running pressures, so it is possible that printing may still
take place with a partially blocked filter, hence the jet is not shut down.
When this warning is reported no solvent addition is permitted; pressure only is used to
control the TOF. This may result in the ink viscosity increasing and the pressure being
increased to the maximum running pressure. The effect would be poor print quality.
Possible Causes:
• The main ink filter or the ink pick-up tube in-line filter are blocked (most probable).
• Some other loss of pressure in the ink system.
• Faulty pump.
• Faulty pump drive circuit.
6.6.20 “3.19 Valid UNIC Chip Not Found”

The UNIC on the IPM PCB is missing, of an unrecognizable type, or is not functioning
correctly.
6.6.21 “3.20 No Time Of Flight”

This event message indicates that the printer has been unable to obtain a valid TOF over a
predetermined period of time.
It is only likely to be reported after the jet has been started using the Jet Test – Start
function. It is most likely to occur when a shaft encoder is used, and the encoder or
production line stops in mid-print. It occurs 5 minutes after jet start, during which time
there has been no TOF readings recorded. If this condition continues for a further 35
minutes a “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure” occurs and the printer shuts down. This occurs
regardless of which jet state the printer is in, that is, ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’.
Possible Causes:
• The software is not receiving TOF signals.
• Incorrect or no signal from the TOF sensor caused by a partially blocked nozzle or jet
misalignment.
• Poor jet break-up caused by incorrect modulation/ink viscosity.
• The ink viscosity is so far out of range that correctly measured TOF values are rejected
as being spurious readings.
• Heavy build-up of dry ink on the deflector plates.
FA69084–1
6.6.22 “3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix”
7300 Spectrum only. A mix will not take place while the ink is low.
6.6.23 “3.22 Fault Prevented Mix”

7300 Spectrum only. A mix will not take place while there is an active fault.
6.6.24 “3.23 Power Off Occurred During Mixing”

7300 Spectrum only. The printer was powered down before the mix sequence was
completed.
This warning is reported at power-up. It indicates that the printer was previously switched
off while the mix sequence was still running.
6.6.25 “3.24 Restart In Progress”

During a normal startup only, the printer is attempting to restart the jet after failing to start
it the first time. A further two restarts are attempted after which, if unsuccessful, the
printer fails.
Possible Cause:
• The jet was misaligned during startup and the restart sequence is attempting to clear a
suspected blockage.
6.6.26 “3.25 Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks”

7300 Spectrum only. The ink has remained unmixed for at least 4 weeks.
6.6.27 “3.26 User Data Corrupt–Please contact your local Linx

Service Centre”
Internal software error. On startup, checks are made for invalid data, and if found this
event is reported.
6.6.28 “3.27 Mix Disabled”

7300 Spectrum only. The mix sequence has been disabled by selecting the Disable Mix
function on the Ink/Solvent page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation > Ink/
Solvent).
6.6.29 “3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown”

The wording of this warning message used to be “3.28 Phase Amplifier Saturated” but was
changed to “3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown”. A phase fault is normally
generated when the printhead components are contaminated by ink build-up, therefore,
this new wording is more relevant and understandable to the user.
If this warning is displayed, the printhead must be cleaned after the next shutdown as
described in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
The technical description of what actually causes this warning to be reported remains the
same as the former “3.28 Phase Amplifier Saturated” and has been retained as follows.
The software is unable to reduce the phase packet size sufficiently to prevent phase
amplifier saturation.
During the phasing process, a series of 8 drops (default number) are charged and form a
phase packet, which is then detected by the phase sensor. The software selects the ideal
phase position where the detected signal is maximum. If the signal is greater than a
predetermined software level, and therefore unreadable, the next phase packet is reduced
by 1 drop, to 7 drops, and the detection process is repeated.
FA69084–1
The phase packets are reduced by 1 drop each time the signal is too large, down to a
minimum of 2 drops. If the signal is still too large when the phase packet contains only 2
drops, this System Warning is reported.
Possible Causes:
• Poor drop break-up caused by incorrect modulation/ink viscosity.
• Misaligned jet.
• Build-up of wet ink between the EHT deflector plate and earth.
• Conductivity problems due to contaminated ink.
• Faulty phase amplifier on the IPM PCB.
• Bad earthing.
• Incorrect printhead type entered on the Printhead Type page (Print Monitor > Menu
> Setup > Installation > Printhead > Printhead Type).
• EHT leakage due to contamination of the printhead.
• EHT leakage due to moisture on and around the EHT deflector plate caused by
condensation or a high humidity environment.
6.6.30 “3.29 Over Speed (No Remote Data)”

This warning occurs in Single print mode. The printer has tried to print a message that
contains one or more remote fields, and no data has been received over the
Communications interface to fill these remote fields.
Possible Causes:
• Print rate is too fast.
• Data was sent too late.
• The baud rate is too low.
6.6.31 “3.30 Remote Error”

This warning advises the operator that the printer has received the ‘Set Remote Error’
command (121) through the remote communications interface. If this event occurs, contact
your local Linx Service Centre.
6.6.32 “3.31 Restarted Print Delay”

This warning can occur when production schedules are used, which can be standard,
remote interface fast message selection, or PIO production schedules.
A new message in the schedule has been selected after the next product was detected and
the delay has been started. The only action the printer can take is to restart the delay, but it
is probable that the print will be too late to hit the product. This warning is an indication
that this condition has occurred.
FA69084–1
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 Introduction
The Troubleshooting Flow Charts in this chapter are designed to cover the large amount of
knowledge that exists about printer failures, and to present this knowledge in a clear and
easy to follow way. Flow charts do not replace the need for a Linx-trained maintenance
technician, as there is always the occasion when there is no flow chart for a particular
problem. The flow charts must only be used by a Linx-trained maintenance technician, who
has been given the opportunity to practice with them during training.
7.2 How to Use the Flow Charts

Follow the flow charts by reading the instructions in the first box and completing the action
as required before moving to the next appropriate box. At various stages throughout a flow
chart a decision needs to be made. The result of the decision decides the next path. An
example is shown in Figure 7-1, which shows the simplicity of the system.
Make a Cup of Tea 68145
Is there water in the YES Is the water boiled?

kettle?
NO NO
Fill the kettle with water. Switch on the kettle.
Wait for the water to boil.
YES
Make the tea.
End
Figure 7-1. Simple Flow Chart Example

It can be seen that if the steps are not followed correctly, it would be impossible to make a
cup of tea. Therefore, it is essential to read and follow carefully the instructions in each box.
An explanation of how a flow chart is designed, what the different shaped boxes mean,
and how to use a flow chart are shown in Figure 7-2.
FA69084–1
FCXXX Each flow chart is identified
with a code number, which
can be referenced in the
Start 68491
Index.
A terminator box is the start

point for each flow chart. It
contains the flow chart title
or the relevant event
message code number.
Always note and follow the

direction of the arrows.
Rectangular boxes contain

specific instructions.
These must be completed
before moving to the
next box. A decision box requires you to
answer a question (usually the
answer is Yes or No) and follow
the appropriate path.
Good record keeping is essential
The rectangle with side bars directs you
here as a wrong answer can be to another procedure. This procedure is
retraced and amended. typically in either the Maintenance Manual
or another flow chart.
When the breakout procedure has been
completed, return to this point to continue
unless otherwise directed.
Procedure location
Decision YES and title
NO
This symbol instructs you to
perform an action a number
of times. When this has
been completed, continue
with the flow chart as
... until directed.
Sometimes a number
of instructions are
to be repeated.
Test ...
This terminator box directs you

to the final flow chart FC999. This terminator box
It assumes that the fault has indicates that you must
been found and rectified. If return to the last flow chart
other faults exist, you must you were working through
restart from flow chart FC001. before this one.
This repeats until all faults have
been rectified.
Final Test Return
Figure 7-2. How to Use a Flow Chart
FA69084–1
7.3 First Steps
The first flow chart in the series is ‘Troubleshooting Start’, for which the reference is FC001.
This flow chart must always be followed first no matter what the fault is. It ensures that
all the parameters are set for the troubleshooting session.
7.4 Fault Recording

All details of the printer and the fault should be recorded on a Flow Chart Record Sheet, an
example of which is given in Figure 7-3. This sheet provides the ability to understand the
troubleshooting process, so that when the fault has been identified and rectified it is
possible to evaluate how to avoid the fault reoccurring.
7.5 When Flow Charts Seem Inappropriate

Sometimes the flow charts seem inappropriate and they appear not to help in diagnosing
the fault. If this is suspected, the flow charts already followed must be repeated to establish
if a wrong decision has been made or a reading has been taken incorrectly. Also, it must
always be taken into consideration that if a component has been replaced, it may itself be
faulty. If there is doubt about the condition of the replaced component, test it in a printer
that is known to be working correctly.
7.6 Miscellaneous Faults

There are occasions when the flow charts are not appropriate for the particular fault. If this
is the case, it is necessary to resort to the standard fault diagnosis techniques, which are
taught during the Linx training course. In addition, the following miscellaneous fault
symptoms are provided, with recommended remedies.
68659
Symptom Fault Remedy

Spectrum printer—no print Pump seized Replace the pump
Spectrum printer—printing, but Ink tank 1. Run the ink mixing sequence. If
low ink opacity ‘plugged’ symptom is still apparent, try:
2. Empty the ink tank and flush the
system.
FA69084–1
69056
6900 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Record Sheet

Printer 6900 Printhead
Serial Number Serial Number
Line Setup >Trigger: Line Setup > Speed:
Print Trigger Speed Selection
Trigger/Printhead Distance Line speed
Inter-Print Distance Pulses per mm
Dual Trigger details
Installation > Ink/Solvent: Installation > Ink/Solvent:
Ink Type Solvent Type
Installation > P/Head: Installation > ID:
Printhead Type UNIC Code
Conduit Length Printer Config Code
Printhead Height Printer Name
Printhead Code
Fault observations:
Flow Chart FC001 Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Flow Chart Result
Conclusion Components replaced
Final test of system Precautionary measures
Figure 7-3. Flow Chart Record Sheet
FA69084–1
7.7 List of Flow Charts
69397
List of Troubleshooting Flow Charts

Flow chart Title Purpose
FC001 Troubleshooting Start Always start here
FC002 Jet To examine the jet
FC003 Modulation To examine modulation
FC004 Charge To examine drop charging
FC005 Phase To examine phase synchronization
FC006 Low Pressure To test primary ink circuit. Can be used
when event "3.18 Low Pressure" occurs
FC007 Ink Quality To test ink quality
FC008 Low Viscosity Ink To find the cause of the ink viscosity being
too low for the printer to operate
FC009 High Viscosity Ink To find the cause of the ink viscosity being
too high for the printer to operate
FC010 EHT Deflection To test the EHT system
FC011 Print To find the cause of print problems
FC012 Print Quality To find the cause of print quality problems
FC200 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature For when the displayed event occurs
FC201 2.01 EHT Trip For when the displayed event occurs
FC202 2.02 Phase Failure For when the displayed event occurs
FC203 2.03 Time of Flight Failure For when the displayed event occurs
FC204 2.04 300V Power Supply For when the displayed event occurs
FC205 2.05 Ink Tank Empty For when the displayed event occurs
FC206 2.06 Solvent Tank Empty For when the displayed event occurs
FC207 2.07 Internal Spillage For when the displayed event occurs
FC208 2.08 Printer Over Temperature For when the displayed event occurs
FC209 2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet For when the displayed event occurs
FC211 2.11 Pressure Limit Reached For when the displayed event occurs
FC212 2.12 Viscosity For when the displayed event occurs
FC213 2.13 Hardware Safety Trip For when the displayed event occurs
FC999 Final Test When the problem has been solved
Figure 7-4. List of Troubleshooting Flow Charts
FA69084–1
FC001
Troubleshooting 69057
Start
Shutdown and switch off

Has the printer failed? YES the printer, and then
switch it on again.
NO
Read the explanation of

Note any printer failure or the event message in the
warning messages from Maintenance Manual.
the Event Log and enter
these on the Flow Chart
Record Sheet.
Check all the installation

data on the Installation
menu and enter the
required data on the Flow
Chart Record Sheet.
Create a test message

using the maximum size
message type.
Clean the printhead and

cover tube, if
necessary.
Set: Line Setup menu >

Trigger menu > Leading
Edge Primary.
Speed menu > Speed
Selection > Fixed Speed.
Select: Maintenance menu

> Jet Functions menu > Jet
Test – Start.
Go to the appropriate
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Figure 7-5. FC001 Troubleshooting Start
FA69084–1
FC002
Jet 69058
Does
Set Pressure = Flow Chart
Actual Pressure NO FC006
(±0.25 bar / 3.57 p.s.i. 'Low Pressure'
/ 14 bits)?
YES
Maintenance Manual
Is the jet going
Chapter 5
straight into NO
the gutter? 'Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning'
YES
Return Final Test
Figure 7-6. FC002 Jet
FA69084–1
FC003
Modulation 69059
View the jet break-up in the

charge electrode and
assess which image the jet
break-up most looks like.
YES Return
NO
NO NO
Note the presence

of satellites
YES YES YES
Test Modulation signal

Increase modulation and Decrease pressure and output from IPM PCB
observe jet break-up. observe jet break-up. (TP32) with DVM set to AC
volts range.
Is an Is an
improvement improvement Is the signal present?
observed? observed?
YES
NO
NO YES NO
NO
Maintenance Manual
Replace the printhead. Chapter 5 Replace the IPM PCB.
'Modulation Range'
YES
Final Test
Figure 7-7. FC003 Modulation
FA69084–1
FC004
Charge 69060
From the Maintenance

menu > Jet Functions
menu, put the printer into
the "Ready to Print" state
by selecting the Start Print
option.
Place a piece of paper at
the printhead outlet and
select the Test Print option.
Check continuity of
Is a message printed? NO charge coaxial cable.
YES Is charge cable

continuity
NO
good?
YES
Maintenance Manual Maintenance Manual

Chapter 5 Chapter 5
'IPM PCB Calibration' 'IPM PCB Calibration' Replace the printhead.
(Charge Amplifier (Charge Amplifier
Calibration only) Calibration only)
Can you perform

the Charge Amplifier
Calibration?
YES
NO
Replace the IPM PCB.
Return Final Test
Figure 7-8. FC004 Charge
FA69084–1
FC005
Phase 69061
Flow Chart
FC007
'Ink Quality'
Test continuity of
Is the phase
phase coaxial cable, NO value good?
YES Return
including outer screen.
Is the p hase
cable continuity NO Replace the printhead.
good?
YES
Final Test
Figure 7-9. FC005 Phase
FA69084–1
FC006
Low Pressure 69062
Maintenance Manual
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5 Is the printer
Chapter 5
'IPM PCB Calibration' NO due for scheduled YES
maintenance? 'Scheduled
(Pressure Transducer
Maintenance'
Calibration only)
Final Test
Test the pressure

Is it possible transducer and
Check ink flow from the associated electronics.
pump outlet.
YES to calibrate the NO
pressure? Replace components
as necessary.
Is there good
Check ink flow from the Check vacuum at the
main ink filter outlet.
YES ink flow from NO pump inlet
the pump?
Is there good Is there good

YES ink flow from vacuum at the NO
the filter? pump inlet?
Examine the manifold Test the pump and

and associated piping. associated electronics.
Replace components NO YES Replace components
as necessary. as necessary.
Examine the ink

pick-up tube and
Replace the associated piping.
main ink filter.
Replace components
as necessary.
Check Maintenance Manual

amendments to make sure that
scheduled maintenance is being
completed to latest specification.
Confirm maintenance interval is
appropriate for the installation.
Final Test
Figure 7-10. FC006 Low Pressure
FA69084–1
FC007
Ink Quality 69063
Make sure that the printer

is in the
"Jet Running" state.
Set TOF to Off (Monitor Jet

page).

menu > Jet Functions
option.
YES
... phase number

=
0, 4, 8 and 12.
Take a print sample.
Repeat four times

at ...
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
Is one of the print
'IPM PCB Calibration' NO samples good?
(Charge Amplifier
Calibration only)
YES
Was charge
calibration required? Reset TOF to TOF/Phase
(Monitor Jet page)
NO
Replace the ink. Return
Final Test
Figure 7-11. FC007 Ink Quality
FA69084–1
FC008
Low Viscosity Ink 69064
Make sure that the

pressure transducer is
correctly calibrated.
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Solvent Add
Valve Tests'
Replace the ink.
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Solvent Flush
Valve Tests'
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Purge and Gutter
Valves Tests'
Make sure that there is

no blockage in
the feed line.
If all systems are considered to be

functioning correctly, monitor
the printer for a further 2 hours.
If the printer correctly adds solvent, assume
that the initial problem was caused by the
operator adding solvent to the ink tank.
Final Test
Figure 7-12. FC008 Low Viscosity Ink
FA69084–1
FC009
High Viscosity Ink 69065
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'IPM PCB Calibration'
Calibration only)
Flow Chart
Is TOF OK? NO FC203
'Time Of Flight Failure'
YES
Is there
Refill the solvent tank. NO solvent in the solvent
tank?
YES
Maintenance Manual
Test the solvent level Chapter 5
sensor. 'Solvent Add
Valve Tests'
If all systems are considered to be

functioning correctly, monitor the printer for a
further 2 hours.
If the printer correctly adds solvent, assume
that the initial problem was caused by the
operator adding ink to the solvent tank.
Therefore, the condition of the solvent needs
to be checked.
Final Test
Figure 7-13. FC009 High Viscosity Ink
FA69084–1
FC010
EHT Deflection 69066
Make sure that the

printhead and cover tube
are clean.
Make sure that the
printhead cover tube is
correctly fitted.
Initiate message printing
using the Test Print option.
Examine the printhead

output, the printhead
components, and the
printhead cover tube for
signs that ink drops were
diverted from the ink jet.
Were ink drops

NO diverted?
YES
Test EHT control signal into Make sure that the

the EHTPSU (TP3). calibration code
is entered correctly.
Test continuity of the
EHT cable Check that the printhead
(approximately 20 MΩ). cover tube detection is
functioning correctly.
NO
Test for correct voltage

Did the on the EHT plate.
tests reveal a
problem?
Was voltage
YES NO as expected?
Replace faulty component

as necessary. YES
Final Test Return
Figure 7-14. FC010 EHT Deflection
FA69084–1
FC011
menu > Jet Functions Print 69067
option.
Place a piece of paper at YES
Flow Chart
the printhead outlet and
select the Test Print option. Is TOF OK? NO FC203
Is ink Does the printer Test trigger, trigger setup

ejected from the YES print when NO and associated
printhead? triggered? electronics.
NO YES
Clean the printhead.

Does the printer Test line speed sensor,
Check for obstructions.
print at the correct NO line speed setup and
Repeat Test Print associated electronics.
rate?
twice more.
YES
Flow Chart
Is the fault still
apparent?
NO Is the print sample NO FC012
good? 'Print Quality'
YES
Maintenance Manual
Does Chapter 5
Print Count NO 'Software
increment? Programming'
procedure
YES
Flow Chart Is the fault still

FC010 apparent? YES
'EHT Deflection'
YES
Is the fault still

apparent?
YES Replace the IPM PCB.
NO
NO
Final Test
Figure 7-15. FC011 Print
FA69084–1
FC012
Print Quality 69068
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
Is the problem
'IPM PCB Calibration' solved?
& Charge Calibration)
NO
Flow Chart
Is the problem
FC010
solved?
'EHT Deflection'
NO
Flow Chart
Is the problem
FC007
solved?
'Ink Quality'
NO
YES
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
Problem solved? YES
'Modulation Range
Checks'
NO
YES
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Software
Programming'
procedure YES
Final Test
Figure 7-16. FC012 Print Quality
FA69084–1
FC200
2.00 Printhead Over Temperature 69069
Is the
printhead ambient
NO temperature less than YES
60 °C?
Place printer and printhead

Disconnect printhead in an environment where
connector the temperature is
PL6 from IPM PCB. within operating
range for 1 hour.
Does the fault

YES still exist?
NO
The printer must be

located in an environment
less than 60 °C.
Examine connector PL6

for obvious damage
and repair if possible.
Does the fault

still exist?
YES
Replace the printhead.
NO
Final Test
Figure 7-17. FC200 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature
FA69084–1
FC201
2.01 EHT Trip 69070
Flow Chart
FC002
'Jet'
Flow Chart
FC003
Make sure that the event 'Modulation'
settings are correct.
Examine printhead cover Make sure that link LK21
tube detection system and is removed.
replace faulty components
as necessary.
Remove the printhead
from the printhead cover
tube, and then refit it.
NO YES
Was Was
warning 3.12 warning 3.13 "Cover
"Printhead Cover Off" YES Override Link Fitted"
displayed? displayed?
NO
Disconnect the EHTPSU

output cable.
YES NO
Take a print sample. Make sure that the
environment is within
operating parameters.
Make sure that cleaning
procedures are being
adhered to.
Make sure that there is no
Replace the IPM PCB. vibration being transmitted to
Does the the printhead.
printer fail? If all else is OK, replace
the EHTPSU.
Final Test
Figure 7-18. FC201 2.01 EHT Trip
FA69084–1
FC202
2.02 Phase Failure 69071
Flow Chart
FC002
'Jet'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC003
'Modulation'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC004
'Charge'
Is the problem
NO solved?
YES
Flow Chart
FC005
'Phase'
YES
Is the problem
NO solved?
YES
Flow Chart
FC001 YES
'Troubleshooting Start'
Final Test
Figure 7-19. FC202 2.02 Phase Failure
FA69084–1
FC203
2.03 Time Of Flight Failure 69072
Flow Chart
FC002
'Jet'
Flow Chart
FC003
'Modulation'
Flow Chart
FC004
'Charge'
Electrical noise is being Flow Chart

generated on the FC005
production line. 'Phase' Electrical noise
is being generated
within the printer.
Make sure that the

electrical supply is free Move the printer to an area
from noise, earthing to the NO where there is no Examine all earth
printer electrical noise and a good YES connections.
is in place, and the earth. Make sure that the
printhead is isolated from printhead cover tube
other earthing sources. screw has good earth
continuity to the printer.
Does the fault

still exist? Replace in turn:
Make sure that auxiliary 1. LVPSU
components are screened. 2. IPM PCB
3. Pump
4. Printhead
Retest the system after

each replacement.
Refit original component if
Make sure that there is no the fault is still apparent.
static on the production
line.
Final Test
Figure 7-20. FC203 2.03 Time Of Flight Failure
FA69084–1
FC204
2.04 300V Power Supply 69073
Make sure that the printer is

switched off.
Remove IPM PCB link LK8.
Remove IPM PCB link LK25.
Switch on the printer.
Does the
fault still exist?
YES NO
Switch off the printer.

Refit link LK8 and link LK25.
Disconnect charge cable.
Disconnect modulation cable.
Switch on the printer.
Replace the EHTPSU.
Does the
fault still exist?
YES NO
Replace the IPM PCB. Replace the printhead.
Final Test
Figure 7-21. FC204 2.04 300V Power Supply
FA69084–1
FC205
2.05 Ink Tank Empty 69074
YES
Is the ink tank
nearly empty?
NO YES
Switch off the printer. Add one bottle of ink.

Examine the ink level
sensor and wiring, and (only ever add a maximum
replace, as necessary. of two bottles).
Is the warning
Has the fault cleared? "3.03 Ink Low" still
present?
NO
YES
Test the ink level sensor

electronics, and replace
the IPM PCB,
as necessary.
NO
Final Test
Figure 7-22. FC205 2.05 Ink Tank Empty
FA69084–1
FC206
2.06 Solvent Tank Empty 69075
YES
Is the solvent tank
nearly empty?
NO YES
Switch off the printer. Add one bottle of solvent.

Examine the solvent level
(only ever add a maximum
sensor and wiring, and
of two bottles).
replace if necessary.
Is the warning
Has the fault cleared? "3.04 Solvent Low"
still present?
NO
YES NO
Test the solvent level

sensor electronics, and
replace the IPM PCB, as
necessary.
Final Test
Figure 7-23. FC206 2.06 Solvent Tank Empty
FA69084–1
FC207
2.07 Internal Spillage 69076
Is there ink
YES or solvent in the NO
ink tray?
Clean the ink tray.

Remove and clean
the ink spillage sensor. Disconnect the ink system
Examine the ink system to connector PL1.
determine the cause of the
leak and repair,
as necessary.
YES
Does the Does the

fault still exist? YES fault still exist?
NO
NO
Test the leak detection
wiring for short circuit to
earth and repair as
necessary.
Final Test
Figure 7-24. FC207 2.07 Internal Spillage
FA69084–1
FC208
2.08 Printer Over Temperature 69077
Is the external
temperature greater
than +58 °C?
NO
Is the YES
fan rotating after
switching on the
printer?
NO YES
Examine the air filter and

replace as necessary.
Examine the fan and fan Examine the air inlet and
wiring; replace/repair outlet vents for
as necessary. obstructions. Clean as
necessary.
Make sure that routine
maintenance programmes
are being followed.
Test the fan output voltage

at connector PL2. Make sure that the
NO Has the fault cleared? operating environment is
within the limits stated in
the maintenance manual.
Reload software.
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Software
Programming'
procedure
Has the fault cleared?
YES
NO
YES
Final Test
Figure 7-25. FC208 2.08 Printer Over Temperature
FA69084–1
FC209
2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet 69078
Make sure that the jet is

running.
Is the jet
entering the centre of
the gutter?
YES
NO
Connect pin 12 to pin 13
on the printhead connector
PL6.
Monitor TP6.
Flow Chart
Is the voltage on
FC002 TP6 greater than
'Jet' 4 volts DC?
NO YES
Replace the printhead. Replace the IPM PCB.
Final Test
Figure 7-26. FC209 2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet
FA69084–1
FC211
2.11 Pressure Limit Reached 69079
NO Is the warning "3.18 YES

Low Pressure"
present?
Flow Chart Flow Chart

FC003 FC006
'Modulation' 'Low Pressure'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC004
'Charge'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'IPM PCB Calibration'
Calibration only)
YES
Is the problem
solved?
YES
NO
Flow Chart
FC001 YES
Final Test
Figure 7-27. FC211 2.11 Pressure Limit Reached
FA69084–1
FC212
2.12 Viscosity 69080
Increase/decrease the
pressure to bring the jet
break-up into the charge
electrode and achieve
good TOF.
Is it
possible to achieve
good TOF?
YES
NO
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Modulation Range
Checks'
Viscosity?
Flow Chart
Low or High or
FC203
lower higher
than than
expected expected
Flow Chart Flow Chart

FC008 FC009
'Low Viscosity Ink' 'High Viscosity Ink'
Final Test
Figure 7-28. FC212 2.12 Viscosity
FA69084–1
FC213
2.13 Hardware Safety Trip 69081
Flow Chart
FC201
'EHT Trip'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC200
'Printhead Over
Temperature'
Is the problem
NO solved?
YES
Flow Chart
FC001 YES
Final Test
Figure 7-29. FC213 2.13 Hardware Safety Trip
FA69084–1
FC999
Final Test 69082
Clean the printhead and

make sure that the cover
tube is clear of any
obstruction.
Start the jet using

the green [start] key.
Does the printer

start and print OK?
NO
YES Flow Chart

FC001
Note any conclusions on

the Flow Chart Record
Sheet.
Evaluate any
precautionary measures
to be taken to avoid
a reoccurrence
of the problem.
Put the printer back on
the production line and run
it, observing
its operation, for
at least ½ hour.
Clean the working area.
Dispose of all liquid
and solid waste in
accordance with local
regulations.
Clean the printer.
Complete all relevant

paperwork.
Report conclusions and

preventative actions to be
taken to whoever is
responsible
for the printer.
Finish
Figure 7-30. FC999 Final Test
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
CHAPTER 8: TRAINING COURSE
GUIDES
Course One: Printer Operation (Level C & Level A)

Course Overview
Purpose
These training courses are intended for anyone who is required to operate a Linx 7300
printer on a production line.
The courses are designed to enable a maintenance technician to train personnel, in the
necessary skills needed, to maintain normal line operation of the printer on a day-to-day
basis. To achieve this, the courses make use of the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
The training provided here is for a printer that has been previously commissioned and has
a number of suitable messages already stored in it. The maintenance technician should also
make sure that he is fully aware of the customer’s printing requirements, and that the
default options are correctly set for the application.
It is essential that the printer is set to the correct/appropriate password level prior to
commencing these courses.
Level C Course Objectives

This training course guide is to be used following the installation of the Linx 7300 printer,
to train operators to Level C.
The Level C course is designed to enable the trainee to safely set up the printer on a variety
of production lines, together with any associated ancillary components. In addition, the
trainee will be able to start and stop the printer, select and print messages, create and edit
messages, and carry out the more advanced routine maintenance tasks and simple
troubleshooting. The trainee will also be conversant with the safety implications and be
aware of the location in the manuals of basic First Aid instructions.
This course is therefore suitable for the Line Supervisor or more advanced Line Operator.
Level A Course Objectives

This training course guide is to be used following the installation of the Linx 7300 printer,
to train operators to Level A.
The Level A course is designed to enable the trainee to safely set up the printer on a variety
of production lines, together with any associated ancillary components. In addition, the
trainee will be able to start and stop the printer, select and print messages, and carry out
basic maintenance tasks. The trainee will also be conversant with the safety implications
and be aware of the location in the manuals of basic First Aid instructions.
This course is therefore suitable for a Base Level user or Line Attendant.
FA69084–1
Level C Modules
01. Introduction
02. Continuous Ink Jet Printing
03. Getting Started and Printing Messages
04. Navigating the 7300
05. Creating and Editing Messages
06. Stopping Print and Shutting Down
07. Looking After Your Printer
08. Routine Maintenance
09. Line Installation
10. Review
Level A Modules
01. Introduction
02. Continuous Ink Jet Printing
03. Getting Started and Printing Messages
06. Stopping Print and Shutting Down
07. Looking After Your Printer
09. Line Installation
10. Review
Equipment List
Equipment Quantity
Equipment Quantity
Linx 7300 Printer 1
Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide 1 per printer
Magnifier or eyeglass 1
Safety glasses 1 pair per trainee
Protective gloves sufficient for the course
Paper towels sufficient for the course
Hand cleanser sufficient for the course
Eyewash 1 bottle
Paper for printing onto As required (optional)
Make sure that all local Health and Safety regulations are complied with.
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 01 – Introduction
Aims
• To establish the credibility of the course, the trainer and the course materials.
• To establish a relaxed atmosphere in which to learn.
• To make the trainees aware of the relevant health and safety aspects.
Key Points
• Outline the course objectives.
• Cover the health and safety aspects of working with a CIJ printer, inks and solvents.
Activities
Introduce yourself and the training course to the trainees.
Explain domestic arrangements (timings, breaks, lunch, facilities).
Explain the use of the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
Outline the course objectives.
Explain the warnings and cautions. Use the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide to illustrate the
relevant points.
Explain the safety implications (hazards and their prevention, and accident management)
for the following:
• Ink/solvent flammability
• Eye and skin contact
• Inhalation
• Ingestion
Stress the importance of keeping the printer cover fitted.
Equipment
Ink and solvent bottles
Personal safety equipment
Fire extinguisher
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing
Aims
• To give some awareness of what continuous ink jet printing is and, in particular, how
the Linx printer achieves its purpose.
Key Points
• Continuous ink jet printing is a non-contact printing method for printing small
variable characters and images.
• The Linx printer achieves this by creating a stream of ink drops, from which
individual drops are electrically charged and deflected out of the printhead onto the
product in a predetermined manner.
Activities
Ask the trainees if they can give examples of where continuous ink jet printers might be
used. Examples could be food products for legislation reasons, pills, motor parts for
product traceability, and cable for marking the product length. In fact, there are very few
products manufactured today that do not require a mark for one reason or another, and
many of these applications are satisfied by marking the product using continuous ink jet
technology.
State that ink jet is usually selected for its capacity to print a large number of characters
every second, and so can cope with production line speeds up to 6 m/s.
Explain that when the printhead cover tube is removed, all dangerous voltages are
removed and the printhead can be handled and viewed safely.
Show the passage of the ink from the nozzle to the gutter.
Explain that, as the drops are formed they can be given an electric charge that causes them
to be deflected by the deflector plate onto the passing product.
Explain that, as the uncharged drops receive no charge they are not deflected and pass
directly into the gutter at the end of the printhead.
Point out the sensors on the DPP and explain that they are used to control the charge and
speed of the drops.
Equipment
Magnifier or eyeglass
Safety glasses
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing
Messages
Aims
• To make sure that there is understanding as to what is required for the printer to be
used successfully on the production line.
• To make sure that the trainees are able to bring the printer to a state where it can be
run on line.
Key Points
• Powering up the printer.
• The keyboard and display.
• Printing a message.
• Using the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
• Selecting a message.
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to switch on
the printer. Invite the trainees to switch on the printer and observe the startup screen.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about the printer display
and explain the use of each of the items on the display.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to start
printing.
Briefly explain what is happening during start up.
Show when the printer status changes to ‘Printing’ and demonstrate printing onto a
product. (You may have to improvise and explain the installation at this point.)
Show that Print Count increments each time the message is printed.
Explain that the message displayed on the Current Message page when the printer was
switched off, will be available for immediate printing the next time the printer is switched
on.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to select a
message. Indicate the Message Store option on the Print Monitor page.
Invite each of the trainees to select a message from the list of stored messages.
Make sure that all the trainees can select and print messages.
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 04 – Navigating the 7300
Aims
• To make sure that the trainees become familiar with, and can confidently use, the
cursor control keys.
• To make sure that the trainees become familiar with the menu structure.
Key Points
• Using the Up, Down, Left, and Right cursor control keys.
• Understanding the menu structure.
Activities
Introduce the cursor control keys.
Explain the principle menu options.
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 05 – Creating and Editing
Messages
Aims
• To make sure that the trainees can access and use the functions of the Message Editor
to create their messages.
Key Points
• Using the Message Editor.
• Placing fields using the cursor keys.
• Saving and printing newly created messages.
• Adjusting the position and appearance of the message.
• Editing messages.
Activities
Before starting this module, the printer must be set up with the default message type for
the particular line the printer is to be running on.
Invite the trainees to access the Message Store menu and select the New option.
Demonstrate entering text into the message by using the insert text options.
After entering text, demonstrate how the message can be saved and printed.
Invite each of the trainees to create a new message and input their name, and then save and
print each message.
Invite the trainees to adjust the appearance of their message using distance, height, and
pitch.
Explain how other fields, such as the time and date, can be added to a message and moved
into position using the cursor control keys.
Discuss with the operators what message they will be printing on the production line. Ask
the trainees to enter the message into the printer and to print it.
Explain how to edit the message and change the data within it.
Remember to save the message before attempting to print it.
Demonstrate how to change the setting of the message type if more than one message type
is to be used on site (optional).
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting
Down
Aims
• To show the difference between a paused print and a stopped jet.
• To emphasize that the 7300 is a completely automatic printer requiring minimum
intervention.
Key Points
• Pausing stops the printing but the jet continues to run.
• The [stop] key initiates a full shutdown sequence.
• The full shutdown sequence stops the jet, flushes the nozzle with solvent, and leaves
the printer in a condition ready for a clean and reliable startup next time.
• The [stop] key is the preferred method for switching off the printer.
• The power switch should only be used if the printer has failed (as displayed in the
Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page), or in the event of a hazardous
situation (for example, fire).
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to pause
printing.
Invite a trainee to demonstrate the correct key to stop and restart the print.
Show how the status message changes.
Demonstrate to the trainees that when printing is paused, the jet is still running (emphasize
the importance of wearing safety glasses during this operation).
At this point, it may be an opportunity to demonstrate the ink jet and drop formation
(optional).
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to stop
printing and shut down the printer.
Invite one of the trainees to shut down the printer, noting that the status message changes
in the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page.
Explain what is happening as the printer shuts down. Observe the printer switching itself
off and explain that the whole operation is automatic with no user intervention required.
Equipment
Safety glasses
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer
Aims
• To demonstrate to the trainees that minimum intervention is required for basic printer
operation, and if a few simple rules are followed the printer will give trouble-free
operation.
• To demonstrate the correct method of filling the printer with ink and solvent, as
required.
Key Points
• System Event (warning) messages and appropriate actions.
• ‘Ink low’ and ‘solvent low’ warnings.
• Ink and solvent dos and don’ts.
• Ink and solvent addition.
• Event message log.
Activities
Demonstrate a warning on the printer (a simple one is to remove the printhead from its
cover tube) and show the warning message on the System Event page.
Explain that all printer ‘events’ are logged and demonstrate how to access the Event Log.
Explain that the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page should be examined
whenever they are close to the printer to make sure that no attention is needed.
Explain that if the printer is reporting an ‘ink low’ or ‘solvent low’ warning, this is a
continuous reminder that a tank needs refilling.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about ink and solvent
safety precautions.
A ‘Quick Quiz’ can be given to cover all the relevant safety aspects about working with the
printer.
Make sure that there is complete understanding of all the points. In particular, show the
protective gloves and glasses symbols, which remind operators that protective equipment
is to be worn when handling ink and solvents.
Show the trainees the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about First Aid instructions.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about adding ink and
solvent.
Show the adhesive label on the solvent filler cap, which indicates the solvent type to be
used. Emphasize that this must be compared to the markings on the solvent bottle itself
and be the same. Also show the ‘Use-by’ date on the bottle.
Repeat the above activity for the ink filler cap and ink bottle.
Demonstrate, using an empty bottle, how the bottle should be placed into the filler tube.
Show the serrated teeth, which are designed to pierce the foil on the bottle neck.
Advise caution that the bottle must not be removed too early.
Emphasize that only one bottle of ink or solvent is to be added at any one time.
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 08 – Routine Maintenance
Aims
• To make the trainees aware of the regular maintenance activities necessary to ensure
trouble-free operation of the Linx 7300 printer.
Key Points
• How and when to clean the printhead.
• How and when to clean or replace the air filter.
• Accessing the Monitor Jet page and the Event Log page.
• Use of the Nozzle Flush and Nozzle Clear functions.
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to look after
the printer. Demonstrate how to clean the printhead and printhead cover tube. Emphasize
that the guide states that the printhead requires cleaning only once every week.
Indicate the location of the air filter and demonstrate how to remove it. For the 7300 model,
demonstrate the cleaning procedure. State the cleaning interval.
Explain that the filter on the 7300 (IP65 version) model cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced when it becomes excessively dirty.
Demonstrate and explain the Monitor Jet page (optional).
Emphasize that correct nozzle alignment is very important and must not be mechanically
adjusted.
Explain the causes of a blocked nozzle and demonstrate the use of the Nozzle Flush
function. Show the jet of solvent coming from the nozzle.
Demonstrate the Nozzle Clear procedure and encourage each trainee to try it himself or
herself.
Emphasize that, in the case of an incorrectly aligned nozzle, only the Nozzle Flush and
Nozzle Clear functions must be used to rectify the fault. No one should try to physically
move the nozzle without first seeking advice from a person trained to do so, or a Linx or
Linx Distributor maintenance technician.
Emphasize that moving the nozzle with non-approved tools cancels any current warranty
or service contract.
Equipment
Safety glasses
Protective gloves
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 09 – Line Installation
Aims
• To ensure that the trainees are able to install and change the setup parameters for
typical product sensors and line speed detectors.
Key Points
• A product sensor sends a signal to the printer to start a message printing onto the
product after a delay.
• A line speed detector sends a number of pulses to the printer, which interprets them
as a line speed.
• Correct setup is essential to ensure correct printing.
• Product sensors and line speed detectors are optional components.
• All line setup functions are accessed from the Line Setup page.
• Security.
Activities (all activities are optional based upon installation

setup)
Trigger the product sensor and explain how the signal is transmitted to the printer.
Explain the correct positioning of the printhead.
View the Trigger page on the Line Setup menu. Explain the options and settings,
particularly those that are used on the production line.
Explain line speed detection, if fitted.
Look at the Speed page on the Line Setup menu. Explain the options and settings,
particularly those that are used on the production line.
If a shaft encoder is fitted, emphasize the need to correctly calculate the number of pulses
per mm, as this can seriously influence the further positioning of the message (optional).
If a double trigger is used for line speed detection, emphasize that product size and pitch
must be accurately measured. If this is not done, adverse effects may be seen when
selecting a message type or printing a given message (optional).
If the production lines also uses other ancillary equipment, such as secondary triggers or
alarms, these also require explanation. Show their locations on the Line Setup menu.
Explain their uses and functions as necessary (optional).
Describe password entry and refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start
Guide about user levels and passwords.
Explain the importance of using the correct level of password for the requirements of the
user.
FA69084–1
Level C: Module 10 – Review
Aims
• To answer any questions that arise.
• To ensure all Aims have been adequately met.
Key Points
• Agreement of Aims.
• Decide upon any future training requirements.
Activities
Ask if there are any questions.
Review the Objectives from Module 01 and get agreement from the trainees that they are
happy that these have been met.
If there is any confusion, run through the particular points again.
If necessary, arrange a convenient time to cover again any areas where there is still
confusion. These needs may only be relevant to individual trainees.
FA69084–1
Level A: Module 01 – Introduction
Aims
• To establish the credibility of the course, the trainer and the course materials.
• To establish a relaxed atmosphere in which to learn.
• To make the trainees aware of the relevant health and safety aspects.
Key Points
• Outline the course objectives.
• Cover the health and safety aspects of working with a CIJ printer, inks and solvents.
Activities
Introduce yourself and the training course to the trainees.
Explain domestic arrangements (timings, breaks, lunch, facilities).
Explain the use of the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
Outline the course objectives.
Explain the warnings and cautions. Use the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide to illustrate the
relevant points.
Explain the safety implications (hazards and their prevention, and accident management)
for the following:
• Ink/solvent flammability
• Eye and skin contact
• Inhalation
• Ingestion
Stress the importance of keeping the printer cover fitted.
Equipment
Ink and solvent bottles
Personal safety equipment
Fire extinguisher
FA69084–1
Level A: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing
Aims
• To give some awareness of what continuous ink jet printing is and, in particular, how
the Linx printer achieves its purpose.
Key Points
• Continuous ink jet printing is a non-contact printing method for printing small variable
characters and images.
• The Linx printer achieves this by creating a stream of ink drops, from which individual
drops are electrically charged and deflected out of the printhead onto the product in a
predetermined manner.
Activities
Ask the trainees if they can give examples of where continuous ink jet printers might be
used. Examples could be food products for legislation reasons, pills, motor parts for
product traceability, and cable for marking the product length. In fact, there are very few
products manufactured today that do not require a mark for one reason or another, and
many of these applications are satisfied by marking the product using continuous ink jet
technology.
State that ink jet is usually selected for its capacity to print a large number of characters
every second, and so can cope with production line speeds up to 6 m/s.
Explain that when the printhead cover tube is removed, all dangerous voltages are
removed and the printhead can be handled and viewed safely.
Show the passage of the ink from the nozzle to the gutter.
Explain that, as the drops are formed they can be given an electric charge that causes them
to be deflected by the deflector plate onto the passing product.
Explain that, as the uncharged drops receive no charge they are not deflected and pass
directly into the gutter at the end of the printhead.
Point out the sensors on the DPP and explain that they are used to control the charge and
speed of the drops.
Equipment
Safety glasses
FA69084–1
Level A: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing
Messages
Aims
• To make sure that there is understanding as to what is required for the printer to be
used successfully on the production line.
• To make sure that the trainees are able to bring the printer to a state where it can be
run on line.
Key Points
• Powering up the printer.
• The keyboard and display.
• Printing a message.
• Using the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
• Selecting a message.
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to switch on
the printer. Invite the trainees to switch on the printer and observe the startup screen.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about the printer display
and explain the use of each of the items on the display.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to start
printing.
Briefly explain what is happening during start up.
Show when the printer status changes to ‘Printing’ and demonstrate printing onto a
product. (You may have to improvise and explain the installation at this point.)
Show that Print Count increments each time the message is printed.
Explain that the message displayed on the Current Message page when the printer was
switched off, will be available for immediate printing the next time the printer is switched
on.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to select a
message. Indicate the Message Store option on the Print Monitor page.
Invite each of the trainees to select a message from the list of stored messages.
Make sure that all the trainees can select and print messages.
FA69084–1
Level A: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting
Down
Aims
• To show the difference between a paused print and a stopped jet.
• To emphasize that the 7300 is a completely automatic printer requiring minimum
intervention.
Key Points
• Pausing stops the printing but the jet continues to run.
• The [stop] key initiates a full shutdown sequence.
• The full shutdown sequence stops the jet, flushes the nozzle with solvent, and leaves
the printer in a condition ready for a clean and reliable startup next time.
• The [stop] key is the preferred method for switching off the printer.
• The power switch should only be used if the printer has failed (as displayed in the
Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page), or in the event of a hazardous
situation (for example, fire).
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to pause
printing.
Invite a trainee to demonstrate the correct key to stop and restart the print.
Show how the status message changes.
Demonstrate to the trainees that when printing is paused, the jet is still running (emphasize
the importance of wearing safety glasses during this operation).
At this point, it may be an opportunity to demonstrate the ink jet and drop formation
(optional).
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to stop
printing and shut down the printer.
Invite one of the trainees to shut down the printer, noting that the status message changes
in the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page.
Explain what is happening as the printer shuts down. Observe the printer switching itself
off and explain that the whole operation is automatic with no user intervention required.
Equipment
Safety glasses
FA69084–1
Level A: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer
Aims
• To demonstrate to the trainees that minimum intervention is required for basic printer
operation, and if a few simple rules are followed the printer will give trouble-free
operation.
• To demonstrate the correct method of filling the printer with ink and solvent, as
required.
Key Points
• System Event (warning) messages and appropriate actions.
• ‘Ink low’ and ‘solvent low’ warnings.
• Ink and solvent dos and don’ts.
• Ink and solvent addition.
• Event message log.
Activities
Demonstrate a warning on the printer (a simple one is to remove the printhead from its
cover tube) and show the warning message on the System Event page.
Explain that all printer ‘events’ are logged.
Explain that the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page should be examined
whenever they are close to the printer to make sure that no attention is needed.
Explain that if the printer is reporting an ‘ink low’ or ‘solvent low’ warning, this is a
continuous reminder that a tank needs refilling.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about ink and solvent
safety precautions.
A ‘Quick Quiz’ can be given to cover all the relevant safety aspects about working with the
printer.
Make sure that there is complete understanding of all the points. In particular, show the
protective gloves and glasses symbols, which remind operators that protective equipment
is to be worn when handling ink and solvents.
Show the trainees the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about First Aid instructions.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about adding ink and
solvent.
Show the adhesive label on the solvent filler cap, which indicates the solvent type to be
used. Emphasize that this must be compared to the markings on the solvent bottle itself
and be the same. Also show the ‘Use-by’ date on the bottle.
Repeat the above activity for the ink filler cap and ink bottle.
Demonstrate, using an empty bottle, how the bottle should be placed into the filler tube.
Show the serrated teeth, which are designed to pierce the foil on the bottle neck.
Advise caution that the bottle must not be removed too early.
Emphasize that only one bottle of ink or solvent is to be added at any one time.
FA69084–1
Level A: Module 09 – Line Installation
Aims
• To make sure that the trainees are familiar with their installations.
Key Points
• A product sensor sends a signal to the printer to start a message printing onto the
product after a delay.
• A line speed detector sends a number of pulses to the printer, which interprets them
as a line speed.
• Correct setup is essential to ensure correct printing.
• Product sensors and line speed detectors are optional components.
• Security.
Activities (all activities are optional based upon installation

setup)
Trigger the product sensor and explain how the signal is transmitted to the printer.
Explain the correct positioning of the printhead.
Explain line speed detection, if fitted.
If the production lines also uses other ancillary equipment, such as secondary triggers or
alarms, these also require explanation.
Define the functions that the trainees have access to, and explain that to access other
functions they need further training.
FA69084–1
Level A: Module 10 – Review
Aims
• To answer any questions that arise.
• To make sure that all Aims have been adequately met.
Key Points
• Agreement of Aims.
• Decide upon any future training requirements.
Activities
Ask if there are any questions.
Review the Objectives from Module 01 and get agreement from the trainees that they are
happy that these have been met.
If there is any confusion, run through the particular points again.
If necessary, arrange a convenient time to cover again any areas where there is still
confusion. These needs may only be relevant to individual trainees.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
APPENDIX A: 7300 FOOD GRADE
PRINTER
A.1 Introduction
The Linx 7300 Food Grade printer is a special version of the Linx 7300 printer. The two
products are very similar, with some differences in operation and design. Where the 7300
Food Grade printer is different from the standard 7300 printer described in this manual, the
alternative information is provided in this appendix. Cross-references are given in bold text
to sections in other chapters of the manual and have one of the following statements:
• Read this section in conjunction with section …
• Read this section instead of section …
A.2 Summary of Differences

The following is a summary of the 7300 Food Grade printer differences from the standard
7300 printer. Refer to the section, ‘Technical Description’ later in this appendix for more
detailed information.
A.2.1 Hardware
• The 7300 Food Grade printer has a MidiEC printhead, optimized for up to 3 lines of text
or graphics and is specifically for use with Linx food grade inks.
• The nozzle assembly is not interchangeable with other types.
• The MidiEC printhead is only available as a straight printhead with a 2-metre conduit.
• The ink system uses a dual-circuit pump, which provides continuous gutter suction in
the primary circuit of the ink system.
• Unlike the pump in the standard 7300 printer, the pump fitted in the 7300 Food Grade
printer ink system has no internal pressure relief valve (PRV). Instead, an external PRV
is fitted between the input and output ports of the primary circuit of the pump.
• The 7300 Food Grade printer is fitted with a printhead positive air pump as standard.
A.2.2 Configuration
• The operating temperature range for the 7300 Food Grade printer is 0 °C to +40 °C,
compared to the recommended temperature range of +5 °C to +45 °C for a standard
7300 printer.
• Only Linx Red food grade ink 6100, Linx Blue food grade ink 6120 and Linx Blue food
grade ink 6220 can be used.
• A software link must be fitted to configure a standard 7300 printer to a 7300 Food Grade
printer. With the software link fitted, the printhead type and the ink types that are
available are limited to those used by the 7300 Food Grade printer.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A—1 Sep 2009
A.2.3 Software
• To minimize the risk of printer failure due to a dirty printhead, an EHT flash test is
performed before each jet startup to check that the printhead is clean and dry.
• When the 7300 Food Grade printer is turned on, the jet start is delayed for a 5-minute
warm-up period. This helps to reduce the risk of EHT failure at jet startup due to
condensation within the printhead, which can occur in food marking environments.
• To prevent potential problems related to short print runs, if the [stop] key is pressed
the shutdown is delayed (if necessary) until a calculated, temperature-dependent,
minimum run time has elapsed. This helps to reduce the risk of over-dilution of the
ink.
• The Set Pressure is normally approximately 0.07 bar (1.02 p.s.i.) below the Solvent
Add Pressure. At low temperatures, this pressure can be much higher than the
Reference Pressure. This helps to reduce the risk of over-dilution of the ink.
• Modulation Tracking is not used on the 7300 Food Grade printer.
A.2.4 User Interface

• The Ink/Solvent page provides a facility for automatically calibrating the Reference
Pressure for food grade inks.
A.3 Technical Description

A.3.1 Printhead Components
A.3.1.1 Printhead Temperature Sensor
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Printhead Temperature Sensor’ in
Chapter 3: ‘Technical Description’.
The MidiEC printhead temperature sensor is also used to provide temperature
measurement for the following:
• Calculation of the minimum run time when the jet is started.
• Calculation of the Reference Pressure for food grade inks using the Calibrate 6xxx Ink
option on the Ink/Solvent page.
A.3.1.2 Standard Gutter Restrictor

Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Standard Gutter Restrictor’ in
The gutter restrictor is not fitted to MidiEC printheads.
A.3.2 Printhead Theory of Operation

A.3.2.1 Printhead Types
Read this section instead of the section ‘Printhead Types’ in Chapter 3: ‘Technical
Description’.
The 7300 Food Grade printer uses a Mk7 MidiEC printhead. The nozzle orifice size (jewel
size—measured in micrometres) is 62 µm.
The MidiEC printhead is suitable for printing up to 3 lines of 7 High characters.
NOTE: The MidiEC nozzle is not interchangeable with nozzles from any other type of
printhead. It is stamped with the letters “EC” to distinguish it from other nozzle
types.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
A.3.2.2 Modulation
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Modulation’ in ‘Printhead Theory of
Operation’ of Chapter 3: ‘Technical Description’.
The modulation frequency for the MidiEC printhead is 80 kHz.
A.3.2.3 Viscosity Control

Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Viscosity Control’ in Chapter 3:
‘Technical Description’.
The warm-up time mentioned in the section ‘Viscosity Control’ refers to the time allowed
for the system to stabilize after jet startup. This must not be confused with the 5-minute
printhead warm-up time for the MidiEC printhead, which occurs after switch on and before
jet startup. This delay allows the heater in the printhead to clear condensation from the
printhead.
For the 7300 Food Grade printer, the initial stabilization period before the first solvent
addition after startup is 45 minutes. Thereafter, the minimum period between solvent
additions is 20 minutes.
The 7300 Food Grade printer uses a different algorithm to adjust the system pressure as the
ambient temperature changes. The Set Pressure is normally about 0.07 bar (1.02 p.s.i.)
below the Solvent Add Pressure. At low temperatures, the Set Pressure can be considerably
higher than the Reference Pressure.
The maximum number of consecutive solvent additions allowed is 25.
A.3.2.4 Starting Up and Shutting Down

Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Starting Up and Shutting Down’ in
There are two additional items in the list of actions performed during startup, an ‘EHT
flash test’ and a warm-up delay. A function called ‘minimum run time’ is also used to
determine when the jet shuts down.
EHT Flash Test

The water content of the ink used in the 7300 Food Grade printer can create a humid
environment around the components inside the printhead cover, which can cause
condensation if the temperature falls (condensation is caused by a combination of humidity
and falling temperature). It is important to note that condensation can occur even in warm
environments and with small temperature changes. Any ink residue or condensation in the
area of the EHT deflector plate, charge electrode or DPP can cause electrical leakage
between the printhead components. This can cause Print Failure “2.01 EHT Trip” during
printing, followed by immediate jet shutdown.
To minimize the risk of printer failure during printing, the 7300 Food Grade printer
performs a 10-second EHT flash test before each jet startup to check that the printhead is
clean and dry. If this test fails, Print Failure “2.01 EHT Trip” is reported, the EHT output is
turned off and the jet is not started.
If this failure occurs, switch off the printer and clean the printhead, using the cleaning
procedure provided in the ‘MidiEC Printhead Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in
Refer to ‘System Events’ later in this appendix for more information.
FA69084–1
Warm-up Delay
In conditions of high humidity, condensation can cause any dried ink deposits on the
printhead components to become conductive, which can cause EHT trip failures. To avoid
this, there is a 5-minute warm-up time after the printer is switched on, which allows the
printhead heater time to disperse any condensation before the software allows the jet to start.
During the warm-up time, the jet cannot be started with the [start] key. The jet starts
automatically at the end of the warm-up time, unless the [stop] key is pressed first to cancel
the automatic startup.
Minimum Run Time

Short jet running times must be avoided because the solvent used at startup and shutdown
may not have time to evaporate during printing. This can cause poor viscosity control and
overflow of the ink tank.
At each startup, the software calculates and sets the minimum run time required, which is
dependent on ambient temperature. (The run time is longer at lower temperatures.) This
ensures that the run time is sufficient to allow solvent used at startup and shutdown to
evaporate during operation, and therefore avoids overdilution of the ink and overflow of
the ink tank.
If the [stop] key is pressed before the minimum run time has elapsed, an advisory message
is displayed that shows the remaining time until jet shutdown.
At the end of the minimum run delay time, the printer shuts down automatically. Two
methods can be used by maintenance technicians to override the delay if necessary. Refer
to the section ‘Overriding the Minimum Run Time Delay’ later in this appendix for more
information (Maintenance > Jet Functions > Overriding the Minimum Run Time Delay).
A.3.3 Ink System

A.3.3.1 General Description
Read this section instead of the section ‘Ink System’ > ‘General Description’ in Chapter
3: ‘Technical Description’.
The Ink System is contained in a stainless steel enclosure, which is integral to the base unit
of the cabinet. The cabinet top cover has two openings through which the ink and solvent
tanks are filled, via internal filler tubes. The filler tubes are sealed by removable protective
caps. Both the filler tubes and protective caps are colour coded—black for ink and white for
solvent. Adhesive ink and solvent type identification labels are supplied with the printer
for attaching to the protective caps.
The ink system comprises the following main components (refer to Figure A-1):
• Ink tank
• Ink pick-up tube incorporating a 40 µm stainless steel in-line filter
• Dual-circuit pump and motor assembly
• Pressure relief valve (PRV)
• 10 µm (nominal) polypropylene disposable main ink filter
• Small ink manifold assembly, which includes the pressure transducer and venturi
• Damper
• Solvent tank
• Solvent pick-up tube incorporating a 20 µm stainless steel in-line filter
• Five solenoid-operated valves
• Interconnecting pipes
FA69084–1
NOTE: The symbol ‘µm’ stands for micrometre, which is the SI unit of length and formerly
known as the micron.
The 7300 Food Grade printer has polyethylene ink and solvent tanks with nominal capacities
of 1440 ml. Both tanks are fitted with fluid level sensors (float switches) to detect when the
level of ink or solvent falls below a predetermined point. If either sensor detects a low fluid
level, a System Warning message is displayed (“3.03 Ink Low” or “3.04 Solvent Low”).
If, during a print run, the ink low condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the
Print Failure “2.05 Ink Tank Empty” after 8 hours. If, during a print run, the solvent low
condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the Print Failure “2.06 Solvent Tank
Empty” after 12 hours. This is to prevent the ink or solvent from running out completely.
The ink system pump used in standard 7300 printers has an integral pressure relief valve
(PRV). The 7300 Food Grade printer has an external PRV connected between the input and
output ports of the primary circuit of the dual-circuit pump. Control of the pump/motor
assembly is achieved by a 0 to +5 volts (depending on the requested pressure) drive signal
supplied by the IPM PCB.
The pump draws ink up from the tank through the ink pick-up tube, which incorporates a
40 µm in-line filter. The ink then flows through the primary circuit of the dual-circuit pump
to the 10 µm main ink filter, which provides the primary filtration within the ink system.
The filter removes any remaining foreign particles from the ink before it reaches the
venturi manifold and the printhead. From the main ink filter, the ink is fed through the
venturi manifold to the damper and the Feed valve, and then out to the printhead. The
purpose of the damper is to smooth any ink pressure fluctuations within the primary
circuit and to isolate them from the printhead.
Ink is fed to and from the printhead through the feed, purge and gutter lines, via a 3-way
within the ink system enclosure and incorporates a 15 µm filter. The tubing to and from the
printhead is colour-coded: red stripe for the feed line, blue stripe for the purge line, and no
stripe for the gutter line.
The disposable ink pick-up tube and filter, and the main ink filter are replaced at every
Scheduled Maintenance. The damper is replaced annually. All these items must be
replaced in accordance with the Scheduled Maintenance procedure provided in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
required. The secondary circuit of the dual-circuit pump provides additional gutter suction
to draw unused ink back to the ink tank.
FA69084–1
Gun Printhead
Chamber Purge Valve
Printhead Feed Valve and 15 µm filter Filter Assembly
Sep 2009
Purge Line

Gutter Line
3-Way Fluid Connector and

15 µm In-Line Feed Filter Assembly
10 µm Main Ink Damper H
Filter J
7 25 1 K 21 69562
19 20
Venturi
24
14 OFF 15 OFF 16 OFF 17 OFF 18 OFF
B C A 8
Pressure
A—6
Transducer
9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13
Valve Valve
E Vent
F
Dual-Circuit 22
G Vent
Pump
40 µm In-Line Filter Pipe bend

radius 20 µm In-Line Filter
fitted in template fitted in
Pressure Relief INK SOLVENT
Ink Pick-up Tube Solvent Pick-up Tube
Valve

FA69084–1
Figure A-1. Static Ink System—7300 Food Grade Printer
A.3.3.2 Ink System Connections
Read this section instead of the section ‘Ink System Connections’ in Chapter 3:
The pipe connections to the venturi manifold are made using Festo fittings or barb fittings.
The barbs are sealed by interference fit to the manifold and cannot be removed, and are
therefore not replaceable items.
The following illustration shows the venturi manifold, its components, and the ink system
valves, and provide details of the ink system pipe connections.
22
21
20 19
VENTURI
MANIFOLD
18 17 16 15 14
1 25
7 8
C
A B
6 5 4 3 2
13 12 11 10 9
SOLVENT SOLVENT GUTTER PURGE FEED

24 FLUSH ADD (3) (2) (1)
(5) (4)
69563
6900 FOOD GRADE INK SYSTEM PIPE CONNECTIONS
FROM TO PIPE LENGTHS
PORT 1 (VENTURI) DAMPER INLET (BLEED CAP END) 500 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 2 NOT USED — —
PORT 3 (PURGE VALVE) 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (PURGE) 450 mm BLUE STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 4 (GUTTER VALVE) PORT 8 (VENTURI) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 5 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) PORT 6 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 120 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 9 (FEED VALVE) PORT A (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 10 (PURGE VALVE) E (PURGE VALVE T-PIECE) 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 12 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) PORT 7 (VENTURI) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 13 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) PORT B (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 150 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 15 (PURGE VALVE) PORT 11 (GUTTER VALVE) 150 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 16 (GUTTER VALVE) J (GUTTER VALVE T-PIECE) 220 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 17 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) 19 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 18 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 20 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 21 (Y-PIECE) 22 (SOLVENT TANK PICK-UP TUBE) 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 24 (VENTURI) INK TANK (INK RETURN LINE) 500 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT C (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (FEED) 450 mm RED STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
DAMPER OUTLET PORT 14 (FEED VALVE) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
MAIN INK FILTER OUTLET PORT 25 (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER) 220 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK PICK-UP TUBE PRIMARY PUMP INLET T-PIECE 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRIMARY PUMP INLET T-PIECE PUMP INLET (PRIMARY) 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PUMP OUTLET (PRIMARY) PRIMARY PUMP OUTLET T-PIECE 75 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRIMARY PUMP OUTLET T-PIECE MAIN INK FILTER INLET 75 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK TANK FILLER TUBE (VENT) SOLVENT TANK (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
SOLVENT TANK FILLER TUBE (VENT) INK TRAY (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
G (PURGE VALVE T-PIECE) INK TANK 120 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (GUTTER) K (GUTTER VALVE T-PIECE) 225 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
H (GUTTER VALVE T-PIECE) PUMP INLET (SECONDARY) 225 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PUMP OUTLET (SECONDARY) F (PURGE VALVE T-PIECE) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PRIMARY PUMP OUTLET T-PIECE PRV INLET 45 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRV OUTLET PRIMARY PUMP INLET T-PIECE 45 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
Figure A-2. 7300 Food Grade Ink System Pipe Connections
FA69084–1
A.3.3.3 Ink and Solvent Flows
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Ink and Solvent Flows’ in Chapter 3:
The ink and solvent flow descriptions in Chapter 3: ‘Technical Description’ are also
applicable to the 7300 Food Grade printer, except that the layout of the ink system is slightly
different. Figure A-1. ‘Static Ink System—7300 Food Grade Printer’ in this appendix shows
the different ink system layout.
Secondary Circuit (7300 Food Grade Printer)

In the ink system secondary circuit of the standard 7300 printer, the venturi vacuum acting
on the gutter draws the unprinted drops back into the system through the switched off
Gutter valve, and returns them to the ink tank via the venturi. In the 7300 Food Grade
printer, the secondary circuit of the dual-circuit pump provides additional gutter suction to
draw unprinted drops back to the ink tank.
A.3.3.4 Startup and Shutdown Sequences

Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Startup and Shutdown Sequences’ in
The Normal Start Sequence and the Normal Shutdown Sequence for the 7300 Food Grade
printer are different from the standard 7300 printer and are shown in the following valve
sequence summary tables.
Normal Start Sequence (7300 Food Grade Printer)

Unlike the standard 7300 printer, the 7300 Food Grade printer does not draw solvent from
the solvent tank during the Startup sequence. However, there is residual solvent in the ink
system from the previous shutdown.
v3.6 69564
NORMAL START
Action Description MidiEC

Pressure Test (P3) 4.14 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line 8s
Pressure Set to zero 0.00 bar
Wait Allow pressure to reach 0 bits 5s
Pressure Maximum Running (P4) 4.49 bar
Wait Balance pressure in purge line 5s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start jet 5s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Purge gun 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Pressure Default Refernce Pressure (P0) 3.34 bar
Wait Wait for TOF 8s
Figure A-3. Normal Start Summary Table—7300 Food Grade Printer
FA69084–1
Normal Shutdown Sequence (7300 Food Grade Printer)
v3.6 69565A
NORMAL SHUTDOWN

Wait Constant 5s
Wait Constant 5s
Wait Stabilize pressure 5s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Stop jet 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed and gutter lines 45 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Solvent to feed and purge lines 7s
Wait Soak period 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear purge line 30 s
Wait Clear gutter line 20 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Solvent to feed and purge lines 7s
Pressure Solvent jet 2.64 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start solv. jet/clean gutter pipe 14 s
Wait Stop solvent jet 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Suction on purge line 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear purge line 40 s
(continued)
Figure A-4. Normal Shutdown Summary Table—7300 Food Grade Printer
FA69084–1
v3.6 69565B
NORMAL SHUTDOWN

Wait Clear gutter line 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 10 s
Wait Constant 1s
Figure A-4. Normal Shutdown Summary Table—7300 Food Grade Printer (continued)
A.3.3.5 Ink Type Dependent Parameters

The Ink Type Dependent Parameters table for the MidiEC printhead is included in Chapter
3: ‘Technical Description’.
A.3.4 Electrical Components

A.3.4.1 Ink System Pump
Read this section instead of the section ‘Ink System Pump’ in Chapter 3: ‘Technical
Description’.
This unit is a dual-circuit pump and brushless DC motor assembly mounted through an
aperture in the front wall of the ink system enclosure. The pump comprises two pump
units mounted on a common drive shaft, providing two separate pump circuits.
The purpose of the larger, primary circuit is to pump ink round the ink system at different
pressures as required by the ink system control circuits. These pressure values depend on
the different functions performed by the printer during startup, normal running, nozzle
clearing, and shutdown.
The purpose of the smaller, secondary circuit is to provide suction for the printhead gutter,
to draw unprinted ink drops back to the ink tank.
The motor is powered by +24 volts DC, and pressure control is achieved by a 0 volts to 5
volts DC drive signal supplied by the IPM PCB control circuits, via PL3.
Magnetic coupling from the motor to the pump ensures separation of the ink from the
electrical drive parts. The pump has an external pressure relief valve (PRV) for the primary
ink circuit, which is connected across the input and output ports of the primary circuit of
the pump.
In the illustration below, the primary circuit ink flow is indicated by the larger arrows and
the secondary circuit ink flow is indicated by the smaller arrows.
68776
Figure A-5. Dual-Circuit Pump Ink Flows
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
A.3.4.2 Printhead Positive Air Pump
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Printhead Positive Air Pump’ in
Unlike the standard 7300 printer and the 7300 Spectrum, the 7300 Food Grade printer has a
printhead positive air pump fitted as standard. The addition of a positive air pump
provides a significant improvement in startup reliability in very high humidity conditions.
High humidity can occur over a wide range of temperatures, so positive air provides
improved performance at all times of the year.
A.3.5 Electronics and Software

A.3.5.1 IPM PCB
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘IPM PCB’ in Chapter 3: ‘Technical
Description’.
Test Points and Links

The IPM PCB in the 7300 Food Grade printer is identical to that fitted to the standard 7300
printer, but link LK7 has two additional functions.
Minimum Run Time

When Link LK7C is fitted, the minimum run time calculated by the printer is disregarded
and the shutdown delay is reduced to 1 minute. This is used for production testing.
CAUTION: The minimum run time is an important factor in achieving reliable operation of the
printer and must not be routinely overridden.
The default setting for link LK7C is ‘not fitted’.
This link can be fitted to aid fault diagnosis but must remain not fitted when the printer is in
normal use.
Food Grade Ink Options

When link LK7F is fitted, the printhead type (MidiEC) and the ink types that are available
are limited to those used by the 7300 Food Grade printer. The default setting for link LK7F is
‘fitted’.
A.4 System Options

A.4.1 Option Availability
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Option Availability’ in Chapter 4:
‘System Options’.
The Power Down page of the 7300 Food Grade printer has no Delayed Power Down
options.
The Ink/Solvent page has an additional Calibrate 6xxx Ink option.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A — 11 Sep 2009
A.4.2 Line Setup Page
A.4.2.1 Power Down
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Power Down’ in Chapter 4: ‘System
Options’.
Because the Delayed Power Down options are not applicable to the 7300 Food Grade printer,
the appearance of the Power Down page is as shown below.
v3.4 69568
Figure A-6. Power Down Page
A.4.3 Installation Page

A.4.3.1 Printhead
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Printhead’ in Chapter 4: ‘System
Options’.
The following Printhead page shows the settings for the 7300 Food Grade printer.
v3.4 69569
MidiEC
Figure A-7. Printhead Page
FA69084–1
Printhead Type
The 7300 Food Grade printer supports only one printhead type: MidiEC. This is the only
printhead shown on the Printhead Type page of the Printhead page.
Conduit Length
There is only one conduit length available on the Conduit Length page: 2 metres.
Printhead Code
The default Reference Modulation Voltage for the MidiEC printhead is 125 volts. This is
suitable for operation over a temperature range of 0 °C to +40 °C and applies to all 7300
Food Grade printer configurations (including egg coding applications).
Where ambient temperatures are likely to regularly exceed +35 °C, the installation
technician must enter a value 10 volts less than the Reference Modulation Voltage for the
printhead. Also see the note for Linx Blue Food Grade ink 6220 in the ‘Ink Type Dependent
Parameters (MidiEC)’ table (Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Ink Type
Dependent Parameters).
A.4.3.2 Ink/Solvent
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Ink/Solvent’ in Chapter 4: ‘System
Options’.
The Ink/Solvent page provides a facility for automatically calibrating the Reference
Pressure for food grade inks, as a diagnostic aid. The appearance of the Ink/Solvent page
is therefore as shown below.
v3.4 69570
Figure A-8. Ink/Solvent Page
Calibrate 6xxx Ink

The Ink/Solvent page has an additional Calibrate 6xxx Ink option, which is only enabled
with the Level E (Service 2) password and when the jet is running.
When the Calibrate 6xxx Ink option is selected, the printer uses the Actual Pressure and
the current printhead temperature to calculate the true Reference Pressure for the ink.
When the calibration is completed, the internal alarm tone (buzzer) is sounded once.
NOTE: The calibrate function is primarily for use by Linx during the manufacturing
process and is not intended for normal use by maintenance personnel.
FA69084–1
A.5 Maintenance
A.5.1 Jet Functions
A.5.1.1 Overriding the Minimum Run Time Delay
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Jet Test – Stop’ in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
There are two ways to override the minimum run time delay and stop the jet immediately:
• By using the key combination [ctrl] + [stop].
• By using the key combination [shift] + [stop].
The first method works in the same way as on a standard 7300 printer, that is it initiates an
immediate quick stop of the jet.
The second method initiates a normal 7300 Food Grade shutdown sequence instead of a
quick stop, but again overrides the minimum run time.
In both cases, the printer first displays the following advisory message.
v3.4 69572
Figure A-9. Advisory Message for Minimum Run Time Override

The procedure can be abandoned at this point by pressing the Cancel key.
IMPORTANT: The minimum run time is an important factor in achieving reliable printer
operation and must not be routinely overridden. Operators must not be
informed that these override methods exist.
Using [ctrl] + [stop] produces the System Warning “3.00 Shutdown Incomplete” when the
jet has stopped, and the shutdown is recorded in the Event Log as “4.01 Jet Test Stop”.
Using [shift] + [stop] does not produce this System Warning, and the shutdown is recorded
in the Event Log as a normal shutdown. (Note that a comparison of startup and shutdown
times in the Event Log can be used to track overuse or unauthorized use of this shutdown
method.)
FA69084–1
A.5.2 Monitor Jet
A.5.2.1 Modulation
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Modulation’ in ‘Monitor Jet’ of
REF (Reference Modulation)

The Reference Modulation Voltage is manually set according to the expected ambient
operating temperature. Refer to the section Installation Page > Printhead > Printhead Code
in this appendix for more information.
Automatic Tracking
Automatic Modulation Tracking is not used on the 7300 Food Grade printer.
A.5.3 Maintenance Instructions

Read this section in conjunction with the relevant maintenance instructions in Chapter
A.5.3.1 Purge and Gutter Valves Tests

Note that although the Gutter valve is connected differently on the 7300 Food Grade printer,
the Maintenance Instruction ‘Purge and Gutter Valves Tests’ can also be used without
alteration for the 7300 Food Grade printer.
A.5.3.2 Printer Installation
Installation Parameters
On the Printhead Code page (Installation > Printhead > Printhead Code), set the Reference
Modulation Voltage to the appropriate value for the expected ambient operating
temperature range.
Refer to section Installation Page > Printhead > Printhead Code in this appendix for more
information.
FA69084–1
A.6 System Events
A.6.1 Print Failures
A.6.1.1 “2.01 EHT Trip”
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘2.01 EHT Trip’ in Chapter 6: ‘System
Events’.
An additional feature of the 7300 Food Grade printer is the inclusion of a 10-second EHT
flash test on the printhead before each startup. This means that, unlike the standard 7300
printer, the 7300 Food Grade printer can report an EHT failure before the jet is started.
A.6.1.2 “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure”

Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘2.03 Time Of Flight Failure’ in
Chapter 6: ‘System Events’.
A.6.2 System Warnings

A.6.2.1 “3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown”
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at
shutdown’ in Chapter 6: ‘System Events’.
If this failure occurs, a different cleaning procedure is recommended for the 7300 Food
Grade printer to the standard one stated for this event in Chapter 6. Switch off the printer
and clean the printhead, using the cleaning procedure provided in the ‘MidiEC Printhead
Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
A.7 Troubleshooting
A.7.1 First Steps
Read this section instead of the section ‘First Steps’ in Chapter 7: ‘Troubleshooting’.
For the 7300 Food Grade printer, the first flow chart in the series is ‘Troubleshooting Start’
(provided overleaf), for which the reference is ‘FC001—7300 Food Grade Printer Only’.
This flow chart must always be followed first no matter what the fault. It ensures that all
the parameters are set for the troubleshooting session.
The flow chart also includes a check for printhead cleanliness. Cleaning the printhead can
often clear failures, such as:
• “2.01 EHT Trip”.
• “2.03 Time of Flight Failure”.
• “3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown”.
If the printhead requires cleaning, use the cleaning procedure provided in the ‘MidiEC
Printhead Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
FA69084–1
FC001—6900 Food Grade Printer Only
Troubleshooting
69571
Start
Check the installation data

on the Installation page.
Enter this data on the Flow
Chart Record Sheet.
Load the maximum size

test pattern and, if
possible, start the jet and
take a print sample.
Note any printer failures or

warnings on the Flow
Chart Record Sheet. Read the explanation of the
event message in the
Maintenance Manual.
If the printer displays a

failure code, power down
and switch off the printer.
Clean the printhead.

This action is only required
if ink deposits are visible
or Print Failure 2.01, Print
Failure 2.03 or System
Warning 3.28 have
occurred.
Switch on the printer and

set Line Setup menu >
Trigger menu > Print
Trigger menu > Leading
Edge Primary.
Line Setup menu > Speed
menu > Speed Selection
menu > Fixed Speed.
Select: Maintenance menu

> Jet Functions menu >
Jet Test – Start.
Go to the appropriate
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Figure A-10. FC001 7300 Food Grade Printer Troubleshooting Start
FA69084–1
A.8 Training Course Guides
Read this section in conjunction with Chapter 8: ‘Training Documentation’.
A.8.1 Course One: Printer Operation (Level C & Level A)

Throughout the course, the special features of the 7300 Food Grade printer must be pointed
out and, where appropriate, demonstrated. In particular, make sure that trainees are
familiar with the following points.
A.8.1.1 Warm-up Delay

To ensure reliable operation, the operator must switch on the printer at least 5 minutes
before it is to be used. This is particularly important where the ambient temperature is
below +5 °C. The software does not allow the jet to be started until at least 5 minutes after
switching on.
A.8.1.2 Cleaning Procedures

It is important to use the correct procedures for cleaning the MidiEC printhead, as
described in the ‘MidiEC Printhead Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
A.8.1.3 Delayed Shutdown Feature

This delay is an important factor in achieving reliable operation, and operators must not be
informed of the methods available to override the delay.
A.8.1.4 Humidity and Condensation

The water content of the ink used in the 7300 Food Grade printer can create a humid
environment around the components inside the printhead cover, leading to a risk of
condensation if the temperature falls. It is important to note that condensation can occur
even in warm environments and with small temperature changes. Condensation in the
printhead can cause EHT trip failures during printing, and to avoid this the 7300 Food
Grade printer performs an EHT flash test before starting the jet (see Technical Description >
Printhead Theory of Operation > Starting Up and Shutting Down, earlier in this appendix).
A.9 Illustrated Parts List

Read this section in conjunction with the parts list on ExtraLinx or the Linx 7300 Ink Jet
Printer Service Information CD.
A.9.1 Introduction
The following table identifies the few parts that are different from the standard 7300
printer and specific to the 7300 Food Grade printer.
Part Description Pack Availability

Number Quantity Terms
FA74203 6800 DUAL HEAD PUMP ASSY 1 Ex-stock

FA22061 PRINTHEAD ASSEMBLY MK7 MIDI EC 1 4 weeks
FA7402/6100 MK7 MIDI EC NOZZLE ASSY (RED FG INK 6100) 1 Ex-stock
Figure A-11. 7300 Food Grade Printer Parts
FA69084–1
A.10 On-Farm Egg Coding
A.10.1 Introduction
The 7300 Food Grade printer can be used for applications in environments that are subject to
wide temperature and humidity variations, and short printing runs, principally egg coding
on farms.
There are some additional features that are required for the standard 7300 Food Grade
printer to allow it to work effectively in the harsher conditions that are encountered in egg
coding environments.
These additional features are described in the following sections. Read these sections in
conjunction with, or instead of (as indicated), the related sections earlier in this ‘7300 Food
Grade Printer’ appendix or in other chapters of the manual.
A.10.2 Configuration Code

Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Printer Configuration Code’ in
Chapter 4: ‘System Options’.
A Configuration Code is required if the 7300 Food Grade printer is to be used in an egg
coding environment. This Configuration Code changes the warm-up delay time (see
below).
A.10.3 Warm-up Delay

Read this section instead of the section ‘Warm-up Delay’ earlier in ‘Starting Up and
Shutting Down’ of this appendix.
To ensure reliable operation, the operator must switch on the printer at least 30 minutes
before it is to be used. This is particularly important where the ambient temperature is
below +5 °C.
In conditions of high humidity, condensation can cause any dried ink deposits on the
printhead components to become conductive, which can cause EHT trip failures. To avoid
this, the 5-minute warm-up time after the printer is switched on is increased to 30 minutes.
This allows the printhead heater more time to disperse any condensation before the
software allows the jet to start (see ‘Configuration Code’ above).
During the warm-up time, the jet cannot be started with the [start] key. The jet starts
automatically at the end of the warm-up time, unless the [stop] key is pressed first to cancel
the automatic startup.
A.10.4 Maintenance Times

A.10.4.1 Maintenance Finished
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Maintenance Finished’ in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
When the 7300 Food Grade printer is used in egg coding environments, the scheduled
maintenance interval is 2400 hours/14 months.
FA69084–1
FA69084–1
Index
NOTE: In the following Index, entries contained within double quotation marks are
event messages.
Symbols
24 Volts Alarm Beacon
Installation 5—147
Output 3—82
3-Way Fluid Connector 3—9, 3—10, 3—23, 3—31
Filter Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—37, 5—61
"300V Power Supply" 3—70, 3—71, 5—6, 6—9, 7—22
A
Abbreviations 2—9
Actual Modulation 5—11
Actual Pressure 5—10
Actual TOF 3—8, 3—18, 5—12
Additional Publications xxiii
After Jet Shutdown (auto power-down option) 4—8
Air Filter 3—2
Replacement 5—37
Alarm PCB 3—82, 3—83
Alarms
24 Volts External Alarm Beacon
Output 3—82
Dual Alarm
Conversion to 5—151
Output 3—83
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V)
Output 5—196
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC)
Output 5—192
Alignment
Jet 3—20, 5—95
Nozzle 3—20
Always Log option 4—14
Amendments iii
Antistatic Precautions 5—30
Approvals, Regulatory 2—8
Arrow keys 3—4
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit
Automatic Tracking
Modulation 5—12
Modulation, Food Grade Printer A—15
Pressure 5—10
Auxiliary PCBs 3—76
B
Backing Up and Restoring Data 3—76
Battery 3—70
Block New Events option 4—11
Blocked Gutter Clearance 5—109
Built In Self-Test 3—72, 6—18
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 1 Sep 2009
C
Cabinet 3—1
Cooling 3—2
CALCHG1 option 5—18
Calendar option 4—25
Calibrate 6xxx Ink option, Food Grade Printer A—13
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) 3—21, 5—139
Calibration
Charge Amplifier 5—71
Pressure Transducer 5—237
Calibration Mode option 5—18
Calibration Value option 5—18
Cautions (Safety) 1—1
CE Approval Checklist 5—31
Change User Level page 4—27
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled P/Hs 5—175
Charge (Troubleshooting FC004) 7—9
Charge Amplifier
Calibration Procedure 5—71
Output 3—69
Charge Calibration Factor 3—20, 4—19
Charge Calibration page 5—17
EHTPSU1 option 5—18
XCAL125/XCAL255 option 5—18
Charge Electrode 3—7, 3—15
Charge Voltage 3—15, 3—69
Circuit Diagrams 3—67
Clear Event History option 4—13
Conduit Length option 4—18
Conduit Length option, Food Grade Printer A—13
Configuration Code 3—76, 4—21
Egg Coding A—19
Control Panel and Keyboard Keys xxii
Control Panel LEDs 3—4
Conventions (used in this manual) xxii
Cooling Fan 3—66
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads 5—169
"Corrupt Program Data" 6—5
Cover Override 3—71, 6—16
"Cover Override Link Fitted" 3—71, 6—16
Cover Override option 4—19
Cover Tube Magnet (printhead) 3—8
Create (test message) option 5—24
Cross-References xxii
Current Date option 4—17
Current Events page 4—10
Current Time option 4—17
D
D-Type Connector, correct assembly 3—89
Damper 3—22, 3—23
Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—37
Date & Time page 4—17
Hijri Date Offset (Days) option 4—18
Hijri Date option 4—18
Debounce
Primary Trigger 3—72, 3—78
Secondary Trigger 3—73, 3—80
Deflector and Phase Plate (DPP) 3—7
Deflector Plates 3—7, 3—16
Cleanliness 3—16
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Delay (auto power-down option) 4—9
Delayed on Idle (auto power-down option) 4—8
Delayed on Jet Running (auto power-down option) 4—9
Delayed on Printing (auto power-down option) 4—9
Density, Ink 3—8
Disable Mix option 4—23
Display 3—4
Display PCB 3—76
Downloading Software 3—77
Draining the Ink System 5—47
Drop Charge 3—15
Drop Deflection 3—16
Drops item 5—27
Dual Alarm 3—84
Dynamic Flow Control 3—11
Module Replacement 5—229
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) 5—233
E
Edit Interval option 4—15
Edit Modulation option 5—11
Edit Modulation page
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option 5—12
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option, Food Grade A—15
Edit Pressure option 5—9
Edit Pressure page
Automatic Tracking (pressure) option 5—10
Egg Coding, Food Grade Printer A—19
Configuration Code A—19
Maintenance Times A—19
Warm-up Delay A—19
EHT default value 3—64
EHT Deflection (Troubleshooting FC010) 7—15
EHT Flash Test A—3
EHT Power Supply Unit 2—3, 3—64
"EHT Trip" 5—6, 6—7, 7—19
"EHT Trip", Food Grade Printer A—16
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Compliance 2—8
EMC Directive 2—8
European EMC Standards 2—8
USA EMC Standards 2—8
EMC Compliance 2—8
Empty Tank option 5—22
Empty Tank Sequence 3—55
Enclosure Protection Compliance 2—8
Engineering units 4—24
Environmental Compliance 2—8
RoHS Directive 2—8
Environmental Specification 2—1
Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces (Combined)
Ethernet Interface 3—88
Event Filtering page 4—12
Hide/Show Faults options 4—12
Hide/Show Information options 4—12
Hide/Show Warnings options 4—12
Event History page 4—10
Block New Events option 4—11
Clear Event History option 4—13
Track New Events option 4—11
FA69084–1
Event Log 4—10
Current Events page 4—10
Event Filtering page 4—12
Event History page 4—10
Event Setup page 4—13
Event Setup page 4—13
Always Log option 4—14
Edit Interval option 4—15
Log At Intervals option 4—14
Never Log option 4—14
Reset Count option 4—15
Events messages 6—1
External Alarm Beacons
24 Volts Alarm
Output 3—82
External Alarms
Dual Alarm
Mains (VFC) Alarm
Output 3—83
Output 5—196
Output 5—192
External Signals 3—77
Alarm Output 3—82
Dual Alarm 3—84
Ethernet Interface 3—88
Multi-Stage Alarm 3—84
Parallel I/O Interface 3—86
Primary Trigger 3—77
Secondary Trigger 3—79
Serial Interface 3—85
Shaft Encoders 3—80
USB Facility 3—88
F
Fail LED 3—4
"Fault Prevented Mix" 6—19
Fault Shutdown Sequence 3—50
Feed Dry Cycle option 5—22
Feed Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Feed Valve (Ink System) 3—22, 3—23, 3—28, 3—31, 3—41
Testing for Leaks 5—79
Feed Valve (Printhead) 3—9, 3—31, 3—41
Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
Filter Replacement 5—165
Feed valve option 5—23
Filter, Air 3—2
Replacement 5—37
Filter Purge option 5—21
Filter Purge Sequence 3—54
Final Test (Troubleshooting FC999) 7—31
First Aid 1—5
Eye Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Ingestion of Inks or Solvents 1—5
Inhalation of Solvent Fumes 1—5
Skin Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Flash Memory 3—77
Float Switches 3—22, 3—65
FA69084–1
Fluid Connector, 3-way 3—9, 3—10, 3—23, 3—31
Filter Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—37, 5—61
Fluid Level Control 2—4
Fluid Level Sensors (Float Switches) 3—22, 3—65
Flush Cycle option 5—22
Flush Cycle Sequence 3—53
Food Grade Inks
Ink Types A—1
Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Food Grade Options Link A—11
Food Grade Printer 3—1
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option A—15
Calibrate 6xxx Ink option A—13
Conduit Length option A—13
Egg Coding A—19
Configuration Code A—19
Maintenance Times A—19
Warm-up Delay A—19
EHT Flash Test A—3
Flow Diagram, Static Ink System A—6
Gutter Restrictor A—2
Ink and Solvent Flows A—8
Ink System A—4
Ink System Connections A—7
Ink Type Dependent Parameters 3—59
Ink/Solvent page A—13
IPM PCB Links A—11
Minimum Run Time A—4, A—11
Link A—11
Overridng the Shutdown Delay A—14
Modulation Frequency A—3
Options Link A—11
Parts List A—18
Positive Air Pump A—11
Power Down page A—12
Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Printhead Code option A—13
Printhead page A—12
Printhead Type option A—13
Pump/Motor Assembly A—10
Secondary Ink Circuit A—8
Training Courses Special Features A—18
Valve Sequences
Normal Shutdown Sequence A—9
Normal Start Sequence A—8
Viscosity Control A—3
Warm-up Delay A—4, A—19
Fuses (Mains) 3—63
G
"Gate Array Test Mode Active" 6—18
Glossary 2—9
Gregorian calendar 4—25
Guard Drops 3—16
Gun Chamber 3—7
Gutter (clearing a blockage) 5—109
Gutter Check Valve (In-Line) 3—10
Gutter Dry Cycle option 5—22
Gutter Dry Cycle Sequence 3—55
"Gutter Override Active" 3—72, 6—17
Gutter Restrictor 3—10
Gutter Restrictor, Food Grade Printer A—2
Gutter Sense Override 3—72, 6—17
Gutter Valve 3—28, 3—41
Testing for Leaks 5—82, 5—85
Testing for Operation 5—85
Gutter valve option 5—23
FA69084–1
H
Hall-Effect Switch 3—8, 3—15
"Hardware Safety Trip" 6—12, 7—30
Hide/Show Faults options 4—12
Hide/Show Information options 4—12
Hide/Show Warnings options 4—12
High Viscosity Ink (Troubleshooting FC009) 7—14
Historic Correction 3—15
I
ID page 4—20
Printer Configuration Code option 4—21
Printer Serial Number option 4—22
UNIC Code option 4—21
Imperial units 4—24
Important Notes xxiii
In-Line Feed Filter 3—9, 3—31
In-Line Gutter Check Valve 3—10
Ink Bottles item 5—27
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) 5—127
Ink Density 3—8
Ink Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—22, 3—23, 3—31
Filter 3—22
Replacement 5—36
Ink Flow 3—31
Ink Flow, Food Grade Printer A—8
"Ink Low" 3—22, 6—13
Ink Low (level) 2—4
"Ink Low Prevented Mix" 6—19
Ink Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—57
Ink Mixing Valve 3—22, 3—23, 3—28, 3—39, 3—41
Ink Mixing—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—23, 3—39
Damper Purge 3—39
Ink Mixing 3—39
Pump Jog-Start 3—39
Ink Quality (Troubleshooting FC007) 7—12
Ink Spillage Detection 3—65, 6—10
Ink System 2—3, 3—2, 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Connections 3—29
Connections, Food Grade Printer A—7
Construction 2—3
Damper 3—22, 3—23
Draining 5—47
Electrical Connections 2—3
Environmental 2—3
Feed Valve Test 5—79
Flow Diagram, Static Ink System
7300 Food Grade Printer A—6
7300 Spectrum Printer 3—25
Standard 7300 Printer 3—24
Fluid Level Control 2—4
Fluid Level Sensors (Float Switches) 3—22, 3—65
Food Grade Printer A—4
Gutter Valve Tests 5—81
Ink Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—22, 3—23
Ink Spillage Detection 3—65, 6—10
Ink Tank 3—22
IP Rating 2—3
Main Ink Filter 3—22, 3—23
Maximum Surface Temperature of valves solenoids 2—3
Performance 2—4
Pressure 2—3
FA69084–1
Primary Ink Circuit
Standard 7300 and Food Grade Printers 3—31
Pump/Motor Assembly 3—22, 3—65
Pump/Motor Assembly, Food Grade Printer A—10
Purge Valve Test 5—81
Secondary Ink Circuit
All 7300 Printers 3—31
Solvent Add Valve Tests 5—91
Solvent Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—23
Solvent Flush Valve Tests 5—87
Solvent Tank 3—22
Valves 3—28, 3—65
Venturi 3—23
Ink Tank
7300 Spectrum 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Construction 2—3
Removal 5—53
Standard 7300 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Construction 2—3
Ink Tank Dip (Pick-up) Tube
Replacement 3—23, 5—57
"Ink Tank Empty" 3—22, 6—9, 7—23
Ink Type Dependent Parameters 3—58
Micro printhead 3—60
Midi A printhead 3—59
Midi plus printhead 3—61
Midi printhead 3—58
MidiEC printhead 3—59
Mini printhead 3—60
Ultima A printhead 3—59
Ultima plus printhead 3—61
Ultima printhead 3—58
"Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks" 6—19
Ink Viscosity 3—8, 3—18, 3—19
Ink/Solvent page 4—22
Ink/Solvent Type option 4—23
Last Mix option 4—23
Mix Time option 4—23
Next Mix option 4—23
Ink/Solvent page, Food Grade Printer A—13
Inks and Solvents (Safety) 1—3
Installation page 4—16
ID page 4—20
FA69084–1
Locale page 4—24
Keyboard option 4—25
Language option 4—24
Secondary Keyboard option 4—25
Units option 4—24
Use Language Defaults option 4—24
Photocells page 4—26
Printhead page 4—18
Mod Slope option 4—20
Printhead Code option 4—19
Printhead Height option 4—18
Printhead Type option 4—18
Printhead page, Food Grade Printer A—12
"Internal Failure" 6—5
"Internal Spillage" 5—6, 6—10, 7—25
IP Rating 3—1
Ink System 2—3
Printer Cabinet 2—1
IPM PCB 3—67, 3—76
Charge Amplifier Calibration Procedure 5—71
Links 3—70
Links, Food Grade Printer A—11
Links locations 3—75
Pressure Transducer Calibration Procedure 5—237
Replacement and Calibration 3—76
Test Points 3—68
Test Points locations 3—75
Isolated Secondary Trigger Input 3—73, 3—80
J
Jet (Troubleshooting FC002) 7—7
Jet Alignment 3—20, 5—95
Jet Functions page 5—5
Jet Test – Start option 5—6
Jet Test – Stop option 5—7
Jet Test – Stop option, Food Grade Printer A—14
Start Print option 5—7
Stop Print option 5—7
Test Print option 5—8
Jet Run Time (Present) 5—16
Jet Run Time (Total) 5—16
Jet Sequences page 5—19
Jet State box 5—19
Nozzle Clear option 5—21
Nozzle Flush option 5—20
Purge Dry Cycle option 5—22
Reset Sequence Count option 5—19
Solvent Drain option 5—22
Start Sequence option 5—19
Stop Sequence option 5—19
Jet Test – Start Sequence 3—44
FA69084–1
Jet Test – Stop Sequence 3—50
Jog-Start Routine 3—39
K
Keyboard 3—4
Keys
Control Panel xxii
Keyboard xxii
L
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 3—4
LEDs 3—4
Lethal Voltages 1—3
Line Setup page 4—7
Power Down page 4—7
After Jet Shutdown option 4—8
Delay option 4—9
Delayed on Idle option 4—8
Delayed on Jet Running option 4—9
Delayed on Printing option 4—9
Power Down page, Food Grade Printer A—12
Links
IPM PCB 3—70
IPM PCB, Food Grade Printer A—11
IPM PCB locations 3—75
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures 5—209
Locale page 4—24
Units option 4—24
Log At Intervals option 4—14
"Low Pressure" 3—19, 3—36, 5—10, 6—18
Low Pressure (Troubleshooting FC006) 7—11
Low Viscosity Ink (Troubleshooting FC008) 7—13
Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 2—2, 3—63
M
Main Ink Filter 3—22, 3—23
Purging 5—36, 5—37, 5—69
Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—65
Output 3—83
Mains Cable Connector 3—62
Mains Filter 3—63
Mains Input Fuses 3—63
Mains Power Cable 3—62
Mains Power Requirements 2—2
Mains Power Supply Switch 3—62
Maintenance Due By option 5—16
Maintenance Due Within option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option, Egg Coding A—19
Maintenance Instructions 5—29
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mount) 5—147
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement 5—61
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation 5—179
Blocked Gutter Clearance 5—109
FA69084–1
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) 5—139
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled P/Hs 5—175
Charge Amplifier Calibration 5—71
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Inst. 5—205
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads 5—169
Draining the Ink System 5—47
Dual Alarm Installation 5—197
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement 5—229
Ethernet Interface Installation 5—201
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) 5—127
Ink System Feed Valve Test 5—79
Ink Tank Dip (Pick-up) Tube Replacement 5—57
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning 5—95
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures 5—209
Main Ink Filter Purging 5—69
Main Ink Filter Replacement 5—65
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion 5—151
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Modulation Range Checks 5—105
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion 5—193
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion 5—189
Parallel I/O Interface Installation 5—185
Positive Air Pump Installation 5—157
Pressure Transducer Calibration 5—237
Printer Installation 5—145
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks 5—43
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement 5—165
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) 5—233
Printhead Valves Tests 5—75
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests 5—81
Scheduled Maintenance 5—33
Solvent Add Valve Tests 5—91
Solvent Flush Valve Tests 5—87
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal 5—53
System Flush 5—115
Maintenance Options 5—1
Option Availability 5—3
Password Access 4—3
Maintenance page 5—5
Charge Calibration page 5—17
Jet Functions page 5—5
Jet Sequences page 5—19
FA69084–1
Maintenance Times page 5—15
Power On Time (Present) 5—15
Power On Time (Total) 5—15
Monitor Jet page 5—8
Actual TOF 5—12
Phase 5—14
Pressure in p.s.i./bar/bits option 5—11
Reference Modulation 5—11
Reference Modulation, Food Grade Printer A—13, A—15
Reference Pressure 5—10
Reference TOF 5—12
Set Pressure 5—9
Solvent Add Count 5—14
Solvent Add Pressure 5—9
Temp (printhead temperature) 5—14
TOF Mode option 5—13
Print and Consumables History page 5—26
Drops item 5—27
Messages item 5—27
Recent Drops item 5—27
Recent Ink Bottles item 5—27
Recent Messages item 5—27
Recent Solvent Bottles item 5—28
Reset Recent option 5—28
Solvent Bottles item 5—27
System Flush page 5—25
Test Message page 5—24
Create option 5—24
Save option 5—25
Valves page 5—23
Mix valve option 5—23
Open/Close option 5—23
Printhead Feed valve option 5—23
Purge valve option 5—23
Solvent Add valve option 5—23
Solvent Flush valve option 5—23
Valve Reset option 5—23
Maintenance Terminology 5—29
Maintenance Times page 5—15
Manual Phase option 5—13
Maximum Pressure 3—42
Memory Capacity 2—7
"Memory Corrupt" 6—13
FA69084–1
Menu page 4—9
Change User Level page 4—27
Event Log 4—10
Setup page 4—16
Message Types 2—5, 3—13, 3—64, 4—21, 5—24
Metric units 4—24
Micrometre (µm) 3—22
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Minimum Run Time A—4, A—11
IPM PCB Link A—11
Overriding the Shutdown Delay A—14
"Misaligned Ink Jet" 6—10, 7—27
"Mix Disabled" 4—23, 6—19
Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—57
Mixing Valve 3—22, 3—23, 3—28, 3—39, 3—41
Modulation 3—13
Modulation (Troubleshooting FC003) 7—8
Modulation Frequency 3—14, 3—69
Modulation Frequency, Food Grade Printer A—3
Modulation Range Checks 5—105
Modulation Tracking Slope 4—20
Modulation Voltage 3—14, 3—69
Monitor Jet page 5—8
Actual TOF 5—12
Edit Modulation page
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option 5—12
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option, Food Grade A—15
Edit Pressure page
Automatic Tracking (pressure) option 5—10
Phase 5—14
Reference Modulation 5—11
Reference Pressure 5—10
Set Pressure 5—9
Solvent Add Pressure 5—9
TOF Mode page
TOF Only option 5—13
TOF/Phase option 5—13
Multi-Stage Alarm 3—84
Output 5—196
Output 5—192
N
Never Log option 4—14
FA69084–1
Next Object Input 3—69
"No Time Of Flight" 6—18
Normal Shutdown Sequence 3—46
Normal Shutdown Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—9
Normal Start Sequence 3—44
Normal Start Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—8
Nozzle Alignment 3—20
Nozzle Assembly 3—7
Nozzle Cleaning 5—95
Hot Water Wash 5—101
Nozzle Clear 5—97
Nozzle Soaking 5—99
Nozzle Washing 5—100
Solvent Wash 5—100
Nozzle Clear Sequence 3—52, 5—97
Nozzle Flush Sequence 3—56
Nozzle Realignment 5—103
Nozzle Replacement 3—21, 5—139
NPN/PNP (triggering devices) 3—77, 3—79
O
Open/Close (valves) option 5—23
Option Availability
Maintenance Options 5—3
System Options 4—5
Options
How to Select and Change Options 4—2, 5—1
"Over Speed (Asynchronous Data)" 6—15
"Over Speed (Compensation)" 6—15
"Over Speed (Line Speed)" 6—15
"Over Speed (No Remote Data)" 6—20
"Over Speed (Print Trigger)" 6—14
"Over Speed (Synchronous Data)" 6—14
P
Parallel I/O Interface 3—76, 3—86, 5—185
Link Positions 3—86
Pin Connections 3—88
Parts List, Food Grade Printer A—18
Password Access 4—3, 5—2
Phase 5—14
Phase (Troubleshooting FC005) 7—10
Phase Control 3—17
"Phase Failure" 6—8, 7—20
Phase Packet 3—17
Phase Positions 3—17
Phase Sensor 3—7, 3—17
Phase/TOF during a Stalled Print 3—18
Phasing 3—7, 3—17
Piezoelectric Crystal 3—13
Pigmented Inks, Printhead Cleaning 5—43
PIO PCB 3—76, 3—86, 5—185
Positive Air Pump 3—66
Positive Air Pump, Food Grade Printer A—11
Power Cable 3—62
After Jet Shutdown option 4—8
Delay option 4—9
Delayed on Idle option 4—8
Delayed on Jet Running option 4—9
Delayed on Printing option 4—9
FA69084–1
Power LED 3—4
"Power Off Occurred During Mixing" 6—19
Power Off Override 3—71, 6—17
"Power Off Override Active" 3—71, 6—17
Power On Switch 3—63
Pressure Conversion Figures 3—41
"Pressure Limit Reached" 6—11, 7—28
"Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped" 6—12
Pressure Relief Valve, Pump 3—22, 3—23
Pressure Transducer 3—27
Calibration Procedure 5—237
Primary Ink Circuit
Standard 7300 and Food Grade Printers 3—31
Primary Trigger 3—77
Primary Trigger Signal 3—69
Print (Troubleshooting FC011) 7—16
Print and Consumables History page 5—26
Drops item 5—27
Print Failures 6—6
2.00 Printhead Over Temperature 3—8, 5—6, 6—7, 7—18
2.01 EHT Trip 5—6, 6—7, 7—19
2.01 EHT Trip, Food Grade Printer A—16
2.02 Phase Failure 6—8, 7—20
2.03 Time Of Flight Failure 3—18, 6—9, 7—21
2.03 Time Of Flight Failure, Food Grade Printer A—16
2.04 300V Power Supply 3—70, 3—71, 5—6, 6—9, 7—22
2.05 Ink Tank Empty 3—22, 6—9, 7—23
2.06 Solvent Tank Empty 3—22, 6—9, 7—24
2.07 Internal Spillage 5—6, 6—10, 7—25
2.08 Printer Over Temperature 3—66, 6—10, 7—26
2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet 6—10, 7—27
2.11 Pressure Limit Reached 6—11, 7—28
2.12 Viscosity 3—19, 6—11, 7—29
2.13 Hardware Safety Trip 6—12, 7—30
2.14 Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped 6—12
Print Monitor 4—1
Print Quality 3—20
Print Quality (Troubleshooting FC012) 7—17
Printer Cabinet
Construction 2—2
Dimensions 2—2
Weight 2—2
Printer Configuration Code 3—76
Printer Configurations 2—1
Printer Installation 5—145
Printer Models xxii
"Printer Over Temperature" 3—66, 6—10, 7—26
"Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance" 5—16, 6—16
FA69084–1
Printhead 2—5
Cleaning
for Food Grade Inks 5—223
for Pigmented Inks 5—43
Components 3—6
Connections 3—10
Construction 2—5
Correct Installation 5—169
Cover Sensor 3—8
Cover Tube Magnet 3—8
Dimensions 2—5
Feed Valve Filter Replacement 5—165
Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
Feed Valve Test 5—75
Positive Air Pump 3—66
Positive Air Pump, Food Grade Printer A—11
Purge Valve Test 5—75
Replacement 3—21
Replacement (Printer with DFC) 5—233
Right-Angled, Changing the Orientation 5—175
Temperature 5—14
Temperature Sensor 3—8
Types 2—5, 3—12
Valves 3—9, 3—20, 3—31
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks 5—43
Printhead Code 3—20
Printhead Code option, Food Grade Printer A—13
"Printhead Cover Off" 3—71, 6—16
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement 5—165
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
"Printhead Over Temperature" 3—8, 5—6, 6—7, 7—18
"Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown" 6—19
Printhead to Substrate Distance 2—7
Printhead Type option, Food Grade Printer A—13
Printing Performance 2—5
Publications, Additional xxiii
Pump Jog-Start Routine 3—39
Pump/Motor Assembly 3—22, 3—65
Pump/Motor Assembly, Food Grade Printer A—10
Purge Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Purge Valve (Ink System) 3—28, 3—41
Purge Valve (Printhead) 3—9
Q
Quality, Print 3—20
FA69084–1
R
Read Pressure 3—68
Ready LED 3—4
Recommended Procedures 5—30
Reference Modulation 3—14, 3—20, 4—19, 5—11
Reference Pressure 3—19, 3—20, 3—43, 4—19, 5—10
Reference TOF 3—8, 3—18, 5—12
Regulatory Approvals 2—8
"Remote Error" 6—20
Reset Count option 4—15
"Restart In Progress" 6—19
Restart Sequence 3—45
"Restarted Print Delay" 6—20
RS232 and RS422 3—71, 3—73, 3—85
Cable Connections 3—85
S
Safety 1—1
First Aid 1—5
Eye Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Ingestion of Inks or Solvents 1—5
Inhalation of Solvent Fumes 1—5
Skin Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Inks and Solvents 1—3
Lethal Voltages 1—3
Test Printing 1—6
Warnings and Cautions 1—1
Safety Compliance 2—8
European Safety Standards 2—8
Low Voltage Directive 2—8
Safety Functions 3—76
Safety Override 3—70, 6—17
"Safety Override Active" 3—71, 6—17
Safety Recommendation v
Save (test message) option 5—25
Scheduled Maintenance 5—33
Scheduled Maintenance Checklist 5—32
Secondary Ink Circuit
All 7300 Printers 3—31
Secondary Trigger 3—79
Secondary Trigger Input 3—68
Security Level 4—27
Serial Interface 3—85
Set Pressure 3—8, 3—19, 3—68, 5—9
Setup page 4—16
ID page 4—20
Locale page 4—24
Shaft Encoders 3—80
"Shutdown Incomplete" 6—13
FA69084–1
"Shutdown Incomplete (Failure)" 6—13
Shutting Down 3—19
Soft keys 3—4
Software 3—77
Backing Up and Restoring Data 5—217
Downloading Software 3—77
Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software 5—215
Programming—Normal 5—211
Transferring Data 5—219
Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) Valve 3—23, 3—28, 3—41
Solvent Add Offset 3—43
Solvent Add Pressure 3—8, 3—19, 3—43, 5—9
Solvent Add Time 3—36
Solvent Addition, Automatic—All 7300 Printers 3—36, 6—11
Solvent Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—22, 3—23, 5—88, 5—93
Filter 3—23
Solvent Drain Sequence 3—55
Solvent Flow 3—31
Solvent Flow, Food Grade Printer A—8
Solvent Flush Valve 3—23, 3—28, 3—41
"Solvent Low" 3—19, 3—22, 3—36, 6—14
Solvent Low (level) 2—4
Solvent Tank 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Construction 2—3
"Solvent Tank Empty" 3—22, 6—9, 7—24
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal 5—53
Spillage Detection, Ink 3—65, 6—10
"Stack Overflow" 6—5
Standards 2—8
Standby Mode—7300 Spectrum Only 4—23
Starting Up 3—19
Strobe LED 3—7, 3—15
SureFill page 6—13, 6—14
System Event page 6—1
System Events 6—1
System Failures 6—4
1.00 Internal Failure 6—5
1.01 Stack Overflow 6—5
1.02 Corrupt Program Data 6—5
System Flush 5—115
Empty Ink Tank 5—120
Flush Cycle 5—124
Precautions 5—120
Solvent Drain 5—125
System Flush Cycle Sequence 3—53
System Flush page 5—25
System Flush Procedure 5—120
System Options
Line Setup page 4—7
FA69084–1
Menu page 4—9
Option Availability 4—5
Password Access 5—2
System Warnings 6—13
3.00 Shutdown Incomplete 6—13
3.01 Shutdown Incomplete (Failure) 6—13
3.02 Memory Corrupt 6—13
3.03 Ink Low 3—22, 6—13
3.04 Solvent Low 3—19, 3—22, 3—36, 6—14
3.05 Over Speed (Print Trigger) 6—14
3.06 Over Speed (Synchronous Data) 6—14
3.07 Over Speed (Asynchronous Data) 6—15
3.08 Over Speed (Line Speed) 6—15
3.09 Over Speed (Compensation) 6—15
3.10 Under Speed (Line Speed) 6—15
3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance 5—16, 6—16
3.12 Printhead Cover Off 3—71, 6—16
3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted 3—71, 6—16
3.14 Power Off Override Active 3—71, 6—17
3.15 Safety Override Active 3—71, 6—17
3.16 Gutter Override Active 3—72, 6—17
3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active 6—18
3.18 Low Pressure 3—19, 3—36, 5—10, 6—18
3.19 Valid UNIC Chip Not Found 6—18
3.20 No Time Of Flight 6—18
3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix 6—19
3.22 Fault Prevented Mix 6—19
3.23 Power Off Occurred During Mixing 6—19
3.24 Restart In Progress 6—19
3.25 Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks 6—19
3.26 User Data Corrupt–Please contact your local.. 6—19
3.27 Mix Disabled 4—23, 6—19
3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown 6—19
3.29 Over Speed (No Remote Data) 6—20
3.30 Remote Error 6—20
3.31 Restarted Print Delay 6—20
T
Technical Data 2—1
Temperature Sensor, Printhead 3—8
Test Message, creating 5—24
Test Message page 5—24
Create option 5—24
Save option 5—25
Test Points
IPM PCB 3—68
IPM PCB locations 3—75
Test Printing (Safety) 1—6
Time Of Flight (TOF) 3—8, 3—18
"Time Of Flight Failure" 3—18, 6—9, 7—21
"Time Of Flight Failure", Food Grade Printer A—16
Time Of Flight Measurement 3—7
TOF
Actual TOF 3—18
TOF Mode page
TOF Sensor 3—7
FA69084–1
TOF Signal 3—18
Track New Events option 4—11
Training Course Guides 8—1
Food Grade Printer Special Features A—18
Level A: Module 01 – Introduction 8—13
Level A: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing 8—14
Level A: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing 8—15
Level A: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting.. 8—16
Level A: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer 8—17
Level A: Module 09 – Line Installation 8—18
Level A: Module 10 – Review 8—19
Level C: Module 01 – Introduction 8—3
Level C: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing 8—4
Level C: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing 8—5
Level C: Module 04 – Navigating the 7300 8—6
Level C: Module 05 – Creating and Editing Messages 8—7
Level C: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting.. 8—8
Level C: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer 8—9
Level C: Module 08 – Routine Maintenance 8—10
Level C: Module 09 – Line Installation 8—11
Level C: Module 10 – Review 8—12
Trigger Device Types 3—77, 3—79
Troubleshooting 7—1
Miscellaneous Faults
Spectrum printer—no print 7—3
Spectrum printer—printing, but low ink opacity 7—3
Troubleshooting Start (T'shoot. FC001) 7—6
Troubleshooting Start (T'shoot. FC001), Food Grade A—17
U
"Under Speed (Line Speed)" 6—15
UNIC 3—67, 3—76, 4—21, 6—18
Units option 4—24
USB Facility 3—76, 3—88
"User Data Corrupt–Please contact your local..." 6—19
User Interface 3—4
V
"Valid UNIC Chip Not Found" 6—18
Valve Cableform Assembly 3—65
Valve Sequences 3—41, A—8
Empty Tank Sequence 3—55
Fault Shutdown Sequence 3—50
Feed Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Filter Purge Sequence 3—54
Flush Cycle Sequence 3—53
Gutter Dry Cycle Sequence 3—55
Ink Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—57
Jet Test – Start Sequence 3—44
Jet Test – Stop Sequence 3—50
Normal Shutdown Sequence 3—46
Normal Shutdown Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—9
Normal Start Sequence 3—44
Normal Start Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—8
Nozzle Clear Sequence 3—52
Nozzle Flush Sequence 3—56
Purge Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Restart Sequence 3—45
Solvent Drain Sequence 3—55
Valve Sequences Summary Tables 3—41
Valve Sequences Summary Tables, Food Grade A—8
FA69084–1
Valves (Ink System) 3—28, 3—65
Valves page 5—23
Open/Close option 5—23
Venturi 3—23, 3—27
Venturi Manifold Assembly 3—22, 3—23, 3—26
"Viscosity" 3—19, 6—11, 7—29
Viscosity Control 3—19
Viscosity Control, Food Grade Printer A—3
Viscosity, Ink 3—8, 3—18, 3—19
Viscosity Settle Time 3—19, 3—36
W
Warm-up Delay A—4, A—19
Warning LED 3—4
Warnings (Safety) 1—1
Width Adjuster Unit 3—82
X
FA69084–1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NOTES MK7 PRINT
1. OPTION BUSS INTERFACE SIGNALS THERMISTOR HEAD INK SYSTEM
NOTE 5 FEED
5V,12V,24V,-16V OPTION BOARD NEXT OBJECT P/CELL VALVE
D[0..7] OPTION BOARD AUXILIARY INPUT
A[28..31] I2CSCL, I2CSDA MODULATION
/A-OE-/GPL-B1, A-WE0-/BS-AB0, /A-RESET /DREQ1, /SDACK1
SMTXD2, AUX-SMRXD2 RASTER-TRIG
IRQ4-AUX0-1
OPTION BOARD SHAFT ENCODER
CHARGE
2. OPTION FUNCTIONS/BOARDS..CONNECTOR DETAILS GUTTER

VALVE
OPTION CONNECTOR
PHOTO CELL/SHAFT ENCODER SPLITTER 9 WAY D FEMALE
RS232/RS485 1 x 9 WAY D FEMALE + 2 x 9 WAY D FEMALE STACKED
PARALLEL I/O 25 WAY D IP RATED STROBE LED
3. ONLY ONE TYPE OF ALARM MAY BE FITTED
4. HONEYWELL SS21PE PRINTHEAD

HEATER INK TANK
D D
TO UP
5. NTC 10K SIEMENS B57621C103J62 LEVEL SENSOR VALVE
DPP PLATE
(PHASE/TOF)
7. POSITIVE AIR PUMP TYPE ASF THOMAS BLG 12/02-4
8. FAN TYPE
6800R PAPST 3414 24V 2.4 W GUTTER

6800S COMAIR ROTRON BD24B7 24V 11.5W SENSE PURGE
VALVE
9. PLUG & SOCKET REVERSED IN 1 POSITION TO DIFFERENTIATE
COVER SENSOR
10. BELLING LEE/SCHAFFNER (HALL EFFECT)
NOTE 6
SOLVENT TANK
LEVEL SENSOR
PRINTHEAD PHFEED 120 MOTOR 070 PUMP FLUSH

FEED VALVE VALVE HITACHI TX14D11VM1CBA
VALVE
1/4 VGA TFT LCD
320 X 240
SPARE VPOWERS SPAREIV KEYBOARD/LEDS

PHEAD /SPAREPH- NOTE 4 VALVE CFL
VALVE BACKLIGHT
SAFETY 24 WAY 8 WAY

EARTH + SUPPLY FLEXIBLE TAIL FLEXIBLE TAIL
40 WAY
FLEXIBLE
24 WAY 8 WAY 40 WAY CABLE
R/A BS STRIP R/A BS STRIP CONNECTOR
+ SIGNAL - SIGNAL
INK SPILL
DETECTOR
PRESSURE
2 WAY MOLEX 2 WAY MOLEX TRANSDUCER PL17 PL18 SK1
MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR KEYPAD LED'S LCD
CONDUIT - SUPPLY
2/4 NOTE 12
METRES PL20 7 WAY
INVERTER CONNECTOR
HITACHI INVERTER
C 40 WAY IDC
CONNECTOR
PL38
K/BOARD IPM
SCAN0-9
INVC657
C
RETURN0-7
/LCD-ENB
12V, 3.3V, 0V, 0VI
EHT3000 PSU SAFETY
EARTH
MP15007 HIGHVOL EHT PL37
CONNECTOR 18 WAY MOLEX 24 WAY MOLEX 24 WAY MOLEX LCD IPM
0 - 10KV MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR 34 WAY IDC
3 x RADIALL MCX CONNECTOR LD0-8, SHIFT-CLK, LCD-A-C+
SERIES MINI BNC LD0-8, SHIFT-CLK, LCD-A-C-
/CTRL/ALT/SHIFT
/FAIL, WARNING, READY-LED
SK3 SK4 SK5 PL6 PL3 PL1 PL17 DISPLAY PCB

PL7 PHASE CHARGE MOD PRINTHEAD PUMP INK SYSTEM K/BOARD IPM
24V 12 WAY MOLEX
MOLEX 12 WAY MOLEX EHT / AS13629
PROG MINIFIT JNR
JNR MINIFIT JNR STROBE+ RTHERM 24V VPOWERS NO-INK SCAN0-9
/EHT-EN 322V STROBE- GUTSENSE DRIVE /FEED- NO-SOLVENT RETURN0-7
/322V-EN /COVER 0VCHASSIS 0VP /GUTTER- /SPILL /LCD-ENB
322V 24V VPOWERS 5V /TOPUP- PRESST+ 12V, 3.3V, 0V, 0VI
/EHT-OVER PROG /PHFEED- -10VREF /PURGE- PRESST-
/EHT-EN /SPAREPH- /FLUSH- 5VREF
/322V-EN /SPAREIV- 0V
322V
/EHT-OVER PL21
LCD IPM
2 WAY MOLEX
POSITIVE MINIFIT JNR PL9 LD0-8, SHIFT-CLK, LCD-A-C+
POS AIR LD0-8, SHIFT-CLK, LCD-A-C-
AIR PUMP IPM PCB /CTRL/ALT/SHIFT
NOTE 7 12V /FAIL, WARNING, READY-LED
0V AS13592
PL12
PHOTOCELL
SHAFT
PL5
ENCODER 10 WAY IDC
COOLING AUTO
SPLITTER CONNECTOR
FAN 2 WAY MOLEX POWER
NOTE 8 MINIFIT JNR OFF 24VFD SE-INPUT
24V PRI-IN SEC-IN
POWEROFF- 0VF QSE-INPUT
P-BUSY SEC-IN-ISOL+ 14 WAY IDC
5VFD CONNECTOR
PL25 14 WAY RIBBON
DISPLAY CABLE ASSEMBLY
LOW VOLTAGE PSU
RXD2+/-
COUTANT POP111 TXD2+/-
MP10674 0/5/12V
B SK6
ETHERNET
SK7
4 WAY USB B
CONNECTOR
4 WAY USB A
PL14
OPTION
B
ETHERNET CONNECTOR
BUSS 50 WAY IDC 50 WAY IDC
PL8 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
POWER SK8 8 WAY RJ45
5.1V 16 WAY MOLEX 16 WAY MOLEX ETHERNET CONNECTOR NOTE 1
L 12V MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR 5.1V
N -16V 12V PL30
E 24V -16V PL15 10 WAY IDC
PF 24V SMC1 CONNECTOR PL27
PF PL10 2 WAY MOLEX ALARM VFC
PL16 10 WAY IDC 24V ALARM MINIFIT JNR
SMC2 CONNECTOR COM
24V NC1
L N 14 WAY MOLEX PL19 10 WAY IDC RETURN NO2
0V TO CHASSIS MINIFIT JNR PL18 SCC3 CONNECTOR NO3
CONNECTON AUTO POWER OFF NC4
PIO PCB NO4
LIVE-SWRELIN
NEUTRAL_SWRELIN AS16127
LIVE-SWRELOUT
NEUTRAL_SWRELOUT NOTE 2
MAINS SWITCH PL13 6 WAY MOLEX MULTI STAGE MULTI STAGE

MOMENTARY NO RS232/422 PL11 PL29 MINIFIT JNR
SK9 SK1 SK2 VOLT 4 WAY MOLEX 4 WAY MOLEX ALARM 24V
ALARM PCB PL1 ALARM PCB
ON 8/8 WAY V RJ45 ETHERNET PHOTOCELL/SHAFT PHOTOCELL/SHAFT
(FLASH
PROG) FREE
MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR PL1 AS13718 COM AS13718
PL1 PL1 24V 24V NC1
TX+-S ENCODER ENCODER DCD3 CTS3 ALARM NO 24V ALARM1 ALARM1 NO2
TX--S 24VFD SE-INPUT 24VFD SE-INPUT /DSR3 /DTR3 NC RETURN ALARM2 ALARM2 NO3
RX+-S PRI-IN SEC-IN PRI-IN SEC-IN /RXD3 /R13 NO COM ALARM3 ALARM3 NC4
RX--S 0VF QSE-INPUT 0VF QSE-INPUT RTS3 RXD3+/- NC FUSED ALARM PCB 4 WAY MOLEX FUSED ALARM PCB ALARM4 ALARM4 NO4
P-BUSY SEC-IN-ISOL+ P-BUSY SEC-IN-ISOL+ /TXD3 TXD3+/- COM MINIFIT JNR SK10
5VFD 5VFD AS13741 AS13741 PIO 6 WAY MOLEX
MINIFIT JNR
L N
NOTE 10
ROCKER IP RATED BARRIER
MAINS SWITCH
IP45 6800R PRINTER OPTIONAL ETHERNET 9 WAY IP67 RATED 9 WAY IP67 RATED 9 WAY IP67 RATED 3 WAY BULGIN 2 WAY BULGIN OPTIONAL REMOTE OPTIONAL PHOTOCELL/ 25 WAY IP67 RATED 6 WAY BULGIN 7 WAY BULGIN
ON/OFF IP65 6800S PRINTER CONNECTOR (RJ45)
8/8 WAY IP67 RATED
D FEMALE D FEMALE D MALE BUCCANEER
IP67 RATED
BUCCANEER
IP67 RATED
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
CONNECTOR
SHAFT ENCODER
CONNECTOR
D FEMALE BUCCANEER
IP67 RATED
BUCCANEER
IP67 RATED
PLUG PLUG 15 WAY IP67 RATED 9 WAY IP67 RATED PLUG PLUG
D FEMALE D FEMALE
L N E SAFETY EARTHS ALARM OUTPUT

NOTE 3
IEC MAINS
FILTER / FUSE
A 2 x 4A (T) FUSES THIS DRAWING IS FOR

REFERENCE ONLY.
IT IS NOT AN ASSEMBLY
A
DRAWING
LINX PRINTING TECHNOLOGIES PLC

BURREL ROAD
ST. IVES
CAMBS PE27 3LA
A. SALMIN R:\HW\6900\SYS DRAWING\ISS2\6900SYS2.SCH
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MUST NOT BE COPIED
IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT Title
DRN DATE OF LINX PRINTING TECHNOLOGIES PLC. 6900 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
IT MUST ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSES FOR WHICH IT
CHK DATE HAS BEEN SPECIFICALLY SUPPLIED. Size Document Number Rev
IT IS TO BE KEPT SECURELY AND MUST NOT BE DISCLOSED A1 CD13720 2
APPD DATE TO ANY THIRD PARTY.
Date: Thursday, June 21, 2007 Sheet 1 of 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Linx 7300

7300_MMCover_EN_Iss1.PMD 1 9/4/2009, 3:58 PM

Amdt Incorporated by Date of Amdt Incorporated by Date of

CHAPTER 1: SAFETY .................................................................. 1—1

CHAPTER 2: GENERAL AND COMPLIANCE INFORMATION ... 2—1

CHAPTER 3: TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION .................................. 3—1

CHAPTER 4: SYSTEM OPTIONS ................................................ 4—1

CHAPTER 5: MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 5—1

CHAPTER 6: SYSTEM EVENTS .................................................. 6—1

CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................

CHAPTER 8: TRAINING COURSE GUIDES ............................... 8—1

APPENDIX A: 7300 FOOD GRADE PRINTER ............................. A—1

INDEX ................................................................................... INDEX—1

CHAPTER 1: SAFETY ..................................................................................... 1—1

CHAPTER 2: GENERAL AND COMPLIANCE INFORMATION ...................... 2—1

CHAPTER 3: TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................... 3—1

CHAPTER 4: SYSTEM OPTIONS ................................................................... 4—1

Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks ................................................................................. 5—43

Draining the Ink System ..........................................................................................................

Spectrum Ink Tank Removal

Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement ............................................................................................. 5—57

3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement ...........................................................................

Main Ink Filter Replacement ................................................................................................... 5—65

Charge Amplifier Calibration .................................................................................................. 5—71

Printhead Valves Tests ............................................................................................................ 5—75

Purge and Gutter Valves Tests ............................................................................................... 5—81

Solvent Flush Valve Tests ....................................................................................................... 5—87

Solvent Add Valve Tests .......................................................................................................... 5—91

Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning ....................................................................................... 5—95

Modulation Range Checks .................................................................................................... 5—105

Blocked Gutter Clearance ce .....................................................................................................

System Flush .........................................................................................................................

Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) .................................................................. 5—127

Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) .......................................................... 5—139

24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mounted) ........................................................ 5—147

Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion ............................................................................. 5—151

Positive Air Pump Installation .............................................................................................. 5—157

Printhead Feed Valve Replacement ..................................................................................... 5—161

Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement ............................................................................ 5—165

Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads ............................................... 5—175

Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion ................................................................................... 5—189

Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion ................................................................................... 5—193

Ethernet Interface Installation .............................................................................................. 5—201

Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation ................................................... 5—205

Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures ........................................................................... 5—209

MidiEC Printhead Cleaning ................................................................................................... 5—223

Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement ...................................................................... 5—229

Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) ......................................................................... 5—233

CHAPTER 6: SYSTEM EVENTS ..................................................................... 6—1

APPENDIX A: 7300 FOOD GRADE PRINTER ............................................... A—1

Control Panel and Keyboard Keys

Important Note Symbol

WARNING: GENERAL SAFETY. REGARDLESS OF THE LEVEL OF PERCEIVED HAZARD, THE

1.2 Safety Warnings and Cautions

The mandatory Hand Protection warning symbol is an indication that solvent-resistant

Irritant Substance Hazard

Electric Shock Hazard

Hot Surface Hazard

1.3 Lethal Voltages

WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST IN THIS

WARNING: THIS PRINTER MUST BE EARTHED.

1.4 Inks and Solvents

WARNING: HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES. THIS PRINTER USES SOLVENT AND SOLVENT-

1.5 Heavy Equipment Hazard